BOOKSELLER.... NORTHAMPTON", 
 
 Keeps constantly for sale^ 
 Classical, Medical, Historical and Miscellaneous 
 OOKS, and Stationary in great variety. 
 
 REESE LIBRARY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 
 
 Received- sZ^^I^XU/ iSS^e^ 
 
 S^^^^kjOjl^ 
 
 v> 
 
 Accessions No.'^^.'^f//... Shelf No. ---.,. 
 
 mi 
 
'^^ d^ 
 
 
 1 "^"-^ 
 
 ■JJlAS!^^-- 
 
 1/ 
 
 '^ 
 
 
JJJJ_-iJ-^xTXJ_:-4X 1 JL K^ 
 
 or 
 
 
 ll^mi 
 
 ».^^4II^ 
 
 f'AKEN CHIEFLY FROM THE 
 
 GRAMMAR 
 
 OF 
 
 CASPAR FREDERICK IIACHENBERG. 
 
 iRTFORD : 
 PUBLISHED BY SAMUEL G. GOODRICH, 
 
 ROBERTS k BURR, PRINTERS. 
 
 1820. 
 
DISTRICT OF COJVjYECTICUT : 
 
 Jr~~^ JOE it remembered, that on the twenty-eighth day of 
 J] L. o. ,| September, in the thirty-ninth year of the Independence 
 IL==iiiJ of the United States of America, Chauncey Allen Good- 
 rich^ of the said District., hath deposited in this Office the Title of a 
 Book, the right whereof he claims as Author, m the words following, to 
 wit : *• Elements of Greek Grammar, taken chiefly from the Grammar 
 of Caspar Frederick Hachenberg — Adopted for use in Yale College, 
 New- Haven ,'' in conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United 
 States, entitled. An Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing 
 the Copies of Maps, Charts and Books, to the Authors and Proprietors 
 of ?uch Copies, durine: the times therein mentioned. 
 
 HENRY W. EDWARDS, 
 Clerk of the District o/* Connecticut. 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 THE materials of this work, as stated in the Title 
 page, were derived chiefly from the Grammar of Hachen- 
 herg. Numerous additions, however, have been made from 
 other sources ; and the plan new modelled in conformity 
 with the existing mode of instruction in this country. 
 The list of Anomalous Verhs is from Valpy : the ob- 
 servations on Dialects, from the Glocester Greek Gram- 
 mar. 
 
 In issuing a second Edition, the Author has chiefly to 
 regret, that a severe and long protracted illness has lim- 
 ited his attention to the retrenchment of redundances 
 and the correction of errors, in a work originally com- 
 piled in great haste. The materials, particularly, which 
 were designed to enrich the Syntax, he is compelled to 
 reserve for a future edition. 
 
 A few errors of the press have unavoidably occurred, 
 from the publication of the work at a distance from the 
 Author, and beyond the reach of his inspection. 
 
 December 10, 1819. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Letters. 1 
 
 Syllables. 5 
 
 Article. ----- 9 
 Noun. 9 
 
 First Declension of Nouns. - 10 
 Second Declension of Nouns. 12 
 Third Declension of Nouns. - 14 
 General Rules of Contraction. 18 
 First Forna of Contracts. - 19 
 . Second Form of Contracts. - 20 
 Third Forno of Contracts. - 21 
 Fourth and Fifth Fornas of Con- 
 tracts 22 
 
 Irregular Nouns. - - 25 
 
 Patronynaics. - - - 27 
 
 Diminutives — Verbals. - 28 
 Adjectives of three termi- 
 nations. - 30 
 of two termina- 
 
 nations. - 35 
 
 of one termination. 38 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives. - 39 
 
 Numerals. - - - 42 
 
 Pronouns. - - - - 45 
 
 Verbs. 50 
 
 Active Voice. - - - 58 
 R^eduplication and Augment. 63 
 Formation of Tenses in the Ac- 
 tive Voice. - - - 68 
 Passive Voice. - - - 74 
 Formation of Tenses in the Pas- 
 sive Voice. - - - 80 
 Middle Voice. - - - 84 
 Formation of Tenses in the Mid- 
 dle Voice. - - - 89 
 Deponent Verbs — Contract 
 Verbs. - - - - 91 
 
 PAGE. 
 1st Declension of ContractVerbs. 92 
 2d Declension of ContractVerbs. 94 
 3d Declension of ContractVerbs. 97' 
 Verbs m^i. - - - lOO 
 Irregular and Defective Verbs 
 
 in ///.---- 123 
 Anomalous Verbs. - - 133 
 Impersonal Verbs. - - 143 
 Adverbs. - - - - 1144 
 Prepositions. - - 149 
 Conjunctions. - - 152 
 Syntax — Agreement.. - 153 
 Article. - - - - 159 
 Government. - - i62 
 Government of Substantives. 162 
 Government of Adjectives. - 164 
 Government of Verbs-Genitive. 169 
 Dative. 174 
 Accusative. 177 
 TwoAccus. 177 
 GovernmentoflmpersonalVerbs. 1 79 
 Construction of the Infinitive. 180 
 Participles. - - - 102 
 Construction of Circumstances. 184 
 Case Absolute. - - 188 
 
 Government of Adverbs. - 189 
 Conjunctions. - - - 193 
 Prepositions. - - - 195 
 Prosody. - - - <208 
 
 Dialects. - - - 2i§ 
 Appendix, No. I. Digamma. 250 
 No. II. Subscript 
 
 Iota. - - 255 
 No. III. Middle- 
 ton's Theory of 
 the Article. - 256 
 
Figure. 
 A a 
 
 Tyr 
 
 AS 
 
 Ee 
 
 H»7 
 
 It 
 
 K« 
 
 a;i 
 
 Nv 
 
 
 P p/O 
 
 2CC<7S 
 
 Tt7 
 
 X;c 
 
 Ho 
 
 ^^ifoii^ 
 
 \hi^ 
 
 ORTHOGltAPHr: 
 
 
 ^^00^^ — 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 E GREEK LETTERS ARE TWENTY-FOUR. 
 
 Name. Power. 
 
 a?^ 
 
 alpha 
 
 a 
 
 (3yjta 
 
 beta 
 
 b 
 
 fyafii^a 
 
 gamma 
 
 g hard 
 
 SeTita 
 
 delta 
 
 d 
 
 e^^iXov 
 
 epsllon 
 
 e short 
 
 ^rira 
 
 zeta 
 
 z 
 
 yjra 
 
 eta 
 
 e lona 
 
 6r,ra 
 
 theta 
 
 th 
 
 LLYta 
 
 iota 
 
 i 
 
 xanna 
 
 kappa 
 
 k 
 
 ^/xfjiSSa 
 
 lambda 
 
 1 
 
 (IV 
 
 mu 
 
 m 
 
 vv 
 
 nu 
 
 n 
 
 l^ 
 
 xi 
 
 X 
 
 ofiLxpcnf 
 
 omicron 
 
 o short 
 
 TtL 
 
 pi 
 
 P 
 
 po 
 
 rho 
 
 r 
 
 aty^ia 
 
 sigma 
 
 s 
 
 rav 
 
 tau 
 
 t 
 
 in^/Xo^ 
 
 upsTlon 
 
 u 
 
 <^6 
 
 phi 
 
 ph 
 
 'V/ 
 
 cm 
 
 ch aspirated 
 
 '4^1 
 
 psi 
 
 ps 
 
 Qfieya 
 
 omega 
 
 o lony 
 
 2 
 
 
 
- Letters, 
 
 SIXTEEN letters, viz. ot.s^i, o. v, /3, y, ^, x, A, /ct, y, ?r, ^, (t, r, 
 were introduced from Phenicia into Greece, by Cadmus, 
 fifteen hundred years before Christ. Their form was ori- 
 ginally that of the Phenician characters, and was gradually 
 changed to the present.* Eight were afterwards added, viz. 
 5?5 6;, <p, Xi ^5 C' l> "^j i^ ^^^ fi^^h or the sixth century before 
 Christ. These, being merely substitutes for existing letters, 
 came slowly into use. They were first employed by the 
 Ionics ; and afterwards by the Attics, though not in public 
 records till 403 A. C. Hence the new alphabet of twenty- 
 four letters was called l^v/>ta ypot/u^ittctToc ; and the old alphabet 
 of sixteen letters, Arrtx-u ypuf^fA^ru^ which continued in use 
 am.ong the iEolics. 
 
 Greek w^as originally written in capitals, without spaces 
 between the words ; as, ENAPXHHNOAoroSKAIOAOroSHN 
 nPOSTONGEON. Ev cc^XV ^^ ^ Aoyo$, xctt o Aoyo<i m Trpog rov 
 
 ©fOV. 
 
 The smaller characters were formed from the larger, be- 
 tween the seventh and ninth centuries, for convenience in 
 writing. 
 
 The lines of Manuscripts were called o-rtxotj and the con- 
 tents often estimated by their number.! Thus, ypecTrrov ev 
 c7ixoi<; (nj, end of the Epistle to the Philippians, denotes that 
 the manuscript had 208 crnxot or lines. 
 
 To the letters may be added the rough hreoihr 
 inff ['] or EngUsh H ; as, 'Ofiyjpog^ Homeros ; ^e^c^^ 
 hexo. 
 
 1. The aspirate^ or English H, was originally a letter 
 among the Greeks. In the old inscriptions, HEKATON is 
 written for ex.ojrov ; and nH for <p : KH for x^ &c- ^t was af- 
 t'erwards divided into two parts, !'H. The former retain- 
 ing tlie original sound, was called the rough breathing. The 
 latter was called the smooth breathing ; and denotes merely 
 the absence of the rough. These characters, H, were 
 gradually rounded into their present form, ['] rough breath- 
 ing, ['] smooth breathing. 
 
 *Vide Shuckford's Connexions, vol. i. p. 256. 
 -r Vide Mai^hV M5chae]is, vol. ii. p. 526. 
 
2. When V or p begin a word, they have always the Fough 
 breathing ; as it^ap, 'Vyirap, In the middle of a word, if ^ be 
 doubled, the first has the smooth, and the second the rough 
 breathing ; as ccphv. 
 
 3. The Attics frequently use the rough breathing when 
 others use the smooth ; as u><vetv, <i^/$, «^>}y. 
 
 Letters are divided into Vowels and Consonants. 
 The vowels are seven : two long, jy, o ; two 
 short, f, o ; three doubtful, a, t, v. 
 
 1. Before the invention of ?? and 6>, t and o were used for 
 the long as well as short sounds of E and o ; and o was 
 sometimes put for a. 
 
 2. The doubtful vowels are short in some words ; as, cc 
 in TxTTi^ ; long in others ; as, in Xcco^ ; and in some others 
 either long or short, at the will of the writer ; as, in A^jjs. 
 
 The diphthongs are twelve ; six proper, viz. 
 at, av eij ev^ oty ov ; six improper, viz. qc, yIj 6), yjVy 
 
 1. Diphthongs always end with i or y ; hence these vow 
 els are axWcd postpositive, and the other vowels prepositive, 
 
 2. The point under the u. n *;, is called the subscrif.t 
 [ota,* and w:is originally written on the right of the letters ; 
 as, HOAOI (06^61,:) tiiis is still done after capitals ; as A/0I12S 
 
 3. The diphthong vt never occurs except before a vowel , 
 as uioi. 
 
 Consonants are divided into Mntes, Liquids 
 and Double Consonants. 
 There are nine Mutes. 
 
 bn fco t>: 
 
 o o c 
 
 O U C 
 
 Smooth, 7t, x^ r. 
 Middle, /?, y, S, 
 Rough, ^, X, a 
 
 See Appeodix. No. 2. 
 
4 Lttiers. 
 
 The rough mutes are formed by adding the rough breath- 
 ing to the smooth mutes ; <p, ph ; ;ti, kh ; $Ah, The mid- 
 dle have a slight roughness added to the smooth. 
 
 Hence these letters, as they stand perpendicularly, are very 
 often interchanged, by a change of breathing ; as, c-x^xih^ 
 for (rK£><i^eq ; ?^ic<po^ for ^iKrTrai ; t>xTA> into oy^eoq. 
 Letters thus interchanged are called Cognate, 
 5r, /3, ^, are cognate, and formed by the lips. 
 », y, Xi by the palate. 
 
 Tj }j e, by the tongue. 
 
 There are four Liquids, X, f^, v, p. 
 
 Liquids do not precede a mute in the same syllable. 
 They are sometimes called immutables, because they rare- 
 ly change. To the Liquids, er has sometimes been added. 
 
 There are three Double Consonants. ^, ^j 4^' 
 ^ represents* xg, yg, ;^g. 
 
 4/ Ttg^ ^g, ^g. 
 
 Hence, when these letters are thus joined, the double let- 
 ter is substituted. 
 
 1. This maybe particularly remarked in declension and 
 conjugation. A^cc\)/t for A^aiict^ from Afoij3$ ; Af|^ for Myo-o), 
 from A5y<y ; TrM'^eo for TrXgicc-co^ from TTXexa ; ccXn-^^Af foT ccMKpca) . 
 from ccxsttpd}, 
 
 2. Zeta was used for ^g, with a sound, probably, resem- 
 .bl^ng c- or 0-C-. Among the ^Eolics, who never used the 
 double consonants, c-J" was put for ^, transposing the letters., 
 because (5" never immediately precedes c-.j 
 
 r, before x^ y^ %, ^5 has the sound of ng ; as. 
 a)/y6?wog, anggelos. 
 
 The letters v^ p, cr, ^^ ^^ are called final conso- 
 nants, because words not derived from foreign 
 languages end in no others. 
 
 * It cannot be loo strongly impressed on the mind of the learner, that 
 and f are mere reprcsentadvcs ofthe leiter? against Ihcm, and may al- 
 tys be resolved into them. 
 - Vide Rule IV. p. 5. 
 
Syllables, 
 
 Except fji, ^Ky and t^x, supposed to be derived from eg 
 and a^t- 
 
 SYLLABLES. 
 
 General Rules in the Formation ofSyllaHes, 
 L When mutes come together the smooth must he united 
 with smooth, middle with middle, and rough with rough ; 
 hence if one is determined, the other is made to correspond ; 
 as, irvsp6m for ervTrd^v ; AeAf;^^5 for >^s>.£k$£ ; l^^ot^og, from tTrrcc. 
 Exception 1. A rough mute cannot be doubled ; but the 
 iirst is changed into its cognate smooth one. ^aTr^^t for 
 'Zot<p<Pca ; Buicxoi for Bi^xX^^ ' ^1760^ for rtC&o^. 
 
 2. The preposition sk ma}- be folloued by a letter of any 
 kind ; as, fx/3«AAa;, £x.$Xf4^i<;. 
 
 IL Two successive syllables, in the same word, do not be- 
 gin with an aspirate ; lest they should occasion too great ;• 
 roughness of language. To avoid this, the iirst commonly 
 loses the aspirate ; as, ix^ for ex^ » c/^ftTexe^ for otf-i/pex^ '? 
 s^oeuxet for peptVKA j :rs<pxyr'X for ^i(p6t,yy.it ; r^SvKcc for 0£$vjcx : 
 rt$ijf^.t for 6i6ijM't J Kex^^oc f^r x^X^^-^ 5 "^^'PtioJ* f<^i* ^p^X^'^y from 
 %'| ; ery^jjv for e^vdiiv from ^vc^. 
 
 Sometimes the second. TruSiin [ov 7r£t&>:3i. rJivt for tM: 
 To this rule there are some exceptions ; s\ich as $BT6fii:. 
 .AX^£t^ oi%f<r^«6/, oiLOpfX^^efi- 
 
 III. When the rough breathing and a smooth mute come 
 together, they unite and form a rough one ; as, 'rrcK,v6£-^i<i from 
 ^djvr' and i'^iq ; Kud^i for ^t^r'^^-g ; f^.s$vi^{v fur f^iT^ vfttv j ^x ^l**' 
 for hkI^o) ; £(p6vifJL£^oq . from e-x-Tx and T^f^^epx ; pt,v^' y.ro for vvy.rt^ 
 
 ra ; ^ay-UTicv for Td 'iijmtiov, 
 
 IV. The letters r, J^, ^, ^. do not immediately precede c. 
 To avoid this concurrence, the first letter is commonly drop- 
 ped, and the preceding short vowel lengthened ; as, «t5-«i» for 
 eco'Ta, from xS^f j xwo"^ for cvtvrz-u^ from (vtvra ; t^Wa'^u for 
 ttA^j^t-a;, from ;rA};^itf ; ofyi(, for op/P^, Gen. opvi$oc ; up7ixccif for 
 
 <c/J7rc«^o*&>, from apTTx^ej, 
 
 The same is generally true of i» before c 3 as, r-j-p^f/s for 
 
 rf^^fv^, Gen. rvfpdevTo^ 3 J/^i^^ for <5'i^6V^, Gen. Moyro^ i 'Opr9}(noc, 
 
 from the Latin Hortensius ; Ik^^ct/ for. 'ocovreci, from ixorrei ; 
 
 ^TTucra for g-ttevOj-o;^ from 6*;r«v^a;. Thc}^ aic, ho^vp.rer* somf- 
 
 •mes joined j a? in ry^/y?. fAf-^/yj. 
 
V is commonly retained in ev in composition ; ai9, gyc'xj;??^^ ; 
 but I is frequently inserted, as in e^ncKexxu. 
 
 V. N. is changed—- 
 
 1. Into y, before k, y, %, | ; as in eyx^^P^^ 7r£<pccyKcc, 
 
 2. into /ic, before the cognates tt, /3, ^, and the letters |n. 
 and -v/^ ; as in sf^Tts^os , e/nfixtvcj, (3-vu.^vr,(i^ ef^f^svof, o^uf^i^v^f^oi, 
 
 3. Into A,' ^, c, before those letters respectively ; as in 
 
 ]. The preposition «v is generally unchanged before x, / and ^ ; as, 
 2. V frequently remains in the old writers as, ctv^eAoc.. 
 
 VI. Before the letter ft — 
 
 1. /3, ^, ^, -i^, are changed into /m<; as, XzXuf^i^^ui for XiXet7r(JMi\ 
 '^cTviJLiA.ui for rervTrf^stt, 
 
 2. X and ;^^, into y j as, h^oyiA.oe,t for h^Kf^it ^ >is>^£yi^ui for 
 
 Except rtA//», etv^o;, 
 
 VII. A letter is sometimes inserted between two other let- 
 ters, to prevent an unpleasant concurrence of sounds ; par- 
 ticularly when fA. precedes A, or ^, the letter /3 is often insert- 
 ed ; as fjLfcvifjL^^iet^ from /tc£ff"fl$ and rjfjut^ec ; f^ef/^fi^^ijKet fov fJctfJieX^Ku. 
 
 When y precedes^, the letter J" is frequently inserted ; as, 
 oi^^^oc, for «v£foc. From the same attention to harmony, we 
 find ctfA,^^oroq for ufi^oro^, &c* 
 
 From a regard to sound, r in the preposition kgctu is fre- 
 jjuently changed into ^r and », before <p and x ; ^^s? y-ocKx^vo-a^i 
 for y^aroixevcrctt ; and into /3, y, <^, tt, A, /it, v, ^ , before those letters 
 respectively : as, tcccpfcov for Kxrocp&cv, &c. 
 
 N. B. The preceding rules are very important for the resolu- 
 ion of anomalies^ in the inflections of nouns and verbs. 
 
 VIIL The letter v is annexed to datives plural in z, and to 
 verbs ending in f or /, when the next word begins with a vow? 
 
 1. ny~o7-i takes y after it ; sikot-iv uv^^e^ ; also 7irctvrct7rcco-i and 
 siome others. 
 
 2. The Poets sometimes add y when the next word beginJi 
 with a consonant ; as, o-r^j^gc-nv A<«o-<o/$ . 
 
 ** To avoid a concurrence of vowel? 
 
SyllahUs, 7 
 
 On tht Change, Increase, and Retrenchment of Syllables. 
 
 1 . Metathesis is the transposition of letters and syllables ; 
 :as, Kot^Ts^oi for K^ocre^oq -, cc-zre^etcicc for ei-srei^icria. This often 
 extends to the breathings ; as, Ki6aiy (orx^rm] Qoaam for rAtp^^^^yv, 
 from retx,vq. 
 
 2. Prosthesis is the prefixing of one or more letters to a 
 word ; as, esiKocrt for nx^Tt ; Tsficiiev for fietiov. 
 
 3. Epenthesis is the insertion of one or more letters withia 
 a word ; as, ^r^v/ivi for yrcXvi, 
 
 4. Paragoge is the annexing of one letter or more to a 
 word ; as, Xoyoia-i for Xoyoiq. 
 
 5. Apheresis is the cutting off of letters from the begin- 
 ning of a word ; as, otc^o^jj for otcrffa^r?;. 
 
 6. Syncope is taking from the middle of a word ; as,^;^^«»y 
 
 for JjAt/tfev. 
 
 7. Apocope is taking from the end of a word ^ as, ^«*x^y 
 
 ••r ^ctK^vav. 
 
 8. Apostrophe (') cuts off tt^ f, h a, from the end of a word, 
 when the next word begins with a vowel ; as, ruvr^ c^yovhr 
 
 Tecvra e?<£yev, 
 
 1. ^Ǥ/ and TTgo, with datives in /> are not affected by apostrophe. 
 The apostrophe is not always U!'ed where it niight be, especially in 
 prose. 
 
 2. Long vowels and diphthongs are oflen removed by apostrophe 
 amontc the Poets ; 'as, cy'aS^x /'or «>« ci/x ; ^nKcfx* iyu (or /2>ih'./uoit iyoo. 
 
 3. Tiie first vowel of the succeedinij word is sonaetimes omitted ; as, 
 V}^5t6< for w etyttBi. 
 
 4. Sometimes the two words are drawn together ; as, iyuS'^ for ryoo oiSa ^ 
 Tcif/.A for Tat iy.it j Kd:m for aam-yri ^ Tuv^svcfe for to evSevJ^g ; katol for KottHToi, j 
 
 iCU for KXt it; KU.K ior X'AJ iK ; pfJ^^Cog for Xat< OTCOJ , yUCr^iV for fXH iyriv 
 
 9. Tmesis separates the parts of compound words, by an 
 intervening word ; as, xccra yxtuv SKot^^v-^e, for yutccv KuTeicuAw^s. 
 
 10. Dieresis (••) separates two vowels which might form a 
 diphthong ; as, zra^ for -ssrcciq. 
 
 11. Syncresis unites two vowels into a diphthong; as, 
 r5/;^ei for reixs'i' 
 
 12. Crasis is a contraction with a change of one or more 
 ■?f the vowels : as, Ksea^ for Kspxog ; ^xT(;^,i:z for /Siftz/Psff-j, 
 
a Etymology. 
 
 13. Dyastole is a comma used to separate words, which 
 might be mistaken for parts of a single word ; 'o, r^, and he : 
 W, when. 
 
 There are four Points or Stops. 
 The comma ^ (,) 
 
 The note of interrogation (;) 
 The colon or point at top (•) 
 The period or full stop (.) 
 
 frOOO^C 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 THE Parts of Speech in Greek are niiiej viz. 
 Article, Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Parti- 
 ciple, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction. 
 
 Interjections are included among Adverbs. 
 
 There are three Numbers ; the Singular, 
 ^vhich denotes one; the Plural, which denotes 
 more than one : and the Dual, which denotes 
 two or a pair. 
 
 The dual is not found in the New Testament, nor in the 
 •Eolic dialect. It was used chiefly by the Attic and Ionic 
 writers, and not even by them in the earlier periods. 
 
 The Genders are three ; Masculine, Feminine 
 and Neuter. 
 
 The Cases are five ; Nominative, Genitive. 
 Dative, Accusative and Vocative, 
 
Jrticle — Kouit 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 The Article is a word prefixed t^^^Mtfpltoflt^" 
 purpose of designation or distinctionTOTf^ ai^po- 
 Ttog^ (he man. It corresponds, (though not exact- 
 ly J to the English definite article ; and is thus 
 declined.'* 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 0, 'jy, TO 
 
 D. Tcf), Tjj, ru, 
 
 A. T0¥> TJJV To. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. T<y, r», ra* 
 
 G.D. ro/V, T(*<V, TO/V. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. eiy xt, rcc, 
 G. rwy. rav. rav, 
 D. Toiiy Tui^, roii, 
 
 A, T«f, Tcti ., Ttt. 
 
 1 . The Article has no vocative ; its place is supplied by 
 the adverb u. 
 
 2. When ^£ is annexed to the article, it has the force of a 
 demonstrative pronoun, as oak, vh^ ro^f, this, that. 
 
 3. The article was origi^iailj ra^, ry^ re ; hence the to/, 
 of the Dorics and Tonics ; and r in oblique cases and in the 
 neuter. 
 
 NOUN. 
 
 There are three declensions of Greek nouns. 
 The first has four terminations, a, yi^ ag, 77$. 
 The second has two, og, ov^ which, among the 
 Attics, become cjg, ov. 
 
 The third has nine, a, /, i;, cj, r, p, cr, ^, 4^. 
 
 General Rules of Declension. 
 
 1. The nominative, accusative and vocative 
 of the dual, and of neuters, are alike ;and in the 
 plural of neuters, end in a. 
 
 * Let the young student decline each gender of the Article by itself. 
 The Feminine \ will give him (with a sliglit variation) the terminations 
 of the first Declension of Nouns. Tlie Masculine 'o, and the Neater 
 
 • -rive the terminations of the secoad Declension, 
 
10 
 
 First Declension, 
 
 2. The dative singular ends always in t.* 
 
 3. The genitive plural ends in ov. 
 
 4. The vocative is always like the nominative, 
 in the plural, and usually in the singular. 
 
 The dative plural seems originallyto have ended in /, in 
 all the declensions ; and the genitive plural usually inetyy, or 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 Nouns of the first declension have four termi- 
 nations, a, >7, feminine ; ag, >?$, masculine. 
 
 The terminations ccg, j}$ , are thought to have been deri- 
 ved from X and ;?, by adding $. 
 
 
 Nouns in yj^ 
 
 and 
 
 a, are thus declined : 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 V ri^'Tj, 
 
 
 
 
 N. u( rtu-cct, 
 
 G. 
 
 rm rtjuc-nii 
 
 
 N. 
 
 A. V. TU riJbL-X, 
 
 G. T*»V TifJL-m- 
 
 D. 
 
 rvi Ttl^ Ti^ 
 
 
 
 
 D. r^<$ rtf/^'Uti, 
 
 A. 
 
 T3JV rifJL-yiv^ 
 
 
 G. 
 
 D. TOCIV Ttf^-CtlV, 
 
 A. reci rif4.-uii 
 
 V. 
 
 a TtM'H' 
 
 
 
 
 1 V. 6> rtfjL-xt. 
 
 
 Sin^. 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 rj Atyc*-«, 
 
 
 
 
 N. ^i f^T'Obi, 
 
 G. 
 
 ri,i fi.HT-7)i , 
 
 
 N. 
 
 A. V. rcC fJLHT'Xy 
 
 G. rm f/^ar-avy 
 
 D. 
 
 T>J fttfT-JJ, 
 
 
 
 
 D. Tccig ^5<.r-«<5, 
 
 A. 
 
 rjjy ^sr-«y, 
 
 
 G. 
 
 D. ratv f^cHT'Xiv, 
 
 A. rug itty5*-ccf , 
 
 V. 
 
 a fJLHT-a, 
 
 
 
 
 V. eo fJL>i<r-(tt. 
 
 Nouns ending in Sa, Oa, pa, a pure, t and d con- 
 tracted, have the genitive in ag, and the dative 
 in ot ; I as, 
 
 * In the first and secoad declensions, the Iota is subscript. 
 
 ■\ A vowel is called pure^ when it is preceded hy another vowel witi 
 which it does not form a diphthong ; as the atin <pihtct. 
 
 ■^ The ancient Latins followed this method of making the genitive ii 
 «c : Thus, Gen. Sing, terras^ escas^ for terra', esccf. Paterfamilias co'i- 
 tinues in use. 
 
First Declension. 
 
 11 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 t} (piXtx, 
 
 
 N. 
 
 OCt ^tXlCtty 
 
 G. 
 
 rv)€, ^< A/665, 
 
 N. A. V. Tci (pt?^tlc) 
 
 G. 
 
 rm ^M/6>y, 
 
 D. 
 
 T>j <piXtu^ 
 
 
 D. 
 
 rflC/5 (ptXiutq, 
 
 A. 
 
 rrjV ^i><ictiy 
 
 G. D. Tciiv ^iXtxiv. 
 
 A. 
 
 rUq ^t?ilCtqy 
 
 V. 
 
 a ^ihioc. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 M ^iXtxu 
 
 
 Nouns in og are thus declined 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 • Totf^l-Uq^ 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Ot TUf^i'Xly 
 
 G 
 
 ra ru/^i-H) 
 
 N. A. V. r&f recjLU'U, 
 
 G. 
 
 Tat rUfJLl'f^^y 
 
 D. 
 
 7 0) ruH-i-cCf 
 
 
 D. 
 
 roi<i Tcci^^l-eii'i 
 
 A. 
 
 Tov rxf^i-ctVy 
 
 G. D, Totv ruj^-uiv. 
 
 A. 
 
 TS$ TU/^t-Oi^y 
 
 V. 
 
 a Tuf^i-et, 
 
 
 V. 
 
 CJ 7et,u,(-ect. 
 
 Some nouns in cc^ , especially proper names, make the gen- 
 itive in «> after the Doric form ; as, Trotyrcii, G. TruTru ; BufjLxq., 
 G. Q>afiM, 
 
 Some have both « and « ; as, Af;^t;r«§, Af;^^t^T«. and A^x^^* 
 
 Nouns ending in Yiq are thus declined : 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. nXeav yi^, 
 
 G. T^TfAo/V-y, 
 
 D. roj T£Xa)V-7)r 
 A. Tov rtXm jjv, 
 V. 0) reXav-i}. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.,A. V. rare>^m-etf 
 G. D. To/y riXm'CCiv, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ei itXaV'Oti, 
 
 G. Tav T£Aft,y-a;y, 
 
 D. roi^ TiXav-ut^y 
 A. mi rsXav-ctq, 
 V. 6f TiXm-ui, 
 
 Nouns in c-tjj^ make the vocative in jj or «. All nouns in 
 tj:5, poetical nouns in 9n;$, national denominations in r^<i. and 
 compounds of yroXa^ ftfr^J, and r^i^a^ make the vocative in 
 «; as, ycvveaTTr.q^ V. xv^a>7rot. Also some proper names; as, 
 
 Some proper names in 97$ have the genitive in v : aSjlTo^aj^, 
 G. ricJj?* A^»;$; G. A^>}. 
 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 Nouns of this declension, which have two vowels in their 
 termination, are contracted, if the former one is a short vow- 
 el, or u used as a short vowel. These end in £ot$, cjj^, ect, £??j 
 
li 
 
 Second Declension, 
 
 RULE. 
 
 Drop the former of the two vowels ; as, f^^eccc^ /w,v^ ; e/;eo6j 
 spa ; cccrAojj, cc7r?i^ ; y«Af;;, yoc>^rj ; A^eAAfj^s, AwfAA^s. 
 
 But e;t, if not preceded by ^ or a vowel, is changed into 
 ^ ; as, yscc, yri ; ^Epf4.£e£s, 'Epf^ri. 
 
 After the nominative has been thus contracted, it is regu- 
 larly declined, according to the examples already given. 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 The second declension has two terminations og 
 and ov ; which are lengthened by the Attics into 
 wg and ov. 
 
 By contraction, d«s, oov ; and 505, jov, become «$,and«v. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 1 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. A«7-«5, 
 
 i 
 
 N. oj A«7-oi, 
 
 G. T»Aoy-s, 
 
 N. A. V. r&;Ady-ft/, ; 
 
 G. ta;v Xoy^i 
 
 D. ta; Aoy-oj, 
 
 i 
 
 D. ro^5 Aoy-oi$, 
 
 A. Toy Aay-tfv, 
 
 G. D. Td/v Aoy-e/v. | 
 
 A. 7ii$ Aoy-»?, 
 
 V. M A(jy-f. 
 
 1 
 
 V. <yAoy-oi. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ra |yA-«v, 
 
 
 N. T«|t;A-fl6, 
 
 G. rsi|t/A-«, 
 
 N. A. V. TO) |t;A-fi;, 
 
 G. rm |«^A-<yv, 
 
 D. Tay |f A to, 
 
 
 D. Te/$ |fA-o/$j 
 
 A. Ta |t;A ov, 
 
 G. D. To/v |t;A-o/y. 
 
 A. r^ |vA'«e, 
 
 V. « |t/A-ov. 
 
 
 V. 6,^vX-ct, 
 
 Nouns in ov^ Sv^ and qv^ are neuter : those in 
 o^j «$5 and og, are generally masculine, sometimes 
 feminine or common. 
 
 1. Many nouns in oq are feminine ; some from a refer- 
 ence to a noun of that gender, understood ; as, t^yifM^^ a de- 
 sert, i. e. ff »j,cto5 r^, desert land. 
 
 2. Some substantives in c$ are common ; as, '0, \ uv^paTro^, 
 
 3. Nouns in &>$ are masculine, except names of cities and 
 islands, which are feminine ; together with these three, ieaq, 
 aurora ; y^^A&'s, a brother's wife ; ««Aiy$, a threshins; floor : 
 xpa?. a debt, is neuter. 
 
Second Declension — ^ttic Form* 
 
 18 
 
 ATTIC FORM. 
 
 This is made by lengthening the last vowel or diphthong in- 
 to <w, and subscribing < ; as, A«y<»« for Xctyai ; A«y<w for A^ya ; 
 Aflcyfit; for Xccyot, 
 
 If d long precede •5 , it is changed into f ; as, hs6i<i for >^^ ; 
 and «v<wyfa)» for otvayxto^t^ 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Sing. 
 6) M'Ofg, 
 
 Sing. 
 N. TO scv6fye'av, 
 G. ra etva/ye-o), 
 D. ru) ecyMys-ajy 
 A. TO ecyuye-av, 
 V. M ecv6fyi'6fv. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. Ta M'O/y 
 
 G. D. TCtV Af-toV. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. Tof ccvayt'Of, 
 G. D.roty etvays-m. 
 
 Phiral. 
 
 N. 01 ?^i'Cfj^ 
 
 G. ToiV Af-fllVj 
 
 D. ro<5 Af-4u$j 
 A. Ty$ A£-ft;$j 
 V. a; Af-fiD, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 7cc uvojys'e), 
 G. r^yv <JtVA;yi-tt/v, 
 D. ro/5 flfVAjyfto?, 
 .A. r« fl6yA>ye-iy, 
 V, a; ctfVft;ye-&'. 
 
 1 . The vocative is like the nominative ; and hence nouns 
 in og, of the common form, often have the vocative like th^» 
 nominative, after the Attic form ; as <I)<Ao5 a MmXots^ II. ^. 180. 
 
 2. The Attics often reject v in the accusative of this de- 
 clension, and almost always in the following words : u^c^u 
 A3r»-oA?uy?, I<y$, Kf«$, ?MyMi, and Tvv^upecoq. Sometimes in the. 
 nominative ; as,ro uytipAf for otyzpav ; in the accusative plural, 
 T«$ <iA<y for <iA<y5. The Attics frequently decline nouns of 
 the third declension, according to this Form; as, yeA^v, 
 (Eurip. Ion. 1191.) for yfAA/T^ft from ya^ys. 
 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 The terminations cv^ and ow are contracted from 0^5, ooi ; 
 
 RULES. 
 
 1. If the two last vowels are short, change them into dv; as, 
 
 00-1 eov, otJSv : but « makes j? ; as, uhx<pihi^ ethx^pii^. 
 
 2. If not, omit th*3 former one ; as, «^7f», orU ; ot%»,co-1?. : 
 
 >3: 
 
14 
 
 Third Declension, 
 
 Sing.^ 
 
 N. oTJ-eov ^v, 
 G. orJ-eH, », 
 D. ocrl'icp-^ y, 
 A. oa-]'eov, «j>, 
 V. oc-J-eovy «v, 
 
 Sing.^ 
 
 N. vcoi «$, 
 G. r8v-d« «j 
 D. TO) y-do; 9, 
 A. Toy y-ooy^ ay, 
 V. at y-df J ». 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. dO-7-e«, &;, 
 G. D. oTJ'eoiv, otv. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. r^ v-ofi), J, 
 G. D. Totv y-oo^v, o/v. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. oTJ-eec, «, 
 
 G. 3-7-f6»yi 6)^Vj 
 
 D. oTJ-eoiiy o/$j 
 A, o(r]-eeCy uj 
 
 V. 9T]-lcCi U. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. o'i y-eo/, o7j 
 G. Ta>v y-ocifv o/Vj 
 D. ro/$ y-03/5, 015, 
 A. r«$ y-o»$, «5, 
 V. A) y-oo/, o7. 
 
 So its Compounds evHo^, ecvoc^, &c. Also, poog, ;i^voo5, ^rAooSj 
 ;^foo$, with their compounds.* Some contracts in »$ take the 
 form of the third declension ; as, ysg, G. yoo$, D. yoi*. 
 
 itjois and diminutives in w$ are thus declined. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Sing. ^ 
 
 N. Ifja-'Si, 
 
 N. A/oy-iJs, 
 
 G. i^o-J, 
 
 G. A/«y-y, 
 
 D. Ijjo-», 
 
 D. Aiov-u, 
 
 A. Ijjc-ay, 
 
 A. A«>v-wy, 
 
 V. I«o-«. 
 
 V. A/oy-v. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 The terminations of this Declension are nine, 
 
 viz. a, 65 u, o, 1^5 p5 c, ^5 -x^. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 .N. r/7cfcy, 
 G. rii Ttluvo^i 
 D. TAi rtlecvt, 
 A, Toy rtlcaety 
 V. 6) T/7«y. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N, A. Y i ra ri1<AUi 
 G. D, ro/y T<7«yo/y. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. oJ rtluveij 
 G. r6>v ttlotim^ 
 
 D. TOt^TtlcCG-ti 
 A. Tii5 Tt]ciCVXif 
 
 V. a> T<7«yf$. 
 
 * The Cofppounds of voo? and p»c? are not contracted in the nomina- 
 tive and accusative, and but seldom in the genitive plural ; as, st/vose, 
 
 xatx/^'^o*, not 8wvci, Ksthtpjia. G. ifvMiv, seldom syvXv. 
 
Sing. 
 
 N. To (rafMt,^ 
 
 A. TO C*^|«,«, 
 
 Third Declension. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A.V. ra TAfi^ctle, 
 G. D. TOIV TafMtjoiv, 
 
 15 
 
 Plural. 
 N. Tflc o-af^oclecj 
 G, rejv Q-MfA^m. 
 D. TO/ 5 trafjLxo'i. 
 A. Tflt frufjLai]x^ 
 
 V. «l T6)fA.u]ot, 
 
 Gender. 
 
 I. Nouns ending in £«$, <«v, i;v, t;$-fo5, <yi'-oyTo$, ^j^-^yvTo?, are 
 masculine ; as, o ^x<rt^vg, &c. 
 
 The following are Masculine, with few exceptions. 
 Those ending in etp, np^ a*^, vp, w, 6>$, «$, -v^, tfC5-«vTo$, m-uu^, 
 
 II. Nouns ending in c»5-«^o$, -ns-rnToi, ctts, a', and /$ verbal, 
 are always feminine ; as, 17 ?iscf4.Tocs, &c. 
 
 The following are Feminine, with few exceptions. 
 Those ending in «/§, ets, /v, /5» M, "«) ,^?} t-^, (G. vo$, vJo5, f^^O 
 dyy-ovo^. 
 
 Some are common ; as, 0,57 y^iTA^y, &c. 
 
 III. Nouns ending in u, t, v, o^-eoi, up-upa^ op'9poiy ui-urcii 
 and etdg, are neuter ; as, to <rapcxy &c. 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 The Genitive Singular ends in 0$ ; as, n^trxv, tt^xvoi ; ca>i^x. 
 crft>|tto6T-tf$ ; Ae*jM,^«$, A«|u,^<««5^-05 ; opng, opvj-oi . If the last sylla- 
 ble of the Nominative contains a long vowel, it is usually 
 changed into a short one in the genitive, and i and v into e ; 
 
 as, xo/fcjjv, 5ro/^5v-o$ ; <«TTy, etCTi-oi, 
 
 It is probable that all nouns of this declension ended ori- 
 ginally in $ ; and that the genitive was formed by the inser- 
 tion of before 5, as is still the case with a large class of 
 them ; as, 
 
 o(^/^, o<pt'og ; iLtvg, M-^-o-q ; 
 Aoot&s , {Adu,-^) Afiu^'Os , 
 ^J?;*^!, ycnip'JK-o-q ; 
 KVKXa-^, tcvKXeo-ss-'O-g ; 
 
1 B Third Declensmi, 
 
 1. ^Terminations in J$, t5, ^5, vj, ^$, dropped the first let- 
 ter ;t as, 5Asr/5 for fA33-/J5-/^os ; x^pii for ;k^«^/r$-/T05 ; ^^y? for 
 (par^'iOToq ; y^tffs for yJ'cftTj ^ JJ^^T^j J o^y/5 for opvt&i-idoS ; ecva^fov 
 uvuKTS 5 uvotKrog ; jLtxprvg for f^ccpTvp^-upog. 
 
 Sometimes the preceding vowel was lengthened ;J as, ^01/5 
 for ?roc$-o^o5 ; Kten for xr^vs-evos. 
 
 2. Sometimes the last letter was dropped ; as, vfxr«^ for 
 yexrap^'otpog '^ piv foT ptvg, pms . In this case, the preceding 
 vowel was commonly lengthened ; as, Trotfttiv for ^rotf^H-em ; 
 >itpLvi^v for A/ftVfvs-fvof ; cc^afv for cc^ovg-cvoi ; ecTTyjp for uTTepg-Bpog. 
 
 3. Sometimes both letters were dropped ; as, o-A>^i» for 
 <r&>^fltT5-cftros ; fCfA< for /tis^irg-trog ; y^cAsft for y<55Aofc|, from 
 y<»A<e»Tf . 
 
 The accusative singular of nouns not neuter, is formed 
 from the genitive, by changing og into u ; as, nruv^ riretvog, 
 A. rnxv-ct. 
 
 Exception 1. Nouns in ig, \\ vg, »vg, and oug, whose geni- 
 tive is in og pure, change $ of the nominative, into v ; as, o^^s, 
 oipm , A. e(p/y ; ^orpv^-vog, jiorpvv 'y votvg ^ vecog, vuvv j (ioug, fioeg, 
 
 To these add, >^ecug, A«>$. Accus. A^«v, xZv, 
 
 The poets often violate this rule ; as, (iorpvu for ^orpw ; 
 
 vvcc for vavv, 
 
 2. Many nounsIT in ^g and vg, whose genitive is not in og 
 pure, have both cc and v ; as, Kopvg^ teapv^og, KopvSu or xe^yv ; 
 KXsig, icXti^og, KXei^x or xAe/v. 
 
 ;)^/fl6pi$ has ^tcfiiToc, and ;^flft/i/v. 
 
 To these add compounds of Trovg ; as, a^Kv^r^vg, atcvro^cc or 
 
 * These changes are given as probable^ rather than certain^ 
 i- By rule iv. page 5. 
 J Vide rule iv. page 5. 
 ll Except A/c, A/c?, Ace. A/st, Jupiter. 
 
 IF Those whose last syllable has no accent ; when it is accented, the 
 Hcctisative is a only ; as, TrarpUj-rxi-ptJ^A, 
 
Third Declension, 17 
 
 Vocative. 
 The vocative is, for the most part, like the nominative ; 
 as, rtrccv, V. T/Tfl6v. 
 
 But the short vowel of the genitive, from the long vowel 
 of the nominative, remains in the vocative ; as, 
 Norn. Gen. ' Voc. 
 
 yrump, TTotrepoi, Trocrep. 
 
 '^EKTap, ^EKTopo^, 'Ektop, 
 
 So likewise <ra/Tep^ AttoAAw and Uaret^ov, whose genitives 
 have a long vowel. 
 
 Nouns, (except those in 3j5 and 05,). whose genitive is in Ǥ 
 pure, drop $ of the nominative, to form the vocative ; as, 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 jSoccMfV?, 
 
 -eci, 
 
 j3«o-iA£t/. 
 
 ficv^, 
 
 /3o<J?, 
 
 Qov. 
 
 /^orpvi, 
 
 ^OTpVC?, 
 
 (ioTpv, 
 
 }fovi, 
 
 V6fi5, 
 
 vcv. 
 
 So, TTecig, 
 
 TTCCthi, 
 
 TTcCt. 
 
 «Af.$, 
 
 xMi^oi, 
 
 icXti or KMii . 
 
 otvet^ has for its vocative, otvu, ; ywj?, yvmi ; Tbf^, tthv ; ooa^.. 
 
 Certain nouns in i/$ and «$, especially proper names, 
 which were originally adjectives or participles, have the vo- 
 cative like the nominative neuter of the primitive ; as, Ata^^ 
 
 A/fltv, V. Aiecv. S//^05/$, S/jttafy, V. Sz/^fP. 
 
 In proper names, the poets often reject the v ; as, Aiec for 
 A*Jv ; ©o«for©o«y. 
 
 Nouns in a^, and m, ««$, have the vocative in 01 ; as, eclS&iS: 
 V. xi^ot ; jj;^j6;, V. ij^oi. 
 
 Dative Plural, 
 
 The dative plural is formed from the dative singular, by 
 changing the last syllable into ci 5 as, caf/k^-t/, truf/^t-fri ; rsi^s-i, 
 Tiix^i-ci ; 0A«y-<, (^A«y-a-|) (^Ao|/ ; Apoc^-t^ (Apa/2-c-/) Apoi-^t, 
 \U precede the last syllable, it is dropped ;* as, T/r<tv-/, riret,- 
 Ti ; 9r««y-r/, -xet-Ti ; and if 5 or precede the v, they are chang- 
 ed into their corresponding diphthongs si and « ; as, ^^scV'Tt, 
 
 ♦B> Ruleiv. p. 5. 3* 
 
1 8 Third Declensions-Contractions, 
 
 Nouns ending in c, preceded by a diphthong, annex i to 
 
 the nominative ; as, /3if$, /2acr/ ; ^oc<riX$vg, ^uTtXiva-t ; vccv$, volvo-i. 
 
 Syncopated nouns in;;^* have the dative in*5-<; as, Trotriip, 
 
 Tru-Tpusrt ; So, cttrTTjp, et(rrpe60-t ; ctp7}v, c&pvos , upvoc^i ; 'f//$, 't;/o60-<, 
 
 ;k^e5<r/ i« from the obsolete ;^f c« , and f^otprvTi from f^ccpTv<5* 
 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 Many nouns of this declension are contracted. 
 
 1 . Two vowels are contracted into a single vowel or diph- 
 thong ; as, retx,ecc, rsixv > '»"f/;tf«« j rei^cHi. 
 
 2. By dropping a consonant, two vowels are brought to- 
 gether, which are afterwards contracted ; as, xepecru, Kgpoict^ 
 
 3. A vowel is sometimes dropped entirely ; as, TrscrTip, 
 
 Some nouns are contracted in all the cases, and some in a 
 part only. 
 
 In the oblique cases, there is no contraction, unless the 
 former vowel is short, or a doubtful vowel used as short. 
 
 It should be remembered by the learner, that 
 The short vowels are, f, o. 
 
 Which have their corresponding long ones, j;, &'. 
 
 And their corresponding diphthongs, f<, ov. 
 
 The following are the rules of contraction for this declen- 
 -^ion, and likewise for all contracted Verbs. 
 
 1 . When a short vowel is doubled, it is changed into its 
 corresponding diphthong ; but ee of the dual commonly be- 
 .*omes ',;; as, ^cccn?,sei, ^cc^iXiK; ; Aiirooq, Ar^r^^, 
 
 In verbs, t £^i?^£, i(pixu ; ^rjMofAsv, ^if?Mf^ev. 
 
 In the dual, AiitioG-dsne, AnfJLoa-Qevri, 
 
 The dual sometimes follows the rule. c-»f Aff, (ry.eXii. 
 
 2. When both the short vowels meet, they are contracted 
 iito 8\ as, r£/;^ffo5, TiiXH<i ; /3of5, /Sss. 
 
 In verbs, <t>tMof^v, ^tX8f44v ; ^tjXoere, ^;jAm. 
 
 3. A short vowel before ec is changed into its correst 
 ponding long one,| and a is dropped ; as, f«/», ^p ; Aj^Toet, Ajjt^ ; 
 
 * F.xcept yanrrhPf ya.<r<T»f>^t, 
 
 t An example in verbs is given, for the use of the student when ht 
 
 aches Contract Verbs. 
 
 : Or as in oac case, into its corrcspending diphthong ;^as, «A»eRt? a^mth 
 
Third Declension — First Form of Contracts* 19 
 
 But SC6 pure becomes « ; as ;k^^?e«, X9^^' 
 
 4. A short vowel before t forms a diphthong with it ; as, 
 
 5. i before a long vowel or diphthong is dropped ; as, 
 
 In verbs, <pi>^u^ <pkXa, 
 
 6. *o before a long vowel is (with the vowel) contracted in- 
 to J ; as, ^v>s6eo>i ^jjAJ ; JSjAo>?Tf, d'yjXare. 
 
 before a diphthong unites with the second vowel of the 
 diphthong ; as, ^ijXo97, JjjAoI ; ^jyAoe/, ^;jA<jI ; Jj;Ao»i, ^jjAa? ; S7j?^oov, 
 
 But in the termination oetv, i being rejected, it is contract- 
 ed into a; as, ^r^>^itv, J'jyA^y. 
 
 7. When At precedes o, « or a; the contraction is into<y; 
 when otherwise, into « ; as, /So^^o-^, fioao-t ; ff-««s, a-os ; TtfMof>t»ev 
 
 In diphthongs,/ is subscribed; as, riftctet, fif^^ ] ftl^f^^^ 
 
 8. Neuters in (j^ pure and ^a$, reject t in the oblique cases, 
 to produce a concurrence of vowels ; as, 
 
 KSpuTcc, lupotot^ Kepct* 
 KepUTOfv, Kspuav, Kepav. 
 
 9. If the former vowel be long, or i or y, strike out the 
 other ; as, 
 
 (iorpvei, QorpZf. rtf^jjsv, rif^m. 
 
 First Form of Contracts. 
 Two terminations ; o$ neuter ; vig feminine^ ex» 
 c^pt names of men . 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 ^^^<9?p-W, 
 
 N.A V. 
 
 N. 
 
 ut rpii}p-esq, et^f 
 
 G. 
 
 rj75 rpttjp'io^^ 85, 
 
 Tec rpiijp-ee, ^, 
 
 G. 
 
 rm rfiiy)p-eav^ aVf 
 
 D. 
 
 TTi rpiijp'gi^ et. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 recti rpmp-eTi, 
 
 A. 
 
 rm TptTjo-eeCi tj, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 ^/ 
 
 Tots TPl>!p'£CCq, £<5 , 
 
 V. 
 
 arptiip-eq^ 
 
 rxivrptyjp'£6lv,oiv. 
 
 V. 
 
 6) rpiinp-eeg. £/f. 
 
 *Thr3 rule applies only to vferbs. 
 
"20 Third Declension — Second Form of Contracts. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 TO retx,-os. 
 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 N, 
 
 TCCTglX'tOti V, 
 
 G. 
 
 r^iTf /%-f05j 
 
 «, 
 
 T6} Tsix-eh n-t 
 
 G. 
 
 rm retx-i^v, ui 
 
 D. 
 
 TO) Tit^-ei, 
 
 et, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 Toti retx^eo-iy 
 
 A. 
 
 TO retX'og, 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 A. 
 
 Tet reix'est, t}, 
 
 V. 
 
 6) retx-oi, 
 
 
 TO/V Tf<;k^-fO/v,e/v. 
 
 V. 
 
 o» rgiX'^<*'-> V' 
 
 Compounds of x^o<; have two contractions ; as. 
 
 1st Contraction. 
 
 2d Contraction 
 
 N. 'HpcCiC?i'£7)S, 
 
 >?«• 
 
 G, 'HpflftxA-f£o$ fa$, 
 
 £0i, «5. 
 
 D. 'HpocKX-£si eet. 
 
 si, «'• 
 
 A . *H fioLKX-etoc , itt , 
 
 see, 1?. 
 
 V. -Hpax^-eig, ^5, 
 
 f«. 
 
 1. In some nouns ending in eos , the £ is entirely dropped; as, 
 (TSTfa^jG. czs-eeo? czr^s . Sometimes they are otherwise con- 
 tracted ; as assTiii^ o-zs-^i, 
 
 2. The Attics often change 5* of the accusative singular 
 jnto flc ; as, tv(peci,tv<pu,. 
 
 3. Proper names in jj^-fog, and compounds of £t«5, a year, 
 often take the form of the first declension, in the accusative 
 and vocative singular, and the nominative and accusative plu- 
 ral; as, 
 
 0/ AefMrdevocij r«$ Asf^otrhvx^. 
 
 Second Form of Contracts. 
 
 Two terminations, ig feminine, a few mascu- 
 line * and common ; l neuter. 
 
 
Third Declension — Third Form of Contracts 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. ra o(pe€, 
 G.D.To/v o^iotv,o<pe£fiv 
 
 21 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. o^/f , 
 G. riio<p-eei, eoeq^ 
 D. Teo o<p-ei^ ei, 
 A. T«v o<Ptv^ 
 V. Of o(pi» 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ot o<^-ff$, eh, 
 
 G. TOfi 0^£«V, 
 
 D. rot^ c<peTt, 
 A. tS5 o^-fac$, f/$, 
 V. a> o^«$, etg. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 G. o-/yjj;r-<o5, f^^S, N. A. V, c-<y;j^/f. G. c/vjjtt-i^v, f^y, 
 
 D. c-«/;j5r-J/, <5 f/, D. <rty9)7nrt, 
 
 A. r;v>jx/, G. D. G-ivi}T-toiV, Cfjv, A. a-<y)77r/fl6, 
 
 V. ^tvijTrt. V. o-/y);9r/fl6. 
 
 The terminations eof^;, et, eatv, ih, belong to the Attics, and 
 are most in use ; the other to the Ionics. 
 
 Third Form of Contracts. 
 Three terminations, evg^ rg, masculine ; v neii- 
 
 ter. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 G. Tit (oeCTtX-eoi^ C^^'s) 
 D. to; ,)3<«cr/A-f<, f7, 
 A. Toy /3«cr<A"«f«, 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. TTeXsK'vg, I 
 
 G. ra ^fAf>6-fo$, (fas)' 
 D. TO) TTeXiK-it^ el, 
 A. Tov TreXsK'VV^ 
 
 V, 6) TTsXsX-U, 
 XT ^'°^- 
 
 In. To «r7-t;, 
 
 G. m ccTj-ecg, (f^ ) 
 
 D. rai ctTJ-e'i, ilj 
 
 A. TO CCt]-Vj 
 V. ^ Oi^l'V, 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. 
 
 T6; ^etTiX'iiy rj^ 
 
 G. D. 
 
 To^y j3«(riA-5o<y. 
 
 j^ Dual. 
 N. A. V. 
 
 T6^ TTcAfit-ff, ^, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 To;y TTeMK-eoiv. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 To/v «tf5-7-foiy. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 G. T^y ^XTiX'e6)?y 
 D. T©<$ liccctX-ev^t, 
 A. r«6 /3;tfr/A-fflf«, ei$, 
 V. a ^xa-iX-ecS) Ǥ. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ot TTeXeK-eg^f st^, 
 G. Tfijy TTiXeicem, 
 
 D. T0i$ ^£AfJC-e5-<, 
 
 A. TUs veXsK-ecci^ el^ j 
 V, a TeXsic-eeij eig. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. rx xrl-ex'. rj, 
 G. Ta;v <»5-/-f&;y, 
 D. TO/ 5 xrl-eTt^ 
 A. Tic x^l-£oe>^vj^ 
 V. <y xcrlsoc, r. 
 
22 Third Declension — 4^A and 5th Form of Contracts. 
 
 1. The Attic genitive e^f^ is most in use. 
 
 2. Some nouns in evg pure are otherwise contracted ; as, 
 '/^oevg. Gen. Aid6<»>«, ;tJ«J$ or ;^ou5 . Ace. p^oe*, x^^' 
 
 Some nouns in t/$ make the genitive in voi dative t;/, nom- 
 inative and accusative plural u^ ; as, t^^vg e/o$, vi, N. and A. PL 
 
 Fourth Form of Contracts. 
 Two terminations, (og, o, feminine. 
 Dual. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 G. rJJ5 0si^-oog^ otf$, 
 D. rj) <p£t^'oi,ot., 
 A. r«;v (psf^'ox, <y, 
 
 N. A. V. rot.<Piihoiy 
 G. D. Tflt/v pti^-cn. 
 
 Plurai; 
 
 N. «i< Ou^'ot, 
 j G. TA>v (p£i^-av, 
 I D. ra/5 pei^-otg, 
 I A. ri«5 0ei^'ovgy 
 ! V. « <pu^-oi. 
 
 1. There are only two nouns in «? of this form, «/Jft;$ and 
 «^6;;, which are rarely found out of the singular. 
 
 2. The dual and plural have the form of the second de- 
 clension. 
 
 Fifth Form of Contracts. 
 
 Two terminations, a$ pure, and pag, neuter gen- 
 der. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. To KSpXg^ 
 
 
 
 G. TH Kepoclog, 
 
 tceouoi J 
 
 XipZ^ 
 
 D. TO) K£px]ty 
 
 >tf/j(«/, 
 
 KipZ. 
 
 A. TO Kspxg. 
 
 
 
 V, ^y >cf^flt$. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 N. A. V. r^ Kepxle, 
 
 >t£0^£, 
 
 KipX, 
 
 G. D. TOiv Kspxhiy, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Kip^^r. 
 
 Is. Tei KepecJXf 
 
 ;cf^ise<«, 
 
 nepoi. 
 
 G. r<wv KSpxiAfVf 
 
 «gpfi*«yv, 
 
 icepav. 
 
 D. TO/5 K£pcc<rt, 
 
 
 
 A. raft Kspxlx, 
 
 «£/>£««, 
 
 XipZ. 
 
 V. ft> Kspciloe., 
 
 »f,p«eoe, 
 
 KSpS^ 
 
Third Declension—' Contractions, 
 
 23 
 
 Some nouns are contracted by the omission of 
 a vowel ; 
 
 1. In every case ; as, xepeovy xevov. 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 €QlV. 
 Sing. 
 N. xtv-eav, a>v. 
 
 fap. 
 
 N. eeepy rjp, 
 
 G. expcg',rpoi, &LC. 
 
 aag. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 G. A««»0$, A^0$, &C. 
 
 dig. 
 
 G. k^ocih^i ^ccocqy &C. 
 
 2. In part of the cases ; as, Ovyarrjp, ArnjtYiryjp^ 
 avrjpf'^ 7taryjp9 f^>7ry/p, yoLarripJ 
 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 6vyccl'Vpi 
 
 
 jN. 6vyctispe^. pei, 
 
 G. Bvyul-epo^, p6^y 
 
 N.A.V. 6pyu}-(p£^p£^ 
 
 G. $vyxl-epav, pay^ 
 
 D. Bvyccl-ept^ pi, 
 
 
 \ D. evyul'pccTi, 
 
 A, 6vyet'}'ipot, pcci 
 
 G. D. ^vyul-epoivypoiv. 
 
 1 A. Svyccj-epy,^, Petti: 
 
 V. $vyui'Sp. 
 
 
 1 V. $vyechepes, peS' 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. etv-vp. 
 
 
 N. «y-c^f5, (J'/Jf?, 
 
 G. *v-f^d$, J)e<»«5 
 
 N.A.V. «v-£^£, J>f, 
 
 G. «v-f^<yv, JjOtfwy, 
 
 D. uv-spit i'pi. 
 
 
 D. eitv-^pe6<ri, 
 
 A. etV'ipoc^ ^pXi 
 
 G. D. etV'spolv, ^poiv. 
 
 A. «v-f^fid5, J/J«$, 
 
 V. ^v-.^ 
 
 
 V. <«»-£^f$ , JjOf$. 
 
 ♦ otv>jp inserts tT, because v never immediately precedes p. 
 
 t TTATup^ fA,>irnp^ ycta-T)fp^ have no contraction in the accusative sinsjular, 
 and the genitive and accusative plural, to distinguish them from ^otT/ioi, 
 unrpoL^ yei7T^(t^ of the first declension. 
 
M 
 
 Third Declension — Contracts. 
 
 N, 
 G. 
 D- 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 vrccl'Spi, ft, 
 
 wafj-epa, 
 
 vrttl'tp. 
 
 Duai. Plural. 
 
 N. A. V. ^ctl-epSj pe, G. TTetl-i^m^ 
 
 G. D. TTOcl-SpOtVy pOlV. 
 
 D. vx]-petTif 
 A. TTul-epcc^i 
 
 V, TTxl-SpS^f ps^. 
 
 Taclrip differs from Ttalyjp and [lyjlyjpy bj making 
 the dative plural yaalyjpau 
 
 Some nouns are contracted only in the nomin- 
 ative, accusative and vocative plural. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. e^ig, 
 G, e^t^oi. 
 
 G. K?[et^oi, 
 
 G. opn6ciy 
 
 ig. 
 Plural. 
 N. e^-thi, ^ 
 A. e^'t^xi, > 
 V. sp'ihi, ) 
 
 eti. 
 
 €Lg, 
 
 A. KX-et^ug, N 
 V. jtA-f<JV$, ) 
 
 N. o^v'i6eq, 
 
 A. O^V-<^fit$, 
 
 V. o§v-t6eg, 
 
 «'«. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. v*t;5) 
 
 G. V«o$. 
 
 PluraL 
 
 \ N. v-«»f5, 
 A. y-flca$, 
 V. v-om, 
 
 > ^«5. 
 
 
 t)$. 
 
 N. /3<.7f f«, 
 
 N.^,7 
 
 G./3«7fW5. 
 
 A. ;3.7( 
 
 
 V. ^,7 
 
 
 ^^, 
 
 ng. 
 
 N. p-«$, 
 
 A. (i-oiCt, 
 
 ' i^5'. 
 
 N. >t«Aar/5, j N.xaA«r-/JV$ , 
 G.ic«Aw<^o$. A xflsA«r-/^«$, ) f/5. 
 
 I V. KCCXTV-t^i^^ 
 
 Ef/^f5, KXtihq, o^vtee<;, &c. seem to have been contracted to 
 avoid the unpleasant concurrence of the letters ^5, ^$,* which 
 were not sufficiently separated by the intervening short vow- 
 el. This could not be done with the genitives xAe/<5d$, 6pt0oi, 
 e^t^os^ because it would destroy their characteristic. 
 
 * Vide rule iv. page 5. 
 
Irregular Nouns, 25 
 
 IRREGULAR NOUNS. 
 Irregular Nouns are either defective or redundant. 
 
 Defective. 
 
 Some are altogether indeclinable. 
 
 1. Names of letters ; as, to otX(poc ; ra dXpci, 
 
 2. Cardinal numbers from Ttrg^li to '£x,et]cv, 
 
 3. Poetic nouns, which have lost the last syllable by apo- 
 cope J as. To ^of for a'c^i^cc. 
 
 4. Proper names derived from other languages ; as, o 
 
 Feminines are sometimes declined ; and those which have 
 taken Greek terminations ; as, o Isckco^c^. 
 
 Some have only one case ; as, N. ^&'$, a house. V. &> rcev, 
 friend. Dual, ec-ce, eyes. Plu. G. 'g^^^y, of good things. V. 
 £0 UoTTot, O Gods. 
 
 Some have two cases ; as, N. a<$, a lion. A. A/v, or A/vct, N. 
 (p$ote^ or (p6otq, cakes ; A. (p^oixi. 
 
 Some neuters have the same word in three cases ; as, 
 N. A. V. ovofc^, <JVitt«5, o(peXiq^ fipe'ioe,<i r-^os -, i£X^6)^^ Xezrcci, &C. 
 
 Some have the Singular only ; as, yv, uv.^^ ecA^, ttv^. 
 
 Some have only the plural ; as, names of festivals and some 
 cities. AicwTict, Bacchanalia ; A^Tjvecf, Athens. 
 
 Redundant. 
 
 I. In the nominative, 
 
 1. Of the same declension ; as, 
 
 «7 ecvlihlo^y TO oivft^ajov, an antidote. 
 ^vyo^^ TO ^vyov, a yoke. 
 
 c-'ia.hoq'i TO o-lot^iov^ stadium, &:c.. 
 
 In the plural of the second declension ; as, 
 • ^eciLt^g, a bond ; et ho-f^t^ ra, hrf^t. 
 KVKXoq-i a circle ; oi y^vK^ct , rx KVKXec. 
 A£/%vo$, a candle ; «< xt^x^<^h '^<« Xvx'^ec. 
 Names of Gods and Men, being much in use, are more re- 
 dundant than others. Jupiter is reckoned to have had ten ; 
 Zfvj, Aei;?, Vihv^, Zo:§, Z3j$, A/?, Z;jv, Z<«y, ^^y Auv. These, how- 
 
 4 
 
2^8 Irregular Nouns. 
 
 eyer, diifer only in dialect, and may be reduced to two, A;^- 
 and Zjjv, which alone are declined. 
 
 N. G. D. A. W 
 
 At5, } A/d$, Au, Aloe, 
 
 Zevq^ ) ZfV, 
 
 Z35V, Z>;vo$, Z;js//, Z;jVft:, 
 
 2. Of different declensions ; as, 
 
 rj (io}\>}, e /3oA«5, a thrOW. 
 
 ^ ecTs-gpcty sc-3s-£pciy evening, 
 4 yi»j7, ro y/xo$ -fo$ , victory, 
 
 c yot/5-v«y, voZ^'Voog^ mind. 
 
 II. Redundant in the oblique cases, while the nominative 
 is the same. 
 
 N. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 ^ Ayti, 
 
 Ay/tf$, 
 
 Ay/^cs, 
 
 A^is. 
 
 c A^K9, 
 
 Afy, 
 
 A^})lc^, 
 
 A^fflS, Mars. 
 
 M'ijy^r.S, 
 
 -xii, 
 
 -XJj7e?, 
 
 a mushroom. 
 
 fe^5, 
 
 f^fi;, 
 
 ffA>/o€, 
 
 love, ike. 
 
 From these redundant nouns must be distinguished those 
 which, with different terminations, have different meanings ; 
 as, <r<7«$y grain ; to o-tlev, food. 
 
 Some nouns are peculiar to dialects ; as, v ?rvA>j, a 
 Comm. r TryAof, Ionic. 
 
 NOUNS DERIVED FROM OTHERS FOR. DISTINCTION OF SEX. 
 
 Nouns are often derived from other nouns, for distinction 
 X)f sex. 
 
 1. In the first declension, the feminine is formed by 
 changing ?;$ into ii-i$ei,B.nd ry^ into T/$-r<^6$, r^ni-rfn'^cq or r^icc, 
 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 o Sxt/^y-s. a Scythian. 37 Sxi^^/5-<<^5 a Scythian woman, 
 
 • ;r^o(^«75i$, a prophet. r^ w/>o^37/./5-7/Jo5, a prophetess. 
 
 o uv^rri, a piper. ^ ctvXTJlpi^'Ipiocg, a female piper. 
 
 -'l^uxki, a singer. tj -^f/etxlpisc, a female singer. 
 
 ♦ A/? has become obsolete. 
 
Patronymics-, -'/ 
 
 A lew are formed from «? ; as, rj nxvlg, from o vcocvici-,, h 
 young man. 
 
 2. In the second declesion, 05 is changed into a ov r : nad 
 somethnes into 15-/^05 and ecivu, 
 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 ^ovXoi , a man servant. 57 ^ot/A»j, a maid servant. 
 
 0fc$, a God. 17 Osot, a Goddess. 
 
 Jj ff«.vc5. 17 «iM^v'$ '^0$, a lamb. 
 
 XvKog^ yj >^VKecivct, a woll. 
 
 In the third declension, av is changed into ec(vu ; »;5, |, -v^ 
 into Td-oi ; fai«, into f/£«, a, or /c-^c ; t/»-, into v-yrx, ; jj^. and ar-, 
 into 5/fcfc ; &>$, into a/ii, ai^n or ^5* 
 
 Ac-^v, a lion. 57 Mdivx, a lioness. 
 
 K^j;.', a Cretan. r, Ks^jc-r^, a Cretan woman. 
 
 kIa/|, a Cilician. n lOA/c-c-.-*, a Ciliclan woman. 
 
 c f^aTiMv^y a king. Yj SxtiXhu^ a queen. 
 
 c (ra]'/-^^, -sy (rulti^a^ a Savicur. 
 
 1. Sonie masculines have many fominines; as, 6?cr. V 9fst, i»ef^im. 
 6 ^di<TiKwq^ kins:. *i) QsLc-iXiiA^ fidi(7iXi(r<T:i^ ^u(jtKi?^ ^^TiMwd,^ queen. 
 
 2. A'lc-iently Ihe sariie word na? used in both genders i as, c, '» 05Cf. 
 
 3. Some ofthebc derivatives dilfcr iu signification ; as, «7cti/3», a friend. 
 »73t/pst, or «7flt^/>/f^ a concubine. 
 
 PATRONYMICS. 
 
 Masculine patronymics are formed from the primitive, b^ 
 
 changing the termination of its genitive into cch^, iu.h,q and /<^\$. 
 
 1. Nouns of the first declension, and io<i of the second, 
 
 rhange the genitive ^ into oL^y><;. Bodsm^, Bops-y., Bops-uh^^ the 
 
 ?on of Boreas. *Ha;o5, 'Ha^-», 'HAf-^cJVs. 
 
 2. Other nouns change the termination of the genitive into 
 
 S^y;^ : as, Koovoq-li. KpcV'/Oy^i. A/«|, G. AtotK'Ci, AiXK-tiyj?. N^cJa'^, 
 N£5-7&^-d5, N6r7ef-<^;.5* 
 
 3. But in «// nouns which have the penult of the genifive 
 long, the change is into n/J'rs ; as, Acceplv^^-iii A^^ipl'm^*'/^, Al^u^- 
 csvlc^y Al>i(zvl'toih:i. 
 
^ 8 Diminutives — Ve rhals » 
 
 The Ionics form their Patronymics in ta>v ; as. K^ovim for H^cvths^ from 
 The Eolics, in ctJ'io?, '•Yfp&Jto? for 'TfpsLt^f. 
 
 Feminine patronymics end in /$, a^, r;Uy ivv} or mn. 
 
 1. Those in /$ and u^, are formed from their masculines, by 
 casting off JV? ; as, Ne^-lcpi^, daughter of Nestor, from J^les-J^pi^ 
 &>.g, son of Nestor. 'H'Atag from 'H\icch<;. 
 
 2. Those in m are formed by changing the nominative of 
 the primitive into m, XpuT-y,^^ XpuT-^iq, Ka^/icog, Koc^/^m- 
 
 3. Those in /v^ are formed from nominatives of the se- 
 »jond declension in 05 impure, and of the third form of con- 
 tracts, in the third declension ; as, A<^^i«>-7o5j A^^utJivt^. Hy^- 
 
 4. Those in ajvjj, from nominatives in tog of the second, and 
 .'^yy of the third declensions ; as, Ua^iog, ly^a^ianj. Hf7/<jyy, Hg- 
 
 DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 1. Masculine diminutives end in ixg, «|, /v?;?, /Ao$, vXog,txmi 
 ir/.ci) &^c. ; as, TTcAi^zTiccc^^ a little father, from 7Fcfs:rzrotq^ a fa- 
 ther, &c. 
 
 2. Feminine diminutives end in scg, /?, /y|, vXt}, ux^rj-, ix^r,, 
 iry.y} ; as, fc^nvcc, a little fountain, from Kpy,vr,, a fountain, &c. 
 
 3. Neuter dimiautives end in /*», et^i^^^ i^-v, ^x/>y^ ^/?^/av t^u/sy, 
 «/.v;oy, «^/oy, ceT-zov, <Scc. ; as, 5-7;y^:oy, a little sparrow, from 
 rl^aC'cg^ a sparrow, &c. 
 
 4. One primitive has sometimes a variety of derivatives ; 
 as, from x«^;;, a girl, is derived Koei^K-r,^ y.ooa,"io't, jcoPioy^ Ko^t- 
 
 VERBALS 
 
 are general!}^ formed by casting off the augment of their 
 {)rimitives, and changing the termination 
 
 * Araplificalives have various terminations. Masculines end in istc^, 
 ns, ^a^av/iif.liaving a great beard, from Trceycv^ beard : In cc ; diS.ctpvicg 
 a iuU grown lamb, from ^tp?, a lamb. 
 
 Feminiaes end in ts ; as ^'xiriCi a great torch, from tTitiV, a torch. Neu- 
 ters end in iov ; as^x^pjuaiSiov a e;reat stone, from /JPf^^^, a stone. 
 
Verbals. ^^ 
 
 in the Firat Person of the Perfect Passive, 
 (^' asye^.*^A^^, I from yr/^ccf^uui. 
 into K^"^' —y^ocf^'~y.y > 
 
 in the Second Person of the Perfect Passiye, 
 as ooxtf^^rtx from ^g^oKif^Lxrai. 
 
 in the Third Person of the Perfect Passive., 
 Masc. 
 
 ''T;?^, as x^^^^l^^ from lax^onclcci. 
 r^5, — TTotiflr.g Tezs-oiifleet, 
 
 Fern. 
 
 /*r/c, as TTto-liq from Tnzs-giTlei.i, 
 
 into 5^^*' -'i^^" \ 
 
 K-TVo, — C^X^(7i^<i ) 
 
 Neut. 
 
 into 
 
 i Ttj^iov, as TTol'^iov from 'xazs-o'l<j(,i. 
 
 in the First Person of the Perfect Middle, 
 ^ ev^y as Totcf'j^ , from rfioiui, 
 
 J /ov, — A'>7;oj; ?.£?.oyx, 
 
 few are formed from other Tenses ; a*-, 
 Ae»»jw$, from the Present ^sv^q-co ; 
 '^<c^,i*'X'^-> fi'om the Perfect nTcif 5r;j^is ; 
 ^x;?, from the First Aorist th-Ax, ; 
 <pvyt}^ from the Second Aorist i^pvyfir, 
 
 4"^ 
 
Adjeciivt 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 Adjectives of three terminations. 
 
 The feminine follows the first declension of 
 nouns ; masculines in og, the second ; all other 
 masculines, the third. 
 
 
 
 og. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 K(A>^-oq, '/?, «y, 
 
 , 
 
 N. iCeiX-oi^ oLty a, 
 
 G. 
 
 y.y^X'OV^ jj$, oy, 
 
 N. A. V. x«A-^, c«, fi;, 
 
 G. KotX-m^ mj Mv, 
 
 D. 
 
 KxX-ca^ 7i, OJ, 
 
 
 D. ;tfi6A-o/$jfl6/5, 0/5, 
 
 A. 
 
 >ti6A-(3V, 3JV, OV, 
 
 G. D. JC6fcA-0iV, OJ/Vj 0<V, 
 
 A. xatA-flt;$ , «5, et, 
 
 V. 
 
 K6i>i-S, y}y OV. 
 
 
 V. KU>i-of, cii, a. 
 
 Adjectives in og pure, and pog, have the femi- 
 nine in a ; as, a^cog-a-ov. fxax^og^ -xpa, -xpov. 
 
 Except compounds of tt^^o^ and adjectives in 50$, denoting 
 matter and color ',^ as, x9^^^^h *?? ^^ 5 (poivixeo^, jj, ov ; also the 
 numeral oyJda^. 
 
 Sing. 
 G. f/,ccy'p-ov) «5} oy? 
 
 D. fJLU,Kp-COy U) OJy 
 
 A. fjucy-p'ov, cftv, ©y, 
 
 V, f/,»Kp'S, £36, OV. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. f^y^y.p-U, Uy U 
 G.D. fA,CiKp'OlV, CClVy OlV^ 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. y^CCKp-Oty Ctty CCy 
 G. f^HTCp-OfV, 
 D. f^XKp'Olg^ uig, Oi^y 
 A. f^ti^iCp'OV^y U9i flt, 
 
 V. f^xxp-oty ccf, et. 
 
 1. Some adjectives of this form are contracted as ; 
 
 ;^^pc-f 6$ -«$j ;;iPvo*f»j-^, ;^^pycr£6y «v, &C. 
 ctcTA«o$-s$, 6ft5rAoJj-y', 6t55"Ao©v-»y,.&:c. 
 
 2. The defective adjective c-oj^?, or c-J$, contracted from 
 crxoi or (7605, is thus declined : 
 
 Sing. N. 0, 4 c^5» (i? «^i4) '?'e 5-ifv. 
 
 A. roy, T^y, Td, r^yv. 
 Piur. N. o<, fit/, c-aTo/, (o-.^, <roi) Tx o-Zxy (Tci* 
 
 A, rcv(iy rxg, o-as, rx c^x, cu. 
 
 yj^YM 
 
 Except when /> precedes «5? ; as, etpyvpio;^ -a-ov ; also, y-tpAfAiCi and 
 
 FCC. 
 
Adjectives 4 
 
 31 
 
 3. These four, <tAAd$, rtj^Koulo^^ rdT^vloiy and roiovlcg^ have 
 the neuter in o ; as, c»aao5-jj*«. 
 
 4. Derivatives and Compounds have commonly but two 
 terminations ; as, <?, ^ ct0otvujo<i, ro ot$xyctJov, 
 
 6. The Attics commonly give but two terminations to ad- 
 jectives of this form ; as, <>, 57 x(xAo$, to KotMv, 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. o|-v$, Hoc, V, 
 
 G. ol-EOi, 5/56$, fO$. 
 
 D. 6^-eiy eiy itoi-i iij el, 
 A. o|-t/y, ficev, t;. 
 
 V. o|-t/, f/flC, V. 
 
 vg. 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. ' 
 G. D. 
 
 o^-sctvj eoctV) eoiV) 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. o|-ff$, f;$, 5/^/5 ecc, 
 G. o^-tm<i etctfv, eoji, 
 
 A. ©|-fc6$, fls, £<««$) fCC. 
 
 V^. o|-ff$ , eliy etoti, etc. 
 
 1. The Poets often make the accusative of the masculine 
 and feminine singular in ex ; as, uhu, T^oflu, for uoutc^i Tropliv ; 
 ivpexTTovlov, for evpv)i ttovIgv, 
 
 2. Words belonging to this form, are sometimes used with 
 only two terminations ; as, 0;jAt;$ iiprt}, Od. f, 4G7. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. (K'COV, HTu^ OV, 
 
 G. Ik-ovIo^j Sic-;j$, ov7o5, 
 D. ix.'0vl4, acyiyoyjt, 
 
 A. iK-ovlx, HTCCV, Of, 
 
 idV. 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A.V. 
 
 eK'oiJe, iicrxyovje, 
 
 I G. D. 
 sK'ovloiy,ii(rutv,ov}oiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N . EK'OvltZ, iiO-Xiy Ovlu, 
 
 G. tK-ovleov, HTMy, ovlckiv, 
 D. eK'Hr^, iiTxig, iis"/, 
 
 A. tK'Ovlxi, «5'flt$, Ov7«, 
 
 Sing. 
 N. TT'Xs 5 UTx, ay. 
 G. 5r- c6yro5 ,06r^5,fl6yTo5. 
 D. :r-fl6VT;, arjj, xvTt. 
 A. 7r-c4V7cc, actftv, ctfy. 
 
 ac. 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 Tr-avTi, XTX, xire, 
 G. D. 
 
 'T-xyroCi^xrxiy'iXvroiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 9r-tf5vr£5, xTXt^ xvru. 
 G. Tr-flcvTA^v, cc5-<i;v, <:fcvrA;v. 
 D. 7r-a,Ti, fit7"fii;$, ctir/. 
 A. 7r-£tvra$ , uo-aq^ xvrx. 
 
 * After this form, the Participles of the Present, 1st Futurej and 2d 
 Aorist Active, are declined. 
 
32 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 
 
 etg. 
 Dual. Plural. 
 
 >>■'. A. V. |N. ;;^id/>/-£vn5,50->-^/,£vr«. 
 
 s^'^c. D. xctpi'ei(rt^ evr^i^^ £i!r(. 
 
 A. %<»/)/-fvri«$,?cc<«$ fvr^t. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 yj^' 
 
 Sin 
 
 N, 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 N. 
 0. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 V 
 
 S '^ruL-m^ and > ^ 
 
 < ; > rr-ciy rv. 
 
 lllg. 
 
 7lU.~rjV7t, TJTTTl, rVTi* 
 
 '^ruL'h^ and , 
 
 Dual. 
 
 A. V. nu^-hrsr, fj-rroi, rvT£» 
 D. T/tt-:^vroiV, y75*i-5t/v, r-yroiv, 
 
 Plurai. 
 
 ' ^T-aroCy 8», 
 
 isg. 
 Sing.^ 
 
 G. 7r}ise.x,-hroi , tia-^rt]^ , avra^-. 
 D. 7r>ifi:x-avr/, ^crc-)^, ^vr/, 
 A. '?rA«as>::-?vrc«, «(5*<ytf£v, «v. 
 y ^ t^Atftf^-sv and I 
 
 Dual.' 
 
 N. A. V. 7r>i(ZK"^vTe, HT(rXy Svre, 
 
 G. D. ^Aipfejt-^vra/v, ^i"C"<j6/v, svloiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 G. 5rA£^«-«yTA'y, HT(ra)v^ ^vrcjif, 
 D. crA5c»-»5*< J H^^j-aii ^ «crj. 
 A. 7r/.fl6x-«yroc$, so-jt^, avr^e. 
 V. ;rAflJx-«vn$ , ^rToii^hra* 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 M<Ai<5 and r<:«Aas« borrow their feminine from the obsolete 
 ,M.£A«<vo5 and 7fltAi«/vo5 ; 
 
 Sing. I Dual. 
 
 D, itfA-«tv/j «/y4j, «v/. 
 A. lA.u^X'Utx^ aivo^v, ocv. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Plural, 
 
 G. |M.eA-o6y<yy, fic/yo/y, s^v^iyv. 
 D. /K<£A-(at(r/. uivc&iq^ r^c•/. 
 A. ,M.fA-£«y<*5, c«<V5C$, oftyflf. 
 
 In like manner rccXocc^, 
 
 * Ti/x)iug has, in the voi^ative case, ri^uifiv and "ttfAyiu, whence we have 
 rifj.h and TtfAV) in the contracted fcum. 
 t Contracted from ttka-icow and '^/^y-oit^ the vocative of rhdncti;. 
 
Adjectives. 
 
 33 
 
 Mfycfts is properly thus declined in the singular number 
 only : 
 
 Masc. Femin. Neut. 
 
 A. f^eyetv, f^eyu. 
 
 V. fteyec, f^eyci. 
 
 The feminine gender, with all the other cases in the mas- 
 culine and neuter, is borrowed from the obsolete jw-fy^A-os, 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 f>L$yX}rO{Vi UtVj oiV. 
 
 Sing. 
 N.|ttfy-flC5, aAjj, cc* 
 G. ^fyaA-aujj;?, ot;. 
 D. ^_5y«A-to, >], a;. 
 A. ^«y-«v, «A»;v, <x. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. f>isyccX-ot^ uiy ot' 
 G. iU.«yfliA-»v, AJV, a;v. 
 D. jM,5y<«A-o(5, «<$, 0/5. 
 A. jMxyaA-6t;$, <*5, «. 
 V. .«.fy<*A-o/, a/} flc. 
 
 HoAy; is thus declined in the singular number only : 
 M. F. N. 
 
 N. ;rcAy$, To>iV, 
 
 A. :roAfVj tto At/. 
 
 V. ^TflAi;, ;roAf . 
 
 The feminine, and all the other cases in the masculine and 
 neuter, are borrowed from the obsolete ttoAA-cj, ;;, oy. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 7roAA-A>, ec, w, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. TTOX'V^, A/J, V. . 
 
 G. ^flA-Aov, A;jCj Aof. 
 D. ^oA-Ao;, A^, Ao;. 
 A. TToA-t/v, A;;Vj i;. 
 V. TToX-v, At;) :/. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Is , TToAA-fl^, (£/) cc, 
 
 G. 9roAA-ft'») ft/y, a>v. 
 D. 7roAA-fl<?, <»/$, Of?. 
 A. TTdAA-of?, a$, «. 
 V. ;roAA-o<j (Jt/j ci» 
 
 1. :5-oAts is sometimes declined regularly by the poets, like 
 o|t/5 ; as, 7roA-v$, £<<«, v, &:c. 
 
 2. rioAAds, ^oAAj;, TToAAoy, is Sometimes found regularly de- 
 clinedin all the case?. 
 
34 
 
 Adjectives, 
 
 TEPvJIINATlONS PECULIAR TO PARTICIPLES. 
 
 OV^ ovaa, OVV^ 2d Future Active. 
 
 Ost and 2d Aorist Passive, and 
 eigj tiaa, ev^ ^ 2d Conjugation of Verbs in ^/. 
 
 ovq^ ovaa^ ov, 3d ) 
 
 ^^5 
 
 vaa, vv, 4\h\^''''y^^^^'^'' ^'^ ^^^^^ i« ^^• 
 
 *6)$, ocra, (jg, 
 
 . Sing. 
 
 A. rvT-ovvlce^ ^rav, «v. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A. V. rvTr-ouvl £ , ifCTi 
 
 CO 
 
 
 'T. 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ai 
 
 tfi 
 
 ^> r^ 
 
 e 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 '^ 
 
 0^ 
 
 u< 
 
 Q 
 
 a 
 
 
 Ci 
 
 
 ' rt 
 
 
 :y75. 
 
 G. D. ruTT-cvy'^oiv, ti^xiv, ^vjoiv. 
 Plural. 
 
 G. Tt;:T-efv7<2yv, ^y&fVf iivlav, 
 D. ry:T-o^J-/, bJ-rH<;^ a^-/. 
 A.-Tt;;T-'Sy>7(«?? ^^v-^:*?, ^»'7<J«. 
 V. re/?r-^fj'7£5} ^r^/, frv7<Jfr 
 
 G. ^(<^-ov7c5, oi;5'^?, ov7cf. 
 
 D. ^t^'Ovll, ^VTVi^ cilt, 
 A, ^i^-ovl^i ous-ccv, Of* 
 V. h^-ovi, gvtu, ov» 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. h^-ovje, ovs-x, ovle. 
 G. D. h^-ovloiv, oVTaiv, ov'^oiv. 
 Plural. 
 
 N. S't^-ovlei, 'ovrcii, o/jat. 
 G. h^-avlojv^%v'^cai^ oijcoi, 
 D. ho'-'o'jTt^ 'ova-ott?, 'cVTf, 
 A. ^i^-ovloig, oyc-^5, ov7«. 
 
 Perfect Active and Middle. 
 Perfect Middle Ionic. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. rv(pQ-ii^, tta-ot^ ev, 
 \G. rv<p$-£v]cg, £/r;j$, fy7fl$. 
 D. rv06-e-Pn^ si(^{l, ev'Ji. 
 A. 'rv(^0-£v1o6, eio-ecv, £V, 
 V. 7vp&-£'g, nTcc, ev. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. ru^d-£v]£, sto-st, evls. 
 G. D. Tv(p&'evlnv, sto-cciv, iiiotv, 
 ! Plural. 
 
 :N. rv00-cvl£i, £(Txt, tilet. 
 G. Tv.p9'ev]afV, ets-oifV, tvlav, 
 
 D. rvdyi-stCt, SlTu!^) £t<^t, 
 
 [A. rv0d-£vlotg^ £iTu^, £ylu» 
 
 jV. ry^(/-fV7^5, £lTCCt,£v'jGC. 
 
 vg. 
 
 Sing 
 
 D. ^svyv-vvlt, vo-y]y vvft* 
 A. ^owyvf v7cd, yP'tfcy. «v» 
 
 Dual. 
 N^. A. V. <^£vyv-vv]£, vreCy vvj:-, 
 
 G. D. ^€vyv-VV']0!V, VTXlVy Vy]0(V 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ^:vyv-t;y7e5, fC-cc(, fy7«. 
 G. <^svyy-vv]^Vf vcroiv^ uv'im. 
 
 D. ^£Vyy-VITl^ VCTcti^^ VTl, 
 
 A. ^evyv-wlug, vcu^, wl^.. 
 V. ^fvyv-i/v7f$, y^^i, vvjoi. 
 
 *C©ntracltd riom *^?) «t-t/;«t, ai.cf . 
 
Adjectives, 
 
 Sing. 
 G. rerv^'ojo^, vicii , o]oi , 
 
 D. T£7v<p-cll^ VIU, oil. 
 A. TeTvC'-oloC^VICCV, 0(5. 
 
 y . TjTf .^ -<y$ , v;a , d^ . 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. nrvP'ole^ ttUy ^ 
 O. D. TeTvip-oioiv^ vixtv, < 
 
 Plural. 
 N. rfrt;^-oT{r$, vtoti, olu. 
 G. T£Tvp-oJMV^ vtav, eiaiv, 
 
 D. TiTVCp-OTi^ VtCtiq^ CO-i. 
 A. T£TV<P'oloti, VixiyolcC. 
 
 V. Tert^p-tfTff, vioci^olGC. 
 
 
 
 ug comrSCtcu. ^^ 
 
 
 
 Sing. ^ 
 
 
 N. 
 
 f5-r-C?, 6;5"i«, &5. 
 
 
 G. 
 
 eCT-6;T0$, ao-^js, Jto^, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 eerz-coTt, ccfry^^ooTt, 
 
 
 A. 
 
 iGT'u'Tot, axruvy ai . 
 
 
 V. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 oit. 
 
 N. 
 
 A. V. IcT-SfTe^ aroc^ars. 
 
 cjoiv. 
 
 G. 
 
 N. 
 
 D. (O-T-fi/ro/v, aa-cctv, aToiv 
 
 Plural. 
 fC-r-fi/Tfj, aroci, arse. 
 
 . 
 
 G. 
 
 'iG-r-OfTdfy^ fi/C&'V, COTUV. 
 
 
 D 
 
 '(Tr-ua-i^ alrut^y air:. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 eCT arui, ao-^c^^ a ret. 
 
 
 V, 
 
 eo'T-aTe(i, acrxt, a Toe. 
 
 Adjectives of Uvo Terminations. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 M.andF. 
 
 N 
 
 N. np-rjV, 
 
 IV. 
 
 G. rep — fvof. 
 
 
 D. rep £vt. 
 
 
 A. rep-£vet^ 
 
 fV 
 
 V. np — fv. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 M.andF. 
 
 N. f^eyet^jfT-ap, 
 
 G. fCfyiJCAjjT 5^)65, 
 
 D. /twyaA;5T — opt. 
 A. f,i£ya.XY,r-opet^ 
 V . «. e y cs A;yT — 4 . 
 
 N. 
 
 op. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 
 
 r,v. 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 M.andF. 
 
 IS. 
 
 N. A. Y.r£P'2fs, 
 
 G. rep — e^m. 
 
 ev«t. 
 
 G. D. r£p'£\Qiy. 
 
 D. rep — to'i. 
 
 
 • 
 
 A, rtp-evdi , 
 
 fVOC. 
 
 I 
 
 V. rep'tnq^ 
 
 fy«. 
 
 ^)p. 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 N. .tc£7aA>jr-o^f§, 
 
 •^i«. 
 
 ^tyuMT-ope. 
 
 G. ^eyjtAJjr — ofl^yy. 
 
 
 D. fteycjAjjT oCTi, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 A. u^ya^.r'T'opcc'; 
 
 opu. 
 
 fjLsyctXy,r'opetv. 
 
 rV, f^eyct^iisr-opeq, 
 
 OfCt 
 
>G 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 
 
 ag 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 M.andF. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 M.andF. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. ueiv-et^, 
 
 ecv. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 N. ccetv-avre? ^ 
 
 fitVTtfC. 
 
 G. ccetv — revTd?. 
 
 
 usiv'ccvrs. 
 
 
 
 D. u£tv — uvrt. 
 
 
 
 D. uetv — uci. 
 
 
 A. tciiv-uvrcc, 
 
 av. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 A. usiV'Xvraq, 
 
 (styTi^. 
 
 V. OtStV flCV. 
 
 
 ciStvetVTetv, 
 
 ig. 
 
 V. ustv-scvrsi. 
 
 «VTfl6. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 M.andF. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 M.and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N . ivxctp'iq. 
 
 /. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 N. evX'^P'i'^Bi , 
 
 ira. 
 
 J. £V)CCtf^ — ircq. 
 
 
 svx^P'ire. 
 
 G. ivx^P — irav. 
 
 
 D. £vxc^f> — in. 
 
 
 
 D. BVXup 10-1, 
 
 
 A. ev^otp-trct&L iv, 
 
 /. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 A. evxoiP'irceg, 
 
 tret. 
 
 V, svxctp — /. 
 
 
 tVXCtp-lTolV. 
 
 vg. 
 
 V. evxccp-treg. 
 
 tru. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 M.andF. 
 
 N, 
 
 
 M.andF. 
 
 N. 
 
 :^. CC^CCKO'Vgy 
 
 V. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 N. u^cticp'vei , vq, 
 
 vcc. 
 
 G. u^oCKp — voq. 
 
 
 u^utcp-ye. 
 
 G. u^ccKp — var. 
 
 
 D. U^XKp Vt, 
 
 
 
 D. u^ufcp—vct. 
 
 
 A. etocc)cp-vV, 
 
 :;. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 A. u^oCKp-vei^y vq 
 
 Vci, 
 
 V, UOCCKp-V. 
 
 
 U^CiKp'VotV. 
 
 ovg.^ 
 
 V . OC^^UKp'VS? , 1/5 
 
 , t'^. 
 
 Sin^. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 M.and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 M.andF. 
 
 N.. 
 
 N. ^TT-OVq, 
 
 ovv. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 N. ^TT-oSes , 
 
 c^«. 
 
 G. hTT O^Oq, 
 
 
 ^ITT-oh. 
 
 G. ^/;r — o^<!yv. 
 
 
 D. ^i7r 0^1, 
 
 
 
 D. ^ITT—oG-t. 
 
 
 A. oiTs^'-od^a, & ot/v, 
 
 fiVV. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 A. hTT-O^U?, 
 
 oJcJ. 
 
 V. ^tTTtV^ k. OU, 
 
 ovv. 
 
 ^TT'O^OtV, 
 
 V. hTT^O^eq, 
 
 6^^. 
 
 ♦ After the subslantives of whicli they are compounded. Thus, atvocf- 
 iif, iiv ; G. 'Ovlof ; D. -ovli ; A. -ov7a, -«v. Contracted compounds of 
 nouns of the 2d Declension : thus, 2yv-«c, «v ; G -« ; 1). -« ; A. -«v ; V. 
 -», «v. In the same manner, those of /wvof ; as, eT/^vt;?, &c. 
 
Adjectives. 
 
 37 
 
 Sing. 
 M.andF. 
 
 O, evoo^ — ov» 
 D. ev^o^—oj. 
 A. £V<^o| — av. 
 
 og. 
 Dual. 
 N. M. F. andN. 
 
 N. A. V. fv^(,|-a;. 
 G. D. ev^o^-otv. 
 
 Plural. 
 M. andF. 
 
 G, £v<^(j| — av. 
 
 D. £vJo| 0<$. 
 
 A. £vJo|-(9t;$, 
 
 N. 
 
 Sing. 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. evye-ai, 
 
 G. ffyf a;. 
 
 D. evyc — (f). 
 A. evye — av. 
 
 Sing. 
 M.andF. 
 
 G. fltA»j^ fd$, 
 
 D. oc?^& £<, 
 
 A. etXrj6-Scc^ rjy 
 
 N. 
 
 N. 
 
 cog. 
 Dual. 
 M. F. and N. 
 
 N. A. V. ffyf-6/. 
 
 G. D. ivyt'cov. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 M. and F.N 
 
 Ǥ.; N. A. V. at>^6'U, r. 
 
 ei.\ 
 
 £$.! G. D. ct?\9}6-iotv, civ. 
 
 Plural. 
 M.andF. N. 
 N. evye — oj. 
 
 G. ft/yf Mv, 
 
 D. evye 6«j?, 
 
 A. ftiyg-^g, fi;. 
 
 V. fl/yf Cfj, 
 
 Plural. 
 M.andF. N. 
 N. x^$-e£<;, f75, ftft, ^. 
 G. uM^ — S6)v^ m. 
 D. ctXyjQ — eTi. 
 A. atA>?^-f«$, £<5, £flf, ^. 
 
 Sing. 
 M.andF. 
 
 N. y£/T-a>v, 
 G. y€tr — ovo$. 
 D. y£^r — ov/. 
 A. ye^r-ovaj, 
 V. yetr — o». 
 
 N. 
 
 Dual. Plural. 
 
 M. F. andN. I M. andF. 
 
 N. yf/T-oVfs, 
 
 N. A. V. yeiT'on. 
 '.' G. D. yf<r-oyo<v. 
 
 G. ySiT 0V6}}>. 
 
 D. yeir — aTi, 
 A. yf/r-ov(3i5, 
 V. ysir-Q]f£q^ 
 
 N. 
 
 
 *The Compounds of ?^»?, y?x«c, sometimes those of x«;a?, after the 3d 
 Declension. tTt'fl-gp-ft'f, ^v j G. -a7o? j D. -a?/ i A. -av*, <i)v. 
 
Adjectives, 
 
 Comparatives in cdv are declined like yetloj'^ 
 except in the accusative singular, and the nomin- 
 ative, accusative and vocative plural. 
 
 M. F. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. f^Sl^'CO)!, 
 D. f>C£l^-OVt, 
 
 A. futl!^-oVci f^si^'Otc futt^-aty 
 V. ftf/^-ov. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. jM-f/^-ovf. 
 
 G. D, f^it^'ovoty. 
 
 N. 
 
 l^iltov. 
 
 f^ei^'ov. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 f4f/^-(»V« fA,H(^'0C6 f^nt^'^s 
 
 f^eil^'Cveg (A.ii^-ot<i fut^-ov^, f^u^-cvu f^t^-ooc t^tit^-eo. 
 
 fA.ei^-omg l^si^'ocii f^etl^'H^, 
 f^ei^-ovei f^t^'oeg f^et^-Hg, 
 Some substantives are contracted like fjuit^-oi ; as, ATPdXXm^ 
 Ace, A7roX?^&>v», A^oAAo'a, A7r«AAflf, 
 
 Adjectives of two terminations are sometimes declined 
 with three by the Poets ; as, spijf^-og, -v, -av. There are a few 
 which commonly take a distinct termination in the feminine ; 
 e>S, Tf^-jjy, -iivcCy -«v. oKeavi-oq, -oc, -ov. 
 
 Compounds in 33$, and especially those \n ry,^, have only 
 one ending ; as, vs^eXijyepsTug, kc. In the JEolic and Doric 
 dialects, they end in ret ; as, n^ptMye^eroi, 
 
 Adjectives of one termination. 
 
 These are usually masculine and feminine ; very rarely 
 neuter. They end in, ;», ^, e-, |, ■;/', ecpc,^ 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 M. aail F. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 M. F. N. 1 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N 
 
 N. 'TToXvX^'i* 
 
 
 
 
 N. cT«jAt;^p-ve;, 
 
 var 
 
 Ct, 9roAi/i«j5 — vo$. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 A. V. 7roXvu(>-i£. 
 
 G. froXvstp — vofv. 
 
 
 1), TTOX'UCf.ri V;. 
 
 
 
 
 D . TTO XvUp O-i . 
 
 
 A. 'TTCAVciP — yx, 
 
 5. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 'XQXvoCp'VOlV. 
 
 A. 7roAftf6/)-v^5, 
 
 VJ«. 
 
 . -r.^Xvxor.. 
 
 
 
 
 V. 9r*At;ei*-v<:5, 
 
 Vi^. 
 
Comparison of Adjectives. 39 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 Comparison is made in rfjx)g, ra7og, or lov^ calo;. 
 
 I. The comparative and superlative are form- 
 ed by adding Ttpog and ra7ogto the positive ; as, 
 
 (.caxapj ^axap-lepogj f.taxo^'lalog. 
 anTiSg^ auTiSa-lspog^ a7t?M(y'la^og. 
 
 -o; drops $ ; as, uMxta^, f^uKpo-ypoq, t^x^po'lajoi ; and if the 
 penult is short, changes « into a ;* as, e-otpo^, G-o^a-lspo^^ <r3(pM- 
 
 When the penult is doubtful, i.e. either loni; or short, it 
 may have o or * ; as, tKctvoi, iKuvorepc^, iKctvorurcq, or tKccvampc^, 
 
 -sti is changed into f$ ; as, ^tcpiEi^, x<*pi(^'l^poi %f*^/fc--7«?o$. 
 
 -x^, -'/j^, and -t;?, add repa and retjo^ to the neuter, 
 
 evpvq, evpv-'Jepoi, evpv-lccjoi. 
 
 ui and -jjv to the nominative plural ; a<, 
 
 <ra)0pm^ (ra0p6)}itG--1<po^^ (r^(ppdiygO''']tt%i^ 
 rep7}v, TtpivsiT'lspo^, rf^£yfC--7<t7«f, 
 
 -| turns -t4 of the nominative plural into Krl(po<;,' Krlaloi ; as, 
 
 The Attics compare many adjectives by irrepc^, ic-rccra^ ; uir,- 
 pcq^ eiiruToi ; ttrrtpoq^ ic-Totrct; ; the last in common with th* 
 Ionics ; as, 
 
 II. Some adjectives have the comparison in 
 
 iidv and idlog ; as, rj^vg^ rihtov r.hialog. 
 
 * Else four short rowels would come together. To avoid ihret^ 
 Homer sometimes Igngt^ens a short one. 
 
40 Comparison of Adjectives, 
 
 1. Some adjectives in o$, derived from substantives, have 
 the comparison in tm and /o*?©?, formed from the original 
 word ; as, 
 
 xaAo^, (from XfisAAo5-f05,) x«(AA/6>v, KxX>ii(rlti. 
 
 sX^po^y (from f;>^^05 -f«5 .) ex^'^^9 f;^^/^-/©^. 
 
 otycjpoq^ (from oiKJog-ov.^ oi^litjV) eixlt^l^^' 
 
 uto-^po^y (from aifrxo^-soSi) uic^icov, eci<rx'<^loi' 
 
 f>Lctx.fiog, (from /M'Jjj&os-fa^,) ^CijKim, fJLviKt^loq. 
 So, fJLUpo^, (from the verb fjnoo, ob.) ftfio^v, f^sKrleg. 
 
 X€pr,s (ob,) X^'P^^^ Xi^Pi^'^^i- 
 
 Some adjectives in a have a double comparison ; as, 
 
 ?. Some adjectives in t;^ are compared in both ways ; as, 
 
 ^^''^^'' }^pAim, ^pccMo^, 
 
 The termination /«;», with the preceding consonant, is 
 '■iften changed into (rcrm, and by the Attics into rrm ; as, 
 
 ^ C Bpec^iav, 
 
 ^^"^^'^ l/px^^^, 
 
 I rAX^w,\ 
 
 (^^xrrav, A. 
 £>.ocxvi) fAac-c-a;v,J «Aflc;iiio*7«5. 
 
 \ ^ ^ ft'pcclicrlo;. 
 
 I KpetT^wVi A. J 
 
 »f«Ty$, 
 
 ♦ For <pi?^clipcc^ <^tx<f}ct%c. 
 
 t Trt;:t^»v became fi^pc^av by trani^position of the breathing; (Vide Me- 
 tathesis, pa.^e 7,) and thence Sjtc^^w. 
 :}: For iha'^icev, 
 
 § For '»x/av, from obsolete Vy?. 
 II For x?:*7/r.'^, changed into Jfc^ctf-^-av, and Wfssrcrav, and lengthened into 
 
Comparhon of Acljectrccs. 
 
 i^r/ccq, as from jttcyys, makes regularly /ttgy/ajv, .uey 0T35. By 
 the rule, f^eytav becomes f^zo-Tm^ and, changing c-s- into (^, (see 
 yjage 4,) ^^(Jdyv, which was lengthened into f^u?^Mv ; so, oA/yo5, 
 
 4. A letter is sometimes dropped in comparison ; as, 
 
 pcthci, pcciarty pocicrjo^y ) /> . » '^ y 'i 
 
 ^ \ f r, } lor pciidiu'i^ pc6idt(rlG5. 
 
 pctm pcc^lo^^ ^ '^ ^ 
 
 ^/A(j$, ^t>Jepo<, , 0/>i7fit7«$) for 0t^lipoi, (ptMlxlo^, 
 
 TccXxioiy 7rcc?<onlepoqy Tti^^culcijo^^ for 
 
 Gspcio^-) S!petl£po<;^ Oipstlulo^, for 
 
 Qspito^spo^j Gipsiolcclo^i 
 ^fiAt/5, vXitm and xAs^v, 7rA5;o*7«$, for 
 
 TTdAA/wv, ^oA/^os. 
 
 One is irregular in the comparitive ; 
 
 Comparisons from the Comparative Degree 
 
 x<siAA<a>y, 
 Aaj^a^v, 
 
 TrpoTspoi , 
 
 jCfltAA/fliTfPoj. 
 
 A^tT£^fl$. 
 
 fjuioTspot;, 
 TrpoTipcciTepoi . 
 
 
 
 ocoTepoVj 
 'r.iTepov, Ion. 
 ^^eip^'Tepov. 
 
 From the Super la live. 
 
 X^ipJf^lo?, X^ipi^l^'^^'^if J »vMog, KV^Q-lxToq ; gAie;::/o-7a$, fA/y,v<r;"5 
 
 jpo$ ; TTparos ^ 7rpaTtir,c^, 
 From Subsiaiitives, 
 
 ^6i^tX£Vi , ^XTlXivlipoq, ^XTiXevlocloq, 
 
 _ , <pMptP,tpc<iy <Pafp6lxlo^. 
 
 >t0xu.^t!g, Kpxf^clspcg, tcpxf^Qolocloi. 
 7rAi})cJt:g, 7rXijKlt<r'jepog, ttXtjkIitJx'Jgs. 
 'rclr.q^ To]tT]se!ig, TTollTjxles, 
 
 From a Pronoun. 
 
 tCVTtg, XVTo'Jxlc 
 
 ptyog, piyiav^ 
 Kspacg, xep^icav. 
 
 KViia)V, 
 
 oC'prg, xptav, 
 
 piyir^cg. 
 
 Upiiicx ' 
 
 From Verbs. 
 
 Afti", ;.<y/<*>v, Aa^o-'V, Aiyr^o^. 
 
 ^fflft', (psprcprq^ 
 
 
 " Others fjrm these comr^arisons from ^*Mf, r wearoru 
 
4-2 
 
 Nuimrals 
 
 From a Participle., 
 
 spp6oiA.tu^y ippMf^gnTJepoi^ ipp^/jLtsveOTeiroi, 
 
 From Adverbs, 
 
 KC&TCify 
 
 '^ocpo^ 
 
 xvarspa^, 
 y-ciTarspog, 
 upc^prepoq, 
 ev^oTepo^, 
 
 ET&fTspog, 
 B^UTipoq, 
 
 , TTecporep^g, 
 
 Cyreprspog, u? 
 Cdipo^, Co 
 
 TTporepO^, TT 
 
 ccvaTciloi. TrpoTco^ 
 y^rcoTo&loti. 
 ec^ocprotles. ' 
 
 es-aralos. Troppu, 
 TrctpoTocjoi, ez-v^/, 
 
 From Prepositii 
 rBprecro^^ by Syncope 
 
 oerotroi, Syn. TTpoctToq, 
 
 TTpoTMrepoi 
 { eyyvnpc^, 
 
 07r{c']ep6g, 
 
 7ropfaT£po<;, 
 
 Trpafiutrspe^y 
 
 , Trpoe-aretlog 
 tyyvTctlof)* 
 ByyKnoq, 
 
 TTOpp^fTocloi-, 
 
 Trpaixiroiloi 
 
 Cttccto^. 
 
 by Contract 
 
 
 NUME 
 
 RALS. 
 
 
 The Greeks used the letters of the alphabet to denote 
 numbers, taking « for one, / for ten, and p for a hundred. 
 But their letters being only twenty-four, they introduced 
 three other characters ; Vau, ^ 6 ; Cophe, ^J^ 90 ; San- 
 
 pi, ^> 900. Thousands were denoted by the same letters 
 Afith a -stroke under them ; as, a., 1000. 
 
 a, 1. 
 
 I, 10. 
 
 p, 100. 
 
 a,, 1000. 
 
 ta, 
 
 11. 
 
 3, 2. 
 
 X, 20. 
 
 <T, 200. 
 
 (3^, 2000. 
 
 ./?, 
 
 12. 
 
 y,3. 
 
 ?., 30. 
 
 T, 300. 
 
 y,, 3000. 
 
 ty> 
 
 13. 
 
 ^,4 
 
 fi,^0. 
 
 V, 4«0. 
 
 8,, 4^00. 
 
 i6, 
 
 14. 
 
 
 v, 50. 
 
 ^, 500. 
 
 f, 5000. 
 
 le, 
 
 15. 
 
 ?-, 6. 
 
 P, 60. 
 
 Z, 600. 
 
 5-^, 6000. 
 
 '5-. 
 
 16. 
 
 <, 7. 
 
 0, 70. 
 
 ^l^, 700. 
 
 t^, 7000. 
 
 ^r. 
 
 17. 
 
 r, 8. 
 
 7t,80. 
 
 u, 800. 
 
 ;?, 8000. 
 
 t)7, 
 
 18. 
 
 e, 9. 
 
 4,90. 
 
 ^, 900. 
 
 e, 9000. 
 
 id. 
 
 19. 
 
 1. When letters are used to denote numbers, an oblique 
 stroke is drawn over them ; as, <&', 1; /3', 2. 
 
 2. The first letter in the name of a number, was some- 
 times put for that number ; as, I for /«, from f^tu, one ; IT, 
 from TTsyTij five j D. from h^cuj ten j H, from HEKATON-. 
 
Kumcrals* 
 
 %^ 
 
 •ne hundred ; X, fromXiAia^, a thousand ; M, from Mvpiot^ ten 
 thousand. 
 
 Letters thus used, except n, may be placed together to the 
 amount of four, to express numbers ; as, IIII, 4 ; AAII, 22 ; 
 HH, 200 ; AAAA, 40 ; MMMM, 40,000. These letters, 
 when inclosed within a n, were multiplied by live, ^rsvre • as, 
 
 IaI 50. 
 
 3, Each letter may denote a number, according to its 
 place in the alphabet; as, ^, 1; /3, 2 ; y, 3 ; and so on to 
 &',24. 
 
 Cardinal Numbers, 
 
 8/C, 
 
 one. 
 
 /yo. 
 
 two. 
 
 T/5«f, 
 
 three. 
 
 T«a-Tat/!H, 
 
 four. 
 
 7rn% 
 
 five. 
 
 N*' 
 
 six. 
 
 iTrlAi 
 
 seven. 
 
 okJo), 
 
 eight. 
 
 svvist. 
 
 nine. 
 
 S'iKit, 
 
 ten. 
 
 hj^iKA, 
 
 eleven. 
 
 SvOoSiKAt 
 
 twelve. 
 
 J^iKoilpili , 
 
 thirteen. 
 
 •S'iKuliira-ApiS^ 
 
 fourteen. 
 
 ^MitTTivli^ 
 
 fifteen. 
 
 ^iiCAi'^t 
 
 sixteen. 
 
 ^iJCU'eTrldy 
 
 seventeen. 
 
 (^iKsLOKlcD, 
 
 eighteen. 
 
 (^iKASVViX, 
 
 nineteen. 
 
 UKoa-i, 
 
 twenty. 
 
 UK07t iU, &C. 
 
 twenty-one, &c. 
 
 rptxy-ovlsti 
 
 thirty. 
 
 TSS-TxfiAK'ivlit, 
 
 forty. 
 
 -TrtvliKovlu,, 
 
 fifty. 
 
 i^MKCvlit, 
 
 sixty. 
 
 fiJ'o/unKovla,, 
 
 seventy. 
 
 oy^onKOvldi^ 
 
 eighty. 
 
 iVViVHKOvloL, 
 
 ninety. 
 
 hsijov, 
 
 a hundred. 
 
 S'tomoTi-ci, .eti, -tt 
 
 , two hundred. 
 
 ;^A/-o/, -A/, -at 
 
 a thousand. 
 
 fxupi-a^ -5t/, -at 
 
 ten thousand. 
 
 hi'jC]o/Ju}cto-/uvpi.Qi^ 
 
 > a million. 
 
 Ordinal Numbers. 
 
 nluplo?^ 
 Tpia-KxiS^iKctlo?^ 
 
 first. 
 
 second. 
 
 third. 
 
 fourth. 
 
 fifth. 
 
 sixth. 
 
 seventh. 
 
 eighth. 
 
 ninth. 
 
 tenth. 
 
 eleventh. 
 
 twelfth. 
 
 thirteenth. 
 
 -3-5-ae/3f3-jt:t;crjx,a7o?, fou r teenth 
 
 7rivl?}tcU(f?Kxlog, fifteenth. 
 
 t^K:it<^iiC3t.h;, sixteenth. 
 
 ecr7aMt3t/cr?;c3t7cf, seventeenth. 
 
 OKlux.u.tS'iKiihc, eighteenth. 
 
 ivvixKoLiS-cKxlcct nineteenth. 
 
 UKCTlcg, twentieth. 
 UKo/Ioc, Tpufiloc^Scc. twenty-first, Sec. 
 
 rpictx.oa-lQc, thirtieth, 
 Tgy3-5t/S3tX5cr7of, 
 
 «J«X05-75?, 
 
 iVVtViDCOTlii , 
 «Cjt72<7-7c?, 
 
 ;)^eAtoTlagy 
 
 fortieth. 
 
 fiftieth. 
 
 sixtieth. 
 
 seventieth. 
 
 eightieth. 
 
 nintieth. 
 
 a hundredth. 
 
 two hundredth. 
 
 a thousandth. 
 
 ten thousandth. 
 
 > a laillionlh. 
 
44 
 
 JSumtrats* 
 
 All the CKruiaal numbers, from rsc-rxfisf, four, to 'skscjcv, a 
 hundred, are undeclined : all above a hundred are declined ; 
 as, ^tocyiac-i'oi, -xij -u, two hundred. 
 
 All ordinal numbers are adjectives of three endings, and 
 regularly declined, like x^A-a?, -;f , -av, or i«|i-a5) -*&» -«v. 
 
 Examples of the Declension of etg, one ; hvo, two ; 
 rpag, three ; tsaaapecy four. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Sing. 
 M. F. N. 
 
 h'og^ uuxg^ivogj 
 ivLy iita^ ivL. 
 
 Dual 
 
 ' M. R N. 
 fiyjSeigj UYj^suta^ ^yjSev^ &c. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 ^; 1^.0 and 5i^,t g;^^^^^ 
 
 |-v* y bvoiv and Svslv, 
 
 D. Svat^ 
 ' A. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 M. k F. N. 
 N. rpetg, rpa, 
 G. tptovj 
 D. rpcat^ 
 A. Tpftg, rpia. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 M. F. and N. 
 N. recaapegj rsaaapa. 
 G. reaaapcjVj 
 1). Tscrcrapa't. 
 A. reaaofOLg^ reaaapa. 
 
 1 . Ovc'eis and ft»^«5 are sometimes resolved into their coriip©- 
 nent parts, for the sake of greater strength ; as, a^' '"i^^' Vy«; 
 
 *f>ihn;^^Sivxg; jumS'tvic^ ju-nSivu.;^ f/.>iSiTi^ <i;c. sometimes occur. — From 
 « c, one, is formed 'srfpsf, /Ae o//ier (of two ;) and iVom i^Sn;, ,uiiJ'^5j 
 aJ'irrfios^ fx,»^iripo;^ neither (of two,) by rejecting c as well as /. 
 
 t ouo is .^iometiaies an indeclinable ; Od. ''-. 515 ; lb. v, 407. 
 
Pronouns. 
 
 4o 
 
 .^v 5r<jy?raT£ m^pcoTrm K^xrti&svrei, having been overpowered by 
 not one of those who then lived. Xen. Hel. V. 41. 
 
 2. Instead of J'wd and ^votv, Homer often uses htot, ^oicv<;^ 
 ^oioi^y derived from hoio<;. 
 
 3. Whe'n two numbers are united, the least is commonly 
 placed first with koli between them ; as, -prare xuthx-u ; if the 
 larger precede, the icoti is omitted ; as, hKXTn^Ti, When 
 three numbers are united, the largest are placed first, with 
 TCui between them ; as, nat; Ikoctov kou eiKo(ri Kut tfcru 
 
 Oktu and fvvft* are rarely or never thus united with other 
 numbers, as in Latin duodeviginti is 18, so in Greek, (using 
 a participle of the verb ho) s^aTtXtvTi ^voiv ^eoyru, reo^upocKcvrec 
 BTicc, he reigned 38 years. 
 
 4. In expressinj?: a mixed number whose fractional part was 
 1-2 (as 6 1-2) an ordinal, next greater than the whole number, 
 was prefixed in the singular to the coin, weight, &,c. with yj/iii 
 between them; as, i&^cf^v i}fAnoc?Mvrov, 6 1-2 talents; rpirov 
 rjf^i^pccxf^v, 2 1-2 drachmae. When the cardinal number 
 was prefixed in the plural, the sense was different ; as, t^/cc 
 ^f^rcc^MVTot, three half talents, or a talent and a half. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Pronouns are divided into — 
 
 1. Personal. 
 eyco, I ; 
 GVj thou ; 
 oi;,* of him. 
 
 2. Possessive. 
 6'fiog^rijov^ my; 
 GogyCe^aovj thy ; 
 og, or i-og^ >7, ov^ his ; 
 
 z'. i'rfp-og, a, ov^ our, of 
 
 ys two ; 
 o^oirsp'Og^ a, ovj your, 
 
 0/ i/cu two ; 
 V/Ucvfp-og, a, ov^ our ; 
 ■t».:^f7fcp-o^j a, Qv^ your ; 
 G^-og,ri,ov^ Ithei 
 a(p8l6p'0gj a, ov^ } 
 
 eir. 
 
 * In prose this pronoun is commonly used by the Attic writers in a 
 reciprocal sense. 
 
4G 
 
 -^roJiGum. 
 
 3. Relative. 
 
 0^5 yij, 6, who ; 
 avl-oq^ri^ o? he, she, it. 
 
 4. Demonstrative. 
 
 £)tHV'Oq^ Yl^ Oj that ; 
 ovlog^ 'avlyij ^oirto^ this. 
 
 5. Reciprocal. 
 FuavloVy of myself ; 
 
 asavlov^ of thyself; 
 eavlov^ of himself ; 
 a?.Xyi?udv^ of one another. 
 
 6. Indefmite. 
 
 ^^6$, rf, any ; 
 Setva^ some one. 
 
 Sing. 
 iN. eyoy 
 G. s/jjov or fiov^ 
 D. f^t or itioc, 
 A. e^ or iis. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. av^ 
 G. aovy 
 D. (yo(, 
 A. (Te, 
 
 G. 01'. 
 D. 6ij 
 
 A.i. 
 
 Sing.^ 
 
 N. 6g, V, ^, 
 . oy, 97$. 01^5 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. 
 
 V6)t, VQ, 
 
 A. 
 
 6v, »?»', 0. 
 
 G. D. VMV, vov. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. cr^t, 04*^^, 
 G. D. a^Mv, o^v. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. a<prx, a^Sf 
 G, D. ff^oiv, a<piv. 
 Dual. 
 N. A. o, 'a, o, 
 G. D. 6iv, 'div, 6iv, 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 'riuag. 
 Plur. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. a^etg, 
 G. a^iiVj 
 D. a^udij 
 A. <3pag^ 
 
 N. 6u m. ''a, 
 
 Vj. C/r, OJ/, 6>?/. 
 
 D. otc, "^atc, otg, 
 A. ovg, 'ag, ^oc> 
 
 ♦ Tf« is sometimes an ioterrogative. 
 
Pronouns. 
 
 47 
 
 avloc, and sxeTvog are declined like 6$, r^ 6» 
 
 ovlog^ 'avlyj, tovt'o, is compounded of the article 
 6 and avlog. It is declined, and prefixes r, like 
 the article ; thus : 
 
 
 Shig. 
 
 
 N. ovlog, 
 
 'ar7>;, 
 
 rovro, 
 
 G. rovloVf 
 
 rai;7>7$, 
 
 rovlavy 
 
 D. roi'76), 
 
 raD7p, 
 
 rovlcoy 
 
 A. rovrov^ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 rODTO. 
 
 N. A. Tov7(j, 
 
 Tar7a, 
 
 rovlof 
 
 G. D. rovloLv^ 
 
 ravlaivy 
 Plural. 
 
 rovloiv^ 
 
 N. 6ij7o£, 
 
 'avlaiy 
 
 ravla^ 
 
 G. rovloVf 
 
 ravluvy 
 
 roi'jcjr, 
 
 D. TotTotg, 
 
 ravlaigj 
 
 rovlotg, 
 
 A. rovlovgf 
 
 ravlag. 
 
 ravla. 
 
 1. In the same manner are declined rojarog, T»?A<x«r«$, and 
 
 2. In the Attic writers, the demonstratives ovrog and fxf/w5 
 often assume t, to indicate more forcibly ; as, ovroa-t^ ttvlvji^ 
 
 • G. Tovjav'h rotvjr.Ti^ &,c. u and o are dropped before the ^; as, 
 Tdurt for rovro'i'j Bxeivi for eKstvoi, 
 
 From the Personal Pronouns and avlog are 
 compounded"^ euavlovy aeavlov^ mvlov. 
 
 * Homer never uses these reciprocals, but f.-ws ttvlov^ a-i a^'Jlcr^ and 
 i Aulcv or aty7»y, &c. 
 
 They have no nominative, because a reciprocity c/f action is exerted 
 on the as:ent;. 
 
 aulov IS often found by Crasis for Iscvlov^ and ^xi'lcu for cr«^y7«;'. It m 
 used by ihc Attics in the three Persons. 
 
Pronouns. 
 
 N. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 G. iavla, iavlrig, savin, 
 D. iavla, iavlf,, iavla, 
 A. iavlov, iavl'/iv, iavlo. 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ^ ^ 
 
 G. iavluv^ iavluVf iavluv, 
 D. iavlocgy iavlacg^ savloig^ 
 A. eavlsg^ tavlag^ iavla 
 
 Plural. 
 
 D. aTJkYfk'Oig^ -atg, -otg, 
 A. a/l/l>7/l-»g, -ag, -a. 
 
 In like manner are declined ef^^ecvrn and a-ectura, in the szn- 
 gular Number only. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. rtg, rt, 
 G. rn^og, 
 
 D. TiVLy 
 
 A. r^z^a, rt. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. nve, 
 G. D. tiVQiv. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 G. riVQVf 
 D. TtCTt, 
 
 A. tLvag, Hiva^^ 
 
 1. The Attics use m for t/v,>5, rw for nvi^ and tav for rtvu. 
 
 2. r/$, as an interrogative, has the responsive o<rTi(i ; as, 
 r/5 rii"/6 £7rom<re ; Who did this ? «y» of<5.« >7f5, i know not who. 
 
 3. Anciently, there was another interrogative pronoun, 
 viz. 9rd55 ^J?, ^«j inhere ? or m what place ? and its responsive, 
 o7ro5, 95r;j, otto, there, or zn that place. They are now used as 
 adverbs, in the genitive and dative singular only. From 
 them are formed, in the comparative, Trorcp-ec;, -u, -ov, 
 which one (of two'?) and its responsive oTroUrtQc, From 
 them also are derived many adjectives and adverbs now in 
 use.j 
 
 * o>- and T/; are often joined, and signify whoever; thus, oa-lt^j'^ri;, 
 
 t Among the pronouns are ranked the gentile adjectives, derived 
 from ^x'r?<^ov. the soilj and a substantive pronoun ; viz. V-^&Tat^-c? -», -ci/^ 
 
Pronouns. 4*^ 
 
 Sing. 
 N. 6, Ti^ 'to, Setva,'* or Secg* 
 G. Ttf, T>7g, w, htivcLjOQj or &£i^oc. 
 D. TO, 'Tyj, TO, fetrart, or 5ttr(. 
 A. rov, rYiv^i:o^ heiva. 
 
 ^f/y« is sometimes undeclined. Aris. Thes. 62:^. 
 
 of our country or people ; vfA.i^cL'Tr.aq^ .>», -sv, of your counlnj or people ; 
 ^rctTjt^-ofj ->>, -cv, of what country or people- 
 
 From the neuter of the article, relative o?, interrogative ;rfl?, and its 
 responsive orog^ are derived otlier adjectives much in use ; as, 
 
 Article. Relative. 
 
 ra, the, .0, 'which. 
 
 Tology of the kind, _ olcg, of rn'hich kind, 
 
 Too-o^^ of the number. oc-o^, of which number, 
 
 r>)?itKO(i^ of the size. r?^i>co^, of which size. 
 
 Interrogative. Responsive. 
 
 ^ro, what, oxo, that, 
 
 '^ou^y of what kind, oTroios^of that kind. 
 
 vro(rcg, of what number, ottocg^, of that number, 
 
 ^v^iy^o^, of what size. o7njXtice(;y of that size. 
 
 From these and ovrcs are derived to/mto?, Totxurn^ to;«tc, of this hind; 
 TCO-8T0?, of this number; T-ffKinaTag^ of this size, 
 
 * As to ^uvA^ which grammarians have considered as an indc/jnite pro- 
 noun, it is not to be found without the article before it ; as, o Sitc^ which 
 is a contraction of o J* ug^ this or that one ; cu $<- £fc, make ««^fi/?, no ont. 
 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 And thus, 
 
 Tov oe evogy 
 
 TO) ^c £P/, 
 
 Tov 0£ evcc. 
 
 contr. 
 
 m hlvoi ; 
 
 rat ^etvi ; 
 
 Tdv ^eivcc. 
 
 Indeed, o Suvit, is in use, for ^ <^6 sv* j but then the accusative ha'is gov- 
 erned by >/i>w understood. Moor. 
 
50 Verbid. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 Verbs are Active, Neuter, Deponent. 
 
 Active Verbs may be divided into Transitive and Intran- 
 sitive. An Active-transitive verb denotes an action which 
 passes from the agent on to some object ; as, rvTrra rov luctv- 
 yjjy, I beat John. An Active-intransitive verb denotes an ac- 
 tion which has no eft'ect on any thing beyond the agent him- 
 self ; as, "iTTTTofi rpsxsi. the horse runs. What are commonly 
 called Neuter verbs are really intransitive s, because the ef- 
 fect is confined within the object. Those only, which de- 
 note a mere state of existence without action, as, to be, &c. 
 are properly Neuter ; though the name is more commonly 
 applied to all intransitive verbs. 
 
 Active transitive verbs have three voices : 
 
 The Active, which denotes an action that passes from an 
 agent on to an object ; as, rvsrlc^ rov eiv$papr^v, I beat the 
 man. 
 
 The Middle, which denotes reflected action, or what an 
 agent does to himself, or in his own concerns ; as, rvzrlofuti, 
 1 beat myself ; uov(roiT6ott v^op, to draw water for oneself 
 
 The Passive, which denotes the receiving of an action from 
 some agent ; as, rvzyjofjuti, I am beaten, (sc. c;^« tivq^,, by 
 aome one.) 
 
 Neuter verbs have generally the form of the Active, 
 though tenses are often taken from the middle, or passive, 
 with one uniform intransitive signification ; as, &nfryji), 6vy,^of^oct, 
 to die. 
 
 Deponent verbs have the form of the middle, with some- 
 tenses taken from the passive, and a neuter or active meanings 
 as, hxi^dsei,io receive ; yivofMi, to be^ 
 
 Deponent verbs are, probably, in most instances, the midr 
 die voice of obsolete active verbs. As the action which they 
 denote terminates within the agent, they are intransitive ; 
 and are commonly rendered into Latin and English by Neu- 
 ter verbs. 
 
Verbs. 51 
 
 On the Middle Voice. 
 
 There are many words in every language, which denote 
 peculiarly what we do to ourselves, or for ourselves Such 
 in English are the words, to receive, accept, hire ; to sit, which 
 is, to seat oneself ; to lie, which is, to lay oneself do'wn ; to 
 rise, which is, to raise oneself \ip. Such words have, in Eng- 
 lish, no peculiar form, and do not, therefore, demand a sepa- 
 rate discussion. But in Greek, they diflfer inform, as well 
 as in meaning. These are called Middle verbs, or are said 
 to he in the middle voice, 
 
 Mi'T&otv, in the active, signilies to let ; f^iT^oofJutt, in the mid- 
 dle, signifies, to procure that another let to oneself ; i. e. to 
 hire ; and in this instance the English verb to hire, has no 
 less the middle signification than the Greek f4.i(r6oof^:ci. 
 
 Kvxiv^ttv Tjjv cipccfouv is, to roll the ball ; in the middle, rj c^x- 
 tpec>cv><iv^elut, the bail rolls itself, or simply, the ball rolls ; in 
 the passive, r^ a-cpui^ct KvXuhlui, i\\Q, ball is rolled. 
 The Middle Voice denotes, 
 
 1. Operation on ourselves, external ; as, (pvXotrjefrQut, to 
 guard oneself, or beware — Collectanea, Graeca Minora, page 
 60 ;* rpxTreo-dxi, to turn oneself, page 36 ; fA.if>LiKrdui ^ to make 
 oneself like, 63 ; 'TrupotG-Kevcct^eo-Qcii, to prepare oneself, ^Q ; 
 vpoKetTccK>^tvs<r6xf, to seat oneself above, 40 ; <pxtvicrdut, to show 
 oneself, to appear, 68 ; xaaruo-Soti. to wash oneself, to bathe. 
 Isrlavcth active, is, to set up ; W'Joc^Qui, to set up oneself, or to 
 stand ; sTnicx^s^eTSxt, to seat oneself, 13. 
 
 2. Operation on ourselves, internal ; as, (po^eUcStii, to make 
 oneself afraid, to fear; from (^otefo^, to terrify, 37. xvzs-eiT- 
 6a.(, to afflict oneself, to mourn ; from xvzrga, to afflict, 10^ 
 12, 43. sni^ta is to persuade ; Tssiko-Qsct, to persuade oneself, 
 to beheve, to trust, to obe}^ 
 
 3. Operation oi-Amixed natitre; as, aTrc^icdocf, to restrain one- 
 self, to abstain, 71. (tzs-uXXitr]cT&c&i, to take themselves over, 
 to revolt, 58. iva>x^l,r6cct , to feast themselves, 55. Kot/^icG-eat, to 
 cause themselves to sleep, to sleep ; from xo/^ica;, to cause to 
 sleep, 16, 107. ^fcftTAfxottfv&v, bindinj^ themselves about, 
 
 ♦For the sake of the younger student, examples are taken from the 
 Collectanea G rosea Minora, second American edition ; a book in the 
 hands of every one. 
 
^^ Vefbs, 
 
 17. e7raiLQfxf^7}V^ I bound myself by an oath, 35. Mu^u<s-$ai 
 'riyjyih to give oneself to learn an art, to learn an art. 
 
 II. The middle denotes what we do for ourselves, xveiv 
 rnoi is, to release any one ; but when Chryses is said to come, 
 Avc-tfw-fvo? rjjv ^vyci'l^cc, it is for the gratification of his parental 
 feelings. 
 
 TToXifA^ov Toir^cr^ii is, to make war ; TToXi/utov TroivG-oce-Soct, to make 
 war in self defence. 
 
 Af|«^t5v,.$, choosing for yourself, 12, 31 ; ovc&iy^T^v, I should make 
 gain to myself, 32 ; upv^T-x/nsvoi, drawing for oneself, 38 ; 
 etico^of^ilTdxi^ to build for oneself, 41 ; uiieltr^oti, to ask for one- 
 self, 66 ; rtf^ec}p7jo-cicr0cii, to avenge oneself, 6 ; K^i^pcvofMv Kccnt- 
 ;»fAo/7rcfc, I have left myself an heir, 29 ; xeut^g^v, to bear or 
 take ; K6y.i^£T0ui, to take to oneself, to receive, kc. 
 
 To this class may be referred many verbs of washing, 
 dressing, &c. A woman puts on, or looses her girdle, the 
 verb is middle : she puts the girdle on to another, the active 
 is used. A man washes his own hands, the middle is used : 
 his servant washes them, the active. 
 
 III. The middle is used to express what we do within or 
 among ourselves ; as, KccTTjpidf^Tjo-co , you was counting up with 
 yourself, 43 ; TrotsHa-Sat, to make between them, 12 ; evsifjLavloy 
 they divided between themselves ^ XQyi(ra>[A.ttcc^ let us have a 
 reckoning between ourselves, 43. 
 
 Verbs of contending, disputing, fighting, &c. have gener- 
 ally a reference to both parties, and are therefore put in the 
 middle ; as, fnu^e'^^'^ui, pugnare inter se. When the active of 
 these verbs is used, the reference is to one of the parties ; 
 as, TToAf^f/v, to make an attack. 
 
 Instances where the action terminates rvithin oneself. o<JVd, 
 I know to myself, or am conscious. Trtzs-ovOcc, I sufier. ukU' 
 cdy^oiti I shall hear. u-zosXeifXpc^ I am perishing. 
 
 In most instances where the action terminates entirely 
 within oneself, the sense of the middle differs very little from 
 that of the active, oia^os. differs very little from etar,x,o:. Hence, 
 in these cases, one of the tenses is commonly dropped, oi^cc 
 is commonly used ; gihix,u^ rarely ; but n^ViMiv or r^^n^i is al- 
 
yerbs. 53 
 
 ways used, and not the pluperfect middle.*^ In the same 
 manner, Tre-zs-ovBa is commonly used, Trs-ss-adifxa^ rarely, ccxr^Kaa 
 more than T^KHy^-A, ocjcu^oyJsci more than oiKH^rn), 
 
 IV. The middle is used to denote that which we cause t© 
 be done for us ; as, Ks:pscT$(zt, to get onself shaved. £yyoc<psr$ut, 
 to get onself enrolled, xpiiroa is, to lend ; xp^^e^^^^^^ to pro- 
 cure something to be lent to oneself, to borrow, to use. 
 
 The active has sometimes the signification of the middle, 
 the reciprocals E^ttceWov, csecvlov, Lc. being understood ; as^ 
 4t]uvx(, (supp. tfJLocuJov ) to present myself, 55. 
 
 The passive has sometimes the signification of the middle, 
 especially in the aorists ; as, (py,yu,i. to appear ; sxpv^Tj, he hid 
 himself, 8, 16; aAActys/;;;, you change yourself, 52; sKoif^ti&vrav, 
 they slept, 72. In such instances, the person indicated by 
 the nominative case, is likewise the cause of the action ; so 
 that he is at once the agent and the person acted upon, or, 
 in other words, he acts on himself. £<pxv>}, was showed, i. e. 
 by himself. aAAetyer/rj, you were changed, i. e. by yourself, 
 or, you changed yourself. exa/ft;;^;j5-«v, were made to sleep 
 by themselves, i e. they went to sleep, or slept. 
 
 The passive has likewise sometimes the significjition of 
 the active, and the active that of the passive ; especially in 
 the perfect and aorists, among the Attics ; as, ecc^aKei, had 
 bjen taken ; yipctrh^^ you loved ; ^Tfss-o'jytt^va^, he who made. 
 
 It may be aslied, whether the peculiar meaning of every 
 middle verb can be pointed out, on th ? principles here stated ? 
 It is frankly answered. No. Nor ought this to be expected. 
 
 I. The original signification of many worda has been en- 
 tirely lost in the flux of language. In middle verbs derived 
 from such words, we cannot expect to trace their meaning. 
 Every one, who has engaged, to any extent, in the inquiry, 
 must have remarked, that as he approached nearer to the 
 original meaning of the verb, the reciprocal sense of the 
 middle voice became more apparent. 
 
 ♦ Nothins; v/as niorerommoa with the Greeks, than to unite, in tlw 
 way, tenses from different verbs, or different parts of the same verb, t« 
 icako L*n a verbj in ufc. 
 
 ■6* 
 
54 yerbs. 
 
 2. It would be surprising, if, in the constant fluctuations 
 of language, no middle verb had lost its peculiar sense. ^ A 
 change of this kind takes place in every language. How 
 DQany are the verbs, both in English and Latin, which are 
 either active or neuter ? Yet this is no reason for denying 
 the distinction between active and neuter verbs. Nor should 
 the anonialies of the middle voice be a reason for rejecting 
 its peculiar meaning. They are not, perhaps, more nume- 
 rous than can be found in the Latin or English verb ; and 
 would be still fewer, could we ascertain the original signifi- 
 cation of the words. 
 
 3Iooch. 
 
 The moods are five ; bidiccUive^ imperative, op- 
 tative, subjunctive, and infinitive. 
 
 The indicative declares, or asks questions , as, ivzrrcjj I 
 strike, rn szromTs-^ who did it ? 
 
 The imperative commands, exhorts, and entreats ; as, 
 ypx'Ps, write ; ^o? yu>i, grant me. 
 
 The optative is sa^d to express a wish or desire. It seems 
 tD be nearly superiluous, for a wish maybe conveyed by 
 other moods besides the optative ; and the optative is often 
 used to convey the meaning of the subjunctive, or potential. 
 
 The subjunctive represents a thing under a condition, sup- 
 position, &c. and is preceded by a conjunction, expressed 
 or understood, and attended by another verb ; as, ov yctp 
 U7S-£(rlsi>iS &so(; tqV y/ov avlns:? rov KOtrjUGV, hoc KpivTi rov KOTfMV.^ For 
 Ood sent not his Son into the world, to condemn the world. 
 
 The infinitive simply expresses the signitication of the 
 rerb without limitation to person or number ; as, ypsiPsiv, to 
 write. 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 There are nine tenses ; the present, imperfect, 
 ilie first and second aorists, and first and second 
 
 ♦The later Greek writers, such as Plutarch, Elian, Herodianus, Heli- 
 odorus, fcc. sometimes depart from the ancient use of the middle verb, 
 ^n established by the oldest and best writers, Kiukr, 
 
futures, the perfect, pluperfect, and the paulo- 
 post future, which belongs only to the passive. 
 
 The indicative, optative, and infinitive moods, have all the 
 tejises. The subjunctive and imperative want the futures ; 
 though the subjunctive seems to have, sometimes, a first fu- 
 ture ; as, KepS'TjdijTCJvlccty 1 Pet. iii. 1. tcccv&yiTcafA^i ^ 1 Cor. 
 xiii. 3. 
 
 It has been thought by some, that what is called the first 
 aorist subjunctive, is really the first future. What seems to 
 favour this opinion is, that this tense is formed from the first 
 future indicative, and not the first aorist, wnen those tenses 
 differ in characteristic. Thus, 0?>7u in the subjunctive is 
 formed, not from ehy-cc, but from 6-i)Ta, first future ; ^o)Tcj, sub- 
 junctive, from ^eora^ first future, and not e^aKo.^ first aorist. 
 
 The second aorist subjunctive is thouglit likewise to be 
 more properly called the second future. 
 
 On the Sigf lift cat ion of the Tenses, 
 
 Time is naturally divided into past, present, and future.* An 
 action performed in either of these periods, may be repre- 
 sented as taking place definitely or indefinitely. Definitely, 
 as, ypci(^a, I am writing ; indefinitely, yfct(pa, I write ; tfiioi. 
 Tpiyji^ animals run. Definitely, as, ytypcc^u.^ I have been 
 writing ; indefinitely, £ypu.'>j^cc^ I wrote. Definitely, as, 
 TBTv^of^xi, I shall be immediately beaten ; rr^-t^^y, I shall beat. 
 An action may likewise be represented as complete or in- 
 complete, Foxpej, I write, or am writing, denotes that the ac- 
 tion is performing, and therefore not completed. But the 
 moment the writing is finished, I ma^^ say ysypocpa, I have been 
 writing ; which denotes, 1st, t'lat the action is completed and 
 for this reason the tense is called the perfect ; 2cl, that the 
 action is past, and hence the tense is called the preter-perfeci- 
 and 3d, that the action is just nozv, or very lately compliited. 
 In this last circumstance lies the difference between this 
 tense and the aorists. typ^i-^^y., I wrote, expresses an action 
 completed in past time, indifrJie, ysypupoc, I have beeu 
 writing expresses an action completed in past time, definite, oy 
 past time intimately connected with the present. The nJa^ 
 
perfect, eysyf^a/psiv^ I had written, expresses an action com- 
 pleted in past time, prior to another past time. 
 
 An action performed in past time may likewise be repre- 
 sented as incomplete, or imperfect. eypu<pov^ I was writing, 
 expresses an action continued for a time, but not brought to a 
 complete close. It has been called, not improperly, the pre- 
 sent anterior, as expressing an action presefit to a past time. 
 
 It remains to state more particularly, under each of the 
 tenses, their several uses. 
 
 The present tense is used to express an action in present 
 time, definitely or indefinitely; as, yp^c^a, I am writing, or, 
 I write. It is likewise used to express general truths ; as, 
 ^^oc rpfX^iy animals run. 
 
 The present is often used in narration for the past ; the 
 reader being transported back, in imagination, to the scene ; 
 as, 'EvpiTy^st ov]oi Trpuloi rov oc^eX(pov ro)t ihov Xtf-tma, Kyj Myzi civla^ 
 He ^Tstjindeih his own brother Simon, and saith unto him — . 
 
 The imperfect \s> used to express an action in past time, as 
 continued, but not completed ; as, eypcc(poy, I was writing. The 
 Greeks gave it the name of TrapailxltKo^, extended, and describ- 
 iid it as " the extended and incomplete part of the past." t^-uk; 
 azrlcc, a boy was roasting : tcvofv Kpatq <pepMV Tsrolc^^a^ ^i emotive j a 
 dog bearing meat was passing a river. 
 
 It is often necessary to render the imperfect and aorists into 
 English, by the same word ; as, ««/M.f/Co^£vo5 ^£ Trjv ^sviav o ccfrliKOi^ 
 £/$ cctIv TdV up^potiov ey^Of^f^fy, y.M siq ccvopoq evzs-opH 7rccpe?ict,u.<^civBV 
 eiy^ov, " The city mouse, returning the hospitality, carried the 
 country mouse to the city, and received him at the honse of 
 a rich man." Here the imperfects eKo,'A.((^sv and Traps ^ccu.^uv£v, 
 are rendered by the indefinites carried and received, and differ 
 from the aorists only by denoting the coniinuance of the 
 action. 
 
 The imperfect is used, from its expressing the continuance 
 of an action, to denote that which is customary ; as, <5 iV5ro;io- 
 
 ;^e>$ Tov i77-Z!rov ilpiQi KUt fx?£V/^t Traa-ccg r^inspac^, The grOOm kept 
 
 rubbing the horse every day. 
 
 Tlie perfect is used to denote an action as completed in past 
 time, definite ; as, yiyt>oi/pA, I have been writing. It has a 
 close connection with the present, and it is iiiis which'makes 
 it 'definitev 
 
Verbs. 57 
 
 The perfect is sometimes used to express past and present 
 .line united; as, xAi;^< /M.£f, Apyvpolo'^' o<; Xpvcrrjv ufA/piQsQn^ai,, 
 (fear me, God of the silver how, who hast been arid art 
 ■he guardian of Chryses. ovy. oi^sc, I know not, a7id have not 
 ■ nown. Clarke calls the tense thus used, the perfect present. 
 
 The pluperfect is used to express an action as completed in 
 past time, prior to another past time ; as, eyey-pxipsiv, I had 
 uritten. 
 
 The pluperfect is supposed to convey, sometimes, the idea 
 of time passing swiftly ; as, x-iro^e^r.xei, he was gone speedily. 
 
 When the peifect is used to denote ^rese?^^ time, the plu- 
 perfect has the s<^nse of the imperfect ; as, h^oty.cc^ I am 
 afraid ; e^e^otHstv, I was afraid. 
 
 The aorists are used to express an action as completed in 
 past iimeyindejiriite ; as, sypa-^cc, I wrote. They are, how- 
 ever, sometimes used to denote, indeterminately, what is 
 commonly or airways true ; as, ru^ t^wv <puv^a>v a-vvrjSetoc^ «Xtyoi 
 Xpo^'^i ^^fAt/ff-f, A short time commonly dissolves ihe connections 
 of the wicked. 2v ei o yic^ /«.« o ccytc^'/^joi, ev 'a> evhyczo-sc, Thou 
 artmyhcloved Son, in whom I am alzi:ays woli pleased, or, 
 in whom I was, am, and alwa^ys shall be well pleased. 
 
 The aorists are commonly the tenses of narration. 
 
 The futures are used to express that vvhich shall he ; as, 
 ypui^a;, I shall write. 
 
 No difference in sense can he discovered hetween the first 
 and second aorists ; and indeed few verbs have both tenses in 
 use. The same is true of the two futures. 
 
 The signification of the tenses, in thflkindicative mood, has 
 been given. The observations apply, generally, to the re- 
 maining moods, and to the participles. In many instances, 
 however, in Greek, as in English, the tenses in the other 
 moods swerve fronji their proper signification, and the time 
 is to be determined by the nature and drift of , the sentence. 
 The present of the imperative, as, ypxi^e, denotes write, be 
 writing ; or refers to the commencement of the action, begin 
 writing, Tb.e anrist, ypcc\ov, dencies indcfmitel^s '^nVe at 
 any lime. The perfect enjoins a thing to be done prior to a 
 specified time ; as, ysypu^e, have ihls written, before my re- 
 ture. 
 
58 Verbs, — Active Voice, 
 
 Characteristics. 
 
 The Characteristic is the letter which imme- 
 diately precedes o, or o^iac of the present tense. 
 In 7t7, %7, uv, the former letter is the characteristic. 
 The letter before cd in the future, and a in the 
 perfect, is also the characteristic of each of those 
 tenses respectively. 
 
 The characteristic of any tense is the letter next preceding 
 the termination ; or it is the last letter which suffers no varia- 
 tion in a tense. 
 
 CONJUGATION- 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, I strike. 
 
 S. rvnlidf rvnletg, tvnleu 
 D. * rvnltlov, tvTtlslov.'f 
 P. rv7i]Gi.tBV9 rvnlele^ rv7tIovai.X 
 
 Imperfect, / rvas sirilmiy. 
 
 S. srvnlov, ervTtlsgj etimle. 
 
 D. erimhlov, srvnlelyjv. 
 
 P. erimmieVf etvnlelc, srvnlov. 
 
 ♦Tenses whose first person plural end «» in juiv^ have no first pt^rsou 
 duf'.l. These are, ail tenses ol' the active, the aorists of the passive, 
 and the perfect and pluperfect of the middle voices. 
 
 t In all the voicef:, the third person dual is like the second^ in those 
 tenses of the indicative, v/hichhave not the augncient ; and in the suh- 
 junctive. In those which have the augment, and in the optative, it ends 
 
 in «v. 
 
 X In the active voic^, the third person plural ends in o-t^ in those tenses 
 i>f the indicative, which have not the augment ; and iii the subjunctive. 
 In those which have the augment, and in the intperatiye, it ends ia av. 
 In the optjitiye, in ^v. 
 
Verbs* — Active Voice. 59 
 
 First Future, / shall strike. 
 
 S. rin//(j, ru^'fig, TV^^H.^ 
 D. nv^sloVi tv^elov. 
 
 P. rv^o^Vy rv4^e]ef rvylovau 
 
 First Aorist, I struck. 
 
 S. srv^a, ervyloig, fti;-^? . 
 
 D. erv^^alov, etv^PalriVy 
 
 Perfect, J have struck. 
 
 S. relv<pa, Telvcpag, relv((>E, 
 
 D. relv(paloVj relv(palov. 
 
 P. relv^uevy "tslvcpaley relu^paGc 
 
 Pluperfect, I had struck. 
 
 S. etelv^Eiv, erslvrpcLg^ e^telv^ei. 
 
 D. erelvipeilQVy Erelv^etjrjv. 
 
 P. erelvipccusv, erslvcpetle, erelv^Ecaar. 
 
 Second Aorist, I struck. 
 S. erimovy ervnegy ervTte. 
 D. etimelov, erimelyiv. 
 
 V. ervTtojxeVy ervTZcl^y ervrtov. 
 
 Second Future, I shall strike. 
 
 S. rvrtQy rvTteigy rvnei. 
 
 D. ^vTtcirovy rvTtelrov. 
 
 P. rvTiSuEV, rvTCEitey rvniau 
 
 IMPCRATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, Strike. 
 
 S. rvrtlSf rvnltlo. 
 
 D. rvnlsloVf tvnlElcdv, 
 
 p. TVTtJElEyTVTtlEloaav. 
 
 * This teniae, in liquid verijs and in tho Attic aad Doric Dialects^ 
 is the eamewitli the second future. 
 
GO Verbs, — Active Voice. 
 
 First Aorist J Strike. 
 
 P. "tv^oLle, rD\^a7tocrar. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, Have struck. 
 
 s. 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 
 
 Second Aorist, Strike, 
 
 S. 
 
 rv7t£. rvTtalu, 
 
 D. 
 
 rvTttlGv, rvTteldv. 
 
 P. 
 
 tvTtslef rvTteloaav. 
 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, / mai/ be strikiny, 
 
 S. rvTtloiiit, tvTcloigf rvTtloL, 
 
 D. rvTiloilov, tvnloiJyjv. 
 
 P. tv7t]oiiiSP9 tvTtloiJe, rvnlotev- 
 
 First Future, / may strike. 
 D. rtv^OiloVf rvyl^Oijyiv. 
 
 First Aorist, I may have struck. 
 
 S. rv^Latui, "tv-^acg, rv^ai, 
 D. rvxl^ailovy "rvi^tlriv. 
 
 P. rv^atuev, 7ri;\i/at7f, rv^atev, 
 
 ^olic First Aorist,* / may have struck. 
 
 S. rv^l^eta, "tv^l'stag, rvibBte. 
 
 D. rvi^staloVf tvi^sialy^v. 
 
 P. rv^^uaixev, rv^l^£ialSf ii'v^etav. 
 
 * The. if.olic forni of this tense is freguenUy used, particularly by thr 
 '. lies,. 
 
Verbs. — Active Voice. 01 
 
 Perfect arid Pluperfect, I may have been striking. 
 
 S. telv(pOL[iL9 relvfpotgy relvcpot. 
 
 D. relv(poLlov, relvf^oilyiv, 
 
 P. telv^oi^Vy rtlv^otley relv^oiev. 
 
 Second Aorist, / may have struck. 
 
 S. rVTtOlULf tVTtOtgy TVTtOt. 
 
 D. rvTtoilov, tvnoClriv. 
 
 P. rvTtoLiiev, rvnoile, rvnotev. 
 
 Second Future, / may strike. 
 S. rvnoifiij rvTtotgy rvnol. 
 D. rvTtoiroVy rvmlry^v. 
 
 P. rvTtoltieVy rvTtoite, rvTXoiev. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, 1 should strike. 
 S. rvnlid, rvnlYig, rimlip. 
 
 D. rvnlyiloVf rvnlyjlov. 
 
 P. rimlcd^tev, rvnlyjle, rvnluat. 
 
 First Aorist, / should have struck. 
 
 S. tvy^df tvylnpg^ rv^. 
 
 D. rv^loVf tV}lo{Jov. 
 
 P. nn^Ld^ev^ Tv^ls, tv^l^ac. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, I should have been strikiny. 
 
 S. relv^Oy relv^Yig, relv^, 
 D. relv^yjloVy tclv^lov. 
 
 P. relv^o^ev, relv^ley relv^oai. 
 
 Second Aorist, / should have struck. 
 
 S. rvTUdy Tvnrig^ T-v7tYi* 
 D. rvTtrilov^ rvTtypov. 
 
 P. rVTtCd^lSV, rVTtYjlSf Ti;7t6XT6.* 
 
 * In the English eypression of the tenses, much precision is not to be 
 expected. Their use and signification depend on the conjunctions and 
 particles, to which they are joined. 
 
 7 
 
62 Verbs* — Active Voice. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, rvntecVf to strike.^ 
 First Future, rv^l^6LV, to be going to strike. 
 First Aorist, rtv^ai^ to have struck. 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, tslv^svah to have been 
 
 striking;. 
 Second Aorist, rvjteiv, to have struck. 
 Second Future, rvrcelv, to be going to strike, 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, Striking. 
 N. inmluv, rvTilovaa, tvrtlov. 
 G. rvnloplogy rvTtlovayjc, timlovlog, &c. 
 
 First Future, Going to strike. 
 
 G. rv^l^vlogf rv^'ovayjg, tv-ii^ovlog. 
 First Aorist, Having struck. 
 
 G. tv^avlog^ tv^aOYig^ ^v^avlog. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, TI7?o has been striking. 
 
 N. "telv^agy relvipvlay ti:lv^og. 
 G. rslvtpolog^ relv^vtagy relv(polog. 
 
 Second Aorist, Having struck, 
 
 N. rvTdJv, rvTWvaa, rvnov. 
 G. tvTtoi'log, rvnova^/jgy tVTtovlog. 
 
 Second Future, Going to strike. 
 
 S. rVTtQVy '^VTtHCfa^ rvTtbv. 
 
 G. rvnisi^logf rvnSayjg, rvnSvlog. 
 
 * The termination 2/y was originally fiiMsvit^ ; ^s, rwrJ-M, Tajr/J-i^ivotf, 
 which was retained by the Ionics. The Dorics shortened it into «^.8v ; 
 a«, rv^li'fy.iy ; h,y droppiflj ^, it became rv^h-n^ which was contracted 
 
 info t:'jp-7:-/v. 
 
Verbs. — Reduplication and Augments. 
 
 G3 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES IN THE ACTIVE 
 VOICE. 
 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 Optat. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Part. 
 
 Present 
 
 TVTrl-CO ) 
 
 TVTrl-^ 
 
 TVTrl-OtfAl 
 
 rvTvl-oo 
 
 TW^7-S/V 
 
 tut/J-w, 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 let Future 
 
 rvi-co 
 
 
 Tv\>-Gl(J.t 
 
 
 Tf^-g/V 
 
 TV-^-m 
 
 1st Aorist 
 
 irv-^-n 
 
 iTV-^-OV 
 
 ^u^-ctif/.t 
 
 Ty^-w 
 
 Tt/^-at/ 
 
 rv-t-^^ 
 
 Perfect 
 P'u}>erfect 
 
 
 rilv<p.2 
 
 <Tilv<^.OtfJ.t 
 
 Tilv^.oo 
 
 rilu^ evM'Tilv^.ag 
 
 2d Aorist 
 
 irUTT^CV 
 
 rVTT-S 
 
 tUTr-UfX I 
 
 TVTT-a 
 
 Tvr.itv :<TV7r-aiv 
 
 2d Future 
 
 rvTT-Z 
 
 
 TUTT-Olf^l 
 
 
 rUTT-UV 
 
 rvTT-^y 
 
 On the Reduplication and A ugments. 
 
 Verbs are increased in the beginning by redu- 
 plication and augment.*" 
 
 Reduplication* 
 Three tenses, the perfect, pluperfect, and pau- 
 lo-post future, have the reduplication, which is 
 retained through all the moods; as, Te-Ti;4)a, te- 
 rv^Sy te'Tv^oi^L, te-rv^y &c. 
 
 Rule I. If the verb begins with a consonant, 
 prefix it, with e for the reduplication ; as, 
 
 * There is a marked distinction between the increase of the perfect, 
 and that of the imperfect and aoriets. The first is found in ali the moods, 
 and even in the participle ; the other, onlj in the indicative. The in- 
 crease of the perfect is generally formed by prefixing the first letter of 
 the verb witli 2 : it has hence been called the reduplication. The name 
 is not entirely accurate; for this increase is not always a reduplication. 
 It is, however, used here for want of a better; and by the redvplicaiiGn 
 is meruit the increase oi^ prefix of the perfect. II has been thought ad- 
 vantageous to treat of this increase separatefy from the augments ^sy\\2i' 
 %\c and temporal, both because it is distinguished from them by its fixed 
 nature, continuing throu,?h all the moods, ^though it is sometimes the 
 same with them m form ;) and likewise, because the chief difficulty with 
 the young student is to determine, not the increase or prefix of the im- 
 perfect and aoristj but of the perfect. 
 
64 Verbs. — Reduplication and Augmentii. 
 
 Exception I. When the first letter is a rough mute, change 
 it into its cognate smooth one ;* as, ^va^ re-Svicot, for CsSvtcoc ; 
 ^oQsof, 7re-(p6^}jKx, for (pe^o^ijKoc. But p changes places with e, 
 in the reduplication ; as, fecj; epfevtccc, for fefevj&oi. 
 
 2, When the verb begins with a double consonant, two sin- 
 gle ones, of which the second is not a liquid, or yv, prefix on- 
 ly £ ;t as, ^6CC!)i s^^y-ct; -^-asAA^;, e'^aX'Kci] z^viputvci)^ e^ytpocyKcx.) yvoupit^u^ 
 syvAfpixoc', a-lsXXa^ iO-lotXy^oc 5 also ypy^ycDpea, eypijyotpijKet, 
 
 3. A few verbs beginning with two mutes prefix the first ; 
 
 as, ySluou.oe.1, KSKlijf^ui ; ttIoco^ 7riZ!r']a)K» ', 'Trlvj^'^'a^ TriZTiTjJCct, This 
 
 happens because the verbs were contracted from Kelocof/^ut, 
 ^. The following prefix the first letter, or not. 
 
 /3flt»Af^&>, ^iQovXzvyccc^ or e^ovXi'Jx.oc. 
 
 (i?itzx£va}, ^sQXocicsVitot^ Or iQ^oLy^BVyca, 
 
 yXv<pcOy ytyXv^PoL^ or eyXv^oc, 
 
 y>^6f1i^tit^ y£y>iCjltx,oc, or eyXuliicoL, 
 
 Kpv-sr]6f, >c£Kpv(poi, or SKpVipU. 
 
 Rule II. If the verb begins with 'a vowel or 
 diphthong, a and e are changed into>7, and o into 
 cjj according to the rules for the temporal aug- 
 ment; as, a&j, j^pra; oveiSi^o, QveiSixa; "atpeco, ^Yipy^xa. 
 
 Augments. 
 There are two augments ; the syllahicX when 
 the verb begins with a consonant ; the temporal^ 
 when it begins with the vowels a, e, o, or the 
 diphthongs au, at, oi. 
 
 * For the reason of this change, gee Rule ii. page 5. 
 
 t The first letter of the verb is dropped, in these instances, to avoid 
 an unpleasant sound ; such as, -^s-latAK^t, yiy\c»}fMct, 
 
 X The syllabic is so called because it adds a syllable to the word ; the 
 temporal, because it increases the tirm or quantity of the syllable. 
 
\^^^^y THE ";^^ 
 Verbs.— AugmeiS^ JyJ J Y ^H S^^ " 
 
 Four tenseSj the imperfect, p^^^^fec^'iMt^V 
 aorists, receive the augment, Avhic!^*lH)lon^%al^'^^ 
 to the indicative mood * 
 
 The syllabic augment is e prefixed to the aug- 
 mented tenses ; as, rvusluy e-tvo^lov, e-rv^a, s-rvutov, 
 
 p in the beginning of a word is doubled ; as, 
 The Poets, however, do not always double /> ; as, spiz^ov. 
 
 The temporal augment lengthens a and e into 
 >7, and into o ; as, 
 
 a, a5cj, yj^ov, au, ai'^ax'a), y;v^avov. 
 
 €9 e?.6vdo, yi?^vOov. 0, opvaaco, cjpvaaov. 
 at, aipcd, ^por.f 0L9 OLXi^idj qxl^ov^X 
 
 The remaining vowels and diphthongs admit no augment ; 
 
 as, t}ccc(!^a^ iKct^Oi, 
 
 Exception 1. Compounds of o/vej, oima^^ ota^, omit the 
 augment ; as, otfil^^, <5;y;^ov ; oivo^sco, otvo^Eov ;§ oivo-sroXsc^, oiwurc- 
 
 Four beginning with a ; a^, otia^ eir,6i(rTa\ cf.r,^i^QiMcti, Also, 
 
 The augment seems to be omitted, in these instances, to 
 avoid an unpleasant succession of long vowels. 
 
 2. Many verbs beginning with e are augmented by length- 
 ening £ into £1 ] as, £&i^w, e/^/^ov. 
 
 * A few instances nvay be found, in which the augment i? continued 
 through all the moods ; as, etviu^'/Buvett^ for nvot^Quvat, 
 
 t Here <* U lengthened into *>, and t subscribed, 
 if Here ois lengthened into *, and t subscribed. 
 5 mc;^iov is used. 
 11 These six sometimes admit the augments 
 
 7* 
 
* '^ Verbs, — Augm eiits. 
 
 £CC&}, 
 
 fA«a>, 
 
 spzsrco. 
 
 K^i 
 
 iXa^ 
 
 SpVCtl, 
 
 Bet^^, 
 
 ezrcf^LOti, 
 
 etrli^zaj 
 
 £&M, 
 
 e^o),'^ 
 
 WllOiCO. 
 
 eXia-c&f, 
 
 epyci^of4.sit, 
 
 ^X'^y 
 
 fAxf^y, 
 
 spea, 
 
 1^, 
 
 Om^c^, 
 
 £p-2!r(^(i}, 
 
 ea, t to go. 
 
 tXy^vu, 
 
 ep-srvt^a. 
 
 
 3. Verbs in eo augment the second vowel, o, into a ; as, 
 icplx^a^ eajploil^cv. Sometimes however ; is inserted, etopra^oy, 
 
 Hulejor the Pluperfect. 
 
 When the perfect begins with a vowel, the 
 pluperfect receives no additional augment ; as, 
 pecdf sppepxay sppevKStv^ not yjppevxsiv. 
 
 But b}^ exception 3, eo^i^x makes £c<,><7reiv; sopya, ec^fpysivy 
 
 Exceptions by the Attic Dialect, 
 
 1. The syllabic f is changed into «; ; as, ^^^y^xa^ '^m.£XMv, 
 
 2. The diphthongs et and eu are augmented ; as, suetl^co, 
 r.KCi(^cv; st^i^KSiv, Sync, sihtv, Att. rthiv. 
 
 3. The temporal is resolved in ea ; as, uXo&j, suMjKa, for 
 
 4. In some verbs, the syllabic augment is prefixed to the 
 temporal ; as, uv^uvm^ yjvaccvov^ sJ^v^avov, eiKco^ oiy^ccy eoiKa* 
 
 This prelix is made to tenses beginning with j;, o, ^, si, ot. 
 ■ \nd a, 
 
 "6. In verbs beginning with a. short, e, or o, the two first 
 letters of the present are prefixed to the perfect ;J as, cckUm, 
 5JK0X, my-'-i^iCQct,. 
 
 When the perfect, thus augmented, has more than three 
 ^syllables, the third is shortened ; as, <»-?if;^o;, 7iXsi<pci^ uX-'^Xi^pct, 
 
 *i'Tira> retains the augment in all the moeds. 
 
 t In ihe perfect middle is uu^ pluperfect am, Atfic yuv, 
 
 t A " sometimes to the second Aori^t ; as. ciyv^ ^^-yov ; Att. c^ynycv : 
 
 l)y:vI;:i.^thesis, «>it>cv. 
 
Verbs* — Augments* Ql 
 
 But ccyetp&^, spalocu^ and epsi^^, retain the long syllable ; as, 
 e^ytiyepy-'X, eP?:pMi7jK6t. 
 
 The pluperfect of the Attic form admits of a temporal aug- 
 ment J as, ccX'V?^y-ec, JjA-?jAs»f/v. Except e^7]?^v$etv, 
 
 6. The reduplications Ag and f^e are changed into ei ; as, 
 Ajj^a;, M>T,(pa,^ A. fiA^^as ; f/.eipof4.xi, £tf*>ccpf^^( , 
 
 Exceptions by the Ionic Dialect. 
 
 1. The second aorist and other tenses have a reduplication, 
 like the perfect, which continues through all the moods ; as, 
 sKotfJuav ; lonic, Kexoc.tiov^ Kexccf^te^ &C. 
 
 2. The augment and reduplication are entirely omitted ^ 
 as, exux^c-oc, Kot>^7oc ; thhySlo^ htcjo. In the pluperfect, one is 
 sometimes omitied, and the other retained ; as, hS^UKeicxv, for 
 
 3. After the augment is removed from the aorists, the two 
 first letters of the present are sometimes prefixed ; as, cciom ; 
 2d Aor. Tipov ; I. apov, up-xpav. 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 I. Verbs compounded with a preposition, take 
 the reduplication and augment between the pre- 
 position and the verb ; as, 7tpoaS£()?iyjxay TtpoaeSa?.- 
 ^w, from 7tpo(76a/l/l6). 
 
 1 . gj6 in composition becomes f| before a vowel ; as, tKcuX- 
 Xco^e^B^oi>X>.cy. 
 
 2. f» and c-ov, which lose v before a consonant, resume it 
 before a vowel ; as, f^.ttsv^y, tnfJLivcv. 
 
 Exception 1, Compound verbs of the same signification 
 with their simples, and tliose whose simples are not in use, 
 take the reduplication and augment in the beginning ; as, 
 etf^tsvvvf^t, Tsf^iEWVf/^r.v; y.uGe^ofA.cit^ iKet6i(!^cfA.'o\ af^ir^rpisa}^ r,f^(Pia-Qn^ 
 
 ls6v, from cti^<pi and <r?7fl£w, obsolete. To these ^ddccf^zrsxoj^xi, 
 
 and uy.TTt^xofA.xi* ' 
 
G8 Verbs. — Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice, 
 
 2. Some verbs have the augment and reduplication in the 
 beginning or middle ; as, u)fl4o>iEa, -^HiQoXsoy, or (tvliQoXeov, so 
 iyyvuco, cc0ti]/^(. 
 
 3. Some in the beginning and middle ; as, evox^ea, i]y6}X><sov^ 
 Tiva^y^TiKoc ; «vfi/7ft>-has it in the beginning, middle, or both. 
 
 RULE. 
 
 Prepositions in composition lose their final 
 vowel, if the simple verb begins with a vowel ; 
 as, e-cScx^, for exsiej(p ; except ts'^pt and tspo, and 
 sometimes au(pL, 
 
 1. If the simple begins with an aspirate, the preceding 
 -mooth mute of the preposition is changed into its cognate 
 rough one ; as, oc<pst,tp£af, from uthto and uipea."^ 
 
 2. ^ in the beginning of the simple is doubled, after ^ 
 vowel; as, ^lotpfea, from ^ic<,?indfs6>. 
 
 II. Verbs compounded with other parts of 
 speech, take the augment and reduplication in 
 the beginning ; as, <pi?.o(jo^£coy £q)t/{oao^sov^ ne^iTj)' 
 
 When ^vg and ev precede a mutable vowel or diphthong, 
 the augment and reduplication are between the particle 
 and verb ; as, ^vTupKriea, ^u^ijpKrlecv, When they precede an 
 immutable vowel, or consonant, the augment and reduplica- 
 tion are in the beginning ; as, ^vTJv^ea), e^oG-lv^sov ; ^va-oTsce, 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 The imperfect is formed from the present, by 
 changing o into oi;, and prefixing the augment ; 
 
 as, 'tvTtjUj elvnlov ; Qvo^ eOvov. 
 
 •■ Vide rule iii. page 5. 
 
Verbs, — Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice, G9 
 
 Firsl Future, 
 The first future is formed by inserting a before 
 6) of the present, dropping r, 5, Q^ a, ^,* if they 
 precede ; Rs^runroj (rvn-Gid) tvypa; ypa^o^ (yp^^- 
 
 In liquidX verbs a is not inserted; the penult of 
 the present is merely shortened ; as, tpatvcoj (pavu. 
 
 The long penult of the present is shortened by dropping 
 the latter of two vowels or consonants ; as, 
 
 -\2 T ^^ f , ~ ? dropping A. 
 
 It is probable, from analogy, that the liquid verbs once 
 formed their first future regularly, in cu, like the others ; 
 and that the «• was afterwards dropped to avoid the harsh 
 sound of the liquids when joined with o-. What renders this 
 more proble is, that the ^Eolics, who delighted in harsh 
 sounds, used the ^ ; as, rex^a, rfAa;, iEol. tjAs-^. 
 
 1. Most verbs in g-to/ and <^co have |(a» in the future : as if 
 from yof. 
 
 TrpccTca, TTpu^a^ as from Trpuyof. 
 6pvTTCii, opv^eo^ cpvyoj. 
 
 Thirteen in t^ca have either (ra or ^u ; viz. upsrct^ca, ctjt^a;, 
 Mu^a, vvclct^o)^ epcTs-ccl^M^pcepf^spt^a, Qa^a, fyyvu?,t^»y jiovKo^^io^cj, 
 
 K?ixi^M, and some others, have yl^y; as, xAa^a), tcXxy^u, as 
 from y.X(Ayya, 
 
 2. Polys} llables in tla often drop r of the first future, and 
 circumflex the last syllable ; as, vo/^^^o;, vof«./o-a;, voy.iiw. 
 
 * By Rule iv. p. 5. 
 
 tThe learner should recollect that 4 andf are merely substituted for 
 
 ^c, /5?j <pi and «?, >?, x'^' 
 
 t Liquid Verbs are those which have the liquids a, (jl. y, p. in their 
 terminatioD. 
 
70 Verbs. — Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice, 
 
 This belong's properly lo the Attics ; who likewise remove o- from fu- 
 tures in cto-o)^ «!?•* and os-o, contracting the termination; as, »5tA«a, ;tAA.5craj 
 A« xstAw : o/uocro) ; o/mZ. 
 
 3. Four verbs, which had lost the rough breathing in the 
 present,"^ resume it in the future. 
 
 f;^<y, from £%&>, has s^a, 
 rv^u)^ ^v(pa)^ has ^v-^ct), 
 
 Tp£(p6}^ $p£(pat', has ^ps-^a. 
 rpexo), 6psX^, has &psla. 
 
 Verbs in acj, fo, and oo, lengthen the short 
 vowel before era) of the future. 
 
 a and e into ri. tcuoiOj tifir^ao ; ^tXfcOj ^ikriaQ. 
 into Q. Syj2.ou^ (S^/Ujcro. 
 
 Exception 1. ocj retains o in primitives, which are few ; 
 
 as, upo^y ccpcTco, 
 
 2. otco retains ct after f, /, and A or p pure ; as, 
 
 Also, oLitpiLc/AAi^-Ao-ouctt \ and verbs from which other verbs in avv-jm or 
 dt!r«.a9 are formed ; as, Trslxoi^f S'pxa). 
 
 3. Words of two syllables in aa, which do not pass into 
 -}^f^) retain «. 
 
 xA06^, xAflfcc^j;, because it is never KA5?^-^ 
 
 c73-ec£&, cr-STccTa, never csrrtfJLl, 
 
 Likewise, ^^^v^;, ^^<565-a;,' though <p&vi{jLt is used. 
 
 1. The following have either » or ct. ctf>u.ofxAt.^ etxottoo^ etvutec^ afcto}^ 
 iXuct^^ KVdice^ tcps/uao), fj-y/CAW^ /lAOipsiOjueit^ TTsXetce^ Truvuao^ Trupitco^ Tripcteo, 
 
 2. A few in «a liave i(ru> ; as, rsAgft), TtKio-ee , and some, ^^^aor i^u ; as, 
 
 ttiViO}^ aJ\'i)TCO or ettVi7U:. 
 
 3. Some dissyllables in i<'> form their futures in ft^^-a ; as, wAsa, ^Ast/o-a; 
 also^A/ft) makes iiAv<roo^ and ahxice^ ii?.a.'j<r6o ; from obsolete presents inst'ft) 
 and oLva\ 
 
 * Because two syllables do net begin successively with an aspirate, 
 -ce rule ii. page 5. 
 
 r 'i'he same with TrijA^ie, 
 
J Verbs, — Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice. 71 
 
 First Aorisl. 
 The first aorist is formed from the first future, 
 by changing u into a, and prefixing the augment ; 
 
 aSj rv^l/cJy £Tv\l>a. 
 
 The penult of this tense is usually long. Hence, in li- 
 quid verbs, the short penult of the first future is lengthened; 
 ec into J2, i into ft ; as, 'v//66AAa?, -^xXa, e-^tjXoe, ;* cleXa^ etrleiXa, 
 vsf^a, astf4,(z. 
 
 1. The following aorists do not retain the characteristic of 
 the future : e/arac, vsveyicot, z^ux-ol, sBrjKx, r^jcoc. The two first 
 take it from the present : the remainder from the perfect, 
 and are rarely found out of the indicative. 
 
 2. Some verbs drop the c- ; as, 
 
 y^scff, K£icif, eK£i<7x, iyceiu* \ Z''^^ ex.^vj'u, i e^svoc and 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 The perfect is formed from the first future, by 
 prefixing the reduplication, and changing '\/^a) into 
 ^a ; ^cj into ya ; cj and a.j into xa ; and /tao into 
 ^lYixa ; as, Tfa/^cj, rervcpa : ts^cj^ reie^r^xa. 
 
 1. Words of two syllables in Xoo, v<»>, po)- change t into «, be- 
 fore x^ of the perfect ; as, o-JexS, £a-]o(,x-y.x, t£v», rslx-y^Uy ^tts- 
 
 2. Words of two syllables in stvof, tv6j, vm, drop v before 
 x.ec ; as, retvo}, Tfytw, r£]oe.Kx. ; y-ptvio, y.pt\£, xey-piKoi ; 6vV6j, 6vy£, hQvksh* 
 Lxcept «?f /V(y, »/gv6/, SicluyKU, ; TrAt^viy, 9rAt^v<y, Tn'^Xvyy^.a;,, 
 
 3. Some suffer syncope ; as, 
 
 So, h^si^jKec, h^Lt'^y.x, I rs]ef^yjKoi, rslf^r^Xot. 
 K£KUf>ttiy.oc, y^cKf^ijKei, I (leQccX'Ky-oe.y (ie^Mf^cc. 
 
 4. In many verbs of two syllables, the Attics change e into 
 
 • ; as, (r]p£!p6f, £tJoo(Poc, 
 
 * The Attics retain at ; as, i^ax^. 
 
72 Verbs, — Formation oj tin J L,i^t^i, tike Active Voice, 
 
 5. The clH\racteri8lic of the perfect is properly x.cc annex- 
 ed to the present ; as, Xvot^ M?^vKot,. Bui for ease in pronun- 
 ciation, /3x, TTHy are changed into the eorrespondin*^ rou<!;h 
 mute (p ; K l)eini:; little else than a breathing ; as, rpt^u, rel- 
 
 yK Kit, and x^^ i''^^^ X > ^'^^ Afy*', XiMy-KX, X^Mx^ i ^rAfxiw, 
 TFtzrXex'itet^ TreTur^^eXu. 
 
 » before k becomes y ;* i»7«y»* for eKJecvKx, 
 
 6. The perfect in m-^kx is derived from a verb in io, form- 
 <'d ironi the future in jic* ; as, r^^^i^, rf/tcta;, rfltf^nKccy 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 The pliipcrfoct is formed from the perfect by 
 chan<5*mg a into eiv^ and i)refjxing the augment, 
 if the |)erfect begins with a consonant ; as^rtJi'^, 
 ilelvcpinr. 
 
 When the j^erfect begins with a vowel, no 
 augment is [)refixed ; as, eoj^a/lxa, e\j/a/lxt6i'. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 The second aorist is formed from the present 
 by changing o into ov and prefixing the aug- 
 ment ; as, /Uycj, eT^c-yov. 
 
 The penult df this tense is in many cases shortened. 
 
 1. In conaonants^ by droping; t, and the latter of two liquids j 
 
 '.'. In voiveh^ by chan*j;in^ »?, <y, ai, and xv into u ; as, a>}j8a;, 
 
 ^ij^.ov ;t and dropping the first vowel of tt, and cv, as, mittco, 
 
 \iiFov ; ^ft;v«'' cv^tT*"* ^^'**^ before a liquid, ei is changed into 
 
 , in dissyllables ; as, CTrupa^ ea-TrxPov ; into s in polysyllables ; 
 
 . s, uys^pcj syipov. 
 
 lndiss;yll.ibles, c before or after a liquid, is changed into 
 
 u ; as, 7cXi>tu>i f7rA;<Koy.| 
 
 • Sec rulo V. page 6. 
 f^K)\99M has sometimes iHst^a. 
 
Virhs.^—Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice. 7S 
 Verbs in £«<«, and euj change these terminations into ov ; as, 
 
 ^VKCCAf, EfJLVMV* 
 
 Verbs in a-o-u and ^6;, whose future is in ^<w, have their second 
 
 aorist in yav ; as, isr^dyoi from 'Jt^tcrcroi ; also zor^vyt^ and £>//!/- 
 v«v from o-fAvxu, and -^vy^u. Verbs in ^a/, whose future is in 
 rruy have their second aorist in Jdv ; as, t<pp»^oy. Of the latter 
 very few have this tense. 
 
 1. The penult of this tense is necessarily long, in dis- 
 syllables, which take the temporal augment ; as, uyoif, »jyov. 
 So also where the penult is long by position ; as, 6uXzrM^ 
 iGotXTFoi, But in many of these, a transposition takes place, 
 to f)reserve the analogy : thus, TrtpOco makes, in poetry, #9r- 
 fu^v ; h^Kco^ ehotKov. A resolution or reduplication produces 
 the same effect : thus, >jj\)v is made ic«^ov, j»yov, uyetydv. 
 
 2. In /3A<«7r7A>, Ku^vsrlat, and KpvTrlai the characteristic n- is 
 changed into its cognate /3 ; as, tQxcc^ov, &ic. 
 
 TT is changed into the cognate ^ in the following words : 
 
 «v ; usrlcif^ f^<pov ; pi'^lct'y tipi^oi ; ^pva-lcj, t^pv(pQV ; ^;;zr<w, eloe/pov ; 
 
 3. The following have no second aorists : Polysyllables 
 in ^a; and (tc-a* ; Verbs in ao* and «(V after a vowel ; Verbs, 
 in o» ; Polysyllables in «t/<w, cua^, •t;A>,* v<w, vtu ; and many 
 others. 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 The second future is formed from the second 
 aorist, by changing ov into o circumflexed, and 
 casting off' the augment ; as, elvtsov^ nvjiui. 
 
 * «'cfl«y is poetic. 
 
 8 
 
74 Verbs. — Passive Foiee, 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE, 
 
 INDICATIVE JIOOD. 
 
 Present, I am struck, 
 
 S. tvxslofiai^ rvzslip* tvxjflelai, 
 
 D. 'tvzslo^Qovy rvtisleadcrv^ rv^leadov* 
 
 P. rvzslofieday rvtsleadey tvxslovJat* 
 
 Imperfect, / was in the situatioiij or custom^ of 
 being struck. 
 S. 6rvxslo(iyjVf ervcslov, etvtislelo. 
 D. ervtslofj^OoVf ervtslaGdov^ erv^lsodriv. 
 P. ervtsloiieda, erircsleadej erircslovlo. 
 
 Perfect, / have been struck. 
 
 S. nelviifjuiiy reJin/^ai, relvzslat. 
 
 D. relvfiiiedov, rslv^dovt relv^dov. 
 
 P. relv^tfiEda^ relv^de, relvizfcsvoL etac.'f 
 
 * The regular formation of this person was originally in to-at : thus, 
 tvoT'C/uaLt^ scA/, «7a/. The lonians, who delighted in a concourse of 
 vowels, dropped the o-, and made it TVfo/Iisn, The Attics, on the con- 
 trary, who loved contractions, shortened it into ti/^7j>. This form was 
 found the most convenient ; hence it was adopted in the common lan- 
 guage of Greece. 
 
 The Attic contraction was sometimes «/, which distinguished the ia- 
 dicative from the yuhjunctive mood. 
 
 Some verhs retain the original form ; thus, <^!i.yofA.cit makes ^Ayio-dit, 
 Thus also is formed the passive of verbs in f^t : la-loL/ustti /V/a-^ot/ ; t/9s- 
 
 The same observation applies to the other tenses : thus, in the im- 
 perfectj 5Tt/'t!r7«<ro became 27u'©'7€o, and was afterwards contracted into 
 
 ilu-tiflzu, 
 
 t The third person plural is formed from the third person singular, by 
 inserting v before Tdii\ as> Kotpnctt^ Kucpivrsu. But when a consonant 
 comes before Tat, trie insertion of v would produce a most inharmonious 
 sound. Henceap*jriphrasis is formed by the addition of the verhs/^^ to 
 the perfect participle : thus, tilufA.fxmi ua-t^ for ^ih^^Ui. So pluperfect, 
 
Verbs. — Passive Voice. lo 
 
 Pluperfect, / had been struck. 
 
 S. si^elvf/uriV^ etelv^loj etelircslo. 
 
 D. erelvufxsdoVf erelv^dov^ erelv^pdyjv. 
 
 P. £relv[i^ie6a, etelv^de, ^relvfiuevoL yjaav. 
 
 Paulo-post Future, / mn on the point of beim/ 
 struck. 
 
 D. relv^iiedov, r€lv^l^ea^ov^ relv^Eodov* 
 P. relvyl^of-ieday relv^/eode, relv^ovlai. 
 
 First Aorist, I was struck. 
 
 S. etvtpdriv, erv^drig^ etv^Oyi. 
 D. stv^dyjlov^ erv^dyjlyiv. 
 
 P. £tv(p6Yj(/.ev, 6rv(pd'/jley etvcpdyjaav. 
 
 First Future, I shall be struck. 
 
 S. tvcpdyiaofjtai^ tv(^dyjaY}^ rv^Oyiai^lai. 
 
 D. rv^dyjaoueOov, rv^driaeadov^ rixpOyjaeaOov. 
 
 P. tv^dyiaoi.i€day rv^drcyeadsy rvcl)d7^aovlai. 
 
 Second Aorist, / 7vas struck. 
 
 S. ervay/Vj etvzsyig^ stvtSyj. 
 
 D. ervxSYilov^ ervxiSrPyjr^ 
 
 P. etvzsyjiievj etvvirfle^ srvziyjaav. 
 
 Second Future, / shall be struck. 
 
 D. rvt^yjaofiEdov^ rvzjuyjasadovj i:vxSYia8oQov. 
 P, tv^y>ao[X£da^ rvtSriOeGde^ in)v^y;<yovlau 
 
Verbs. — Passive Voice. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, Be struck. 
 
 P* rvcsleadey rvrslsadoaav* 
 
 Perfect, Have been struck. 
 
 P. relvtpdej telv^duaav. 
 
 First Aoristj Be struck. 
 
 P. ii'v^drjlsj tv(pdyiluaav. 
 
 Second Aorist, Be struck. 
 
 S. rvTtT^di^X rvTC/ila. 
 
 D. tvTtYfiov^ rimyjluv. 
 
 P. tvTt'/jlsy rvnyjloaav. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOB. 
 
 Present, / may be struck. 
 
 S. tvnloi^yjVy tvTtloiOj rvnlotlo. 
 
 D. rvnloifiedoVj tvnloiodov.yvTtloiC^dyjv. 
 
 P, rimloLfisOa^ rv7tloiad£j tvnlotvlo. 
 
 ♦The regular formation of this person was in «3-o. The Ionics, by 
 <3ropping <r, made it tu^7£5 ; and the Attics, by contraction, Tvrxrja^ 
 which became the comnaon form. See Note, page 74. 
 
 + For rvph^i^ two successive syllables of which would begin with an 
 aspirate. Rule ii. page &. 
 
 X When the characteristic of the verb is 6, as in 'tth^od^ the termination 
 6/ is changed into ti ; as, '^ti^di for TruSuQt^ according to rule ii. page b. 
 
Verbs. — Passive Voice. 7 7 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, / may have been struck. 
 
 S. telviJ,fZ6Vog etyiVy^ enqgy ec^. 
 
 D. relvixf.i6Pu etyflovj ety^ly^v. 
 
 P, rejvft[jiEV0L €iYj[i8v, ecyflsi eiyicfav. 
 
 Paulo-post Future, I may be on the point of beiny 
 struck. 
 
 S. rerv^oLuyiVj telv^oio^ tsIv^IolIo. 
 
 D. rcclv^imOov^ telv^otaQov^ telv^oKsQyiv, 
 
 P. relv^LueOa^ telv^oLode^ telv^ivlo. 
 
 First Aorist, / may have been struck, 
 
 S. rv^d^iriV^ Tv^deirigj tv^Qslyj. 
 
 D. rv<pd6Lyjlov, rv^dsLTilyjv, 
 
 P. tv^detyjijiEVf rv^der/jlef tv^Oer/jCav. 
 
 First Future, / may soon be struck. 
 S. rv<pdyjaoi[iyjv^ Tv^drjooio, rv<p6ri(yotJO. 
 D. rvtpdyjaoijiedovi tvipdyjaoLGdov, rv^6y;aotadyii\ 
 P. rv^Qr^aoif.L8daj rv^6y;aoiod£f rv<p6y;GOivlo. 
 
 Second Aorist, I may have been struck. 
 
 S. rvmiYiVy rvnetyjgy rvneiyi. 
 
 P. rvTieiYiiL^Vj rvTtSLYile, rvTteiYiaav. 
 
 Second Future, I may be stmck hereafter. 
 
 S. rv7tyjaoi[iyiv^ tuTtr^aoto, rvnyjaoilo. 
 
 D. rvTtriaoL^edov^ rvytyjaoiadov^ tvnaoLCiQriV. 
 
 P rvTtriCoiuedaf rv7iyjaotod8, tvTtyjaoivlo. 
 
 ♦ By circumljocutioa ; i. e. the participle passive and the verb nut in 
 this mood. 
 
 Verbs contract, and others in a pure, having a vowel before ,«2i/ in the 
 perfect indicative, have a simple form for this tense in the optative and 
 tubjuQclive moods. S«e formation of the perfect passive. 
 
 Optative Perfect. 
 
 8* 
 
78 Verbs. — Passive Voice 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Psesent, / should be struck. 
 
 S. tvTtlidiiat, "twilrii^ timlYilau 
 
 D. rvnlaiiedov, rvnlyiadov, Tvnlyjodov. 
 
 P. ^rvnlo^ieda, ^irnlyiode^ ^rvnluvlat. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, I might have been struck. 
 
 S. rtlviifievogt ^> rigf ri. 
 D. relviifisvo yflovj ypov. 
 
 P. relviiizevoL cduev, yfley (ocT^ 
 
 First Aorist, / should have been struck, 
 
 S. nv^doy "tv^Qrig^ rv(p6Yi. 
 
 X). rv^dnroVf rv^Oiitov. 
 
 P. rvpdo^Vf rv^drts, tv^Qoai. 
 
 Second Aorist, I shotdd have been struck. 
 
 S. tVTlQy tXrJti^gj tVTlYi. 
 
 D. tunnrov^ rynntov. 
 
 P, tvTtQiievj rv7tf{r€} rvTtMc^ 
 
 * The regular form of this persen was rruTrlitCAt^ which was made bj? 
 the Ionics, TVTrlmt^ and by the Attics, tv^7«, now in common use. See 
 Note, page 74. 
 
 + Verbs cofttract. and other* in « pure, of the third conjugation, with 
 a vowel before f^ttt in the perfect indicative, have the following form. 
 See formation of the perfect passive. 
 
 rilt/tx-cc/xoLt, -«,t -}iJeti, 
 -fiD/Ag^flt, -of^Ss, -ml At. 
 
 t Verbs contract in e» hare aoftener than » in this tense ; e, %. 
 .«!r0g. 3ee Contract Verbs. 
 
Verbs — Passive Voice. 79 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, rvnleadaty to be struck. 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, relixpdaty to have been 
 
 struck. 
 Paulo-post Future, reJm^ecrOai, to be on the point 
 
 of beiny struck. 
 First Aorist, rv(pdr,vat, to have been struck. 
 First Future, rv^dyiaeadai^ to be going to be struck. 
 Second Aorist, rxmnvoLt^ to have been struck. 
 Second Future, rvnyiaeadatf to be going to be struck. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, Being struck. 
 N. rv7tlo[ievog^ rimlofievy^, rvnloiievov. 
 G. rvnlofievoVf rv7tIoi.i£vyig, rvnlofievov, &c. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, Having been struck. 
 
 N. relv^fiEvogj relvfzuevyjy relv^y,evov. 
 G. relvfiuevovy relvuftevyigj relvixfjievov. 
 
 Paulo-post Future, Being on the point of being 
 struck. 
 
 N. Helv^^vog^ telv^^vYiy relv^ofievov. 
 G, telv^/Ofievov, telvylofievyjg, relv^oi^vov. 
 
 First Aorist, Having been struck. 
 
 N. irv^dsigy tv<pddaay rv^dev. 
 
 G. rv(p^6vlog, rixp^eayyjg, rv^dsvlog. 
 
 First Future, Going to be struck. 
 
 N. rv<pdT^o[i€vog, tv^dyjaoi.iev?j, Tv<pdyj(yo[i£vov. 
 G. rv^OyiaouepoVf i:v^dr^aoiuvyig^ tvfpdyjaofievov. 
 
80 Verbs, — Formation of the Tenses z?i the Passive Voice, 
 
 Second Aorist, Having been struck. 
 
 N. rvTZcig, Tvytelaa^ rvTtev. 
 
 G. rvTtevlog^ 'tvnsiayjgf rvitevlog. 
 
 Second Future, Gouh) to he struck. 
 
 N. tv7tyj(yofievog tvytr^aofievyj, tVTtyjaoiisvov. 
 G. rvTtyjaousvov, tvTty^aoixevyiCy tvnrfiouevov. 
 
 SYNOPSLS OF THE MOODS AXD TENSES IN THE PASSIVE 
 VOICE. 
 
 Indie. Imp. Optat. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Infin, 
 
 Part. 
 
 PreS. TVTrl-OUitt ) l n \ n ^ ! T 
 
 imp. iTUTT Jo u}iv y\ ' 
 
 Perf. Tilv-y.uat > i » Telu-uuivog \ rilv-juuivcg 
 
 rlu. I {Iflvy.fxav ^ ^ unv \ cc 
 
 Pau.' rdu-^-ojucti r{lv4''Ci/A»y \ 
 
 IstA.' s%^Si)V rv<p-BifjL n-uoBii)iv ] to<^B'Z 
 
 lstF.JTU4)9-»!rO/^fltf l^TU<pbn<f''ClUHV 
 
 2dF.' 'rvTnia-^cfj.a.i 1 I tuttht-oi/ia.}))! ) 
 
 rs]v-(pBai.l WiJv-juyiv&g 
 TVTT.iivstt Wwr-iii 
 
 FORMATION OP THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 The present is formed from the present active 
 by changing q into oiiac ; as, txmla, rvnlofxai. 
 
 i and are sometimes omitted ; as, etf^tcci for oioi^sct ; x^'Jxt 
 for A«57«<. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 The imperfect is formed from the present, by 
 changing aat into ir/^Vj and prefixing the augment ; 
 as, rvTilofiai, erimlour^v. 
 
 e and d are sometimes omitted .; as?, g^y?* for ey^^slo .; ojy-jyy 
 
 for O09y.T)V, 
 
Verbs, — Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice, 01 
 
 Perfect. 
 The perfect is formed from the perfect aclivCj 
 by changing the last syllable into /uat ; as, rersf^' 
 
 The following slight changes are made for the sake of 
 harmony. 
 
 1. When the last syllable is preceded by a vowel, ft is 
 doubled ; as, rerv'<pec, rervf^tf^toit, 
 
 2. When it is preceded by y, that letter is changed into ft ; 
 
 as, m<p«Ly-'KU^ 7ri<pccf^-fjt,ut, 
 
 3. ^sc of the active is changed into yuMt ; as, AcAf-;t<«, >^Xi- 
 y^Lott, 
 
 4. Verbs which have «• in the first future active, retain the 
 
 r before fA.a.t ; as, rr>^r,^ci)^ ttA^jCa;, 7rfxA>;-xa, 7re'7r>^-f^f4x6i ; but in 
 verbs in a pure, if the penult of the future be long, a- is omit- 
 ted ; as, TToitM, TTCir.Crco, TeTToiyi-f^LAt.'^ 
 
 The following however, with a long penult, retain the o-, 
 
 0tK60Ct)y yVodJ, 6 puV&> , Kt>^iVOi, TTSV&f, 'XXKkl, TTTCCIAf , f CCl A) , CBW, %04>. 
 
 5. From verbs in vcj, the Attics frequently form the per- 
 lect in o-f>utt ; as, fnxnof, f^/K^txCfAoti. 
 
 6. Dissyllables that have rpe in the penult of the perfect 
 active, change e into <e, in the perfect passive ; as, rpsTrui rel- 
 
 fCCf^l^CUt. 
 
 7. iSome verbs which have ev in the penult of the perfect 
 active, reject the « ; as, 
 
 •JTiCpiV^cc, TFi^vyfAMi, fTEd'gvKU, (recv/^cct. 
 
 On the Second and Third Persons of the Perfect, 
 The second and third persons singular of the perfect pas- 
 sive are formed from the perfect active, by changing a. into 
 rat and rxt ; as, 
 
 rvzr]u, rslv^cc, relvf^f^^t, rtlvcp-ctti, relv(p-rut, 
 which become relv^ui, rilvTrJcn, 
 
 by placing the double consonant ^ for ^c, and changiog the 
 rough mute ^ into its cognate smooth one.t 
 
 ♦ Also, ttpou), and otvow, whose pcDgalt is skort. 
 See rult i. page 5, 
 
5^2 Ferbs. — Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice, 
 
 Xiy»'i XiXe^-u^ XiXtyfA^i^ >^iX€X-<ro!,i ^ AeAe;^^-rtft/. 
 AfAe|flf/, XeXiKJoti, 
 
 Verbs whose perfect active ends in xu, drop the 
 as, >,VQ)i XeXv'Kcc^ >isXvM.su^ XeXv-fTcn XtXV'Tut, (putva^ 7ri(pa,y' 
 y,isf>^ 7r£<pc&fA.uxtt^ Tttc^At-TM^^ 7re:pxv-re6i. But when the hrst 
 person is in <r^«/, the third is in c]eci -, as, ^tAjj^a*, mTs-Xij-xcc, 
 9re7xrXv<^f^sct , ttb^M^oci, 7r£zrXr,(r]ut, 
 
 The first person dual and phiral are formed from the first 
 person singukr, by changing i^cct into f^eBov^f^sBa ; as, relvf4>f^i^ 
 Te'lvf^'f>C£6o9 rijvfjL'iJLdeA. 
 
 The second and third persons dual are formed from the 
 third person singular, by changing roci into ^ov, and the pre- 
 ceding smooth mute into its cognate rough one ;t as, r{}v7r- 
 Tcti^ rilvcp'Oov ; XiXsK-reci, x^sMZ'^o^* If "^^i is preceded by a 
 Towel, er is inserted before Bov ; as, XeXvroa^ XeXv-a-dov, 
 
 The second person plural is formed from the second per- 
 son dual, by changing 6«v into Be ; as, r/Jvp&cv, re]v(p$e. XeXex' 
 
 The third person plural is formed by inserting y before 
 rut^ of the third person singular; BSy Xsxvruty x^Xv-yrea. 
 But if a consonant precede the rat/, the participle with the 
 rerb eia-t is used ; as, relv-ssr-reci, rilofjLitrm tttri. 
 
 The perfect of the imperative is formed from that of the 
 indicative, by changing ott into « ; as, reh'^^at, rijv^o ; and 
 TAi into Bco, with the preceding smooth mute into its cognate 
 rough one ;t as, relvus-'Tctt, rilv<p-Qea. 
 
 When U.XI of the perfect indicative is preceded by a vow- 
 el, it is changed into ftj;v, to form the perfect optative ; and 
 if the preceding vowel be -^ or &;, / is subscribed ; if not, it is 
 annexed ; as, 7re0iX7juxi, tt^^.A'/^.m-jjv. h^nXa)fAcii, h^r.-XuitA^yDt. J'e- 
 ^cfA^ut, hooi^r.v. But vvheniM.;*^ is preceded by a consonant, or 
 a diphthong which has v in it, the perfect participle is used 
 with 5<ijy ; as. XeXsyf^c^t, XsXeyf^evoi; sa^v. 
 
 The perfect of the subjunctive is formed from that of the 
 indicative, by changim»: (jlch preceded by a vowel into a(.tui ; 
 as, scrJdfJLui^ Icrla^A, When t^^^t is preceded by a consonant, 
 or a dipl thong contamin[^ v, the perfect participle with the 
 verb a is used ; as, XiXiyfJLsvo^ <y, 5^$, y^. 
 
 i 
 
 *In ^h^ perfect active, v before a- was chanp^ed into y\ it is here re- 
 stored; 
 i The smooth mute is roue^hened before 9, bj rule i. pa^e ^. 
 
y^rbs, Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice. 83 
 
 The perfect of the infinitive is formed from the second 
 person plural of the indicative perfect, by chang;ing z into ut ; 
 
 as, re^v<p6e^ rs]v<pQ'at. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 The pluperfect is formed from the perfect by 
 changing (xai into (xyjVj and prefixing the augment, 
 when the perfect begins with a consonant; as^relvfi- 
 
 The second and third persons of the pluperfect are form- 
 ed from those of the perfect, by changing ui into o, and uTt 
 into v,c-xi. 
 
 2d Sing, 
 Perf. TertG-octy 
 
 3d Sing. . 
 
 3d Plur. 
 
 Pluperf. fTfTic-o, 
 Perf. AcAf|c6/, 
 Pluperf. eM^^o, 
 
 
 ererivTa. 
 AfAfVftfvo/ £10-1, 
 
 Pou/O'post Future. 
 
 The paulo-post future is formed from the se- 
 cond person singular of the perfect passive, by 
 changing at into of.iaL ; as, 
 
 relvfifiai, rslv^^-acj TfJii^'-of^ou. 
 
 First A oris t. 
 
 The first aorist is formed from the third per- 
 son singular of the perfect, by changing rat into 
 Oyjv^ and iheprecedins; smooth mute it:to its cog- 
 nate rough one f droj ping tlie first letter, if it is 
 a consonant ; as, relvn'^at, eTV(pOr;v. 
 
 Exception 1. Those verbs which change e into ec in the 
 perfect passive, in this tense resume the the e ; as, ecrlpoAi^ucit, 
 
 2. Those which drop y in the perfects, have it restored in 
 this tense by the Poets ; as, g^A/v^^v for etcxidt^v, 
 
 ♦ For the reason of this change, see rule i. page 5. 
 
84 Verbs. -^-Middle Voice. 
 
 3. tfJCiHiO'hi^ from f^£in»f}jeci, 
 
 >, . .. n c assume <r. 
 
 fC-A;^3jy, o-£<rM(r]ett, dropS, <r. 
 
 fvps$i]v, evpiflxiy ^ 
 
 ' >, ^''^ ' ' 4 chanffe tj into f . 
 
 jFir^/ Future. 
 
 The first future is formed from the third person 
 singular of the tirst aorist, by adding (7o/^at and 
 casting off the augment ; as, elv<pdyij rvcpdyjao[iaL. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 The second aorist is formed from the second 
 aorist active, by changing oi^ into riv ; as, elvnovj 
 
 BlvTtYlV. 
 
 Second Future. 
 The second future is formed from the second 
 aorist, by changing j^r into yjao^aij and rejecting 
 the augment ; as, etim-yivy rvn-rjao^aL. 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, / strike myself. 
 
 S. rvTtlofiai^ tvytl^iy rvnl el at. 
 
 D. rvnloi^iedoVf rimhaOoVf tvnlsadov. 
 
 P. tvTtlo^ueda^ tvrtleadsy tcmlovlau 
 
 Imperfect, / was striking myself. 
 
 S. sTvnloiiriV, etunloVj erimlelo, 
 
 D. etvTtloueOov^ etvnjeadov, etunJeadyjv, 
 
 P. ervnloi^eda, etvTtleaOSf etimlovJo. 
 
Verbs. — Middle Voice. 
 
 Perfect, / ha^e been striking myself. 
 
 S. relvna^ reluTtag, relvne. 
 
 D. relvTtalovy relvnalor. 
 
 P. telvTtafisvj relvTtalEy reluTtaac. 
 
 Pluperfectj / had struck myself. 
 
 S. ErelvTtecVf erelimeiqy erelvrtei. 
 D. ErslvTtsdop, erelvTteilyjv. 
 
 P. erelvTtecfisVf erelvTtsLlSf stelvrteiaav. 
 
 First Future, / shall strike myself. 
 
 S. Tu^o^uat, tv^y rv^tlai. 
 
 D. rv^loixedoVf rv4^ea6oVj rv4fea6ov. 
 
 P. rv^oueda, rv^l^£a^8, rv^ovlac 
 
 First Aorist, / struck myself. 
 
 S. srv^oLi-iyiv, £rv4'u, ervyi/alo. 
 
 D. erv^l^af-tsdoVf £rv\i^axjdov^ etir^adyiv, 
 
 P. erv^aueda^ fTinj/aafe, erv^avlo. 
 
 Second Aorist, / struck myself 
 
 S. ervno^yiv^ ervTUi^ ervTtero. 
 
 D. €rv7to[xedov, erimeadov^ sTimeadyiv. 
 
 P. erimo[t6da, ervTteade, ervnovro. 
 
 Second Future, / shall strike myself. 
 
 S. rvTrov/iai^ rvTiri, rimeLrat. 
 
 D. rvTXovftedov, riutEiaQov^ rv7ici<y6ov. 
 
 P. rv7tovf.teda, n^vnuade^ rimovvlai. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, Strike thyself 
 
 S. rimlov^ rvnleado., 
 
 D. rvnleadov, rvnleadov. 
 
 P. tvTtleode^ txmleoQoaav. 
 
86 Verbs. — Middle Voice. 
 
 First Aorist, Strike thyself, 
 
 D. nv^aadov^ rv^aad^v, 
 
 P. tv^aade^ rvi^aadoaav. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, Have struck thyself. 
 
 S. r slime ^ relvnelo. 
 
 D. telvnelov^ relvnelov. 
 
 P. rtelxmels^ telvnsloaav. 
 
 Second Aorist, Strike thyself. 
 
 S. rVTtOVj tV7t£GdQ. 
 
 D. tvTteadovy rvTteadov. 
 
 P. rvTteade^ tvTtsadQaav. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, I may be striking myself. 
 
 S. 7^V7tloifiy]Vy tvnloto, tvTcloClo. 
 
 D. tvTtloiiisdoVy rvTtloiadov tvnloLodyiP. 
 
 P. rvnloifieda, tvTtloiade^ rimlotvlo. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, / may have been striking \ 
 myself. 
 
 S. telvTtOiiitf melvmiq^ telvTtot. 
 
 D. relvTtoiloVf telvTtotlyjv. 
 
 P. ifelvTtOLfieVj telvTtoLlSf tslvTtocev. 
 
 First Future, / may hereafter strike myself 
 
 S. ^ir^oi^'^v^ tir^oio, tv^oilo, 
 
 D. tvil^iixeOov, tV'\l>oi(ydoVj rv<l^0La6yiv. 
 
 P. rv^'Oiueda^ tv^oiade, tv4oLvlo. 
 
 First Aorist, / may have struck myself 
 
 S. tvypaii^yjv, tv^pato^ 'tv^l'ailo. 
 
 D, tv4^ai[iedov9 ^v4^at(ydov, rv-^aioOy^v. 
 
 P. rv^ai^eday tv^^atadsy rv^^atvlo. 
 
Verbs.— Middle Foiee. B7 
 
 Second Future, / may hereafter strike myself. 
 
 S. rvTtoliuyjv, nvnoloy tvTtolto. 
 
 D. rvTtoifiedov, rimolaOoVy tv7tol(y6yiv. 
 
 P. rvTtoifisOa^ rvTtoioOe^ rvnoiplo. 
 
 Second Aorist, I may have struck myself 
 
 S. rvTtOiixyjv, rvTtaiOy rvnoito. 
 
 D. tvTtOiizsdw, rimotadoi^, rvnoLodyjj^ 
 
 P. rirTtoiueOa, rimotode^ rvnoLvlo. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, / should strike myself 
 
 S. rv7iJij(iaL, rvnlri^ rimlyjlau 
 
 D. rvnliduedoVf rimlrtodoi', rvnlyjoOov. 
 
 P. TVTtlci^edaf rvnlriGOe^ rvTilovlat. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, I should hare been slnkiufi 
 myself 
 
 S. rtlvTtco^ rslvTtTig^ rslvny:. 
 D. relvTtyjlovy relimr^.ov. 
 
 P. r6lv7toi.i6Vf rslvTtyjlef reliutoai. 
 
 First Aorist, / shoidd have struck myself 
 
 D. rv4ij}[Z£doVj rv'd/'/i^ydoVj rv^odov. 
 P. rv^Queda^ rv^rioOej rv^vlac. 
 
 Second Aorist, I should have struck myself 
 
 S. rvTtidfiaif rvTiYif rvnrilau 
 
 D. TVTdd^edov, rvnyjadov, rvrtyjaOor. 
 
 P. 'tvito/.teOa, rvTty^aOey tvTtovlai, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, rvnleadac, to strike 
 oneself 
 
88 
 
 Verbs. — Middle Voice, 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, nelimsvaij to have been 
 
 striking oneself. 
 First Aorist, rv^aadat, to have struck oneself. 
 Second Aorist, rvrceadai^ to have struck oneself. 
 First Future J /tv^l'sodai, to be going to strike oneself. 
 Second Fu'uxe^rvTtdaQat^ to be going to strike one- 
 self 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, '7ri;7t7of^6wg, striking oneself 
 Perfect and PJuperfect, TeJ^Ttog, having been strik- 
 ing oneself. 
 First Aorist, ^v^^a^evoc, having struck oneself 
 Second Aorist, rvTZouevog having struck oneself. 
 First Future, rv^o^ievog, being about to strike 
 
 oneself 
 Second Future, ifvTtov^svog^ being about to strike 
 oneself. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES IN THE MIDDLE 
 VOICE. 
 
 Indie. Imp. Optat. Subj. 
 
 Infivi, 
 
 Part. 
 
 Present 
 
 Impcr. 
 
 Perfect 
 
 I^luperf. 
 
 1st Aorist 
 
 IstFut 
 
 irvTrl-ojun] 
 
 
 ^2d AovihUTVTT-ofA'rtv 
 f^d Fut. nv7r~<jZfJt.At 
 
 
 
 TVTrl-OIfJlitV 
 
 rilvTr-Qifxt 
 
 TVTT-ucrSctt 
 
 TVT/J-OfJliVOS 
 TU-vjL-O/MSVO? 
 
 Indie. 
 1st Flit. c-2ir;p-iit^cti 
 
 Liquid Verbs. 
 Optat. Infin. Part. 
 
 c-TTep'ot^m o-^ep'SKT&fiit c-sj-ep'9f^evc§^ 
 
Verbs, — Formation of the Tenses in the Middle Voice* 39 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 The present and imperfect are the same as in 
 the passive. 
 
 First Future. 
 The first future is formed from the f rst future 
 active, by changing u into o^(xl\ as, Tf^o, tv^f-iat^ 
 but in liquid verbs^ into nf-iaL]^ as^ ar^Acj, ore'Xkiijiai. 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 The second future is formed from the second 
 future active, by changing 6 into b^aat ; as, rv%Qf 
 rvmizat. 
 
 Uivd}, ^t(ia;,(pccya, and 5<Jft/, have the seconc] future in ef^t.'\ 
 But these are thought to be the present used lor the future. 
 To these add the poetic futures fiscf^xi and veofMi^ by contrac- 
 tion veZf^xt. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 The first aorist is formed from the first aorist 
 active, by adding ftyjv ; as, ervi^, cxv^aii^^v. 
 
 Verbs in eo pure have this tense often syncopated ; as, 
 
 £Vl>otf^v for sopJi(rcif4.yjVj cjvx^r^v for avK^cct^v, 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 The second aorist is formed from the second 
 aorist active, by changing ov into ottyjv ; as, GrvTtoPj 
 
 * Also those verbs from which o- has been dropped by the Attics ; as, 
 Declined thus : ipcy-cfAsti^ -STct/, ejut, 
 
 9* 
 
90 Verbs ^-^Formation of the Tenses in the Middle Voice* 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 The perfect is, generally, the same with the 
 perfect active, except in the characteristic, which 
 it borrows from the second aorist ; as, telv(pa, re- 
 
 IvTta, 7tt<p8VXGi9 7t£(p£Vya. 
 
 hi^co makes hhiycot.- for ^t^ot^oc, to avoid the too frequent re- 
 currence of the ^ ; >^cLyxoL\a makes hi>g^y•)cu. 
 
 Change in the vowel preceding the characteristic : 
 
 1. f, in the penult of the perfect active, is changed into ; 
 and ii into oi ; as , 
 
 2. Dissyllables in A<5y, v^, and f>u^ change ot of the perfect 
 active into ; as, 
 
 c-7fAAft), i^loiX^sc, i^loXcA, 
 
 3. Oil in the present, is changed into ?? ; as, 
 
 4. Verbs in eta and ea cast off jj» and ty. from the perfect 
 active, to form the perfect middle ; as, 
 
 Other verbs in eo pure, and some in a impure, drop » only; 
 
 as, Af6;, XsXvKot, XtXvoc, 
 opa^ a pica. ^ copcc. 
 
 The following are irregular, ^^aao*, rf^jjAcd ; GaTrroo^ re$rj7rcc ; 
 'A^tfi)^ KS>c}\.rjyet ; e^of^ siaOa, j fA^if^va^ f^csf^ovx ; /SctAAA', /Se/SoAct ; p^o-c-Uy 
 sipaycc ; O'TTsv^a, sT'^H^ct j ccy.iico, tjkocc. 
 
 These changes nremade, even if they affect the augment ; 
 
 as, fA^r^;, oAcT^, not ^jAtt^. 
 
 Many verbs in a pure want this tense, especially those 
 which have otv, sv, or ou, Tf>recetling a ; also pollysyllables in oa^ m 
 ^eo, or (ra-a}i with many others : but opv^^rw makes apvyoL and opM' ' 
 
 pvyei. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 The phiperfect is formed from the perfect by 
 changing a into uv^ and prefixing the augment, 
 when the word begins with a consonant; as, r^- 
 7iuta, etelvTtetv. 
 
Verbs — Deponent and Contract. 
 
 91 
 
 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 Deponent verbs have the middle form, except 
 in the perfect, phiperfect, and paulo-post future, 
 which are taken from the passive, and sometimes 
 the first and second aorists. 
 
 SYNOPSIS. 
 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Part. 
 
 Pre?ent 
 Imperfect 
 
 
 S-ix-fi'j 
 
 'St/UHV 
 
 -U\UAt 
 
 -'tvBcit 
 
 'Q/uivce 
 
 Perfect 
 Pluperfect 
 
 ^iS'cyfXSLL ) 
 
 SiSi->o 
 
 -y/uivos 
 
 ^yfxin;^ 
 
 'X^^» 
 
 -y^ivos 
 
 Paulo p. F. 
 
 J'-M^-i^xt 
 
 
 -Ol/UHV 
 
 
 'iirQoLt 
 
 'Ofxivag 
 
 1st A or. iM. 
 
 iSi^St/UMV 
 
 Si^.At 
 
 -ttlfJltlV 
 
 .UfXAt 
 
 -AO-Qul 
 
 -ClfAiVOC 
 
 1st Fut. M. 
 
 Ji'^-0/A3Lt 
 
 
 •oijuhv 
 
 
 'ia-Sxi 
 
 -o^uivig 
 
 1st Aor. P. 
 
 tS^iX^av 
 
 i^iXB-itli 
 
 .mv 
 
 -w 
 
 -hxt 
 
 •UQ 
 
 1st Fut. P. 
 
 (^i^Qixr-c/UAi 
 
 
 .Oi,UHV 
 
 
 -i^Sxt 
 
 -G/uivc; 
 
 A few of these verbs have a 2d Aorist Middle ; as, 7rvv6ctvofAo(ij 
 irvQcjUiiv. i 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 Verbs in oo, aj, and oo, are contracted in the 
 present and imperfect tenses.* 
 
 Verbs in ao contract guj, ao, aov^ into d ; as, 
 ttfxaid^ ttfiG) ; rcfiaoi-iePj rtf^Qfisv ; rt^aovac, n^at ; 
 — otherwise into a ; as, ^t^ae^ raid : — t is sub- 
 scribed ; as, nuaeLg tif.ia(; ; rifiaoLUir tljiquc. 
 
 Verbs in eo contract ee into d^ and eo into 5 ; 
 as, (pi?,pe^ ^L?^i ; (pcTiEOfievj <pLXb[.t£v — Before a long 
 vowel or diphthong, e is dropped ; as, c^afco, ^c- 
 
 ♦See rules of contraction, page 18, 
 
9^ Ferbs — Contract. 
 
 Verbs in oo, contract o before a long vowel in- 
 to cj ; as, ;^pi;G'06)5 %pi^(T6 : — before a short vowel 
 or 01^5 into «•; as, j^^pvaoele^ ;Kpi;cra7e ; %pi;(Toa(7i, ;^pi^cr- J 
 6ai : — otherwise into ot ; as, x^P^aost^ ;Kprcr0i;. In 1 
 the infinitive oetv^ is contracted into ovv ; as, %pi^cr- 
 oft^, ^pvaovv. 
 
 1. Diss}'liables in a^, from which the Attics have exclu- 
 ded ;, are not contracted ; such as, kXxco for scXoitc^ ; xa«y for 
 
 2. Dissyllables msa are rarely contracted, in the first per- 
 son singular, or in the first and third persons plural of the 
 indicative ; or in the optative and subjunctive moods, or the 
 participle ; as, Teh^a^ TrXgofJi^v^ ^Xsovtri, TrXsoi^^ "TtrXsTp^^ vrXscov. In 
 the imperative and infinitive, they are generally contracted, 
 but not always. 
 
 3. In the optative mood, active voice, the Attics use turn 
 for oiuLi, which becomes &;3jv in verbs from uu -^ as, o/jsujjv for 
 opccoifjLi ; TfAo/jjv for riXeotfJLi. In some verbs in Aa^ they change 
 oc into j; ; as, ^>:5 for (^«5 ; ^/^/.^iv for ^t-^cA-i. 
 
 First Declension. 
 
 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tty.cca}. 
 
 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 rifJL'OCCe} J 
 
 a ; 'ueii, -xq ; 
 
 -««, 
 
 -« : 
 
 D. 
 
 
 -cfc£r6V, 'urov ; 
 
 -flJfTdV, 
 
 'clrov 
 
 F. 
 
 'Uoy.iy, 
 
 -Juev ; -acre, -^rf ; 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 -flftijC-i, 
 
 'UTl. 
 
 S. 
 
 ertf^'uov, 
 
 -uv \ -ecsq, -uq ; 
 
 -«£, 
 
 '» .* 
 
 D. 
 
 
 'CicTov^ -arov ; 
 
 -««sr}jj> 
 
 'UTjjV 
 
 P, 
 
 'CiOI^SVj 
 
 , -^ftfv ; -«eTf J -tffTf ; 
 
 -cc«y, 
 
 -WV' 
 
D. 
 P. 
 
 Verbs — Contract, 
 
 
 IxMPERATIVE MOOD. /•* ^ T V ^ ^ 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tenslk^ ^ o^ .- 
 
 ~ V^ /^ 4.JK i««* -. '^. ^ 
 
 
 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 S. rifJL'dctfJit, -$/«.< ; 'cMi<; -^$ ; -act, -y : 
 
 P. -ecotf^sv, '^f^sv ; -ecoiTs, -qtre ; -^ifto/fcv, -^ev. 
 
 SBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 S. rty.'X6}, '^ ; -UYfii -xi ; -«>i, •« : 
 
 D. ' -ecKTov, -oiroy ; -a>7T(jy, -«tov : 
 
 P. 'OLUfJLei^ -off^sv ; -ACJjrf, -are ; -ccuo-iy 'UTt, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 ^ing. N. Ttf^-etav, -CUV ; -xoVTcc, -u'^ot, \ 
 
 Neut. 
 
 -<5C<3v, -«;» : 
 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 S. rif^-uaf4,xi, -afjLOLi \ -ceri, -x ; -oi£rxt, -uTeti : 
 
 D. -ocof^hv, -cofjLt&o)) ; -dtgc*^'»v, -ccT&oV 5 -icfc-^oy, -uG-dcvl 
 
 P. -xofJLiQx, 'CuiU^oc ; -sftfc^f, -c60"^e ; -flcovrcd/, -ft^vTac/. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 S, irtf>L'Xof^?iv, -af^m ; -i«flt/ -a/ ; -aero, -aro : 
 
 D, 'otoftsdoVy 'con-c^ov • -a£<r^oy, -ac^ov 3 -^f^^Jjy, -ucr$7]v : 
 
 P. 'XOfte$ec, -uf>is$s'j 'Cis<r$ey -a«"^i« ; -c^cpro, -»vro. 
 
94 Verbs. — Contract* 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 D. 'cto>)fAt$6V, -utisCav ; -cc^jc-^ov, -u'^^oV', -cct}<r0ov, -u^6oV : 
 
 P. 'Cit(i)tC£&U^ 'Ci)f/.£^X ; 'OCY/O-et^ -uCrh-j -XCJVTUt, •UVTCtl. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 G. -fitO|6tfVa, -a^iVii ; -Ci<ifA.£\7^C^ 'a(jL£n%-j 'CCOt^iVH) -^fA.£y>5. 
 
 Second Declension. 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 S. ^/A-ew, -ft 
 
 D. 
 
 p. -fa^£v, -s^fv ; 
 
 ^/^eia;. 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 
 
 -f£.'$ -5/$ ; 
 
 -ff/, 
 
 '£] : 
 
 -ssTov, -£irov ; 
 
 -fCTfiV, 
 
 'fira^ 
 
 ; -ffTf , -fTrf ; 
 
 -£yr/, 
 
 -«r/. 
 
Verbs — Contract. 95 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 S. ((ptX-ecv, -av ; -ff?, sU ; -«, -« : 
 
 P. -fo/ttfv, -»|ttfv ; -f£7e, -f<re ; -fov, -«». 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 S. (pi^-esy -ii ; -sera, -{Ira : 
 
 . OPTATATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 S. (ptX'£oif>ct, 'olfii J -eoi^j 'oii ^ -sot, -c7 : 
 
 p, -eotjitsv, 'Oif^ev ; -eo/Xf ; -oiTg, -eoiev, -ohv, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 S. <p/A-£6;, -v ; -£>^$, -ijg ; -£»?, -^ : 
 
 P. "EUfUV, -UfJLi)l i -eJjn , -^T£ J -SMTt, 'U(ri, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 Masc- Fern. Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. ^iX'£ct)V^ -Jv ; -foyCdj, -oZ<^o(, -, -sov, -ouv : 
 
 PASSIVE AMD MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 S. 0vX-£6f^cct, 'if^tcit ; -f>5, -J ; -serai y -sliTut: 
 
 D. (piX'Soi^Lsdov, -Sf^sSov ; -seo-6ov, -elc-^ov ; -es<!'6ov, -elo-^ov: 
 
96 Verbs — Contract. 
 
 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 l^PiX'eofJiVi'i^ 
 
 -8tt;jv ; -f «, -«; 
 
 •BBTOf 
 
 -eiTo: 
 
 D. 
 
 '£Of^e$ov, 
 
 -^f^e^ov ; -£eT$ov, -it(!-6ov; 
 
 -eetr^DV, 
 
 -eto-$tjy 
 
 P. 
 
 -'SOfA.e&cCi 
 
 -if^idcc ; -es<rd£, -fTc^s; 
 
 'S0V70, 
 
 -«yro. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 D. -£oif^£Oov^ -oifA^sBov ; -£of(rdov, 'Oi<r$ov ; ■£oio-&i]Vy 'oi(r$m' 
 
 P. -£otf^(^cc, 'olf^eOoc ; -foi&'^f, -o7<r^ff ; '£oi^ro, -otvTo, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 D. -£au.i6dVy 'oifA.£6ov', • £vj-9ov, ->JcJov; -fjjcr^ov, -^«r^ov: 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense* 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 Sing. N* (PiX-£ef^£Vo<;y 'Hvlbvo^ ; -fd^M-fyjj, -s^ttfy;? ; -sof^evovy -S//.£V6V : 
 
 G. sof^eva, '^f^£vii ; -fOittfv;;;, -»,«tev3y$; -eof^fva, -8^£y«, &C, 
 
Verbs — Contract. 
 
 Third Declension. 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 97 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 .1 • -AflC. 
 
 s. 
 
 ^r,>i'cafj 
 
 -a ; -df<5, -«<$ ; 
 
 
 -o«, 
 
 -«< : 
 
 D. 
 
 
 -OSTdV, -aT<jy 
 
 j 
 
 -OCTOV, 
 
 -KTaV 
 
 P. 
 
 -OCfUV, 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 J 
 
 -o«o*/, 
 
 -«V». 
 
 S. 
 
 eS^X-oov, 
 
 -»yj -Of 5, -»$; 
 
 -6f, 
 
 -«: 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 -ofTdtf, -aiTdv; 
 
 -OfTJjV 
 
 , -«r«v : 
 
 
 P. 
 
 'OOfA^ti, 
 
 -«/t4fy; -ofTf, -»Tf; 
 
 'ooy, 
 
 •8V. 
 
 
 8. 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 -ofTov, -«Tov ; -ogr<yv, -^TAtv: 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 D. "Ooiiov, -oirov ; -ootr7]V -oittjv 
 
 P. 'Cotf^sV) 'Otf^ev ; -oo^rj, -o^rf ; -oo/fv -olev, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 S. ^j?A-«4», -» ; 'oyii, 'oig; -oTi, -01 : 
 
 D. -ojjr«y, -ft/Tov, -otttov, -©rav : 
 
 P. -oafis)t^ -af/.£v ; -oj^tj, -an ; -oojcrt^ -asrt. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. ^;?A-o&;v, -£v; -oao-ec, -H<rx; -oov, -«v: 
 
 G. -ooyTdj, -«i>rfl$j -oi^c*«j5, -icrj^; -oO!»To$, -svTd?, &;c. 
 10 
 
^8 P^erbs — Contract. 
 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 S. &7iX-oofA.ott^ •^f^eii J -6|7, 'ot ; 'oeTxi, -drut : 
 
 D. 'ooftcS-ov, -^f^sB-ov ; 'oecrB-ov ,-HO-S-ov ; -oec^ov, -ho-S-ov : 
 P. -oofisBuf '^f^eS-ct ; -OfC^-f, -^<r3f ; -flovT<«/, -avTcd*. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 S. £0ij>i-oof^7}v, -«/6C3j)» ; -OS, -« ; -fltrej -»to : 
 
 D. 'OOf^eBov, -tif^eS-ov ; -ofcSav, -»cr^ov; -ofO-^v, -»cr5?;v : 
 
 P. 'OOf^eS-oCy'^f^Bx 5 -oeo-Bs) -^cBe ; -oovro, -ayro. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 S. ^ijA-oa^ -» ; -oecr0ct), -«o-^iy: 
 
 D. '0SC-&6V, -^(r$ov ; -«fO-^^y, -«^^6;v: 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 S. d'nX'Ooif^YiV, -o7,tc9}V ; -doio^ -cTo ; -oo/to, -o/Td: 
 
 D. 'OoifjLi^oV', -6ty.e6ov J -oe/o-^ov, -a<o-^ov ; -ooKr^tjv^ -oi(r6nv: 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 D. -oUfJLB^ov^ '0)jiA.e9oyi -oJjr^ov, -ac&ov] ovcrBoVf -^^Bovl 
 
 P. 'OAJf^e^oc, -Z^i^a) -oTiO-ky -airk ; 'cmren, -mroci,, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tense. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. ^v,X-oof^tvoq, -^i^evog ; -oo^svt), -Sf^v^i ; -oof^evoy, -8/^£Vov : 
 
 G. -oof-^syif) -s/^evn ; -«eftfV3;$, -«/M.fv;;5; -oof^vHy -s^gyS, &C. 
 
Verhs — Contract. 
 
 V»» VJH <J\ 
 
 
 
 1 ^"^ ^^ ^^ 
 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 ^S fK '30 
 
 -hJ ^ v^ vT 
 
 fu 5- s. ^ 
 ? ? ? 
 
 
 III 
 
 ?^ 'S ?^ 
 
 CO 
 
 w 
 > 
 
 
 C ^{ «t* o 
 « « « 
 
 O 
 
 <! 
 
 H 
 
 ;?; 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 X 
 
 o 
 
 ^9' 3 'a 
 
 
 
 O § S § 
 
 «Ph 
 
 O 
 
 (/3 
 
 . 2?J»S '» 
 
 ^ « ^ » 
 
 . «a ?9 «a *^ •* '* 
 
 § « « '^ " 
 
 *9 
 
 ^ s- gt 
 
 '^ S 5 5 
 
 a ? 7 p 
 '-H :f. ^ ^ 
 
 5- *< < 
 
 St 
 
 a, 
 B 
 
100 Verbs in fjLt, 
 
 Some contracts are found in more conjugations than one ; 
 
 as 
 
 a or f. 
 
 yT^pota, >iO)<pctco^ ^vpeca, trvXcteo^ ettovacj, 
 yijpe^f, Xea^iCJ^ ^vpst^^ c-t^Afo;, ottovsa. 
 
 £ or 0. 
 
 
 
 a or 0. 
 
 
 
 (itccca, 
 
 ^iou, &C. 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 or e or o. 
 
 
 
 xvv!^-X6f) -ea, -oa, &C. 
 
 
 
 Baryton or Circumflex. 
 
 
 tH^-OfJLOU 
 
 or 'sciLtoct 
 
 iXyc-b) 
 
 or 'SCO, 
 
 (ioC-JC'6> 
 
 -SCO, 
 
 eTTlf^^sX-OfAMl 
 
 -eo/4,ut. 
 
 yrj9-6t 
 
 -ea 
 
 KVXlV^'Ctt 
 
 'ica 
 
 ypA(p-a 
 
 -£A) 
 
 xv-at 
 
 -tea. 
 
 ^I^OCCK-Of 
 
 -estJ 
 
 ^vp'Oftect 
 
 -soptcci. 
 
 ^oK-a 
 
 -iU 
 
 piTTJ-M 
 
 -eta* 
 
 ei^-co 
 
 -gu 
 
 rpvx-6> 
 
 -g(a. 
 
 uX'U 
 
 'ia* 
 
 
 
 VERBS IN \ll. 
 
 Verbs in ^i are formed from verbs in ao, ^0,00, 
 and iJ6) : 
 
 I. By changing 6) into yn ; and lengthening the 
 penult in the singular.* 
 
 II. By prefixing the reduplication. 
 
 The reduplication is proper or improper. 
 
 * In (he secood Aorist, the penult of the dual and plural is lengthen- 
 ed, in all verbs, but TiQ^f^i^ 'nt^t, ^iSatf/.t, 
 
Verbs in f<.t, 101 
 
 Proper, when the first consonant of the present 
 tense is repeated with l ; as, Soo, 8t§wf^t. If the 
 first consonant is a rough mute, it is changed in- 
 to its cognate smooth one ;* as, 6eo, h^Syi^l. 
 
 Improper, when a rough i only is prefixed, 
 which happens to verbs beginning with (t7, 7t7, or 
 a vowel ; as, alao. lolyjfii. 
 
 Thus, from clacj is formed lalyi^t. 
 from 0ao, rtOyjut. 
 
 from S0Q9 ^tSidfii. 
 
 from SeixvvQf Setxvvfzc. 
 
 Verbs in ^c have but three tenses of that form, 
 the present, imperfect, and second aorist. They 
 take the other tenses from verbs in o, from which 
 they are derived. 
 
 Many want the reduplication, particularly all 
 verbs in v^t ; which want, likewise, the second 
 aoristt and the optative and subjunctive moods. 
 
 1. The Poets and Colics change many contract verbs in- 
 to verbs in f*.i, but without the reduplication ; as, 
 
 ytK0C6f, yly,y^f/.t. 
 
 cpxctf, opyif^t. 
 Sometimes they repeat the initial letters ; as, aXoccd^ 
 
 In the Ionic and Bceotic dialects, the reduplication is made 
 by e ; as, eT%(jLt^ TeBvfAt, 
 
 2. To the common reduplication, «, is sometimes added; 
 as, TT^^-za, TFif^TsrXKy^i, 
 
 The reduplication is sometimes in the middle ; as, onu^ 
 
 * By rule ii. page 5. 
 
 t Dissyllables in vf^t have a second aorist, but it is the same with the 
 Imperfect. 
 
 10* 
 
102 Verbs in f/.i, 
 
 3. Barytons sometimes become verbs in i^t< ; as, ^pi6mi j 
 from ^H^oj, But in such instances, the verb in fjn seems to be ^ 
 formed from a contract verb derived from the Baryton : 
 thus, l^ptBrjf^t is from ^ptSeco, derived from (ipida. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 The imperfect is formed from the present, by 
 changing ^ii into v ; prefixing the augment, ex- 
 cept when the verb begins with 6 ; as, tcdyjiih eti- 
 6yjv ; lalyjut IgIyiv, 
 
 Second A ovist. 
 The second aorist is formed from the imper- 
 fect, by casting off the reduplication, and taking 
 the augment ; as, ettdyjv^ eOyjv ; urlyjVt ealyjv. 
 
 First Future. 
 The first future has sometimes a reduplication ; 
 as, rtOj^cTo). 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 The present is formed from the present active, 
 by changing 1^6 into /^a^^and shortening the penult: 
 
 as, lalrj.v^ lalauat ; rLdyji.ay Ttde^ac. 
 
 The following do not shorten the penult, ectji^oct, ukocx^i- 
 
 last, however, sometimes shortens the penult. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 The imperfect is formed from the present, by 
 changing pux' into uriv^ and prefixing the aug- 
 ment, except when the verb begins with l\ as, r^- 
 
Verbs in f^i — First Conjugation, 103 
 
 Perfect, 
 
 The long penult of the perfect active is short- 
 ened in the passive ; as, &6cjxa, hho^L\ ec^iac and 
 redeLiiac are exceptions. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE MIDI>LE VOICE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 The present and imperfect are the same with 
 those of the passive. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 The second aorist is formed from the imper- 
 fect by casting off the reduplication : as, eridefiyiVj 
 
 FIRST COKJUGATIOK. 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 'lal-yjiiiy yjgj yiOl \ arov, atov j afiev^ ate^ dac* 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 lal-riV, yjg, >7 [ atov^ ar/jv \ auev. ar^, aaouv. 
 
 Attic Imperfect, after the Contract forms, 
 more in use.* 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ♦ Throughout the singular number, and ia the 3d person plural. 
 
104 Verbs in fjn — First Conjugation, 
 
 Perf. ealyixay PIup. etalyjzsiv, 1st A. ealyjaa. 
 or ialaxa* or kdlaxeiv. 
 
 Second Aorist* 
 Sing. Dual Plural. 
 
 1st F. alyjao. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 Attic Present, after the Contract forms, more 
 in use. 
 
 Sing 
 
 • 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ujl-ae. 
 
 aero, 
 
 1 a^tov^ 
 
 aetQVj \ 
 
 1 oiste, asrcycfav 
 
 (X, 
 
 drcj. 
 
 1 droPy 
 
 drovj 
 
 1 dtBy drc^aav. 
 
 I%rf, and Pluperf. ialyixe. 1st Aor. alnaov. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 olyi'diy tTg), 1 tovy tQVf I re, tQGav. 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 lalai'Yiv^ yjg^ yj j Tilov, yfl'/iv \ yj^ev, yfls, yjaav & ev. 
 
 Perf. and Pliip. ialrixoifiL. 1st Aor, Glyiaaif.a. 
 
 * The third person plural is often*syncopated ; as, fcCstv for sC«<ratr ; 
 
 i^iV for sSscrotv ; i^litv for isrlna-etv, 
 
 t And€^7jtfl-ctv. Horn. I. M. 55. 
 
 :]: The Colics retain the Jong vowel in this tense ; as, W7«S/, t;6»7/, jT/- 
 Joe^t, And frona both forms Bt is often cast away • hence '^7;/ ?nd V7i«, 
 T/6», (J'fey>'tri/, &c. in the second person 
 
Verbs in fjLt — First Conjugation, 
 
 105^ 
 
 >k 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 alai'YiVj Yi^i 71 I ypjovj yflyjp, \ yjfi^v^ ypSf yjcav & sv- 
 
 1st Fut. GlyjaoifiL. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 lal'Q, d$,* a, I arov, drov^ \ dfiev^ drsj oat. 
 Perf. and Pliip. eGlrjxo). 1st Aor. (77>7(T(j. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Sing. Dual. ^ Plural. 
 
 ol'dy Tig, ^ I ntoVf rlroVf \ uusv, nre^ ijai. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Pres. and Imp. lalavat- Perf. and Plup. ialyixs- 
 [im.. First Aor. alyicrac Second Aor. olnvau 
 •First Fut. clTiaeLv. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 „ Present and Imperf. lal-ag^ dcra, «r. Perfect anij 
 piup. ialyixog. 1st A. alyjaag. 2d A. a7-ag, acra, 
 \ir, 1st Fut. gT/jGov. 
 
 bYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES IN THE ACTIVE 
 VOICE. 
 
 1 Indie 
 
 
 Imp. 
 
 Optat. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Part. 
 
 Present 'i^h/ut 
 Imper. j Wlnv 
 
 \ 
 
 'ta-lctSl 
 
 {(rletlHV 
 
 Is-lZ 
 
 i<rlctVAt 
 
 W7*c 
 
 Perfect ; y%icx 
 Pluperf. «/r»x«/v 
 
 \ 
 
 i<rlnH.i 
 
 WlnKOt/Ui 
 
 ' (O-lniCCO 
 
 iT}hK?VAt 
 
 io-lmces 
 
 1st Aorisl i<J-ho-(t 
 
 
 a-l»(rov 
 
 a-lna-etiui 
 
 1 (rlna-Z 
 
 o-ho-oJ 
 
 0-1)1(7 AC 
 
 2d Aorist, s(7-7>»v 
 
 
 (j-lhdt 
 
 (rJoLtnv 
 
 ' <rlZ 
 
 (rhvctt 
 
 a-l^c 
 
 i St Fut. \o-%<roo 
 
 
 
 a-lna-otfxi 
 
 i 
 
 alho-uv 
 
 o-lno-m 
 
 ♦ It PB sometimes written with an w ; as, 
 
 %, V I ^^<>^ S'"^' I — V'^^ — 
 
lOS Verbs in fjn — First Conjugation, 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 "** Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 lala-fiaif aai^lai \ [ledovj adoVf adov | fieday aOe, vlat* 
 Ik 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 lola-[iY}Vy (To,t 7o I i-tedovy adov, odyjv | /.leOa, aQe, vJo. 
 Perf. ialaf/ai. PI up. ialafiyjv. 1st A. Ealadyji'* 
 1st Fut, aladyjaoiiai. Paulo-post F. ealaaofiat. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect 
 Sing. * Dual. Plural. 
 
 hla-aojX o'06) I cOov, adov \ crfe, aOcdaav. 
 Perf. and Plup. IcrJoco. IstAor. alaOyfJi, 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 hylai'fiyjVj o, To, | iieOov, aOov, adr^v \ ^i^Oa, (T0£, vlo, 
 Perf. and Piup. ialatf^iYiv. 1st Aor. alaOeiyjv. 
 1st Fut. oladrjooifiyjv. Paulo-p. F. i(ylouyoi[x,yjp. 
 
 ♦ The Ionics take away the o- in the second person, and the Attics 
 
 contract the syllables ; as, ^ 
 
 T> A ^ Ion. 'iTlsteti, riQioLl. 
 
 Present, ^ ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^g^^ 
 
 T r. . Hon. W7ato, «t;6?o, t^iS'cc, 
 
 Imperfect, J ^^^^ -^^^^^^ ^^^g^^ ^^^-^^ 
 
 t See preceding Note. 
 
 if The Ionics take away the o- ; and the Attics contract the syllable? : 
 a;«, 'io-luOj %olk); riQiOy Ti9« ; itSoo, StSa, 
 
Verbs in f^ — First Conjugation* 
 
 107 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ^d'Qiiaif fi9 nlat \ ufieOov, r,a6ov, rjadov \ DfieOaj rssQe, 
 or as some think, [ovlai^ 
 
 sal-ofiaLy a, dJat, &c. 
 
 1st Aor. alaSu. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Pres. and Imperf, lalaadai. Terf. and Pluperf. 
 ialdadau 1st A. aladripaL. 1st F. GladyjoeadaL. 
 Paulo-post F. iolaxjEodaL. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Pres and Imperf. lolauerog. Perf. and Plu- 
 perf. bcrJa^vog. 1st A. aladeig, 1st F. olaQYiao^B- 
 vos> Paulo-post F. ialaao^cevog. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES IN THE PASSIVE 
 VOICE. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Present 
 Imperfect 
 Perfect 
 Pluperfect 
 Paulo-p. F. 
 1st Aorist 
 
 hrlst/unv 
 l&late-ojuett 
 
 1st Future (rletSna-Ofxstl 
 
 Imper. Opt. 
 
 \crlct<TO 
 
 
 Subj. i Infin. 
 
 'da-lZ/uett'talaLTSxi 
 WlZfAeLtiTlctu-Sctt 
 
 Part. 
 
 la-lx/usvos 
 '.trlcKrofxivog 
 
 * It is sometimes written with an w ; as, 
 
108 Verbs ui f^i — First Conjugation, 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 P'^^^«".t^"^|as in the Passive. 
 Impeiiect, j 
 
 1st A or. ealyjaai^yiVy ealyjaQ^ &ic. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 eGla-iiyjv^ Co, ro \ [ledov, adoVf aSyiv \ [leOa^ aSe vlo> 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 1st Aor. olriaaif alyjaaodu, &c. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ala-60f 060 I adoVf adov \ ade^ cdcdaoLV. 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 1st Aor. Glyjaat^iyjVf Glyjaaio, &c. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. « Plural. 
 
 alac-iiYiVj 0, ro | iiedcn^, odov, aOyjv \ iieda, oOe, vlo. 
 
 SUBjriS'CTIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 1st A. ay/jGG)[iat, GlyjGyjy &c. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 aJ-o^at, a, drat | ofiedov, dGdov^ aGdov \ OfieOa, dade^ 
 
Verbs in ut — Second Conjugation, 
 
 109 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 1st A or, alyjaaadai. 2d Aor. alaadai. 
 1st Fut. alriaeadai. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 
 1st Aor. alrjGaiievog. 2d Aor. alaiievog. 
 1st Fut. Glyjaofievog. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES IN THE MIDDLE 
 VOICE. 
 
 Indie. Imp. Optat. | Subj. Infin. | Part. 
 
 Present 
 Iroper. 
 2d Aori?t 
 1st Fut. 
 IstAonst 
 
 'nrlot/usLt 
 
 ffli;0-o/U(.ett 
 ta-lne-oL/unv 
 
 <r]iitroU \ (/lua-ctifAhV <rlM<ra^/ucu 
 
 'tO'loLO-QsLt 
 9lx<r&At 
 
 yho-cta-bxt 
 
 'talst/uivoc 
 
 (rho-o/uivcc 
 
 SECOJ^D CONJUGATION. 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 rtd-y][iLj >7g, yiai \ srov^ stov \ e^Vj bUb, elct. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural, 
 
 ♦ iirt^iTuf is sometimes syncopated ; as^^T/Q^v. 
 
 11 
 
no Verhs in fjLt — Second Conjugation, 
 
 Attic Imperfect, after the Contract forms, more 
 ill use.* 
 
 Sing. Ducil. Plural. 
 
 fT'tO-eor, Si^, £€$5 Htc, B£, el I I end'Sov^Sv* 
 
 Perf. redyjxa. Plup. eredyjxELV. , 1st A. £dy]xa. 
 
 Second Aorist.t 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ed-yiPj ed'yjgy ed-yj | elov, elyjv j £[i£Vf elsy eaav. 
 
 1st Fut. Qr,aQ. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. < Plural. 
 
 Attic Present, after the Contract forms, more in 
 
 use. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 tS-BBy I BSto,^e£roVy 
 elf I Bito^Welrov, 
 
 ££roV,\\£Bt£y 
 
 £lr(dv,\\£ir£9 
 
 £eriiaa/v. 
 
 £LtiJGaV, 
 
 Perf. and Plup. t£dy]X£. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 * See 'Note, page 103. 
 
 t See first Note, page 104. 
 
 :j: For TiSsQ/, by reason of the preceding S. See Rule ii. page 5. 
 
 ^ All verbs in /"/, from primifives in «w, are irregular in this tense, re- 
 taining the short vowel, and substituting c for the syllable 6t ; as, s?, 
 
Verbs in fJn-^Second Conjugation, 111 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ^iSet'YiVj y^gj yj \ yjlov^ yflyjv \ y;[ievj rile, yjoav^ and ev. 
 
 Perf. and PIiip. rEdrjxoiixi. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual Plural. 
 
 Q€L'yjv^ yjgj yj \ yjloVj yflYjv \ ri^iev^ yfle^ yjaavy and ev. 
 Is Fut. dyjaoiiit. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 nd'Of Yig, Yi 1 ntov, nrov \ ufxev^ nte, oau 
 
 Perf. and Plup. redyjxco. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Pres. and Imperf. ridevat. 
 Perf. and Pluperf. reOyjxevat, 
 2d Aor. delvai.^ 1st Fut. Brfleiv. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperf. Tr^O-f t$, elaa, ev. 
 Perf. and Pluperf. teOyjxcdg. 
 Second Aorist, d-eig, etcra, ev^ 
 First Future, driGcdv. 
 
 * V^erbs from primitives in mo change the short vowel into a diph- 
 thong in this tense. 
 
112 
 
 Verbs in fAi — Second Conjugation. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES IN THE ACTIVE 
 VOICE. 
 
 Pres. 
 Imper. 
 Perf. 
 Plup. 
 
 1st Ao.leOijKet 
 2d Ao. f^jjy 
 1st F. \6>}(rAf 
 
 Indie. I Imp. Opt 
 
 
 
 ^55 
 
 
 Subj. 
 
 
 Infin. I Part. 
 
 redijfcsvoii 
 
 rt&£ig 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 nde-ixaif crat,*7at | fiedov, adov, odov \ fieday afe, viae. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 etSe'iiYiv, GO* "to I (J-sdov^ adov, adriv \ [isda, (T^g, vh. 
 Perf. reOsiiiai. Plup. etedeijiriv. 
 1st Aor. eteSyjv 1st Fut. redyjaoiiaL. 
 Paulo-post Fut. redeKyoiiau 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 tiQe-aoif oBcd \ odov, adcyv \ ade^ adoaav. 
 Perf. and Plup. teOem. 1st Aor. redrflc 
 
 * See firet Note, page 106. 
 t See last Note, page 106. 
 
Ferbs in fju — Second Conjugation, 1 13 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Sing. Du.il. Plural. 
 
 tLdei-u'/iv, o, tOy I i^eOoVy aOov, adyjv \ f-isOaf oQe, vto. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect. 
 
 red-eif^yjv, do, slro \ eL[isdoVf eiadov^ ecadirv \ euieOa 
 
 [e'Lodsy elvro. 
 1st Aor. redfir.v. IsiFut. reOyjaoi^tyiv* 
 Paulo-post Fut. teQuiaoiur^v. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 reO-uuat, vj, nrat \ cdiieOovy rladov, r^aOov \ o^eda, naQsy 
 
 First Aorist, tedo^ 're%, &:c. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, mOFoBai. 
 Perfect and Pluperfect tsOdaOai. 
 1st Aor. teOraui. 1st Fut. red/iaeaOac. 
 Paulo-post Fut. reQecCEadau 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, rSenev-oq^ yjy ov. 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, redetuevog. 
 1st Aor. redstg. 1st Fut. redyiaoiievog. 
 Paulo-post Fut. redeicouevog. 
 11* 
 
114 
 
 Verbs in fit — Tliird Conjugation, 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE xMOODS AND TENSES IN THE PASSIVE 
 VOICE. 
 
 Indie. I Imp. f Opt. Subj. , Infin. j Part 
 
 Pres 
 Imp erf. 
 Perfect 
 Piup. 
 Paulo. 
 1st Ao. 
 1st Put 
 
 
 T£$ei(ro 
 r£&9)Tt 
 
 rt6£tf^rjV 
 
 T£Q£ir,V 
 
 r£$ai!^uifr£$£'i(r$a.t 
 r£&cS r£&rvc&t 
 
 rt6£fA,£Vog 
 
 red£i^syog 
 
 Te&eto-oy.£vog 
 r£&£i<i 
 r£67] 7g <y-$ui. r£$ii(rof^gvo^ 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 1st Aor. sdyixafiyjv. 1st Fut. dyjaoi.iaL* 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 sSe-^yiVf aoy^ro \ [xedov, adov, aOyjv \ [isOay ode^ vlo. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 Oe-ao, f crOo ] adov, adov | ads, adoaav. 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 
 * Ion. «9f3, Aft. 69» 
 t Ion. Bio^ Att. Sa, 
 
Verbs in f^t — Third Conjugation, 
 
 115 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 Qei'lLYlVi 0, ro | ^i^dov, oOoVy adyjv \ ueda, oOe, vlo. 
 1st Future, Qr^aoi^n^. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE, 
 
 Present and Imperfect like the Passive. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 [pvtai. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 2d Aor. deaOai. l^tFut. 6/iaeadai. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 2d Aor. Oe^ev-og, y;, ov. 1st Fut. Oyjao^vog. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF TP 
 
 1 Indie. 
 
 [E MOO 
 Imp. 
 
 DS AN] 
 VOICE 
 
 Opt. 
 
 [) TENSES 
 
 Subj. 
 
 IN THE MIDDLE 
 
 Iiifin. 1 Part. 
 
 Pres. 
 Imperf. 
 1st Ao. 
 2d Ao. 
 IstFut, 
 
 sri&£f^r,v y 
 
 
 
 
 
 THIRD COmUGATION. 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
116 
 
 Ferbs in fju — Third Conjugation, 
 
 Imperfect 
 Sing. Dual Plural. 
 
 Attic Imperfect, after the Contract forms, more 
 in use.* 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 ^hih-oov^ iVf osg, 8g, 08,S \ | 
 
 Perf. &5t>);^a, Pliip. eSeScdxetv. 
 
 Plural. 
 1st Aor. sScdxa. 
 
 Second Aorist.t 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 eS'OVf £§-6)$, eS'Cd I otov^ ot/jv \ oi.isv, ote, oaav. 
 First Fut. Smq. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 Pres. and Imperf. | 8180-61, to \ rovy^tov \ ^e, tocav. 
 
 Attic Present, after the Contract forms, more 
 in use. 
 
 StS'OS 
 
 6, 
 
 Sing. 
 oet(o,\ 
 
 Plural. 
 
 iftQ. 
 
 oste. 
 
 ostQrsav, 
 
 Dual. 
 
 \0£r0V, 1 OStQV, 
 
 j irovf I Sruv, 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, SsScdxs. 
 
 Sing, Dual. Plural. 
 
 Second Aor. | So-g,t tto, | tov^ tcdv \ te, t(^aav. 
 
 ♦ See Note, page 103. 
 
 t See first Note, page 104. 
 
 iftTo? is irregular for cToQ/. This verb is itself irregular throughout, in 
 this tenge, using o for a. 
 
Verbs in fit, — Third Conjugation, 117 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 Perf. and Plup. Sehuxoi^t. ^ e frtl fit i ^ 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural, 
 
 f^.Oi'yjVy yjg^ yj \ yjrov, yjtyiv \ y;fieVf "/ite^ yjcyav & er. 
 
 1st Fut. Suaoifjii. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural 
 
 Perfect and Pluperf. SeSoxu. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 S'COf oigj 9 I orovy orov | ofisv^ ortef Mu 
 
 t 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, hthovau 
 Perfect and Pluperf hhoxp.vai. 
 2d Aor. Sfivau* 1st Fut. hc^eiv. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, hi^-nc^ Sera, ov. 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, &5G}%)g. 
 Second Aorist, 5-»g, 9cra, ov. 
 First Future, hoa^jv. 
 
 * h^ufAt only has a diphthong in this tense. 
 
118 
 
 Verbs in fxi — Third Conjugation, 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES IN THE ACTIVI 
 VOICE. 
 
 Present 
 Imperfect 
 Perfect 
 Pluperfect 
 1st Aorist 
 2d Aorist 
 1st Future 
 
 Indie, jimper. 
 
 MdKA 
 
 (Tec 
 
 Opt. 
 
 
 Subj, 
 
 SiJ'aiKai) 
 
 Infin. 
 
 iovveit 
 
 Part. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 SiSo-fiaiy aatf^ T'at | (ledoVf odovy aSov \ ^eda^ crfc, vlat 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ehiho'^Ylv^ ooy^ ro \ fiedov^ oOovy adyjv \ fieOa, oOcf vlo 
 
 Perf. ^sSouac. Plnperf. eSeSofiriV. 
 1st Aor. eSoOyjv. 1st Fiit. Sodyjaoiiai. 
 Paulo-post Fut. SsSoaoiiai. 
 
 IMPEATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect* 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 StSo-crojt 060 I adoVf adov | cde^ aOoaav. 
 Perf. and Plup. 8eSoao. 1st Aor. Sodriri. 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 StSoc'^yjv, 0, to I litedovy aOoVy oQyiv \ fieday cde, vlo. 
 
 ♦ See first Note page 106. 
 t See last Note, page 106. 
 
J^erbs m y.i. — Third Conjugation. 
 
 iiy 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, 
 Sing. Dnal. Plural. 
 
 SsS'OLfiviVj oloj otro I oifiedovj oiaOoVf oladyjv \ oifieOa. 
 
 [oujOej oivlo. 
 First Aor. Sodstnv. First Fut. hodnaoL^Yiv. 
 Paulo-post Fut. hehoaoL^Yiv. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 Sing Dual. Plural. 
 
 M'O^uaif o, QTat I uuedovj oaOov, oadov \ of^eOa, oaOsy 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural, 
 
 [covlat* 
 First Aorist, So^cj. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, SlSog^c. 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, SeSoa^i. 
 1st Aor. So^^vai. 1st Fut. So.^yjaea^L, 
 Paulo-post Fut. SeSoaea^i. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, StSoiiev-ogy yj, ov. 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, 8eSou£Pog. 
 1st Aor. So^eig. 1st Fut. So^aouEvog. 
 Paulo-post Fut. S^Soao^evog* 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES IN THE PASSIVE 
 VOICE. 
 
 Indie. I Imp. 1 Opt. [ Subj. Infin. Part. 
 
 Pres. 
 Imp. 
 Perf. 
 
 Pinp. 
 
 PdU. 
 
 l3t Ao. ?/oS«y J^a(«T/ 
 
 Ist Fa-MNrojU^ti ^ 
 
 
 
 (fiS'sfAivoe 
 
 
 Iff 
 
i:zKj y eras in fill — j.mra conjugation* 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 Present and ) 
 Imperfect, j^^^ 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 in the Passive. 
 
 First Aorist, sSoxafiyjVj sSqxOj &c. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 eSo'fiyjVf ao,* to \ [ledov^ adov^ odyjv | fteOa, crfc, vlo. 
 First Flit. Soaoixat. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 hoi-iiYiv, o, to I [isOov, adovy adriv j ^da^ ade, vlo. 
 First Fut. h(jy(50iiiYiv. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 2-5]uat, 6, orat j Q[i6doVf uadov, oadov \ Q^Sa, oxjOf^ 
 
 • h.n. iS'oo, Att. iS^a. 
 t Ion tToo. Att. «r». 
 
Ve7^bs m fjn — Fourth Conjugation, If I 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 2d Aor. hoadai. 1st Fut. hi^eaQau 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 2d Aor. Souevog. 1st Fut. SuOouevog. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES IN THE MIDDLE 
 VOICE. 
 
 J 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Imp. Opt. Subj. 
 
 Pies. 
 Imp. 
 2d Ao. £^of<*]v 
 
 1st F. ! ^(nfO'dfA.Otl 
 
 1 St Ao. I e^aKotf^v 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Part. 
 
 
 
 FOURTH COKJUGATIOK. 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 ^evyv'VfiLj vg^ vat \ vrov^ vtov | v^ev^ vre, xxTu 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Sin<r. Dual. Plural. 
 
 e(£vyv-vi^^ vg^ v | vrov^ vrriV \ v^iev^ vre^ vaav. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. D -al. Plural, 
 
 ^evyvv'dij ro | rov, rov \ re, roaav, 
 
 12 
 
122 Verbs in yj — Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present, ^ivyvvvctt, 
 
 PARTICIPLE, 
 
 Present, ^svywq, Zc-u, w, 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES IN THE ACTIVE 
 VOICE. 
 
 Indie. Imp. Infin. Part. 
 
 fmp3' 1 ?{evyZ' \ I ^'"''''^' I ^^"^^'^^' I ^'''''''' 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 s^evyW'ijLyiVy co^ no \ [isdov^ aQov^ adriv \ [leOay gOs, vlo. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ^evyvv-ao^ add | odovf adov | crfc, oOcjaav. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 Present ^evyvv<r6cct, 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present, ^evyvvf^ivci. 
 
Irregular Verbs in fjn. 12i3 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES IN THE PASSIVE 
 VOICE. 
 
 Present, 
 Imperf. 
 
 Indie. Imp. Infin. Part. 
 
 
 (^evyvvra 
 
 ^euyWT&xi 
 
 ^evyvvfievcq 
 
 Irregular or Defective Verbs in (.a 
 
 may be divided into Three Classes, each con- 
 taining three verbs. 
 
 I. From €u are derived eii^t, to be ; ec^i^ and iyi- 
 [II, to go. 
 
 II. From 8o are derived lyj[iif to send ; yjuat, to 
 sit ; 8Li.tai, to clothe oneself. 
 
 III. layifiLj to know ; <?)>7/w(, to say ; xeiixai^ \o lie 
 down. 
 
 CLASS I. 
 1. eiiii, to be, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ei[ii9 fc$, or St, edit \ ealov, ealov | eai^evy eals, etai. 
 
 Imperfect 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 37^5 >7$>57r>?^? Att.j j yjrovyr^tyjv \ yj^isv.yjre^r.aav. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 yjuriV, yjao, yjro | yjfiedov, riodov, yjadyjv \ r.^ie^a, yjaOe, 
 
 [yjvIo. 
 
3 24 Irregular Verbs in f^t. 
 
 Future. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ea'Of.iah'(i, elaLj(B^ai) \ ofieOov^ eodov, saOov | ofisda^ 
 
 [eodey ovlat, 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ladi, eadiy or ecroj ecrJcj | ealov^ sgIqv | eals^ealoaav. 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 G^yjVf ft>y$, etyj j eiyjloVy siyjlyjv \ eiyifievy eiyjlef etyiCav^ 
 
 Future. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 raoL'^yiVy eaoi'O^ egol-Io | ^edovy adov^ adyjv | iisda^ aOsy 
 
 [v7o. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Sing. Dual. f Plural, 
 
 Present, o), rig^ ri \ yjtov, yjrov fotieVf or^ , Ml. 
 
 Future. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 [ovlat. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present, sivau Future eaeadau 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present, qv^ acra, ov. Future, eaoiievog, 
 2. Eci^Ly to go. 
 
Irregular Verbs in fA,u 125 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ^iliif eig or ei, etCi \ trov, trov \ mv, cre^ etaty or kJc. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 £tVf e6g, €t I iTov, Ltriv \ ixLev utSy taav. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 aX'SLVj etg, el \ eutov^ etryiv \ eiuev^ eutSj eix^av* 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 ioVf tegy t£ I isrov. leryjv \ uofieVf tetSf lov, 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present, 
 i^t,, or ei tro | trov, vt(Siv \ tue^ I'toaav. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 toiiu, torg, tot, | LoutoVy Lotryiv \ tot^eVf voute^ lolsv. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Pres. gti^at or cvac. 2(1 Aor. iiiVf t«cra, ioi\ 
 
 Middle Voice, — indicative mood. 
 Perfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural, 
 
 fia, Etac, et8 \ eiarov^ eiwvov \ eiauevy ecats^ eiMu 
 12* 
 
^2o Irregular Verbs in (^i, 
 
 Phiperfect.*^ 
 
 I * or Yiuevy rfte^ riaav, 
 
 1st A or. euyaiiyjv. 1st Fut. aaafiar. 
 
 3. lyjui^ to go. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 iyj[iij tyjgy tyjat \ isrov^ isrov | loi^evy terte^ mat. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I • I — — leaav. 
 
 OITATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I^IYI I I 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present, iBvai. Present, tetg, uevi^og. 
 
 Middle Voice. — indicative mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 le-fiat, aaiy tat \ [leOoVf adovy odov \ /ueOa, afc, viae. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 le-firtV, aoy to I fiedoVf adov, odyjv \ fieOay ads, vro. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present, tJeao, ceadQ. Present, i^^ev^-og^ 97, or. 
 
 CLASS II. 
 1. "lyyut, to send, has scarcely any irregularities, 
 but it is declined like rtdrjut. It will be sufficient 
 to give the first person of each tense. 
 
 ♦ Imperfect, among the Attics. 
 
Irregular Verbs in (m. 12? 
 
 Active Voice — indicative mood. 
 
 Present, Irniu Imperfect, hnv. 
 
 Perfect, kxa. Pluperfect, kx^v. 
 
 1st Aor. iQ;ca. 2d Aor. liV. 1st Fut. ^cro, 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Pres. and Imp. hOt. Perf. and Pliip. uxc, 
 1st Aor. rixov. 2d Aor. eg, 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Pres. and Imp. leiYiv. Perf and PI up. iixoLut. 
 2d Aor. iir^v. 1st Fut. i]crotf^^ ' 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Pres. and Imp. h, Perf. and PI up. hkq. 
 2d Aor. V. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Pres. and Imp. Uvai. Perf. and Plup. kxevai, 
 2d Aor. iivat. 1st Fut. ^^aai^. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Pres. and Imp. leig. Perf. and Plup. iixog. 
 2d Aor. kg. 1st Fut. ?;(TLjr. 
 
 Passive Voice, — indicatiae mood. 
 
 Present, huac. Imperfect, ^a>?v. 
 
 Perfect, kltat. Pluperfect, kurjp. 
 
 1st Aor. iOrv^ (kdviv) 1st Fut. eOriao^iau 
 Paulo-post Fut. kaoiiau 
 
 imperative. 
 
 Pres and Imp. Uco^ (h.) Perf. and Plu. k<yo. 
 1st Aor. eOnlL. 
 
128 Irregular Verbs in f^i. 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 Pres. and Imp. htiiyjv. Perf. and Plup. iiiiyiv. 
 1st Aor. edELyjv. 1st Fut. idyjGOi^yjv. 
 Paulo-post Fut. iiaoi^yiv. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Pres. and Imp. udfiai. Perf. and Plup. coLiat. 
 1st Aor. idu. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Pres. and Imp. Uadai. Perf. and Plup. kadai. 
 1st Aor. idyjvat. 1st Fut. idyjaeadau 
 Paulo-post Fut. iiGeadai. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Pres. and Imp. le[ievog. Perf and Plup. k[j.8Vog. 
 1st i\or. tdeig, 1st F. idyjgoiievog. 
 Paulo-post Fut. 8Lao[i£vog. 
 
 Middle Voice — indicative mood. 
 
 Present and Imperfect, like the Passive. 
 1st Aor. rixafiYiv. 2d A. ii[iriV. 1st F. riCro,aai 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 2d Aor. fc-co, ("s.) 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 2d Aor. £tf^>7i/. 1st Fut. ^aoi^nv. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 2cl Aor. Vf^at. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 2d Aor. taQai. 1st Fut. {\asadai. 
 
 i 
 
Irregular Verbs in jbLi, 129 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 2d Aor. ifievog. 1st Fut. icofisvog, 
 2. 'H//OU, to sit. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 Yiiiaty riOaLy J^rat | /jf^e^r, io^op, Ip^v \ (i^3a, ?]cr3e, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Yiiir^v, {jcTo, JjTo I Yil^dovy ^y;adoVj ^cQyiv \ 'yjfiEQa^ 'r,aQe, 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 INFINITIVE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Pres. ^rja^L. Pres. 'yjixev-og, >7, or. 
 
 S. iiiiai, to put on. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Perfect. 
 
 ii(iai9 i^yoLtj hratj I — kvT'ai. 
 
 & icalat I 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 BLflYlV^ €t(TOj & iCGO 
 
 eiloj icalOf halo & iolo 
 
 I biVtO 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 SL(Ta[j.yjVy iaaafiyjVj 
 
130 Irregular Verbs in fit. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present and Perfect, itfisvog. 
 First Aorist, iaoaueveg. 
 
 CLASS III. 
 1. K£L[iai9 to lie down. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 xei-iiouy aaif lai \ fxe^ov^ a'^v^ a'^ov \ /ue^a, cr^f, vlau 
 
 Imperfect. 
 £)C£L'fiyjVj aoy TO I [xe^ov, a^Vf a^yjv | fie3a, cr^^, vlo. 
 
 First Future. 
 x£Ky'0[iaiy % etat | | 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 9ceL(yoj xeuy^ \ xeiO^v^ xsta^cdv \ k eca^s, xeta^aav, 
 
 OPTATIVE 
 
 Present 
 X60i-[iyjVy Oj'to \ I — — 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 xsKJCdi^ai^ — I I 
 
 INPINITIVE. PARTICIPLE* 
 
 Pres. x6lo^l.. Pres. xciiiev-oc,, rj^ ov. 
 
Irregular Verbs itifu. 131 
 
 2. hrjfit, to know. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Du.il. Plural 
 
 or rov^ i:ov 
 
 or (j,ei^ 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 bd-r^Vj Yig^ yj \ arjVf aTr^v | a^ev^ ate, aaav & av. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 4(T-a0t &L Ol, alio I alov & lop, alcov ale & 7^, alucfav, 
 
 &; 7u I &?tji'. 7c*xTai & 7ui^. 
 
 NFINITIVE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Pres. Loavau Prcs. tca-g^Ga-v* 
 
 Middle Voice^ — iNf)iCATivE mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing Dual. Plural. 
 
 tcra-^at, cat, rat | /u^S^r, a3or, a^v I /i/f^, a^f , ^'7at. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 iCa-fiyjVj aoy ro | fie^Vf a^v^ o^v \ ff^Sa, a^e, vlo. 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Pres. LGo/j^t. Pres. taane-vog, yjy ov. 
 
 3. ^yjui^ to say. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural, 
 
 ^//f, (^rig, (pyjCi \ ^atov^ (parov \ ^[tev^ cpare^ ^acri.* 
 
 * B ;:■' present and imperfect tenses the P is frequently dropped by 
 Homer, and Attic writers ; thus, tj/xi t^c^ ti<ri^ «v,«?, «. 
 
132 Irregular Verbs in /i*/. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 £(p-yjVy yjg^ yj | atoVf atyjv \ a[i£P, ats^ aaa/p. 
 
 First Future. 
 ^Yja-Q^ ft$, 86 } STOP 9 erov I 0[i€Vf etSy ovai. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 s^'yjVj Yig^ yj \ yjrov, yjrr.v \ yj[A£Vf Yite^ r^aav. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Uri ATlVKt 
 
 Present. 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ^L'YIV, yji, )? 
 
 )7To^, yjryjv 
 
 IJ.EV9 re and ev 
 
 First Aorist. 
 ^yiG-atfiLj aig, at \ avtovy aurriv \ ai[^i€v, aite, atsv. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE, 
 
 Present. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present^ (pavau 1st Fut. ^astv. 
 
 IstAor. ^aai. 2d Aor. ^yjvau 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present, <^a$, <^aoa, ^i'. 
 
 1st Fut. ^>7a(ji^, 1st Aor, ^yjooLg. 
 
Irregular Verbs* 13*^ 
 
 Passive Voice, 
 
 INDICATIVE. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Perfect, Tte^arat. Tiecpao^u. 
 
 INriNITlVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Perfect, TtecpM^i. 7te^cr^ev-og, >;, ov. 
 
 Middle Voice— INDICATIVE mood. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Pinral. 
 
 €(pa-UYiv^aojlo \ a[iedoVyaadov,(xxj6yjv \ aii£OajaaOe,vlo, 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present, <paG^L. 2(1 Aor. <paa^i, 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present, ^iiev-og, 97, ov. 
 
 GENERAL LIST OF IRREGULAR OR ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 There are few Verbs in the Greek language, which can 
 be regularly conjugated in all their Moods and Tenses. 
 Some of these deficiencies may be traced to the principle of 
 harmony : of others, vain is the attempt to investigate the 
 causes. Defective terms are supplied either from obso- 
 lete forms of the same Verbs, or from some other Verbs in 
 use.* To assist the learner in tracing these tenses to their 
 respective Themes or Roots, the following list has been com- 
 piled. It consists of analogies, as far as they can be appUed 
 to any species of Verbs ; but in general it contains the par* 
 ticular formation of each tense in common use. 
 
 Of the following Verbs, those which are used only in the 
 Present and Imperfect, will be found in the first column 5 
 
 ♦ Such is the ca^e in some Lntin Verbs. Thus ferio is used only in 
 the tenses formed from the Present, and borrows the Perfect and Supine, 
 and Die tenses formed from them, from percuHo. 
 
 13 
 
134 
 
 Irregular Verbs. 
 
 the next will contain the obsolete Roots, followed by the 
 Tenses, which are formed from them. 
 
 etAft^A', 9}Mv<rcc, '^>jvufMV & i)Xexfir,y by SynCOpe. 
 
 tfcAg»<i;, efcAf|cCjM,J?y. 
 
 flcAf|f<y, «Ae|>7<rto. 
 
 etA^ft', ocA/cta;, jyAlxac. 
 
 u>ioMy ocAa/C-o;, ciXujTouMi, <ii><a>'^c6i v^^iOfKoc, ri>.afjLcti» 
 
 ufA^upTeeo juu.it prytTCD, u/i<.xpT9}<rofA,ctt, TifUtorr^Tot^ fjf^otp- 
 rrjKoc, rifA.ce.pTyif^ui ^ r^f^^ccprov. 
 Poet. rifj£poroy. 
 
 uyxycif^ Tiyxyov, y,yuyof^r,y^ 
 
 / uoeay xoyjTco rjOTiKX, rjOoy^ f«Jtfc.| 
 
 ctAg|a;, 
 
 i^Aiv^fft; 
 «6A<c*;c4', 
 
 utA,upTuva 
 
 ciifjC*iXi(r/M 
 
 ' avdyyfw, imp. j;v<yyovV, uiaytjccif. 
 
 avayf}fjny Imper. ctyodyy^Qi and uvcoz^i. 
 
 up£A>, upstrcoi upecouxt, yipe^u^ Vjpscraf^Tiv , rjpsG-Oi^v, 
 
 '^vatyx, 
 
 UpSTKOi}^ 
 
 
 * ct>», to irert.V, conjugated with the Djgamma, F^t^a, forms sFat|«, 
 feF«t;v^at, sFat^/Cv. But as the Digamma is seldom expressed in writing, 
 1!h words will be «£«§*, «*;)(;.*, 5£t)^ov. 
 
 t This seems to be put for €F«tJk. That wcTa had the Digamma ap" 
 pears trom iCxJ^ij Odyss, XVI. 28. 
 
Irregular Verbs. 
 
 135 
 
 I (iiQiiCLsct, Qe^ocu, 2d F. ^uf^cci. 
 
 I ^iQxco, Part Pres. ^i^av. 
 
 . i3;^jj/u./, 2d A. f^rv,Part. Pres. P;«rt^. 
 
 |3A;;jtu, f/3A3j»7 2d A. Opt. M. /3A£io. 
 
 ^XcCTJiOfy toAaC'7»5f7"6/, iZ?\ctcrlnK<ty ibAflcr/ox. 
 
 i j3oa>. l2t>fT£jy (ieQii;KcCy 
 
 /ZovXeM, (iovX9]TofM.i, fie^ovXvf^uct, e^ov>^,6r,v. 
 
 C spotty /3/>6xr<y. ^ 
 
 ^^ l^pof^ty i^pm. 
 
 ^i^p^TK<., \^^Q^^Q^^ ^tQpu>hna. 
 
 yu(A,iMy 
 
 ytyoLfJUiifJLet' y cyxftiiBijv, 
 
 ysyccfuijKU, 
 
 \ ynpc^»>> 
 
 yvpUG-Afy eyrpuG-Xy yeyt}pXK'(, 
 
 
 \ ynpr^f^. 
 
 h\t\ Pr. yrpxvxiy Part, yrptt^* 
 
 
 yin&! , 
 
 ytviio-i/xui, eyevzo-xu-Kv, yeyer^fud: 
 £yBvou.y,v, ytyovx. 
 
 (y^V/iC'/^v. 
 
 yetvi-Jf 
 
 (yetfxy^r.v. 
 
 
 yxu. 
 
 yeyxx. 
 
 
 yvou. 
 
 yvMTof, yvuFcfAxi, eyvuxu. cyvA>c'/^xt^ 
 yvAfs-&r,G-ofA.Xi* 
 
 fyvtyr^jrv, 
 
 yvftifti, 
 
 eyjiov. 
 
 
 axiio^ ^xy^fra^ cxviCof^xi^ ^io'x^y.x, e^xr^v^ dit\u. 
 
 . * The ancient Greeks and old Attics wrote ytyvcf-isit ar.J ytyvoca-Kui : 
 itheraore modern writers softened those words into yivoy.nt and yivu<rKo. 
 
136 
 
 Irregular Verbs. 
 
 to divide. ^ ^s^cct/^ui, 
 
 ^iiK S hihfA.t, Imper. hth&i, eht^iTot, 
 
 h^:^ccxcc, ) 
 
 h^pcila^ ^ ^pvifjn, s^pm. 
 
 ^octO'afA.on^ £^oxTot>{A.y,v y Syn. £^oetf^'A^. 
 avvrjTofA.ttty f^vv9io'eein.'>tv, ^f^Wjjiittfei, £$'vyii$n9. 
 
 ^vToj^ ^u^ofA.cci'i h^vy^^ h^vcTf^Ut. 
 
 £^VV. 
 
 h^:^ccxc^, ) 
 
 h^pci^a, I , 
 
 Po.Ax,r.., (. ""'"' 
 d£do>ci}Ka, J ' 
 
 *'* f £hu^ e^jjxflt, f^£r^3jv, £^7;^ct, 
 
 siTMy f ffJfo;, £t^r,crui £l^Woty f/^»jxa, Plup. TihiV. 
 
 et^ov, t^ov, ^ £i^93f>L^, Pr. Opt. £ihtt}v. Inf. £iS'svut. 
 
 £tpa^ { £p£6f, £pv^rofA.9Cly etpijKOt^ £lp7jfA.Ul') £lpi]6i}V, pYthfTOfAUt^ 
 
 SpotJLOtly \ £tp£6)y £tp7}0-of^X(. 
 
 £fpa), £f>p£a^ eppy^^i^-, iippvjo-x. 
 
 £pudcicivej, ipv6£M, £pv$v}<ra>. 
 
 * The origin of this verb is saoj. Hence three forms are derived ; the 
 Boeotic, «AJt»; the ^olic, sActya; and the Doric, skavvw, 
 
 i In this tense <r is frequently dropped and the Contract fojDQ i? 
 adopted : thus, ^v^j, «a??j <a?. E^^-a; comes from sv^a. 
 
Irregular Verbs. 
 
 
 iXivQoi^ 
 
 
 
 £>i=uTfli^xt, vjXsvTot,^ 5jAi/^«y, Syn. ;jA^<5Vj Peri, 
 see last page. 
 
 f^x(, euO£&i]V, evpe&'/jfrof^^t^ eupov, eCpof^.v, 
 ^yj^'^^'i o'X^'^^M^^y s^x^/y-x, i'^X/^f^cci-i etr^s^KVi 
 
 2d A. Imper. o-xei' 
 
 
 
 H. 
 
 Hc6C5"x«y, rj^acaj r^^rjCii;, Tjcr.Coc^ti^rtKOt. 
 
 
 
 ^OpVVCe), 
 
 0. 
 
 h?^£a, e£X/iTa^ £$£X7)roC, T£9£>0JKCC. 
 
 O^OiUy t'.Qvr.KU.., TtC'VCtX^ TsSv-lKnC &- TihilX. 
 
 ^V«, f^aevOV, 2d F. M. $0CV6fJLX,i, 
 
 rc9vi;K3J^ T£9vr.^6i, r£6y7i^oti,at, 
 
 r£$vr,<A.i, Pres. Imper. tj^^^;, Opt. reCvan^v^ InUu. 
 T-evuitect^ Particip. nhx^y 2d Aoi 
 
 £dVi}V, 
 
 6cp£U', ^OpTjTCJ^ id^pOVf 
 
 'Idpv'ioi^ 
 
 \aovx^ 
 
 
 l^pV'JL'/,. 
 
 i^CiVMy 
 
 
 
 
 tSvva, 
 
 iSva, 
 
 t9VTU^ l9vTA. 
 
 
 ^^HiOj^tl'-k 
 
 
 lf,of/.xt, i^xfioiVi 'y.Atst;, ix«tt>;v« 
 13* 
 
 
138 
 
 Irregular Verbs, 
 
 
 
 [ 'iXyif^i , 
 
 x,spuv 
 
 xepocvvvf^i 
 
 xipviJM-i 
 
 f xepsca, 
 
 C iCpXOf, 
 
 >CXpKCCtp<'\ 
 
 Kipoonvu^ 
 xexep^xx.^, 
 
 XlXOiVOf, 
 
 
 iXetOi, Pr. M. Ixoif^ai. 
 K. 
 
 xepoiG-M^ £K£potTct, stii ficco'ociiiijv , x£OccT0r,a-ou,xt. 
 
 Xpoi(r6f,XSXpXKX, XEKpxpCXt, eXpOC&iiV XpX^ijiTC- 
 
 f^xt. 
 
 xsplijerui^ x£ poy.TOf^xi ^ ixsp^ij<rx, xixspotjxa. 
 
 xXay'^6), 
 xsxXuyXoc^ 
 
 xXxlOi^ 
 
 xXxva-a, 
 xskXxvxx, 
 
 kXvci}, 
 ''.opsyyva, 
 
 X6pinVf>(.t, 
 
 y^psfA.ocnsoci)^ 
 •rtpi^^yyvfjLt^ 
 
 xrev6)^ 
 ayJTuxu^ 
 
 y.vXiv^co, 
 
 xXr^76f, Perf. M. xexXTjysc. 
 
 xXxteof^ xXxiy^Tco* 
 
 xXvf4,i, Imper. xXvdi & xexXvdi. 
 
 * xope(»), xopecr&f sxnoerx^ ex6pi(raiu,7}v, xexcp-^xu, xexo- 
 
 I pyjfJLXl' 6X0D£T&yiv. 
 
 ' xpefA.xcO'j xpef^x<ra, exp^f^uru^ expeptxcrxf^m ^ expet^MO->r 
 
 xDeptt}/LLt , xpepcxf^xt . 
 
 r xTJjjM./, sxTy,v, 2d A. M. txTuitA.yjV, Inf. XTcLO-dxtf 
 f Part. xrxf^ivoS' 
 
 I xjuXi&f, xvXi^ca, 
 
 ' xvXiVGea^ KvXi)i07)a-6). 
 
 Ax*//<ci)iM^ 
 
 S ^^'X^i 
 
 ii^xh i^scx^v, Perf. M. Xskoyx'^' 
 
Irre$[ular Verbs. 
 
 K 
 
 
 AfA;4,M.eyflc. 
 
 Imp. fAjj^dV, A>;5-a;, XtjG-of^coci , MXWfA.xt^ 
 
 /tuAfO/, 
 IJuXXiOiy 
 
 M. 
 l^u.$i}croiLc»t , £f^ct6930'x[j(.i!y, f^s^t»6yjKU, £/:4,»B-oy. 
 
 |t4i5C;i:i>j<«<'<di, 2d F. f<.a{;^jot;ft«/. 
 
 f4iXr,caf, efJLeXy,c-ot[^r,y^ ii4.£U£Xkkcc, fJL£f4,s Xr^fji^^t 
 
 & fj(.£fA.^XrfA.o(,i^ £fMXri$i}V, fjiAfAjv, ftsiLcyiXx, 
 f^£XXt)Tu^ £M.£XXr)Toc. 
 
 fUfJLl^6fJLSCly ff^t^BliVj "iJd A. i^. f/krf- 
 
 yjjy, f*.iyvjTciJUtt, 
 
 f^Vt)(r0, fjLiWOM^i, £(^yncroC, £fAyfj'7Xf4,>ii, f^fd.' 
 
 vtjf^aty £fiLyvi<r6nv, fA.i7iTdyi(rofMlt: 
 
 H-opyof, f^p^M, £fMp^xy.ijv. 
 
 f^£f^vy.x. 
 
 i 
 
 ) y^vKctcjj 
 
 y.VK7}<rat, 
 
 tf^VKCVy 
 
 s 
 
 ) 
 
 N 
 
 Nfl6/6i, 
 
 
 yccMy 
 
 IJXTcliCSCi^ £VXTCC fVCOVCCIMiV , evoCT^,v. 
 
 
 
 o^ec^ecj, 
 
 o. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 PcrfM. 
 
 ado. 
 
 > »^f^, 
 
 O^f C-a; & 0^7)TCJ, u^sccc. 
 
 ot^octvM, 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 > of^fo;, 
 
 0lOViT6J. UOY^roL UO Y.&L. 
 
 
 
 > Ot£COy 
 
 otijToy^eci Ctjvjfjuct eur^T^v, 
 
 tt^oy^cit 
 
 
 
 olX-K-^ofAMt. a;;^J?«flC, ^X^^f^^y 
 
 %<\k oj^oyr.v 
 
 tt'^ay^ce, , 
 
 * This verb is chieily used as an Ijjjpersonal. 
 
140 
 
 Irregular Verbs, 
 
 oWVM . 
 
 > e>ilT9£6f, cjXltr6i)Tot aXtT^tjKci. c^XlTddt 6>?itG-67iV. 
 
 0f^9»y 
 
 cXscra, aXe<:-cc^ oiXiKX <>.i:T$yjv atXev^ <yA«ft^y, 
 
 co'^'ppxoiciAaiy oo-^psuy oc-^pifTofAXt. as-(ppofJLriV, 
 
 c<pXu f e^3<A5A», «^ffAjj?rA», <w^g<A«?»flC, atpitXov & ft^^fAtfV, 
 
 iTK0C)l6if, J 
 
 } OVie*^ 
 
 
 e(pXeti, «<pX7)^6t MpXtiKcc, 
 
 Tfr.Safj 
 
 YlATXtOy 
 
 pvetcf, \ 
 
 TTipV 
 7r£pViJ,U.l 
 
 'x-iTTfiec 
 
 TTpl 
 
 TTrjY 
 
 
 rXyifjLt. \ TfXcca 
 
 
 n. 
 
 iT£tc-Gu,ett, Boeot. for TniG-ofioci , tTTOcQKCrff! ^ 
 £7r/>i.0ov, 
 
 7rev06fy Perf. M. TTeTTov^et & 'xsTToTBet, 
 
 yreptccJ* Syn. yrpxaf^ Trpoto-af^ TreTrpXKu^ 7r£7rpu,U'^fy 
 :ir£Tpx(r6fA/ict) eTrpxB^it, 7rpx^y}(r6fA^i, 
 
 TTsTTTu^ TTc-^&i, e7r£'4^a, 7r£7r=.U.,tOCl, £K£(p6'y. 
 
 TZiTxra^ £'X£rxToL^ TreTTertftXflt & '7T£7e'ray.a.^ 
 
 7r£7rrxTfA.xi\ £7r£7rrx7&^, 
 ^y^l^y, fTTj^l^, £7rTn^u,f^yp) , TrsTsrr.Xx^ £7raz^rv, 
 £'7rxyYj\^ wxyYirou-ziy 7fr£7rriyx. 
 
 TTCOTCO 7r£7rUi('X^ TTcTrmtLXl & ttbtoumi, 
 
 £7ro&r^v 
 
 PreS. M. TTtOl^tOCt^ TriTof^Xl^ STTiOV, 2(3 F . M. 
 
 Imp. TrtBi. 
 
 
 £7r£a'x, £7re(rxu7]v, sTre^ov, 2d ]P, M. tts- 
 
 C^fA,Xt» 
 
 * Ilepitci', to pass Irrto another country ; -mpv-ia)^ &c. to pass for the 
 purpose of selling ; 'Troistucti^ in the Middle Voice, to buy a person, or 
 t^iJD^, brought from another country. 
 
irregular verbs. 
 
 ^Tccpvvftect, ^Tcilpci, iTTTacpov, 
 
 ^vy6otioiJLui, Tsvio), 7revc-of4.xti ^e?rv(rfMi, e7rv0A^tiV, ^v6^fMt, 
 
 peof, 
 
 pofyvv^fy 
 pavvvf^tj 
 
 ipya. 
 
 1 hy^y 
 
 P. 
 
 Att. tp^a^, fpl^j, Perf. M. upyoc^ 
 
 pvr,(ra>y pvr^rofiect^ iopvfix,ec epovi^v, 
 p>}lo^, epDV^oCi epc7!^uf4,i^v , tppnyecin epfayu^ tp- 
 pstyrjv, pocyvo-o/Axt* 
 
 pUTAfy eppOfO-X, eppUKU, ipptttptXi^ (pp6tdi}V, 
 
 
 
 CxPlflfd;, 1st A. iO-K7J?iX^ €CKXyiy.u. 
 
 TK^yj/Ut^ Pr. Inf. O-K^f^vett. 
 
 Sk S'ccv ' i o-Kt^xo), s<rKc^xTUi eo-xe^acG-itotti e<rx6^ecv6rjy» 
 
 ^tpiG-o) ^ Tsprira), ^^pnirofJLXt^ irepSG-x, 
 
 X^TfV^A/, 
 
 'LnpiG-KM^ ^epeoj^ 
 
 "ZTopevyVM, i 
 
 ^ropyvf^i, y 
 
 ^TPMVyVM^ f 
 
 > 9poa, 
 
 Z^TpMVyVjKl, y ' 
 
 TiTgy.TKXi ) 
 
 S-opiG-ofy e^opea-eCy £?-op£0-ccf^r^v. 
 
 S'pevG-a)^ e^pofTcc, (9pMTccu>r^yy erpapcect. 
 
 See £X(^' 
 T. 
 
 rf^ryu), rf^yj^a' rsrfMjicx, T£rf/j)}/^xi ^ erpttjBry, erpcotyov, 
 
 * rit/.va) and tauvu a're both found ; the fornoer derived from rs^.a; the 
 latter, from rufxu^ Hence the 2d Aorist is either sTeuo? or sT-ti«9v. 
 
rtrpxciy } rpocuij rpriTuiy erpr^rcc, rerpinfAM.iy erpt^6rjv. 
 
 rtrprif/.ty ^ rtrpcctvM, 1st A. ertrpTjvoc. 
 
 rirpoiCKMy rpouiy r^wcrw, rptnTof^uiy eTpuiCcc, rerpuijuLtU^ erpu- 
 BujVy rpui^TiTajLLxu 
 
 ^P^^^i ) ^pSf^M, e^petfJLOy, 2d F. M. ^pXfMfJLXty h^p6f^0S., 
 
 irpuyovy \ ^'^y*^* (pctr/e>y.u,ty 2d F. (pjcyouH-^t, tpctyov. 
 
 C rv^euy rvxrio-uiy trvy;riToL^ nrv^rKse,. 
 
 'Fvy^ttyi^^ / TBv^uiy Tsv^oftat^ TfTgt;%<c, TfTt/yftaj/, rsTv^cf^At, 
 
 
 ^Ct^Ki^y 
 
 ^£pU)y 
 
 0CCVUiy 
 
 iVtyKCi/y 
 
 tiiicuiy 
 
 (pOpiOiy 
 
 \,0P9^fA.ty 
 
 I 0&Oti>iy 
 
 fri<pVKC6y ) 
 
 oto'iOy otToptXty ot^&vv^ oio-$7ifroiiuii, 
 
 1st A. ^yg^-yflC, T^vsyKccpcrvy Jjvfp/^j^y, 5jy£y»dv, 
 
 T^VSyiCOpLT])!. 
 
 1st A. 9^£txMy o/jvetxc^pcYiv^ svfjvsyptcc; , r9ex^*i^' 
 Per. (vrv^X^' 
 
 ^oPT^TMy e^oOfjToty 7re(poprpoce.ty Syn. ^/^fo, 
 Opta-cdy &LC, 
 
 Imper. A. 2, ^P5«. 
 
 <p0scT(^y (pSYjG-oputi , £<p$x^Xy e<p6ciKce>, 
 
 (p6i-G-uiy (pStcOfuLecf y e^iiG-cAy e^p&tKUy t^Qipia^i. 
 
 £<pVV, 
 
 ♦ 9veu tignijies to produce i 4>y/-</j in //w Middle sensc^ to suffer oneself 
 to be produced, or to be born. * 
 
Impersonal Verbs, 143 
 
 X. 
 
 Xt^F^, I X^^?^"^^ Xo^'P^^^i eX'^ipV^cc, KS^itprjKety rceX't'Fni^^h 
 
 Ki^XQKct^ J Ke^cipr^G-ouxt* 
 
 ^^''*'> \ A , 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 The following are the Impersonal Verbs most in use. 
 
 1 . 0{ the Active form : 
 
 AftjKSt, x-xdr^Ket^ TTpocrr.y.et, it beCOmes. , Imperf. ccvijite, K^f^^Ki, 
 7rpoTr,y.£. Partic. ccvyiko))^ r.ct6r,Koi^ TpoG'ijKov, 
 
 Aorr/^h it is useful. A/>jj/>?, it is deti?! mined. 
 
 A fl>;c-)t£<, it pleases. Imperf. 7}p£crx.i, Fiit. tcperet. 
 
 A/3JC5/, it sufficeth. Imperf. zpKei, Fut. upKscet, 
 
 As/, it is necessary. Imperf. £<}"£<. Fut. ^etio-et. 1st Aor. ef^e^j^-f. 
 
 Optat. ^eot. Subj. ^rp, Infin. i'etv. Partic. ^eo*, it bein^- 
 
 necessary. 
 ^ici<pepsi, there is a difference. Imperf. ^u^psps, Fut. hoto-et. 
 A<9)5f/, it seems. Imperf. eooKst. Fut. ^o'^et. 1st Aor. £^<j|£. 
 
 Partic. Jo|:«v, it appearing. 
 Eyx^f^^iy it is permitted. Imperf. enz&fpst. Fut. eyx^^P^'^^i- 
 
 Partic. lyy^up"^'), 
 E.T]t ; fVf<r/< orgy/ f 6|£<r7< ; TrapsG-t, or Tr^c^oft, it is permitted. Im- 
 
 perl. »;y. Imperat. e^scrjca. Iniiii. i'^etvect. Partic. r© f|<,y, 
 
 cyev it being permitted, 
 t.v7jfjispu^ it is well becommg. Ex^ty it is becoming. 
 
 i^etTciXcciiL^civet, it happens. 2d x\or. xxrsXu^e. 
 
 \ ^ciriTetyst , it is necessary. Partic. ro xflcrfrr^ryov, necessity. 
 
144 Adverbs, 
 
 MfTf6-7/, or f^srac, it is the part of. Mers^jt fjuv rarii, I am a 
 
 partaker of this. Partic. i^srov, 
 MfAf/, it is the care of. Imperf, ef^e>^e. Fut. fieXr^cei, Perf. ft€- 
 
 y.^?iYlKe or f44f^t}?i£. Imperat. fA^iXera. Pass. f^^Xsrcct. Perf. 
 
 fJL.£f4.SX7iT0tl, 
 
 MeTccf^sXei, it repenteth. Fut. f^eruf^eXTiTet. 
 Cxpet^t, it ought. Imperf. or 2d Aor. AJ^fAf. 
 npeTTst, it becomes. Imperf. eTrpe're. Particip. TrsiTrov, 
 Xvf^^^^-tvet, it happens. Perf. o-vf^Qe^y^Ke, Fut. trvu.^ro'u^ and 
 trvfjL^r.Q-tTcci* 2d Aor. crvve^7}y Partic. crvf^^utvov, ct;^^g^jj«(!>5, 
 
 :Lvfjup€pth it conduces. Imperf. crvv£(pepe. Fut. o-umo-n. Par- 
 tic. (TVfAjpepcv. 
 
 *T5r<»^;^e/, it happens, it is necessary, Imperf, yTrjjp;^^^. 1st 
 Aor. vTTiipj^e, Fut. iJTTocp^it. Partic. tJTrupx^v. 
 C)/>e/,itis wont. Imperf. £^<A£<. 
 X/j*;, it ought. Imperf. bxpV^ or xPv^* }st Aor. exp^^^* Fut. 
 
 XPV^^^' Ii^f* XPV^^''' Poet. pi^P/'v. 
 Hence the Compounds, u'^oxp^i and uTroxp^i ^^XP'^'f ^»'''^XP^> 
 
 it is sufficient. Imperf. ccTrsxpt], kc, 
 
 II. Of the Passive and Middle form : 
 'Af^cteruverctt, there is sin committed. Af^sXeiTui, it is not 
 
 regarded. 
 'RtQiutToti^ life is ended. 
 
 Aehicrcci, it is decided. Eyvtoc-7ct/ it is known. 
 Etfucprui, it is decreed. EpvriTon, it is said. 
 EvJ'f;^if7«<, it happens. Eo/xf, it becomes. 
 ETTepxsrui, it occurs. Hx^c/fic/, itis heard. 
 AfygT<«/, it is said. A£/;riT«<, it remains. 
 NojM-<^«Ta5/, it is established. 
 n^^r^A^r^i, it is decreed. 
 
 ON ADVERBS. 
 
 Adverbs may be considered in respect lo their meaning 
 derivation and comparison. As to their meaning, they may b( 
 ©onveniently distributed into the following classes. 
 
 I. Those of Place, which sigmf3% 
 
 1. Rest in a place, and answer the question th where 
 
Adverbs. H6 
 
 The greater part of these end in ^/, n, «, «;, 0/ ; as, uypcGiy 
 in the field ; uyx^*^ tyyv&i, near ; ojA^io^/, elsewhere ; uvroh^ 
 there ; A^'iiyr.a-t, at Athens ; fJL-r^otfLH, cvouf^a, no where 5 o9r«, 
 oTDj, where ; Ts-avrax^i -sruvretx^, ts-uvtxxoi, every where ; fv- 
 ^e/, evTCi, eco) within ; t|<a;, without; ;;ifit/t«/, on the ground, 
 &c. 
 
 2. Motion /rom a place, answering the question TsroSev, 
 'Oi'hence ? These end in ^fv, and rarely in h ; as, 6,y^o^fv, from 
 the field ; ttyx<ih^, eyy^^Ssv, from near ; u^^Cev, from some 
 other place ; ccvroda, thence ; oOev, whence ; eG-u6a, from 
 within ; tlaGev^ from withoui. 
 
 3. Motion to a place, answering the question vs^ot^ whither? 
 Those end commonly in ^e, cr,-, (^£. and are often fovmed by an- 
 nexing these terminations to the accusatives of nouns.* uy 
 povh, ec- poT£. to the field ; aAAtp^c^f , ir£pafG-e, to aiiother place ; 
 <tv7oTi, to the same place ; oocaJ'e, «<«dV6^'£, home ; u?^oc^£-. to the 
 sea, ; x<^i-^°^^h to -he ground. 
 
 To adverbs ending in of, f<$ is sometimes prefixed by the 
 Poets. f'$ u^ci^ee, to the sea. Hom. 
 
 4. Motion throvgh a place, answering the question -nrr., by 
 xvhat way ? These arc mostly datives of the feminine gender, 
 agreeing with l^w*, understood ; as, cfcAA>;, by another way ; tv 
 6etu , by a straight way ; o-^yi^epxv, r<iv, hy any way. 
 
 Some of the preceding signify both rest in a place and 
 motion to a place ; as, ah^ here, and hither ; e^a, within a 
 place, and into a place. These four are adverbs of time and 
 place : uf^uc, «/«,«, oft«Tg, d.as^ev. 
 
 II. Alverbs of Time, which include, 
 
 1. Those which denote some particular time, past, pres- 
 ent, future, or indefinite ; as, vw, now j %^£$, yesterday ; ecv 
 p/ov, to-morrow ; u'ei. always ; At/jr^, lately. 
 
 2. Continuance of time, which is commonly expressed hy 
 some noun in the accusative ; as, ^cAvv rje ;^/;avov, for a long 
 time. 
 
 3. Vicissitude or repetition of time ; as, ^9>.>.y^Kt^^ often ; 
 «y^'$, again ; «^^|, once ; /3<$, twice ; rp;$, thrice, &c. 
 
 III. Adverbs of Quantity, which comprise, 
 
 * V of the accusative is dropped br^fore «", hy rule iv. ppic^e 5. etypio-i 
 for nypoycTi. When ^i beinq; a.-mcxe*.^- foiV \vs 5-, the o-^h changed into f, 
 from the similarity of sound , a?, ASwvit^* for a^avsta-h ; Gvpct^i for Gt/- 
 
 14 
 
HS Mverbs. 
 
 1. Those of quantity ; as, <iA/$, />c«va;$, enough ; (iu^isif'^f 
 deep ; evpea^, broad ; f^Koag by far ; ttoAv, much, greatly, &c. 
 
 2. Intensitives. uyuv, xncv, (a^xol^ (r(po^px, zrccw^ very much. 
 c»*r«vA»5, iT^vfiM^ greatly. 
 
 Diminutives, o-^e^ov, uo-et, f4.cyav, ii,f4,iKpov, /M.<x^«, almost, fwy/5 
 fM^iii, hardly. 
 
 IV. Adverbs of Quality, which end 
 
 in <y$. Ts-pccofg, mildly ; yec)cer,$6f^y maliciously, 
 ia X, and >}, being properly datives of the first declension. 
 ^toc, by force ; Tsrocppijo-iu^ freely ; /J/a, sepa- 
 rately ; xotv'v^, commonly ; ^ip^ri, doubly ; '>i, 
 which way, whence, in what manner, where- 
 fore ; whose ordinary correlatives are ruvrp, 
 (referring to eJcu,) this way, that way, thus,&c. 
 without iota subscript J f/>i»j, rarely. 
 aofflt, for uapta, out of season ; wtuifJLuri^ without 
 blood. 
 
 ct^siii atheistically. 
 oM^6vfjL(thv^ with one accord. 
 xpv^^r^v, secretly. 
 uvktTTi^ unexpectedly. 
 And sometimes in | ; A«|, with kicks ; u^Pt^, tenaciously, 
 
 V. Adverbs denoting the manner of action ; as, 
 
 1. To exhort, as.Hure, confirm ; to show, to desire; tS'Hy 
 to behold, ^j, ajr©/, yf, (J»j, indeed, assuredly, undoubtedly, 
 e* , £i6e would God, that — . 
 
 2. To swear, fc*, v^, y««/, verily, certainly. 
 
 3. To deny, j^, a^i, no, no really ; from which come ar/, 
 ah, neither, and H^uf^ag, by no means. 
 
 4. To forbid, ftj?, no, not 5 whence come f^^h and /*»;- 
 ^xf^aq, not at all. 
 
 5. To grant, f/ev, na J'jj, well, be it so ; supposing it is so. 
 
 6. To interrogate, either in respect to place ^ Tto^i, 5ro/, 
 Tra, '«, where ? 7ro6ev, idiv, whence ? wocrs, whither ? ^r^?, which 
 way ? — time, ttots or '^tpuKoc, when ? — quantity^ ttotov^ how 
 much ? Troo-xKoii , how often ? — quality, :r^$, how ? Trcrtpai^ io 
 what manner ? 
 
 7. To doubt. TVfjLQctv, rux,», rvxov., rvy^ivoi^, perhaps. 
 
 VI. Adverbs which denote Relations. 
 
 1 . Comparison. /w^AAav, more, -j^rre^, less. 
 
 2. Resemblance. <i$, as, as if. a^Trtp^ in the same manner 
 
 m 
 
 ^1 
 
 in /, 
 
 in 
 
 ti. 
 
 in 
 
 U 
 
 in 
 
 h^. 
 
 in 
 
 cri. 
 
Adverbs, 
 
 147 
 
 ag 5 KUiSec, Koc&ccTTepj c'^<w$5 just as ; 'ara^ and '«r«/, just so. a»JVj 
 80, thus. 
 
 3. Order, ftrctf, afterwards, next ; 5|>:5, £<pf|j;$, from hence- 
 forth. 
 
 4. Assemblage. <ift«, together ; of^Hy jointly, along with, 
 rv?\X^Q^v,v^ in a word, in short. 
 
 6. Separation, ccvgv, without ; ^Pk>;», except. 
 
 To these may be added, those of correcting ; «;iA«^3j, ^jlccK- 
 Aov (^jj, ^fvyy, 7fi«^y, but rather, &c. — those expressing the cause ; 
 hiKoL^ because. 
 
 Many adverbs belong to more than one of the classes above 
 mentioned. 
 
 Some adverbs have such an affinity, that, beginning with a 
 -vowel, they are Indefinites ; with w, Interhogatives ; 
 with r, Redditives. 
 
 hidefinite. | Interrogative. Redditive. 
 
 i which way 
 
 ( means, 
 i how far, 
 V> WO** "^hai rea 
 \ son, 
 
 oTCy OTTOTgy ^ 
 
 o^fv, oTTo^sv, whence, 
 0^1, where, 
 oo-dv, how much, 
 •lov, after what 
 
 manner, 
 ^o-uKfg, how often. 
 
 when. 
 
 which way . 
 by what 
 means ? 
 
 L how far i 
 «/, If or what 
 ( son ? 
 
 or 
 
 Tat,vrY^ 
 Tat, 
 
 V ^ this way. 
 
 \ by that 
 ir>), ) means, 
 so far, 
 
 for that reo^ 
 son. 
 
 when ? 
 
 TTOTS^ 
 
 TToSev, whence ? 
 ^oOt, where ? 
 TTOTof, how much ? 
 TTotoVy after what 
 manner ? 
 
 TToTacJct^y how often ? \To<rx>ci? , so often. 
 
 
 then. 
 
 \rore, 
 ry}vix.cc , 
 To^fv, thence, 
 ro6i, there, 
 rocrov, SO much, 
 TotoVy after that 
 manner. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 The Greeks include Interjections among Adverbs. 
 1. Of Joy. ttu, m, /^. 
 
 2. Grief. 
 
 01, of^t, af^i, Oil, ctt, as. 
 
 3. Threatening, nut, 
 
 4. Anger and Disgust. <w, a ; /y, <« ; <pev, tiwotys. 
 h. Admiration. <«, a; ;/3«^«/,Vfi49r«e/, «j6. 
 
 6. Approbation and Exhortation, ua^ivyt. 
 
 Derivation, 
 Most adverbs are derivatives. A {q\w primitives, h«w ever, 
 
148 Adverbs. 
 
 may be found ^ as, wv, now ; x^f^^h on tbe ground ; x&e^, yes- 
 terday. 
 
 The derivatives are taken from most of the parts of 
 speech. 
 
 The accusative singular and plural of adjectives, in the 
 neuter, and the genitive, dative and accusative of some nouns 
 and pronouns, are used as adverbs. 
 
 1. Accusative of neuter adjectives. Trpofrev, ro TreioTov^ 
 'TTp&fToc first ; Tit f^oiXiQ-rx^ chiefly -, o|i;, sharply. 
 
 2. The oblique cases of nouns and pronouns. Gen. ^(A^Hy 
 together, from o,m,o$ ; a^uf^Hy never, from a^cct^o^, no one. Dut. 
 Kvz^iO), around, from KVKXoq, a circle ; rocz^h swiftly, from r^;^o$, 
 swiftness. Accus. ccp^fj^^ ^/»Ai<<5j from the beginning ; ^nc^jv^ 
 as, like, from J'/^jj, manner. 
 
 Verbs are sometimes used as Adverbs. 
 
 1. The imperative, uye^ iQi^t^'e-, &c. 
 
 2. The second aorist active. d^fAov, <y<^£Aov, from t(pgiX(a. 
 
 3. The present optative of the verb him^ et^v. 
 To these may be added, 
 
 1. Nouns compounded with Prepositions. e;c^o«^<yv. 
 
 2. Prepositions united together. TrapsK, abroad. 
 3.^ Prepositions joined with Adverds. eyreirocy then . 
 Difference of place is denoted by difference of termina- 
 tion. 
 
 6^/, 0/, ov, sig' ohv^ the place h or cc, the 
 nify the place froin whence one place whither 
 where one is, sets out. one goes. 
 
 As from 
 McVa^eft, a city Msyxpcdt, or fA.-' Msyapt^Ssv^ to Meyxpse^Sy to g9 
 of Greece. yccpol, to be at come from to Megara. 
 
 Megara. Megara. 
 
 Ovpayois coe- ovpoivodt, to be copxvodsv, to oup^^ovissy or x- 
 Itim, heaven, in heaven. come from pxvaj-e, to go to 
 
 heaven. heaven. 
 
 Tbe proper names of towns, that follow the feminine ar- 
 ticle, form their adverbs in titi or a^-/, (which are properly 
 datives,) with the point under, or without it, in r.etjv or t/Mvy 
 and in u^e ; as, 
 
 A0rjmi, A^/.no'i, A&tjva^iV, Ah^cc^e^ 
 
 Athenas, to be at A- from Athens. to go to Athens. 
 
 Athens. thens. 
 
Prepositions . 1 4^ 
 
 QXvf^TTicc, O^^vf-tTrtu^t, 0?ivft7nct6ev, O^VfcTiriet^s, 
 
 Olympia. to be at O- from 0\ym- to go to Olym- 
 
 lympia. pia. pia. 
 
 Those derived from appellative nouns are formed some- 
 times in the same manner ; as, 
 
 Svpsc, 6vpei$ev, forin- &vp6th or u^e, 
 
 fores, the door. secus, foris. for arhy foras, 
 
 without, from to go abroad, 
 without. 
 In like manner, the article 
 'o, or flJV, hie ; o$t, '«, ubi, <>^£», unde. oih, hue, hie. 
 
 where, from whence, here, hither. 
 
 ^ , qui. cl, quo, ubi. 
 
 Sometimes the adverbs form these derivations from them- 
 selves : 
 
 X^^f^'^iy ;^ciMf», x^f^^y 
 
 on the ground, from the ground, to the ground. 
 
 Comparison of Adverbs, 
 
 1. Adverbs derived from adjectives compared, by rf^asand 
 ToiToi, are compared by changing the o$ into <y$. r©^^?, co^af 
 Tfpuq^ ToipofreiTaiy from co^a^, a-o<PMripoi <ro<pafrocro^, 
 
 2. If the accusative of a neuter adjective is used for an 
 adverb, its comparative and superlative are used likewise ; 
 as, Txxv, rtcxtoVf ra^x^^epoVi ^xttov ; rccxt^^'lov, tuxvtoctov, ruxi^loti 
 rxxvioclcc, 
 
 3. Adverbs not derived from adjectives are usually com- 
 pared by repca and tx]u> ; as, fyyf$ , eyyvrspof, eyyvrcclof ; uyx*^ 
 uyx^i «ty;^oTfPA», cc'/x^'^^^^' 
 
 When the superlative of an adjective is used adverbially, 
 the article is usually prefixed, to 7r^ei<rlov. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 There are eighteen Prepositions, viz. 
 I. Six Monosyllables, 
 f», (before a vowel, f|.) ^po, 
 
 fv, 5r^6?, 
 
 14* 
 
i o u rrep ositt on b- . 
 
 II. Twelve Dissyllables. 
 
 aVflC, fTT/, '^ipii 
 
 Prepositions refer originally to space ; some signifying rest ; 
 and others, motion. Eight denote motion ; six to a place, 
 viz. cev<?6, ^loc^ eis, y.y-Tot,\ TrupUi Trp^? ; «ind two from a place, viz. 
 ecTTo, fji. The remaining ten denote rest in a place. Their 
 signification may, however, be changed by the verb with 
 which they are joined, Ctto denotes under, in a state of rest. 
 H (j-^xtpj, KVAvy^cjut vTTo Tyjv rpiCTTs^otv, the ball rolls under the 
 table, expresses motion ; but this arises entirely from the 
 verb, for the original meaning of the prepositions, see 
 
 SlNTAX. 
 
 On the force of Prepositions in Compos itio7i. 
 
 1. These five, £/$, crw, ^rspt, ac, and uT^ep^ augment the sig- 
 nification of the simple. 
 
 tii . ei(ru)c^a', to hear plainly. 
 
 £x, e-^QotiVo), to go out. 
 
 'y^epi. 7repi^cctX>^Yi(iy extremely handsome. 
 
 cvv. crv)i£Kr£\a>, to finish entirely. 
 
 uTFip. uxipiA.jihoy.xt, to be stark mad. 
 
 2. These five, >ccctx, mtto, Mvrt, hci, Tretpu, either augment or 
 'hange the signification. 
 
 cifTi, c6vr«|/of, preferable. avT/ve^/tft, breach of law. 
 
 uTfa, uTToretva, to stretch. uTTojititv^itvaj to unlearn. 
 
 hoi, <5^{6fcyfAa', to laugh at. hccTTiCra, to disbelieve. 
 
 y^iiiTM, Kxre^Gtoj, to devour. Kxrot^povscj, to despise. 
 
 T^xpa, TToLpoi^ccivu, to go bej^ond. 'procpxvof^og, a law breaker. 
 
 3. Upci sometimes augments, and sometimes diminishes. 
 ■Trpocrn-iicTx^^i to sufler greatly ; Trpoc-uTrTtv to touch slightly. 
 
 4,'Meroer changes and diminishes. /ttfT«c^«Afjc<v, to change 
 design ; f/^eTccTret^eiv, to dissuade. 
 '6. 'iTfo diminishes. uTroSet^o) to be a little afraid. 
 
 1st. Those prepositions, which have a double effect in 
 composition, do not change their original signification. 
 ^ictyiXco means, to laugh at or against ; hu^TFurra^ to believe 
 againstj i. e. disbelieve. 
 
Prepositions, lot 
 
 2d. Two or three prepositions are often found in the same 
 
 word. lTir,f4.ty ecvtcli^f^ct, eTruvia-itjfzt, t6v]i7rpaKxlxAocit^ccva. 
 
 Inseparable Prepositions. 
 There are certain particles used in the composition of 
 words, which are commonly ranged with the prepositions : 
 these are, cc, ui>i, spi, j2pi, ^a, ^cc^ ^f$, a^, xi, vf, y^j, and ^^6 used 
 for ha, 
 
 1 . The following prepositions augment. 
 
 ecpi ; as, apiTTtJcpo^ , very bitter ; ctpi^rM^^ most illustrious. It 
 is commonly derived from upM^ to lit, to be convenient ; or 
 from Apy^, Mars, the god of war. 
 
 spi, ept^popcoq, to roar excessively ; from epcco), to love 3 or 
 from Ti-epiy towards. 
 
 /3». (^aP^if^isca, to be very hungry ; from j3«5, an ox, because 
 of its bigness. And for the same reason we make use also of 
 iTrTrai j as, i7r;royv6>^6;v, one of an elevated genius ; taken from 
 iTTTroi, a horse. 
 
 ^cc, ^^:petvoi, all bloody ; from ^etcrv, densus, thick. 
 
 l^cc. (^cidsoi, most divine, admirable ; from ^c6>, to be hot. 
 
 ?iot. >^c6^ec\7], pelvis, a great bason ; from Xu, valde, great- 
 ly, and ;t5c<viy, hisco,- to be open, because of its wideness. 
 Xa^po^^ a glutton ; from Xa and ^opos , devourcr. It comes 
 from A«<y, to see, to desire, to enjoy. 
 
 A/. Aifift^^v, agito, quasi, valde ago, to agitate, to torment ; 
 from Mccv, valde. 
 
 /3^7. ^piJ]7rvog, an epithet of Mars ; clamorous, heard from 
 afar. 
 
 2. At'5 expresses always some trouble or difHculty, or mis- 
 fortune. ^utkoM^, diflicult, morose j ^vrrvyja, to be unhap- 
 py. ^ 
 
 The reverse of which is bZ ; as, ^vjmAo^, easy, good-hu- 
 moured ; ivrv^eu, to be happy : But it is not inseparable, 
 for£« is also an adverb. 
 
 3. These two denote privation : vf. vf^o<^fi$ ei, those that 
 have no feet, or, whose feet are very short. But if it hap- 
 pens to precede an <*, or an f, it requires to be contracted 
 into?;; as, vr,pi<r]o^^ for vs epiTJc?^ unquestionable. v>?vf^o5 for 
 vs ccHfJLQ^, unshaken by the wind, tranquil, vm/^tcc, calmness, 
 serenity. vii//.£prr,i , eo$,true, sincere, blameless, for V5 ftiisprr^Sy 
 from otf^upram, to err, to sin. 
 
152 Conjunctions, 
 
 vij, vijTFtdif infaas, aa much as to say nan fans, an infant^ 
 one that cannot speak, vj^tto/vos, impunis, unpunished. 
 
 4. N»i also augments ; as, vi};)^vro?, flowing of all sides. 
 
 5. A, signifying privation, comes from ocnv, or ccrep, sine, 
 without ; as, aopxrcg, invisible. 
 
 And sometimes it takes av after it, to avoid the concourse 
 of vowels ; as, ccv^t^/tcfltxro^, incruentus, unbloody ; ;«y<*v^/sfl5, ef- 
 feminate. 
 
 Signifying increase of force, it comes from uyuv, valde, 
 Bimis, vastly, excessively j as, ccrevTjq, intentus, very much 
 bent ; <»|t;Ao5, lignosus, very woody. 
 
 Implying union and collection, it comes from umm, togeth- 
 er ; as u^expsq, brother, from JV A<pt/5, vog. uterus, the womb, be- 
 cause brothers come from the same womb. ctKoXv^oq^ a fol- 
 lower, or companion, from y.zXiv6og^ the road. 
 
 But sooietiines it m ikes no alteration at all in the singnifi- 
 cation ; as, «5*7:*;^v$, the same with o-7«;^y$, spica, an ear of 
 corn. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Are : — 1. Copulative. xj«<,rf, Poet, nh^ sometimes ^fv, h, 
 
 2. Disjunctive, «}, >?ra^, either, or ; u^ts, ocvre, whether, 
 whether. 
 
 3. Conditional, a, «v, ?;v, easy, if; sacv ft^, unless. 
 
 4. Adversative. ctAAse, but ; <5V, but ; o^*'?, yet. 
 
 3. Concessive, ei xxt^ tcxtrot, jcximv, kxv^ although ; ^», yt, 
 indeed. 
 
 6. Casual, yap, for ; ert, because ; an, if indeed ; tTst^ 
 sTTii^iji eTTsi^'n'Trep, since. 
 
 7. Final, or Perfective, hoc, iui. acr]s, on-oq, o^pot^ that. 
 
 8. Conclusive, «v, rotvw, upx, <^»?, therefore, then. 
 
 9. Dubitative. ei, c&p:t, f^yi, whether. 
 
 10. Potential, ctv, and, by the Poets, ksv, ks : in render- 
 ing which, the words can, will, may, must, are used. 
 
 On the Order of Collocation, 
 1. The following are postpositive ; yap, (w-fv, i't, f£, rotwv, 
 
 On 
 
 2, Prepositive and postpositive : av, upot, hoti and, among 
 the Poets, ^u. 
 
 3, The remainder are prepositive. 
 
Syntax. 163 
 
 To Conjunctions are commoply added what are called Ex- 
 pletives. These are, J*?, ^>}rct, uv, y£, ft^y, av, ttso, t^s, tth}, rot^ 
 yv, v^v, poL, ecp^ ks, xfv, ^yjv. Hoogevcn has showH that thei^e 
 particles have always their proper force. 
 
 SYNTxYX. 
 
 Syntax includes Agreement and Government. 
 
 General Principles of Syntax. 
 
 1. Every nominative agrees with some verb expressed or 
 understood. 
 2. Every adjective has a substantive expressed or under- 
 stood. 
 
 3. A noun denoting the source, origin^ cause, or the class, 
 to which any thing belongs, is put in the genitive, with or 
 without a preposition. 
 
 4. A noun denoting that to which an action tends, or from a 
 regard to which it is commenced, or the means by which it 
 is effected, is put in the dative. 
 
 5. A noun expressing the object on which any action ter- 
 minates, is put in the accusative. 
 
 6. The vocative stands by itself, or has an interjection 
 joined with it. 
 
 7. The infinitive is governed by some verb or adjective. 
 
 AGREEMENT. 
 
 Rule L Two or more Substantives, signifying 
 the same thing, agree in case ; as, IlavXog aTtoa- 
 7p?^g, Paul an apostle. Qeq xpttr^^ to God the 
 Judge. 
 
 1. One of the substantives is sometimes understood ; as, 
 Kvx^s&piji/o Tn Arivttya (sup. oj«3$,) Cyaxares, the son of Asty- 
 ages. 
 
154 Syntax, 
 
 2. An infinitive, or part of a sentence, may supply the 
 place of one of trte substantives. 
 
 3. Sometimes the latter substantive is put in the genitive. 
 5rpA/5 A^jjva^v, for TfoXt^ A6}jy»t, the cilv Athens. 
 
 Rule II. An article, adjective, or participle? 
 agrees with its substantive in number, gender 
 and case ; as, to ''ayiov IIv£V[.ta^ the holy Spirit! 
 ev exsLvatg rate, rifiy^paig^ in those days. 
 
 1. Substantives are often used adjectively 3* as, 'EM«5 
 PmTf^ the Greek language. 
 
 2. Several adjectives may agree with the same substan- 
 tive ; as, ;roA/v oiKHf^svTjv^ ev^oitf^evct, Kctt /M-eyctA^y, a citj, popu- 
 lous, flourishing, and large. 
 
 3. The substantive is sometimes omitted ; and the adjec- 
 tive then takes the gender, number and case of the substan- 
 tive understood ; as, 'o ^e ^iKctioi ck ^r/c/cag ^r^cejat, (supp. «»>?^,) 
 the just shall live by faith. Rom. i. 17. 
 
 The adjective thus taken is said to be used substantively ; 
 and has all the relations of agreement and government, which 
 the substantive would have in its place. 
 
 4. The adjective is often put in the neuter, xp*}i^» being un- 
 derstood ; as, 57 'Tct'lpig (ptxlulov ^poloi^, to men, their country is 
 most dear. 
 
 5. An infinitive, or part of a sentence, often supplies the 
 place of the substantive, and then the adjective is put in the 
 neuter gender ; as, ^itfAesroy to f^r <pi?iy}<reti, it is hard not to 
 love. Anacr. 
 
 6. The adjective sometimes agrees, not with the substan- 
 tive expressed, but with another implied in that one, and un- 
 derstood ; as, Td Seiov ocvjov^^ the Gods themselves. (ipe<pQ? 
 (pspovlct To|o», a boy carrying a bow. Anac. /jyeof^oti ro Tr^edoi 
 itvoti ctvovlm , I think the multitude foolish, (pev o> a.y&'M Kctt 
 TTio-lyj ^^t;;>;^, oi^eTcci ct^xroXi-^srav rjf^oii, Alas ! brave and faithful 
 soul, he has left us, and departed. Xen. Cyro. 
 
 7. Participles and adjectives are often put in the same case 
 with the noun or pronoun to which they refer ; as, otof^eva/v 
 etyeit iro(paPcclm uft'&P^'^^*: for oiof^svm uvut o-o^Mlecloiran uv^p^^afv, 
 thinking themselves to be the wisest of men* 
 
 ♦ This is very common in English; as, gold-watch, sea-water. The 
 only difference is, tke words are connected by a hyphen in English, but 
 not in Greek. 
 
Syntax, 155 
 
 8. An adjective, in the nominative or accusative plural, 
 sometimes has its proper substantive in the genitive ; as, ci 
 ^(cvxot Tobi uvOpwTrm^ for ^ocv^ot etvGoMTrai, wicked men. 
 
 9. The personal pronouns in the genitive are, commonly, 
 used instead of poj>sessives ; as, o ^xrr}p un, my father, for 
 tfMi. ec^eX(poi (rH, thy brother, for ro^, rj ei^e^H eJftA'v, youF 
 sister, for u^cshpt}, 
 
 10. Mfcra$, like medins, in Latin, usually signifies the mid' 
 die of ; as, Trot^rov tv AtyociM f^ev-u fA.e\m, Make it remain in the 
 middle of the iEgaean. Lucian. 
 
 11. A word in the dual may agree with another in the 
 plural, signifying two ; as, (ptXets yntu x^ip' fiu?u»f^^v, let us af- 
 fectionately embrace. 
 
 12. Adverbs are frequently used as adjectives ; as, ev roi^ 
 role oty$pa7ro'i, among the men at that time ; Pelceph. 
 
 13. Instead of an adjective, a noun with a preposition is 
 often used ; as, rjoon) i^elot ^o^y^, i. e. fv<^«|o$, exalted pleasure. 
 fur' ft;xAf/flt4 ^ocvxjo^^ i. e. evK?^ir^, a glorious death. 
 
 14. When females are the subject of discourse, but the at- 
 tention is not directed to the se^r, a masculine adjective is 
 sometimes joined to the name of a female ; as, T<y ywoctKs, 
 Xen. Eurip. speakingof a worn m. 
 
 €)uz!rl€iv riv* ev rij ^* rjiupu f^XXcfv NEKPON. 
 
 Being about to bury a dead person on that day — 
 
 Aristoph. of a woman, trepa J*£.* 
 
 15. Such instances as <pt?^^ <y Mt^tXxs^ Iliad, A, 189, and 
 f$(piMyeperu. Ziv^ Iliad, A. 560, are not exceptions to this rule ; 
 fi>u>i is the Attic vocative, SLn^n<pe>^/eperec the ^olic nomina- 
 tive 
 
 Rule III. A verb agrees with its nominative in 
 number and person ; as, eyo ypa^, I write ; 'vfxst^ 
 T^yere^ ye say, 
 
 1. The nominatives of the first and second persons are 
 »arely expressed, except for the sake of emphasis. 
 
 2. The intinitive, or part of a sentence, frequently sup- 
 plies the place of the nominative ; as, ry ^/Aoo-6^f/» to ^Tjletv, 
 (supp. io-lh) to inquire is the province of philosophy. 
 
 T« %-oc9-tf xpeo-K€if ^v<r^sp€a-jocTov ecrltv, to pJease all is very diffi- 
 cult. 
 
 ♦ So Plautufl. Quifi e«t ea ? Sed quis est mulier ? 
 
156 Syntax, 
 
 3. In >ity>itn^ they say, eta^oth, they are accustomed, &c. 
 avepavci is understood. In /:.<?ov7oi, it thunders ; v/^g;, it snows; 
 ppiX^'i Jt rains ; ^et/$ or ai:p is understood ; arid is some- 
 times expressed ; as, ^svc (Bpo^ly,<re. Horn. Gd.l^su^un. The- 
 oerit. 
 
 ' 4. The Attics often use the nominative for the vocative ; 
 as, ^ TTcetq, eyeipa, Maid, arise I Luke viii. 54. x^tps, (ix(ri>ievg. 
 Hail, Kinp* ! John xix. 4. 
 
 Thou Suii, v»boseestand hearest all things. — Iliad, r. 
 
 4. The nominative is sometimes used without a verb ; a«, 
 
 'O yap M.cucry,q cvjrj^ — i-iic oti'a.fx.ev^ri yevovev uvjajy 
 
 But this Moses — We know not what is become of him. 
 
 Acts vii. 40. 
 
 He thai; overcometh— I will make him a pillar. Rev. iii. 12. 
 
 And the shore — all were full of bodies newly slain. Heliod. 
 
 Excepiwu 1. Nominatives plural of the neuter 
 gentler have commonly a singular verb ; as, ^cja 
 Tpe%/^6, animals run. 
 
 2. Sometimes, though rarely, masculines and 
 feminines plural take a verb singular; as, ayj^OoLi 
 ou(pai ^isXecdv^ the noise of songs resounds. 
 
 Pindar. 
 
 3. A nominative dual sometimes takes a verb 
 plural ; as, au(pcd s^eyov, both said. A plural noun 
 denoting hro^ may take a verb in the dual ; as, 
 yjiuab'^oi Ttoraw^t cvSa?.?.yjrov 'vr^op, two wintery 
 torrents unite their streams. Iliad. A. 453. 
 
 4. Nouns of multitude in the singular take a 
 verb in the plural, when the affirmation contain- 
 ed in the verb applies to the individuals which 
 compose the noun ; as, YipcdT/iadv avtov ^aTtav ro 
 TrPc/j^Oo:, all the multitude asked him. But if the 
 affirmation relates to the noun considered as one 
 
nJiole^ the verb is in the singular ; as, arcb^ e^eto 
 hxjoc, with haste the people sat down. 
 
 Iliad, B. 99. 
 
 Rule IV. Two or more substantives singular, 
 coupled by the conjunctions ;^a(,&c. have averb, 
 adjective, participle, or relative plural ; as, CTtf p/L^oc 
 Tcai xapnog Sta^Epovacy the fruit and seed differ. 
 
 1. If the substantives arc of different persons, the verb, 
 he. agrees with the lirst person in preference to the second^ 
 and with the second in preference to the third ; as, £y<w kxi cu 
 Tct ^Dcoctec 7roi>jTof4,efy I and thou will do right. 
 
 2. If the substantives are of different genders, the adjec- 
 tive or relative plural takes the termination of the leading 
 gender, i. e. the masculine ; as, Uotyrec {Trotuyiec) KurtKetro fjcytle 
 
 $iloui, TToQavJx. All the flocks lay down, neither feeding nQr 
 bleating, but longing for Daphnis and Chloe, who had disap- 
 peared. 
 
 Though in the human kind the masculine is the leading 
 gewder, yet in other kinds, such as the camel, the ox, and the 
 dog, the female, being considered more valuable than the 
 male, the feminine takes the lead ; as, 
 
 Ov yecp TTat^ole if/.ui /3li« ^Xx^m doe f^ev Izrvai, 
 
 They never drove away at any time my cattle or my hors- 
 es. Iliad, A. 154. 
 
 3. When the substantives signify things without life, the 
 adjective and relative are put in the neuter, xP^'f^*^^^ being 
 understood ; as. 
 
 Power and riches are desirable for the sake of honor. 
 
 4. The adjective or verb sometimes agrees with the near- 
 est substantive, and is understood of the rest ; as, 
 
 Atit yup rot epeii <Pt^Vy Tro^ijuai t€ ixotxa^i re, 
 Contention is always delightful, and wars and battles. 
 
 Iliad, A. 177. 
 
 5. Sometimes the conjunctions are omitted by the figure 
 Asyndeton. 
 
 15 
 
158 Syntax, 
 
 Rule V, The relative 6g agrees with its ante- 
 cedent in gender, number, and person. 
 
 When no nominative conies between the rela- 
 tive and the verb, the relative is the nominative 
 to the verb ; as, Ai'dpo^ oc euaovrat^ the men who 
 shall know. 
 
 But when a nominative comes between the rel- 
 ative and the verb, the relative is governed by 
 some word in the sentence : as, 6 ?voyog 6v eiTte^ 
 the word which he spoke. 
 
 1. When the relative follows two words, of different per- 
 sons, it agrees with the first ratber than the second, and with 
 the second rather than the third. 
 
 2. The relative often agrees with an antecedent under- 
 stood, or implied in a possessive pronoun ; as, 
 
 c(, ^i €>cuo-l7i ^PuKtoi 7rpccrrcTocyJ]eiCt ^tr.yv^cjt^.cti , (supp. TTpccyf^toijct^) 
 
 1 will nfiention those things which are appointed for each 
 age. Xenop. Cyro. 
 
 3. When the antecedent is not expressed in the prece- 
 ding member, it is commonly repeated, to prevent ambiguity, 
 in the same clause with the relative ; and is understood in the 
 succeeding clause ; as, oco'tKn Xtkfy.puji}^, 'ag i^tv ^ ttoXi^ ufjut^et 
 €>fot;f, 6v vof^tl^av, verbatim, Socrates acts unlawfully, whom 
 the State acknowledges ae Gods, not regan^ng ; i. e. not re- 
 garding those whom the State acknowledges tis Gods. — Xen. 
 Because in this instance no noun is previously expressed, to 
 which cv^ can refer, it was necessary to annex Beovi in the 
 same member, and understand it after vof^i^ofv. 
 
 The antecedent may sometimes be omitted without obscu- 
 rity;, as, ovg Jf ccv yvw^t rii]eav ri cchK6Vvitx,q, rifAopavTcAiy 
 whom they discover transgressing any of these things, 
 they punish. — Xen. Here uvSp^Tm^ is so readily understood, 
 as to render its insertion unnecessary. 
 
 Exception I. The relative is often put in the 
 same case with the antecedent; especially among 
 the Attics ; as, (^cSXaigj otg e;j^o, for ovg e^'^'^i ^^e 
 books which I have* Ttpog r^toigy otg /ieyecy for ovg 
 
Syntax, 159 
 
 Xe/ysi^ to the things which he says. This is some- 
 times done vvben the antecedent is not express- 
 ed ; as a'^ta 6v '■npa^^oLiicV, i. e. ^xHvc^Vy a ; worthy 
 of the things which we have done. Luke xxiii. 
 41. 
 
 2. The antecedent is sometimes used in the 
 same case, and in the same clause w^ith the rela- 
 tive : as bvroc, eali^ 6v V.eyeig avOpcdTtov^ for ovrogealt 
 arf)pu:tog, ov ?^8y8ig, this is the man that you say. 
 
 3. The relative sometimes agrees in gender 
 with the noun following ; as, etg hp8g a^iKmvrat 
 roTtovg^ at xa/isvraL awaycyyai^ they arrive at the 
 holy places, which are called synagogues. Philo. 
 
 Rule VI. Any verb may have the same case 
 after it as before it, when both words refer to the 
 same thing; B.s,£yu eifiikSaGxaTiogjl^m a teacher. 
 
 1. The verbs, which have most commonly the same case 
 after them as before them, are substantive and neuter verbs, 
 with verbs passive of ?iaining^ gesfure^ &.C. 
 
 2. The nominative after a verb substantive is sometimes 
 f^hanged into the genitive plural ; as, Kpoiyog erji rm rrxanw^, 
 for Tfxnym* 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 L The article is sometimes used as a demon^ 
 stroiive pronoun, especially by the early Poets ; as, 
 rriv Sseyoax Xi^crco, but I will not release her. II. 
 A. 29. 
 
 To this head may be referred the use of the Article with 
 u!v and JV, to express contra-distinction o m-sv, the one ; b c*£, 
 the other. 
 
 II. The article is sometimes used as a rela- 
 ffve pronoun ; as, n & (pevyei^ rexvov ; \^i. rca^ 
 
16© l^yntaoo. 
 
 A'x^i^'kea^ tov iMv atax^vo/iai ; what, do you flee 
 from my child ? Iph. Achilles, whom I am asham- 
 ed to see. Eurip. Iph. A. 1351. 
 
 When the Article is thus used as a relative, the verb to 
 which it belongs is frequently changed into a participle ; as, 
 (ic-iv 61 y^iyovTiq, for Qi ?\£yov<ri^ there are those who say. 
 
 III. The article is frequently used as a posses- 
 sive pronoun ; as, «;k6 to Ttarpi, zai r^ fiyjrpt jiovov^ 
 yeyevriadai, aXXa ^^at rri 7tarpi&, that he was born 
 not for his father or his mother only, but for his 
 country. Demos, de cor. § 59. 
 
 IV. The article is prefixed to nouns which 
 express, not generally «wy one of a class, but 
 dejinitely some one which is known. A noun 
 may be rendered thus definite in various ways. 
 
 1. KctT* f|d;^»jv, by distinction^ or general notoriety ; as, '* 
 ■Xotttrtji, the Poet ; i. e. Homer ; ^ v<»o*o? eczrsKeiro uf^ec koh *a sra* 
 AtfA,c<;. at the same time were impending the well known plague, 
 aad the Pc/oponwesian war. Theoc. H. 69. 
 
 The article is thus used, *at' i^o^nv, before the names of the Deity, 
 and of the great objects of nature, the sun, moon, stars, sea, earth, 
 heaven ; and generally before any object which is greatly distinguish- 
 ed or well known. 
 
 2. By a previous mention, either of the same or a synony- 
 mous word ; as, eTxruthvet} ye ftjjv ev Uepc-ojv yo/^is ^urot oe ^o>cii(^i* 
 01 vcuat ct^x^<^^^ty he was educated according to the Persian laws 
 — and those laws seem to begin, &c. Xen- Cyrop. aoXetc-ocnoi 
 
 Tfvoi tfrxvpa^ ux^XaSov, VipsTo rt ;^;fl6A5?areft/»a/ T<3t; ^e^«^ovr/ , and SOme 
 one beating his a^^enc?ant severely, he enquired the reason of 
 abusing the servant, 
 
 3. By implication in the context ; as, ''ovra srpd^^i rot^ wc- 
 y.il^ioii Nvf4,^ocioif ^vyug eyeuro, rr,y xpio-iv HZ* v^of/,£iYUi, he having 
 treacherously surrendered Nymphceum to the enemy, became 
 a fugitive, not waiting the trial ; i. e. the trial implied as the 
 natural consequence of his treachery. 
 
 4. By ?i description in the context which limits the noun to 
 a single object ; as, ^ h(x,6niLiiir,c^ Xpia-ra^ the covenaBt of Je- 
 sus Christ. 
 
syntax, 161 
 
 5. B} ^eing monadic in its nature ; i. c. representing per- 
 sons or things which exist singly ; or of which only one can 
 possibly be the subject of discourse ; as, sxx«4'«$ rot<; ^opai n- 
 o-^x&iv sit; Tfiv yvvxiKOfvijiv. having knocked at the gate, he entered 
 the women's apartment. 
 
 6. Aitar an object has been mentioned, it is sometimes 
 made definite by a subsequent description^ to which the article 
 is preiixed ; as,l^«yy>j$ o zrpo0y^;r,(;y John th;i prophet ; jj Jet/vo7'/?$j 
 a £v roiq ^yoti, vehemence of language. 
 
 This is likewise the case after verbs of calling ; as, rov f^o- 
 vov ot^(>)(>o^oKnloi o)iof><.x^ov]£i, calHug him the only incorruptible 
 man. 
 
 When the second noun is merely in apposition, without de- 
 fining the former, it is frequently without the article. 
 
 V. The article is prefixed to nouns, when they 
 denote a class of objects taken as a fvhole ; as, 6 
 ardpcMog eotl Qvyirog^ man is mortal ; X€yousvov 
 rovg $83g fpp^pciVj uanep 6l xvvcq^ rag aruGpoTtag, say- 
 ing that the Gods guard men as dogs do. 
 
 VI. The article is prefixed to abstract Nouns, 
 
 1. When used in their most abstract sense ; 
 as, ri (xSixtaxat ri axoT^acia ueyiarov rcw oituvxaxov 
 cariy injustice,* and intemperance are the greatest 
 of evils. 
 
 2. When the attribute is personified ; as, yj xa- 
 KirjLy 'vnohx^Hda^ ecTZtv and, malice, interrupting, 
 said. 
 
 3. The article, prefixed to a neuter adjective, 
 
 is used for an abstract noun ; as, to xaKTiog beauty ; 
 
 ro OCT [oz/, justice. 
 
 In these cases the abstract noun represents a class of ob* 
 jects. 
 
 VII. Infinitives, adjectives, participles, adverbs, 
 and members of sentences are frequently used as 
 nouns, and in such cases the article is generally 
 prefixed to them ; as, ra ^i^oaopsLV ro ^yjrecv. in- 
 
 15^ 
 
qiiiry is the business of philosophy; 6l dvv^roi^ mor- 
 tals ; ra 6^(j, external things ; o^v^ etg ro nmd^ opav, 
 quick at discovering all things ; 6c a/i^t 7t?.aruva^ 
 the followers of Flato; and sometimes Plato 
 himself. 
 
 In such instances the noun to which the article belongs 
 expresses a class of objects. 
 
 VIIL The noun to which the article be- 
 longs is frequently understood ; as, ra fi/irpog 
 fsil. ^Yi^ana) the things of hismother; to avOpjTtoc, 
 (sil. ^Yiiia) this word avdfXdTZog. 
 
 IX. In a proposition, the subject has generally 
 the article, and tlie predicate has not ; as, nvev^ia^ 
 6 Qeog^ God is -a spirit. 
 
 X. Proper names are not always subject to 
 these rules. 
 
 Xf . When the noun in the genitive has the arti- 
 cle, by any of the preceding rules, the noun which 
 governs it has commonly the article likewise.* 
 
 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 Government of Substantives. 
 
 I. One substantive governs another, signifying 
 a different thing, in the genitive; as, to Qe8 [laxpo- 
 dvi^ta^ the long suffering of God ; (Byjfia Tads, a seat 
 of stone. 
 
 1. The latter substantive generally expresses the class or 
 kind to which the former belongs ; or some relation of origin, 
 cause, possession or property. 
 
 2. This rule extends to pronouns and to tlie article used 
 as a pronoun ; as, jcpiOm tjjv rif tTrTm, the barley of his horse. 
 
 ♦ It has been designed only to give the general principles respecting^ 
 the article without descending to minnte particulars, which weak! only 
 perplex the younger student. For Middleton's Theory of the artiek;, 
 «ee Appendix. 
 
Syntax. 16^ 
 
 3. When the noun in the genitive signifies a person, it maj 
 be taken in an active or passive sense ; aa, ij yv^o-ij m SiH 
 may denote, our knowledge of God, or his knowledge of us. 
 
 4. The governing noun is often understood ; as, OAr;^7r/«5 
 4 AAfJ«vj))y (supp. utiTtip,) Olympia the mother of Alexander. 
 ui «d^i<, (supp. hiJLov,) to Hades ; ev oc^a (supp. ^of^^) Hades. 
 
 5. A substantive in the genitive is oflen put for an adjective, 
 to express quality more strongly ; as, ^u^oiyKg^ depth of earth, 
 for fioihtac yv ; '/? Trspicra-sioc tr,^ '/^ccptroq^ abundant grace ; iy 
 tco-Toiriu ra 7r?iiirii, inconstant riches. 
 
 6. The Attics use a noun in the genitive, preceded by a 
 neuter article, for the noun itself ; as, ro ttj^ '^^x^^t for 97 rv^^^ 
 fortune ; ro Tut ypu^f^Lxrut^ for t« y^fA.u.ocTu^ letters ; rot ruf 
 ^eep'^u^^v ecTTiTja s^jt^ for ot fixp^etpot, barbarians are faithless, 
 Demosth. 
 
 7. Instead of the genitive, a noun with a preposition is 
 often found j as, ctrv^icc ly Trspi m fiiHy the evils of life, for 
 
 8. The dative is often used for the genitive ; as, •yx Arpsi^fj 
 Ayctt^f^vcyi tjv^acie ^y.u^, U did not please the mind of Agamem- 
 non, the son of Atreus. Horn. 
 
 9. The noun tliat should be in the genitive is often, espe- 
 cially by the Poets, put in the accusative, governed by a pre- 
 position implied ; as, n trg (pptvoe^ njctra vev&oi, for crii(pptiui^ what 
 grief has invaded your mind ? 
 
 10. The dative is frequently used for the genitive 5 as, 
 Tectpt Ttftufov ^evHy the avengcF of your father's blood. 
 
 11. An adjective or article in the neuter gen- 
 der, without a substantive, governs the genitive ; 
 as, ro xpyi<y^ov to Geov^ the kindness of God; ra ty^g 
 '^^jt^c, the gifts of fortune. 
 
 1. In these cases a noun is understood, which is really the 
 governing word. « 
 
 2. Sometimes a preposition precedes the noun ; as, ru Trupcc 
 Tt^ rvyjt.^^ the things of fortune. 
 
 3. The adjective, thus used in the abstract, is often with- 
 out a genitive, and then it has an adverbial sense ; as, rt 
 ^tTToi, finally. 
 
 111. If the latter substantive has an adjective of 
 praise or dispraise joined with it, it is often put 
 
164 Sj/ntccx; 
 
 in the genitive ; as, avrjp ^eyakyjg apstyjg, a man of 
 great virtue ; av9iJLhyig <ppsvidv, daring of soul ; TtpQ- 
 i^evHv^ ryjg apyjtyjg^ to be first in virtue. 
 
 The latter sttbstantive is more commonly put in the accusa- 
 tive, by synecdoche, kutu^ hec. &c being understood ; as, 
 TTrov^ecieg roi rpo-sj-^v, (supp. kcctcc^) of ingenuous disposition. 
 
 Government of Adjectives, 
 
 I. Adjectives signifying any affection of the 
 mind, (as knowledge, ignorance, &c.) plenty, 
 want, power, participation, diversity, and separa- 
 tion, govern a genitive. 
 
 The genitive generally denotes the origin or cause of the 
 qualit es expressed by the adjective; as, 'Et^^ap^i r^^urlvxa^^ 
 experienced from (in) misfortunes — misfortunes being a 
 source of his experience. 
 
 *\is-jroi ezs-t(r>ctf>Levo( ^re^toio, horses acquainted from (with) the 
 plain — the plain being a subject of their acquaintance. 
 
 Aoocr^f/joie^ l^dx^^^ ignorant from (in) war — war being the 
 source of their ignorance — a subject whence they derived no 
 knowledge. 
 
 K5«)6A>» ocyevTlo^^ untasted from (of) evils — evils being the 
 source whence he derived no taste. 
 
 'hMov &eocf^ocroq u&eoiTQ<;^ unperceptive from (of) the most 
 pleasant sight — the most pleasant sight being a source whence 
 he derived no perception. 
 
 T5W .M-f AAavro^ cc-srpaoo'Aroq. vioi foreseeing what is future — what 
 is future is not to him a source of foresight. 
 
 Ovhv £&)iog oc-^^vTJoi r,v ttj^ ABmcticov ^vr^vxia-i . no nation has not 
 heard of the misfortune of the Athenians — the misfortune of 
 the Athenians was the cause of fame to every nation. 
 
 TA>y ^>cAf3r6>v ocTxreio.q^ unexperienced from (in) hardships- 
 hardships not beins; a source of experience. 
 
 Merhv omv^ full from (of) wine — from wine being poured 
 into it — wine being the matter which occasioned its fulness. 
 
 A'^v£/<35 (BioToto, affluent from (in) wealth — wealth being the 
 source of his affluence. 
 
 'TTj-nrvjiy is the same with 'rpoam mat. 
 
Sfntffx. 165 
 
 HMVG-idi icuxeoh nch from (in) evils — evils being the source 
 •f his richness. 
 
 ^Vf4,f4,ctx"'* ^^^^^ ^*'?^'> ^ spear empty of assistants — assistants, 
 ■ot present, being the cause of its emptiness. 
 
 E/>»j^$ «vJ>6;», deprived of men — men removed being the 
 cause of its deprivation. 
 
 Arc<i voXtfiLoio, hungry from (for) war — war, to which he had 
 been addicted, being the cause and the object of his hunger. 
 
 'lf;tg»»/, (T/)a»£$) tc-oAfo5, desirous from (of) the city — \he 
 city being the cause of their desires — desirous of returning 
 to it, to shelter themselves from the enemy. 
 
 Tm Mzretrrji Koree^v, angry from (on account of) the deception 
 — the deception being the cause of his anger. 
 
 Xtfi Bvyotrepoi 6vfJUiVfjLiioi , angry with thee from his daughter — 
 his daughter being the cause of his rage with thee. 
 
 Mf Afo« H-nrpoq^ miserable from his mother — his mother being 
 the origin of his misery. 
 
 Etjxott hifjLAToiv >.vTr}pi6t, prayers releasing from terrors. 
 
 'Ev^cnfM'n^6^ri<i Tt ran Xoym t^ J'w»<«/M.f«wj, proclaiming thee 
 blessed from (because of) the power of thy words. 
 
 BoTTpvx^iv TTim^eg tcxpoc^ thy head filthy from tangled locks— 
 the hair tangled or clotted is the cause of thy head appear- 
 ing filthy. 
 
 Kana^oq u^Qpoifrim <pvTea^^ partaking from (of) human nature. 
 
 Eyicpacrtii civa, not partaking from (of) wine, i. c, temper- 
 ate. 
 
 AAAo7f»<«v TIJ5 ietvla <t|/oc$, fiir from his dignity. 
 '^Xvlffos ovhioq uPilvi^ removed from none in virtue, t*. e, inferi- 
 or to none in virtue. 
 
 It is desirable that the student should make himself famil- 
 iar with this mode of solution, and apply it in his reading. 
 
 II. Adjectives denoting dignity and worth, and 
 those which refer to crime, innocence, or price, 
 govern the genitive ; as, a^co; |Utcrl9tf, worthy of a 
 reward. 
 
 -sreifTec mioi 2TA«rif, all things may be bought for money. 
 eyo^oi ^axsicti^ in danger from (of) slavery. 
 cdv«(T/«/ ru)t rs-cTs-pxyfLceyafi unblameablc from (for) the things 
 wjiich were done. 
 
166 Syntax. 
 
 III. Compounds of a privative, and verbals 
 which denote action or capacity, especially those 
 in T0C5 LXOiy and J7ptog, govern the genitive ; as, 
 
 xOeuroi xoit uveKooq u^ocvrm, without sight OF hearing from 
 any. i, e. without seeing or hearin«^ any. 
 
 <^v?ixrtico^ ra (ratf/^ccrog, guarding the hody. 
 
 -zs-etpsicr^y^g rm ccyu&m, imparting from good things, bestow- 
 ing benefits. 
 
 ?^vTiptcq hijUL'^rm^ freeing from terrors. 
 
 1. Verbals govern the genitive, from the siajnification of 
 their verbs ; and compounds of ot privative, by the force of 
 ctnv^ from which the ct is derived. 
 
 2. To the adjectives which hav2 been enumerated, may 
 be added many which are followed by a genitive of the cause ; 
 as, ci$Xtoq Tr,g rv%»:$, unhappy from fortune. 
 
 iV. Partitives and vi^ords placed partitively, 
 comparatives, superlatives, interrogatiyes, indef- 
 inites, and some numerals, govern the genitive 
 plural ; as, nporog AdyjvaiQv^ the first of the Athe- 
 nians ; iv Tidv 7t?.otQVj one of the ships ; 'Ot na7jaiOL 
 tiw TtoiYjtidv^ the ancient Poets ; 6l nepc^y^^ovreg 
 tuv Ttoiyftuvj the most illustrious Poets. 
 
 1. The genitive expresses, in this case, the class to which 
 the preceding word belongs, w/xw^c? Atljjp<54«5yv denotes, the 
 first from among the Athetiians. 01 7srtp'.6X6vre^ rm -zs-oiifievv, 
 the most excellent from among the Poets. 
 
 2 Sometimes, instead of the genitive, some other case 
 with a preposition is used ; as, f| wstcctaiv yj xoLXXiorJyi^ most 
 beautiful of all j ^walMTxhei t>j 'EA^sseJ"/, the most powerful in 
 Greece ; zs-pathg ev toi^ Ts-ar^ruig, first among Poets. 
 
 3. Instead of the genitive, the case of the partitive is some- 
 times used ; as, ts^^^/A."^, th^ f^evu-zs-eiclsive^riig^! Ts-^vnl^i e7s-ctr,T£, 
 for rav ^;A^», some of his friends he killed, soou he impov- 
 erished. 
 
 4. The partitives 7/« and g/$ are sometimes omitted as, (pepa 
 eroi t]9>jjv r<uv Kx\xt(ri&;v,{sc. uiuv,) I bring you a very excel- 
 lent robe. Xen. ; ocvlog Tjk^^e r^y itfvoyr&'v eivcct, (sc. et^,) he desi- 
 red to be one of those who remained. Thucyd. j n ^^y <pi>^7. 
 (sc, T<? or ni) you are one of my fi'iends. 
 
Syntax. 167 
 
 5. Partitives, &;c. agree in gender with the Fiibstantives 
 which follow in the genitive. When the substantives are of 
 different genders, the partitives, &c. commonly agree with 
 the former, sometimes the latter. 
 
 6. Collective nouns in the genitive singular are governed 
 by partitives, &c. 
 
 7. Adjectives in the positive form, when they express, in 
 a superlative sense, the quality of the subject, govern the 
 genitive plural ; as, f|o;}i«$ Trayim^ the most excellent of all; 
 
 Aloe Gecc&fv, the most divine of the Goddesses. 
 
 8. The Article is sometimes used as a partitive, as Bir^a^ 
 «v ratv ^fAa;y, in whichever of the tribes. 
 
 Dative. 
 
 V. Adjectives govern the dative of the obf'ect or 
 end to vvliich they relate ; as, lxc?jog Aa, like to 
 Jove, t. e. Jove being the object to whom he is 
 like. 0(p£?u^Log tYi TtoXa, proiitable to the State, 
 i. e. the State being the object to which he is pro- 
 fitable, nfotg yevvaLocg ro aLO^^pog ex^^ov^ to the gen- 
 erous, baseness is odious, epoxog ryj xptatt, obiiox- 
 ious to the judgment. e/xoL mxoog TaOvy;xevy exeipoig 
 iy?.vxvgy avru 8c repTXrog, he clied, bitter to me, 
 sweet to them, welcome to himself. 
 
 'O ecvTo^^ the same, governs the dative as adjectives of like- 
 ness ; as, T«y ctuiMv spai cot, I love the same things with you. 
 Luc. vo.t^/^e rr^i ccvrm tivcci ^T^/Lcixg et^tov^ m^ c-vyKpvTs-Tcvrui roti 
 elctf,iscp]x^»v(ri. Consider those who conceal, equally worthy of 
 punishment with those who sin. Isoc. 
 
 VI. Compounds of avv^ bfxog^ b^oiogy and verbals 
 in rog used passively, govern the dative ; as, 
 avyy-j^ig tu narpc^ related to my father, ofioovatog 
 
 \ tidOeg, of the same nature with God ofxoioyTjjrlr.g 
 ^fXLV, of the same language with us. r.ai^la Bvvala 
 6fJ;, ail thiogs are possible to God. ouyvualop 
 roig 7to?yXofQ, unknown to the vulgar. 
 
^68 Syntax. 
 
 VII. Verbals in teov govern the case of their 
 primitives, with a dative of the doer ; as, Cl^ov euocj 
 I must go, i. e. there must be going, as to me. 
 V€oi^ ^'yj?Ui>l£Ov ryg yspovloig^ the young should imitate 
 the old, i. e. there should be an imitation of the 
 old to the young. Simon, roig ^v ''vnapx'^vaL vofwig 
 ;^p>7(T7for, xawuc, be slky} (lyj Osleov^ we should use the 
 present laws, and not rashly enact new ones. 
 Demosth. 
 
 1 . Verbals in redv express necessity, and answer to gerunds 
 in the nominative case. The Verb e^lt is generally under- 
 stood after them, but is sometimes introduced ; as, ypc^^ltov 
 c<r]i. The Attics use them in the plural ; as, ypocTsrlsx e^iot 
 £zs-t<rj6?^7iv, 1 must write a letter. 
 
 2. The verbal is sometimes joined with a substantive, 
 like other adjectives ; as, ypuT^rJeoc f^i i7ri(r]o>,9}^ I must write a 
 letter. 
 
 3. Theverbal sometimes governs an accusative of the doer, 
 especially when its verb governs the dative ; as,ot; ^'uMltcf . 
 rovi }fovv £%ov?c4^ roti tcoctupi (ppovova-i^ the prudent ought not to 
 obey the unwise. Isoc. tuta-Kt-zs-leo^ th f^ev ccvIov, r<« /ttfv yvvuixcc, 
 for uv]u,, yvyxKt, some things are to be looked to by him, some 
 by his wife. 
 
 4. Substantives and verbals often govern the dative by the 
 force of the words from which they are derived ; as, rctt; 
 wuBiTii uKexovhliKoi o veoi , youth follows pleasure. 
 
 5. Substantives compounded with cryy and of^g govern the 
 dative ; ?LS,G-v(rjpocriulr,g avlon;^ a fellow soldier. 
 
 6 There are many adjectives which govern either the 
 genitive or dative ; as, r'/xo/o?, like ; oi^mvf^o^^ of the same 
 name ; cfM-^etlpioc^ of the same father; 01^1^,93] ptcs, of the same 
 mother 5 Grvvipo<poi^ educated together ; (^^y^;^^?$, fami iar ; io-oi- 
 pvvc^i of the same force ; xo/v^?, common ; ^rAowc-zog, «^v5/«5, 
 rich J «t/9ro^o$, abundant ; t^hr,^^ poor ; fvo%<j$, tlzro^/jco^, ysrft/- 
 ^ytofi, exposed, obnoxious ; «<«£(«$, familiar ; mm to be sold ; 
 hu>^iy a slave ; tXtvhpa^ free ; as, 'O/Mtcg m rcclpo^, or rw 
 urotlpt^ like his father. oi^wfAoi th zretlpog, or tm Tratjpt, of the 
 same aanue with his father. 
 
Syntax. 
 
 im 
 
 Government of Verbs. 
 Genitive. 
 I. EifiL and ytvouaij signifying possession, proper- 
 ty or duly govern the genitive ; as, rov xvpLOv 
 eaiisv, we belong to the master, ruv apx^^'^^^ ^^^' 
 rox}g apxouEvovg noidv evSacuovag^ it is the duty of 
 rulers to make their subjects happy. 
 
 1. The genitive is governed by some noun understood ; 
 as, xP*^H^i "^pxyfcct^ he. 
 
 2. To eif^t, signifying office or convenience, the prepo- 
 sition TTpoi with the genitive is joined ; as, 8 cr^o* ixjpa ^•<pH 
 fc-//, it does not belong to a skilful physician, hk e(r]t Trpo^ rv^ 
 ^oAfiw^, it is not proper for the State. 
 
 3.* The verbs ^x^t o'taxttfJuiLi^ hatn^yif^xt^ Tottu, r^Kw, ^ccc-^Af^ 
 joined with adverbs of quality, often govern the genitive ; 
 as, 'sTofiex^i '»"'?5 y*»i^'?5) this is nny opinion. Plut. ev tkh^ ^P^' 
 f^ujav^ to arrive at great possessions. Ilerodot. r?;$ 7rdAv/tt«- 
 Gsiot^ tv rjK.eiv, to arrive at great love of learning. In these 
 cases a preposition is understood. 
 
 For the genitive an accusative is sometimes found ; as, 
 vsKfiKco^ Tjjy ;^^o/o4v i^u, he has the colour of death. Lucian. 
 
 II. Verbs often govern the genitive by the 
 force of some noun implied in them ; as, (Saat?.- 
 evaveOvLdv, i. e. [3aai?^m eivat edpuv^ to be king of 
 the Gentiles, emdv^tv rtvog, i. e. ertidvinav tivog 
 ex^f-v, to have a desire for something ; sTuarlo ce 
 TO iraip8j i. e. vo^l^lj ae e?jirlcd ru trappy, I think 
 you inferior to your companion. 
 
 III. When the action of a verb refers not to 
 the whole of a thing, but to a part, that part is 
 often put in the genitive ; as, xparstvT^vxov ruvorovj 
 to take a wolf by the ears. expaJyjGB rrjg xsipog 
 av\ he took his hand. BTtte r« 'vhalog^ he drank 
 of the water. 
 
 See Adverbs. 
 
* '^^ Syntax. 
 
 IV. A noun denoting the matter of which any 
 thing is made, is commonly put in the genitive ; 
 as, avh^navla eTtoiYiaav fiapfmpiiy tiiey made a statue 
 of fiiarble ; oiSyip^ TtsnotyjuEvov, made of iron. 
 
 The noun is sometimes put in the dative. 
 
 A large class of verbs take after them a genitive express- 
 ing the origin or cause of the action denoted by the verb. 
 These will now be enumerated. 
 
 V. Verbs of sense govern the genitive, except 
 those of 5/^H which govern the accusative. 
 
 u(T6ccvof^at> to perceive ; ukuco, eAKPoc&o,M.xt, utc^ ycXva^ to hear ; 
 cO-^pstivQttcct, to smell ; yevofuct^ to taste ; (c-srlo^.oci^ e-mrt^ocvai^iycif^ 
 hyyocva^ to touch ; fsriXGc^Qatvof^oct. to take hold of, he, 
 
 AurSuvelut ryig yjjs, he perceives the ground — the ground 
 beins: the cause of his perception. ijicii(rcc m uvdpa^a, f heard 
 the man — the man being the cause of hearing. KXv6t ^w-fv, hear 
 from me — I being the cause of the hearing, o^f/ f^pa, he smells 
 of myrrh — myrrh being the cause of his smell. f«? f^ta oczrja, 
 touch me not — derive not from me the feeling of touch. 
 
 1. These verbs govern the accusative, among the Attics. 
 'iptjXccpu&f, to handle, has always an accusative. 
 
 2. Mciv6xva<f to learn ; o-wti^i^t, to perceive ; TrwdavofM^t^ to 
 inquire ; ^cizs-lo^ to tinge, and some others, often govern the 
 genitive, from a similarity in signification to the verbs of 
 sense. 
 
 VI. Verbs govern the genitive, which signify 
 any affection of the mind ; as, desire, disgust, re- 
 gard, neglect, admiration, contempt, memory, for- 
 getfulness, &c. 
 
 £7ri$vf^f6>^ opeyoi^xi, yXi^o^cut, e<ptsu(^t^ to desire ; epetc^, to love, 
 {'iiJLaoa) >^iXu.iof^i^ to desire, Poet.) ; /M,ae<, it is the care of ; 
 (pp^vlt^u^ iTTifjLiXQfjux.i i Kvcouoctf sv] psTTof^oit^ to take Care of J oXiyso- 
 tfcft>, to undervalue ; aXeycj, to neglect ; icxrcc^ppoveea, C'^-ep^pxa^ 
 tJTTepippovsa, to despise ; /icy;je/.<.Vu-fA), f^£f4.vt)pte>it, to remember ; 
 [7ri?iUy9oi]ioux(, eK>icev$ccvof^Qit, ccyLyr^f^cveVfu^ tO forget, &C. 
 
 K-Khro Aocvccm, she felt concern for the Greeks — the Greeks 
 being the source of her concern, upxa-^n r^q euvla ywcciKoq^ he 
 !ored his wife — he derived from his wife the affection of love. 
 
Syntax. 
 
 171 
 
 o9mm (ppcvlit^eiv, to take care of strangers— strangers being the 
 cans * of the care. uf^eMig rav (ptXc^jv, you feel no concern 
 from (for) your friends, eavf^^ca c-a, I admire you — you being 
 the cause of my admiration. ftJ? oxr/upu ^uihiu^, despise not 
 chastening — let not chastening be the cause of contenipt 
 e(p0ov7jT£ ry.iyulnec^iOf'i, he envied him on account of the neigh- 
 borhood — the neighborhood being the cause of his envy, rot 
 h iXu-re xv]ii ^ofoi^svov ev^e^'voto yv^aiKoq, she left him there, griev. 
 ed on account of the well-girt woman. Hom. 
 
 1. 7!ro9£6f and trnzroBtM govern the accusative ; and some- 
 times ilS't&VfA.BOQ^ y^'X'^l^^'^ ftvrjiC0V£V(V, ZZT'XoCvQcc'fOfA.U.i. 
 
 2. Verbs signifying to love, (except spot^a^) admire, regard, 
 neglect, often govern an accusative. 
 
 VII. Verbs signifying to partake, to obtain, to 
 enjoy, to aim at, to communicate, to aid, govern 
 the genitive. 
 
 Tyy^awfij, iiz-irvyx^^(^i f^ipofjLott^ Aseyp^sdVA;, XotfJoooioi^ s'Ss'tXotfd.koiva^ 
 xf P <y, to obtain ; KXy,po^)o^€co^ to obtain an inheritance ; xoivatvecjy 
 usixy^AM-^ccvafy H-eUxoy to partake ; f^iJxMcofjn^ to communicate ; 
 <«23"dA«t/ft;, ov>]fAXi, to enjoy, &c. 
 
 Tii^i Kxi KXKCs ^yv £>^oc^e, though wicked, he gained honor — 
 honor being (hat /ro/^i which he partook, exv ^x^um-sv (r^oX^.i ^ 
 if we may take of leisure — if we may get leisure. x,xkixs fuov 
 ftf/^Ace^f/v, 3j M,pi]7}(i u£]xh^oyxi. it is easier to partake from (of) 
 pleasure, than to impart (from) virtue, xsro^^xvcatuv rm 
 •vim xyxSav, we sliall receive enjoyment from present good. 
 £yaf <rov ovxtf^ijv^ I shall gain advantage from you. 
 
 1. >Mpt^xvoixxt, H-el^X^i y'>o>sp&)iQfjt.£ei . Xocyx^t^'^i rvyxocyuy some- 
 times govern the accusative ; Kxp-^oofjuti always. 
 
 2. Verbs of communicating .^ aiding ^ partakings often gov- 
 ern the dative of the person, xctvma tm ce^fA^aj rr^ Ts-xihxg., 
 I have a share in common with my brother, from (of) the 
 instruction. 
 
 VIII. Verbs of plenty or w^ant, filling or depriv- 
 ing, govern the genitive. 
 
 zrA)j^<», zryii}pcA>, yff^it^co^ f^iTloa^ zrif^iFXiiyj, yefJLa^ to iill ; ft;;s-«- 
 .pta, Trspura-sva, to abound ; irxiilsa, to be rich ; x<^P^cA^^i to sa- 
 tiate ; uT]£p£afs Mtpt^eny to be inferior, to want ; Q-zTx^iL^a^hw^ 
 XP>}^^9 X^pe^<^9 »-a-opsaiy to want 5 eXxrloof^^t, to be iiJerior ; 
 ^lepeeifj yvpevoa^ etP«ctpeofuti,io deprive, &C. 
 
17!2 Syntax. 
 
 Mmo? (ppem sTz/^.-srAsftv^o, his soul was full of rage — rage being 
 the cause of its fulness. ysfLtei Kuxav, is full from (of ) evil. 
 svsOopiiv'lo TijsrjiovT^i, they Satiated themselves from (with) pleas- 
 ure, xp^^^ yt)i}<rx(rd6) yy,u, let him fill his ship from (with) gold. 
 s'ss-£T']e'(^ctvlo 73-oloio, tYiej ciowued from (with) wine, iv-zropst or 
 'arepKro-svit xp^f^^^l '"^ i l^G abounds from (in) riches. sfAJzs-Xiav 
 evippocuns rui y^ctp^ioi^ rifA,m^ filling our hearts from (with) glad- 
 ness. issMpawlo xapa,<i^ they were full from (of) joy. (i-^w 
 hilot.1, he wants from meat — meat being the cause or object of 
 his want. zroe,vro<; hod^ I want from all, i. e. I am altogether 
 destitute, cjeptja-ejctt ry,g 7io>^aiy he has stripped (from) the 
 State. ci,7F0 7(puXiii <pp£vm^ deprived from (of) his mind, o 
 5r«Af^5 uTTccvlav etyoc^av ra^ ttoXiIu^ eK,'reo-']ep^c-e, the war deprived 
 the citizens from (of) all their goods. u<po(.tpiic$oii rivu ry,i 
 cipZ^i » ^^ cut, any one off from his government. 
 
 Aeoutzf, to entreat, which properly denotes, to want, governs 
 the genitive ; as, hof^ut e-a, I entreat (from) you. 
 
 nv£«y, to breathe, as it denotes fulness, governs the genitive ; 
 as, TTve'i KdKiui , to breathe hatred. A^ccipsofA^ut sometimes gov- 
 erns the accusative for the genitive ; as, u<pciip£i<r(\£>tt nvcc rtjv 
 upx'K^, to deprive any one of his government : here- Kctrx is 
 understood. Sometimes the noun denoting the person, is put 
 in the dative ; as, tA<P(&ipHa-6u,i rm rr,v <*/>;^jjy. 
 
 IX. Verbs which signify to rule, to excel, to be- 
 gin, and end, govern the genitive. 
 
 upx^ ^eo-TTo^&f, ^vvxTTcvci), e^ovcTtct^of, uvSevrea, y,otToty.vpisva, to 
 rule ; rtpuvnya, ^a,(rtXiva), avotcrarof , to reign ; Tjyeof^c^i, r^yij^vsvii), 
 to lead ; B7n(r'lu]£Ut to preside ; Trepnifjn, TreptyDiof^.oct, to be over ; 
 <^fl;^ow-«< , to begin ; 'x-xvofJLut, Xr^ya, to cease, &c. 
 
 K?iictpx^^ /ttfvra ^e^ia Kspat; riyeio-Ooit, MfVavat h rov ©£t7<«A«v m 
 6vavvf4.ii, Clearchus should lead (be the leader of) the right 
 wing, and Menon the Thessalian, the left. 'TFoXXm (6vm fucc 
 vc>ui icpulei, one city rules many nations. ycoCjupx^^^o^t t« A«y«, 
 to begin (from) the discourse. A??ye Tro^m, cease from labour. 
 uTTeTretvretvlo rH (ita, they departed from life. TtreTrccv^tevot opy>}^, 
 who have ceased from anger. 
 
 1. Kpscjea, rvpdmva, and eTrilPoTTtua, sometimes govem the 
 accusative ; apx^, ^otrtXsa) and uiccoTa, the dative, nuvu some- 
 times governs an accusative. 
 
 ?., The genitiv^o, after most verbs ofr^lin^, is governed by 
 
syntax, 173 
 
 a fiouu implied in the verb. ^unXevcOf i. e. jlctciXev^ etf^t* 
 avocv-jra^ i. e. uvcc^eiM-i. e^Hc-tec^M, i. e. t'^Sriuv e^^, &-€. 
 
 X. Verbs of accusing, speaking falsely of, 
 acquitting, and o enerally those which pertain to 
 judicial proceedings, govern the genitive of the 
 person or t/tin(/y and sometimes both of the person 
 and thing. 
 
 x.£6li)yopeCify ociliuofictt, iyv,u>^o)^ ^icoKO)^ '/poc(po,ttui, "rpoTKU^^^Letty 
 to accuse ; u7ro?^va, uipiriin^ u'^o'^vi^Ptl^of^octy to acquit ; a-vyyiva- 
 
 O-KCJ^ to pardon ; KUlW/t^COtrKOu^lCOplUOtXCC^a, KulcifCplVOf, JCCtlw^il^l^O' 
 
 f<ctty to condemn, ituTcf^ev^o!^oi>i^ io speak falsely of. 
 
 Atay.a a-e (povn, ypsc<poy,ut c-e (poya^ 1 accuse you of murder— 
 the murder being the cause of the accusation, afpnif^t or 
 cc7ro?iVcu a-e syK>^y:f^uloi^ 1 free vou from the charge. syxscxS g-h 
 TTpo^bc-iuy, I accuse you of treachery Kxhyopaa't a-a (rjua-iv^ 
 they accuse you of seditioji. KulaytvAfc-KCj ct^ ^ccvxla^ or <r« 
 ^xvxjev, I condemn you to death. 
 
 XI. Verbs govern the genitive, which denote 
 difference or separation ; and among the last may 
 be included those of prohibiting, abstaining, spar- 
 ing, relieving, preventing, erring, &c. 
 
 ^iu.xXat,r}cj, ^ia.(^ep6}, to differ ; h'ir!r,fjLt^ to be distant ; o'^'C**'* 
 X«>pi^<^i to separate ; npyco^ to prohibit ; x7.-iXoiuun^ to abstain ; 
 ATtoLXXcffioi^ £>^sv$sfc6o, ^'jotLtci. to frce ^ ?.va/, to loosc ; xn^t^ci) to 
 relieve ; (pn^oci'^n, to spare ; CTroTr/^xvaeucct, ct'Pi'ervyX'^youet:, 
 otf^capluva, to err ; -^f-iV^oi^cui, 7r/as/<y, e-^««A-?u?.ct«;/, to deceive, to 
 frustrate, &,c.- 
 
 Ov^sv hu/pipu ecpx^^ ocysi-^i , uya&cv Txjpo^, a good ruler does 
 not differ from a good father, rj ufA.ctpliu, hicircriv r^fA^^ m e^b', 
 our sins separate us from God. upyu <re Tivpe^ r.ott C^ccloc, I in- 
 terdict you from fire and water, a'et cc7r3ye(r$ut rm HJLKm, we 
 ought to restrain ourselves from evil. o^svBepcocn rjjy Trohtv 
 (poQov^ he delivered the city from fear. e&epu7rsv0>^ rev vog-cv^ 
 he wa^ healed from disease, -srxt^ov ^uh^6ut -srsclptKoq vof^^, 
 it is the law of the country to spare children, r.ysipev ecv'Jev 7cy 
 uTs-yov, he awoke him from sleep. o/axA) Tt rr^^ p/x;«$, I drive 
 you from the house. 
 
 Some verbs of differing govern the dative ; as, hu^spa^ cro;, 
 I differ from you. ^ ,,^ 
 
 lb* 
 
174 Syntax, 
 
 XII. Verbs of buying, selling, estimating, &c, 
 govern the genitive of the price. 
 
 atnovLcct^ etyopu^a^ yrptotf^sti tO buy ; 7rt7rpoco-x6j^ ttuXsu^ to sell 5 
 o^f^et^a, to exchange ; <«|/o&>, to estimate, &c. 
 
 rm TTovm TTaXst 9jiica)v 7rav]ec roc aycxJ^oc Qsoi, the Deity sells US 
 all things for toils. ano-xf^Tiv rcvro Tnvre ^pocxy^o^v^ I bought this 
 for five drach mag. uhovlon hTtrXvi^ r/^jj5, is esteemed worth 
 double. Jo$T<9VTd ^pc^xy^r^, give this for a drachma. 
 
 The price is sometimes put in the dative, with the prepo- 
 sition £7n expressed or understood ; as, eTft fjuc-do) fA.tyu>^ai 
 u7rx^?^etrlci) a-i rui ^itvaVy for a great reward I release you from 
 evil. Sometimes in the accusative, after rrpoq ; as, TriTrpufrKt 
 o XMK6§ TFdilcc 7rpo§ ocpyvpov, the wicked sells all things for gold. 
 
 XIII. Incentivfs^ govern genitives, when the 
 included verb governs the genitive. 
 
 yevay to cause to taste ; wAcc^^;, to make to wander ; ^jy^nT- 
 K6f, ecvufttfA.vtj'TKM, uTFofAiiMTio-jcuy to causc oue to remember, &c. 
 Ey£t;c-^5 f^e ev^ccitAcviccg^ you have made me taste happiness. 
 
 XIV. Most of the active verbs already men- 
 tioned, may take an accusative of the object^ with 
 the genitive, especially those of accusing, con- 
 demning, acquitting, warning, fillinsf, emptying, 
 delivering, separating, disappointing, repeUing, 
 forbidding, restraining, changing, valuing, buy- 
 ing, selling, esteeming. 
 
 Dative. 
 
 XV. Etot, taken for ex^^j to have, governs the 
 dative ; as, soIl (iol ;^p>7/ua7a, I have possessions. 
 
 XVI. Verbs compounded with ev^ ent^ Ttopa, 
 Tt^og^ crvv, ^vno^ avlc^ ofiov, govern the dative ; as, 
 efi^ivoL rotg xadsalcdatf to adhere to institutions ; 
 efiSaTi^^LV or entdetvai ttvi rag X^^^^j to lay hands 
 on any one ; 7tpoa<pspeLV iavlo rag j^^^pag, to lay 
 
 * Verbs signifyiog (0 cause one io do any things are called Xncenfives 
 
Syntax, 175 
 
 hands on himself; Ttapaysveadat rvi sxxTiyiaiqy to be 
 present at the meeting. 
 
 XVII. Any verb may govern the dative, that 
 has the sign to ox for after it in English ; as, etxetv 
 xoucotg, to yield to misfortune ; nag avr^p avlo Ttovet, 
 every man labours for himself. 
 
 The meaning of the rule is, that the word to which the 
 action of the verb tends, or is acquired, is put in the dative ; 
 and this is the case, even though the relation is not express- 
 ed in English by the preposition to or for ; as, ^QfiQeiv rvt Trccjpt' 
 i't, to aid one's country. 
 
 XVIII. Verbs signifying to profit or hurt ; to 
 favor and assist; to command and obey, meet, 
 follow or acquiesce ; to serve and resist ; to re- 
 proach, threaten, and be angry ; to believe or 
 trust ; govern the dative ; as, (Soyjdetv rip TtarptSt^ 
 to aid his country. fuaxsoOaL roiq Tto^f/toig, to fight 
 the enemy, arey^i^^ '^^^^ Ttapovac^ to acquiesce, 
 or be content with what we have, avaaetv Ttaai^ 
 o rule all. ovetSt^eiv rtviy to reproach any one. 
 no'kTuoL avlo ve^adcfi, many are angry with him. 
 roig Sixatoig ;^a;U7tatvf6i; a defiigy to injure the just is 
 wrong. neidsGdai roig vouoig^ to obey the laws. 
 7tX«76) xvhog ouYihi^ glory follows or attends riches. 
 
 Some verbs of admonishing and exhorting, take an accu- 
 sative for the dative ; as, orpwaf srctpc^wa, i-sreyetpMy rarpo^ 
 rpe-zTOf^ v^6eltoo^ and 'ZS-upoCKuXsAt » Turocpccr^otXu (r£ rocvjet^ I exhort you 
 
 to these things : here ess-i or -zs-po^ is understood. 
 
 XIX. Verbs govern the dative, which signify 
 Lo have intercourse, to worship, to pray, to use, 
 to fawn. 
 
 t XocXea^ hiiXsycfjMi^ to converse ; hoclpiQa^ opLtXs6f, evrvyx^v^j 
 10 have intercourse ; evxofM.ty to pray ; srpQtrKvuof^ Xecjpsvat, to 
 vorship i xp^f'^*9 to use, he, 
 'o 'STpoTsv)^of4,sV6s Xx^u OT S'tuXsyeloci roj efw, he who prays, 
 
iia Syntax, 
 
 speaks to Go«3. coipoii ofXtXm k uvjo^ efcSfjo-*} 0-6$^^ he that has 
 intercourse with the Avise shall be wise. Meiiand. xp^^'^ott 
 Tin 4><Aflt), to use some friend. 
 
 1. TipoTicvvia, sometimes governs the accusative ; as do 
 
 ?^iT(rof4,xt, M]otvevCi), iKelsve^, ttiltQaXaoi ; as, sXifrj-sJoy Or, sXiietvevs 
 ©sovrv^eiv oty<«^6;v, he prayed for good. 
 
 2. Many others of the verbs which have been enumerated, 
 under this head, sometimes govern the accusative. 
 
 3. Two datives coupled by xa/. having the verb stf^t ex- 
 pressed or understood, have the sense of community ; as, rt 
 if^ot Ksci <roi, what have I to do with thee ? John ii. 4. rif4.:txeiii 
 KUjiLoi, what have 1 to do with battles ? Anac. 
 
 4. The datives of the pronouns, especially /ito< and «r«;, like 
 mihi in Latin, are often little else than elegant expletives • 
 as, Ts-a G-ai ym oczreXk^ where has he gone ? oiei <roi — fA^ocxsl^dcii 
 Tdv «JVA^»v ; do you think your brother will fight ? Xenoph. 
 Anaba. 
 
 XX. The dative of participles and of some 
 nouns, is often joined to the third person of ft^a or 
 fyivofjtai^ for the verb itself: These are, (3ti/iofi£vog 
 riSou8Vog^ ay(,0o[i€vog9 7H^ochsj(p(iBVoq^ axidVy aa[iEvog : 
 as, et GOi (337j)U£vo> eali, for ei /Sou/l^t, if you will, 
 ^lian. SL cot y^^ofievo ealh if you please. I^lato. otQ 
 \)fiLdv (irj ax^avoiievid eiyj^ to whom of you wouhl it 
 not be grievous ? Xen. «& navv tovlo Tt^oahxaiie- 
 vQig avloig riv, this they little expected. Arrian. 
 vSsavlo axovlir^v^ nor was he unwilUng. Idem, ro 
 h^ a/yfievQ yivelac arSpag ayaOovg Siaac^at^ he wil- 
 lingly saved good men. Idem, rarov [lev xat 
 neTibLpaizsroig av rt yevoilo ^vucv, this you may expe- 
 rience. Thucyd. 
 
 XXI. Any active verb may govern the accusa- 
 tive and dative, when^ together with the object of 
 the action, it expresses the person or thing in re- 
 lation to which it is exerted ; as^ '"vmaxveoiiai aoi 
 hexa ra?javray I promise you ten talents. 
 
Syntax, 177 
 
 •The noun in the dative is sometimes put in the accusative ; 
 
 as, ■ssrot.piKux^ca, (re tolvtol for ralct^i I exhorted you to these 
 fhings. 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 XXII. Verbs signifying actively, govern an ac- 
 cusative of the object ; as, yvaOi GsavroVf know 
 thyself. 
 
 1. Neuter verbs govern the accusative of a noun, whose 
 signification is similar to their own ; as, sroXefioi ■ss-oXsfA.it^tiv^ to 
 make war. The Poets often use neuter verbs in an active 
 sense ; as, o-vpi^m ^ovov, hissing slaughter. 
 
 2. The Attics delight in the accusative, and often use it 
 after verbs which govern the genitive or dative ; especially 
 after verbs of sense ; as, xkHoj rxv^Xy I hear these things. 
 
 3. A clause or a sentence often expresses the object of a 
 transitive verb ; as, (7n0uf4.ovbi€^ xkh^cci n 'role e(r]i o h-v6os, we 
 wish to know what the fable is. Here n ^srojt e<r]i o f^v^o^ is 
 the object of the verb uKUToct. 
 
 Two Accusatives. 
 
 XXIII. Verbs of asking and teaching, clothing 
 and conceaHng, speaking or doing well or ill, 
 govern two accusatives, the one of the person, the 
 other of the thing ; as, 
 
 Xp^ <*'7f<v rovs ©£^5 ctyot^u.^ we ought to ask good from the 
 Gods, ^^sch ; 'uTcu^lx Tg ^i^ec^of^xt, I will teach you all 
 things ; e^eovo-c&v ecvlov rip ■sr6p(pvpccv, Kat eve^vcrecv ocvjcv roc {f^xlt» 
 rx i^fuy they took off from him the purple robe, and put on 
 his own garments. Mark xvi. 20 ; r?}V 6vyciltp<x, e^pvyrle rov 
 Botvctlov ra uv^po^i he concealed from his daughter the death of 
 her husband. Lysias ; f^s^ev tizs-yi^ (pxxvoov ccv^pxg ^s^tov^jy you 
 should speak no ill of worthy men. Aristoph. ; Aecjce^ccif^ouov?. 
 "TTaXXet Ti^v -sToXiv vi^ticvjx/flcc^^ KOLi f/^syuXa, the Lacedemonians, wh^^t 
 have done the city many and great injuries. Demosth. 
 
 XXIV. Incentives govern two accusatives, 
 when the included verb governs an accusative • 
 as, ya2xx enoltaa \uagy I have fed you with milk. 
 3 Cor. iii. 2. ^Opxi^u Vua^ tor Kvpcoj'^ 1 bind you 
 
178 Syntax, 
 
 by an oath before the Lord, ra asfiv^ enyj xoT^a^e 
 x6LV8q^ Reprove them with chaste words. Soph. 
 
 XXV. Verbs governing the accasative, with a 
 genitive, sometimes change the genitive into the 
 accusative, and thus govern tw^o accusatives ; as, 
 xary^yopc) as ^'SvSog^ I accuse you of falsehood. 
 
 XXVI. Verbs governing an accusative of the 
 object, may hkewise take an accusative of a 
 noun similar in signification to their ow n ; as, 
 ^L?u7t7t0(; VLXYjaobg tsg Adyivatsg tyjv sv Xaipcjveia ua- 
 Xyjv. Philip having conquered the Athenians in the 
 battle of Choeronium. Polyb. ^oplt^elf. r^g ai^Opo- 
 Ttsg ^plta SvaSaxlaxlay ye load men with burdens 
 difficult to be borne. Luke ii. 46. 
 
 Passive Voice. 
 
 XXVII. The agent or doer is put in the geni- 
 tive, after passive verbs and those of a passive 
 signification, with the prepositions 'imo, exj nupa^ 
 Ttpog : as, fiyj VLXQ 'vno ra xax8, be not overcome 
 of evil. Rom. xii 21. Ttpog Q^sxai avOpuTtov re- 
 liuyilaiy he was honored by God and man. 
 
 1. The preposition is sometimes omitted ; as, <piXm vtx.Svlu^ 
 <pt>^t, friends are influenced by each other. Soph. 
 
 2. The noun is sometimes put in the dative instead of the 
 genitive ; as, 'Wo o-ocj pxTrcct^ hoiKet'r^cit , to be governed by vice- 
 roys. Herodian. ^f:rd/;j7a/ /«,<»/, it has been done by me. 
 
 XXVIII. When a verb in the active voice 
 governs two causes, in the passive it retains the 
 latter case ; as, xalyjyopsoiiat x^J^Ttrjg, I am accused 
 of theft. Svva'jQs ro paTtlta^a, 6 syo (Sanli^ouaCf 
 ^anliqQyivaiy^ Can ye be baptized with the bap- 
 
 ♦ &dL7rlt^oi>^ is an incentive governing two accusatives, because the in 
 eluded verb f^ATrloa governs one. Se« Rule XXIV. 
 
Syntax* 179 
 
 tism with which I am baptized ? Matth. xx. 22. 
 '06 TtOA^o^evot royaXaj who are fed with milk. 
 Kacv Ttotpa ra 5ta^o/ly rov <p6ovov xat cpovov sStSaxOyjf 
 Cain was taught envy and murder by the devil. 
 Nazian. evhehv^svot ;^J(ji't(Txtfg, clothed in little 
 tunics. 
 
 1. Sometimes ihe^ former case is retained after the passive, 
 and the latter made its nominative ; as, Aj?/t4dwy<t| e-rnrjeo^v tj?v 
 ^PX^^i ^^r ^rH'<!ovotKJt eTriTlsv^r ^ jcpx^^ Demonax was entrusted 
 with the government. Lucian. ttjv ^e ck x^t^m acpTru^oi^coct, 
 which is snatched from my hands, ficcmlov KctiocKpifim , con- 
 demned to death. 
 
 2. Passive verbs are often followed by the accusative, a 
 preposition being understood, npof^r.devi vtto et£]s siC{ips]o to 
 gjwoe/), Prometheus was torn by an eagle as to his liver. Lu- 
 cian. 
 
 3. Passive, like neuter verbs, take a noun in the accusa- 
 tive, of a similar signification to their own. jj%««;r««» x^P^* 
 ficvyeeM^v, they were rejoiced with great joy. Matth. ii. 10. 
 ^Ajjv<«5 €)ccc%v tjj fA.oL'r'iotyi TV7rje(r$af, Let him be beaten a hundred 
 stripes with the whip. Plat. 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 I. Impersonal verbs govern the dative ; as, 
 [isycalov aSo^€v airro, it seemed to him a very great 
 thing. 
 
 Xp^ more commonly governs the accusative. 
 
 II. %p>7, Tipenet and Sa, it hehovethy govern the 
 accusative, with the infinitive ; as, ;^p>7 ralo TtoieiVf 
 this must be done. 
 
 III. &t, sTCkeiTteij Sta^epsij (leteali, fjte?yeLj evSex^^oLt 
 and TtpoarjxsL, with their compounds, frequently 
 govern the dative of the person, and the genitive 
 of the thing ; as, Sei noX^v cot, you have need of 
 much, fxerealt fiot r«7«, I have a share of this. 
 tuv rexvcdv ro Ttalpi ^6/Ut, children are the care of 
 parents. 
 
180 Syntax, 
 
 The nominative is often used instead of the genitive of the 
 thing ; as, ^tes^tpst n o-qi rajo or T«7a, how does this concern 
 you? 
 
 Af/ sometimes takes an accusative of the person with a 
 genitive of the thins;. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 I. The infinitive, with or without an article, is 
 used as a noun in any case ; and the subject or 
 agent of the verb is in the accusative ; as, 
 
 Nom. ;tflc>i£5rov r© f^jj (pt?it]Tcci, (supp. fW/,) it is difficult not 
 to love. Anac. 
 
 Gen. TToAAflCx/s doicsi re <pu>\,ot^oti r* ccyu&oe. "^ov KJviO-cc!rdoct y^ct-Xf 
 
 77a!]£pov etvuii to preserve good, seems often more difficult than 
 to gain it. Flut. (piXo<ro(po(; uvev m Trpscrlsw, a philosopher 
 without action ; m-sxP* "^^ ><e'/uv. at the word. 
 
 Dat. Tfl ^mJ» ecKcctp^fi tcTov £0*7; ro) f4.i<reiy, to love out of reason 
 is the same as to hate. 
 
 Ace. rv(pXoii cT«Mo/$ tycocpio-xlo to /SAe^fiv, he gave sight to 
 many. 
 
 Sometimes the infinitive is preceded by its subject or agenty 
 and the clause used as a noun 5 as> Trps ra 0/A<7r7r<Jv (p6>n^ett, 
 before Philip called you. x^og ro ccyecBo? (pctmG'&cii, to appear 
 good. 
 
 Here OMt^^rov (pmyifrai^ and uyoc&o<i <p(ctve<r9oct, are taken as 
 nouns, and governed by the preceding preposition. 
 
 II. One verb governs another in the infinitive, 
 (rvhen the second denotes the object to n-hich the 
 action of the Jirst is directed ;) as, yjp^alo TieyecVf 
 he began to say. 
 
 Many adjectives^ especially those which denote will or 
 power, govern the infinitive ; as, ccptclo^ «s»ov7«^e/y, excellent 
 in darting. o|t^5 o^Sv, sharp-sighted. 
 
 III. When the conjunctions tug, ort, Ira, &c. are 
 omitted, the Greeks, like the Latins, use the ac- 
 
Syntax. 1 9 1 
 
 eusniive with the infinitive ; as, Ttapa Ttaaw ai^po- 
 Ttoic bm^ycOai^ Stxaiov SLvat^ ixaolsg ra tavluv 6%ctv, 
 among all men it is acknowledged to be just, 
 that each should have his own. 
 
 IV. The infinitive mood has the accusative 
 before it, (n/ien its subject or agent is dijjerent 
 
 from that of the preceding verb ;) as, rt (ipolovg 
 <pporsiv ?i6yti<yc ; why do they say that mortals are 
 wise ? 
 
 V. The infinitive mood has the nominative 
 before it, when its subject or agent is the same 
 with that of the preceding verb ; as, ^yjotvovlog 
 afj£tvuv Ysyev^cQai ol^lyjyog f<f«, he says, he was a 
 better general than 1. oio^iat eivaL fpiTuog ruv evae- 
 Sciv^ 1 think myself a friend of the pious, uz e^ 
 avlog a'?iX trepov alpalrjyeiv^ he said that not he, 
 but another commanded. 
 
 1. If all things in the sentence refer to the same person, 
 «^$ OTao'ls, or a preposition may be joined, even with a nomi- 
 native, to the infinitive ; as, «/ Uepo-tct evof^iTxv, et TreAfioty^uXUfJu- 
 M/, t^a-]e rcc o/ic^tec ^oiovvjti ratv uvjdfv rvy^u¥it¥, the Persians sup- 
 posed that, if called, they should obtain the same reward, 
 doing the same things, ^toc ro f^ ro^ei eivxi, because they are 
 not wise. ^fo$ to etyu$oi <pxivifr6ect , to appear good. 
 
 2. A few* instances may be found, in which the accusative 
 precedes the infinitive, though both verbs refer to the same 
 person ; as, Xiyet tecvjci trepov yeyevefeci, he said that he was be- 
 come another. 
 
 VI. The infinitive is often used forthe impera- 
 tive, Set, 3^p>75 fo^, &c. being understood ; as, 
 Xaipsiviiela xoi^povlov, xT^lhv [iBla K?jaLOvluv, rejoice 
 with them that do rejoice, and weep with those 
 that weep, gv ^e at^eiv rag Mecayivatngj acdi^etv 8e 
 xat OFavlov, save the Messenians and yourself. 
 
 VII. The infinitive, with an accusative, is often 
 
 17 
 
182 Syntax. 
 
 put for other moods, with og, uale^ trts, sq> octij 
 Ttptr, Ttapog^ eTtei^y/, (isxpi^ orusxp^g^ ^^d oiog preced- 
 ing it ; as, cjg iSetv avdpcdnov^ for c5g tSev avd^xMog^ 
 when the man saw ; npo aTusxlo^ ^cdvyjaaL^ before 
 the cock crow ; 6l Qsot etCt olol [lyj [lelaSaXXeiVf the 
 Gods are such as cannot change. 
 
 VIII. The infinitive is sometimes used instead 
 of ^the impersonal participle ; as, efiOL hoTcsvv for 
 spioi hoKHv^ as it appeared to me ; heiv for heov, 
 when it ought. 
 
 IX. The future of the infinitive is often ex- 
 pressed by the aorist or present of the same mood 
 with the particle av ;* as, ni Ttotriaai av^ or Ttoteiv 
 av Tov Ttalepa [13 otec ; what do you think my fath- 
 er will do ? 
 
 X. The infinitive supplies the place of 8:erunds 
 and supines, which are only verbal nouns ; as, 
 xaxcdg emalafisvog InTtevsiv^ minus peritus equitandi. 
 HxyjTJdop ^a%dv ei^rjvr^v, non veni missum pacem. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 I. Participles govern the case of their own 
 verbs ; as, tovg VccSlspovg rotavla yjdn TtaiSevovleg, 
 instructing the younger men in such manners. 
 
 II. Participles are often used as nouns ; as, 
 
 6t ypa'i'OixEvot Xoxparriv^ the accusers of Socrates ; 
 6 epyj)iisvog^ he who cometh. 
 
 There is this difference between the participle and the 
 corresponding noun. The former expresses the person des- 
 cribed, in action ; the latter does not. a ^ovM^ is a man in 
 the rank or condition of a slave : o hvXivco't is one, at the time 
 referred to, fulfilling the office of a slave. 
 
 ♦ See under Conjunctions, the particle av. 
 
>yyniax. loo 
 
 III. Participles are used for the infinitive, after 
 verbs, of persevering^ desisting, knowimjj remem- 
 hering^ esteeming^ showing, discovering, and such 
 as signify Gfw affection of the mind ; as, ov navao- 
 uai ypa^cdv, 1 will not cease to write, fie^ivruat 
 Ttotyioag, I remember to have done it. ^atverat 
 rovro Ttenoiyjxcdg^ he appears to have done it. ovx 
 otSoi eycyye xa/Oiuj TtatSa ifor, I know not that I have 
 seen a more beautiful girK Ssi^o TtsnoLyixog, I will 
 show myself to have done it. ue^v/jao avdpQTtog 
 uvj remember that you are a man. r^aOovto Se oi 
 noX?\joi 7te<p8vyorog Avrcdvt^f the people perceived 
 that Antony was fled, o^omi at, ^sr oXiyov lax- 
 pviiaav^ I shall see you. after a little time, w eep- 
 ing. 
 
 1. The participle commonly agrees in case with the noun 
 to which it refers. But verbs of knowing may be followed 
 by a participle in the dative or accusative, referring to the 
 nominative ; as, <rvvot^oc tf^xvlu^ uuocplocvm, (^cif.tuplccvovjt) (^u/iucplcc- 
 yov7<«,) TTipt oifucpltai, (aiM.ecp'^/ficv,) 1 am conscious of a crime. 
 
 2. Adjectives denoting clearness are followed by partici- 
 ples ; as, ^>jAo5 et G-vicu^civlm, you are plainly a sycophant. 
 so-Jt Jf nx, ec^yjXoi ffl^v, he is clearly about to say. 
 
 3. A participle, with the verbs sif^i^ C'^ap-yc^y yivof^ut, ez^, 
 3jx4>, is often put for its own verb ; as. TrpoQsQr/Koles jjr«v, for 
 '7rpo£oe^r,)cei(rccv, otTriKJocKUi trji rov uv&pi^fTroy, he has killed the man, 
 for ocyrcKjetKB, 6^(7$ rapu^x^, for e'lccpoc^uq, ycu have disturbed. 
 
 4. When the participle is joined with AavfJ^^va;, (pBocvof, rvy- 
 X^^^, ^tciloc>,sa), in any tense, it is rendered by that tense, and 
 the verb by an adverb ; as, eXxOs fioTy^m, he secretly fed. 
 s>^6ov ^ivsiTccvls^ ri^5 «jyyfA«$, entertained angels unawares, ^ik 
 if6t £?i&iuv x,xi Tijv <piXoli^ixv avochi£,eilo, he no sooner Ct.nie than 
 he showed his ambition, ot elvy^xvov eovl eg, who were there 
 by chance, elv/x^^^^f^^^ Ti-eptTrccTHyle^, we happened to be walk- 
 ing. 
 
 5. In some instances, the participle has a real and perti- 
 nent signification, though apparently redundant ; Rs,<pxvepoq v» 
 ^9ii ^tjuoleixcq y.oci et?ixy$pw7rog m, he being sympathetic and hu- 
 
1S4 Syntax. 
 
 mane,was manifest — being really humane, he, in consequence, 
 so manifested himself. etynTxrviTeti uv^i ?%&>, having loved him, 
 I so have him — having loved him, I still hold him dear. 
 'PFpocyoq uTKOTvm £%ii Ts-spotvQi, he has an unaccountable deed, hav- 
 ing done it— i. e. he is involved in the consequence of a deed, 
 Tvhicb, in an unaccountable manner, he has perpetrated. 
 
 6. Participles are often used for the sake of emphasis ; 
 as, t^'av /J«v, seeing I have seen. 
 
 Sometimes the participle of a preceding verb is prefixed 
 to the clause which follows ; as, «*AAcft tv Tpoo-eMe, icut TrpoT- 
 f?i6av unXii, ttoci unXofuvo<; $cg, but do you go to it, and having 
 gone to it, take it up, and having taken it up, give it. eya 
 
 Pi xfv uuioi tXeo^oii, fi Tcoy jy Afccvlo^, tav yepetS-, ^ O^vrxm^ etl^a eA»y, 
 I myself coming, will take away thy reward, or (that) of 
 Ajax or Ulysses, having taken, will lead it away. 
 
 7. Participles have sometimes the adverb f^rot^u before 
 them, in whatever case the construction requires, and thus 
 used have the sense of the Latin gerund in dum. 
 
 Construction of Circumstances. 
 
 I. The causcj source^ origin^ and part affected^ 
 
 are put in the genitive ; as, ^axaptog ryjg rv- 
 Xyig, happy from his fortune ; or fortunate. — 
 <pL?iei avrov ry^g apsryjgj he loves him for his vir- 
 tue. /{vKov zparsLv cdrijv, to take a wolf by the 
 ears. 
 
 The cause, source, origin, and part affected, are very fre- 
 quently put in the accusative by synecdoche, >c»rcc, ^lu, &;c. 
 being understood. 
 
 II. The manner, instrument, means, and end, 
 are put in the dative ; as, xparsc fzyjx,civatgj he con- 
 quers by stratagems ; apyvptaic; Jj^yxaai [io.yfi^ xat 
 navra %par>?attc, fight with silver weapons, and 
 you will conquer all things. Ttapauvdyjrixov 6 ^L?^g 
 xat "tYi oi^ci ;fat rca Xoyc3, a friend gives consolation 
 by his looks and words. Arist. 
 
Syntax. 185 
 
 The manner, instrument, means and end, are often put in 
 the accusative by synecdoche ; as, Trurtjp c-ot ttjv vXtKtuv^ fju^x- 
 A/>r h rr.i ewotuv, a father to you in respect of years, more so 
 in respect of kindness. Heliod. ^iccv J^accr? /t<,»7^c»', you should 
 do nothing with violence. 
 
 III. The genitive is often used for the dative, 
 or the dative for the genitive, as th^ writer is de- 
 sirous of fixing the attention of his reader upon 
 the source^ or upon the instrument or end of the 
 specified action. 
 
 . Thus, when Homer says of Hector, II. viii. 235, he would 
 burn the ships rcith flaming fire, N^jcc^ e/icTrpyjTet wvpi Ki:?iia>, he 
 fixes the mind upon tire, as the instrument by which this is 
 done : but when in another place, 11. ix. 242, he writes, Av](n 
 n epcsrpijG-etf {JLotXipov zrvpoi;, that he would burn themy?'o?n fire, 
 he directs the attention backward to fire, as the cause from 
 which their being burnt proceeded. 
 
 The same observation applies to the following examples. 
 E^£t rupzT7iTc&v e^uh.i , After they enjoyed themselves from 
 food, \uipi <J' AhvotiTi zs-izs-vvpcevo} ctv^pi ^ty-uto)^ Minerva delight- 
 ed in the man wise and just. Avno^ 7}X6' A^i^Mh be went 
 against Achilles. II. xx. 422. Avr;a nsjAf/A/vos /<yv,xx. 113, going 
 against the son of Peleus. 
 
 Otvcf) ^i^ccprjOTei, laden with wine. Xtf^uto (iupeietg Zt'pi^i 
 his hands heavy from pestilence — i. e. with pestilence. 
 
 np£-z!rcv yi t' i;v cev ^'xi/Liovoi Tev * fAou ro^e, this would have been 
 suitable from my evil genius, for ^uif^yt iw £f^^ to my evil 
 genius. Aixg AStjvu^ — ocvrt^toni ^mov sTrci, A. M, 6o4, he gave 
 the divine Minerva a terrible answer, for A/« A$>}vu. 
 
 IV. Nouns which denote that with regard to 
 which any thing is done, are commonly put in 
 the genitive ; as, ev ex^cv <pp6vuP9 to be favourable 
 in mind. 
 
 V. The price of a thing is put in the genitive ; 
 and sometimes in the dative ; as, ovrioauy^p Tiei^rs 
 ^pa2f^'->^'5 1 bought it for five drachmae ; ^ptcrjo ifyjv 
 vLXYiv QiT^aarOf he bought the victory with Lold. 
 
 17* 
 
186 Syntax. 
 
 In purchasing or exchanging goods, the thing received is 
 the cause of giving away the thing exchanged, and must 
 therefore be put in the genitive ; as, ocit^siQe xpvTiu, xa>^tm^ 
 he exchanged golden for brazen arms — his receiving brazen 
 arms being the cause of giving away the golden. When the 
 dative is used, it expresses the means or instrument of pro- 
 curing the exchange ; as, xp^^froj rtjv viktiv huvtitccU, he bought the 
 victory with gold. The dative seems to be used when a re- 
 ference is made to the person who wishes to procure the 
 exchange ; the genitive, when the reference is to the person 
 from whom it is procured. 
 
 VI. The question, whither? is commonly an- 
 swered hjetq orTtpog with the accusative : where P 
 by ev with the dative ; as, ev 'Pof^>7, at Rome. 
 eig ry}v Avnoxsiav^ at Antioch. 
 
 Vil. The question, whence ? is ansveered by ex 
 or ano with the genitive ; by or throuyh what 
 place ? by hia with the genitive ; as ex or aitx) tyjg 
 TtoXsug, from the city. Sea yyjg^ by land. 
 
 The prepositions are sometimes omitted, especially by the 
 Poets. 
 
 VIII. The terminations dc and en, added to a 
 noun, denote at a place ; Se, ^c, or ae to a place ; 
 Qbv and 0c, from a place : as, KopivdoQc oixia vaudv^ 
 inhabiting houses at Corinth. etfiL ^dcyivSej I go 
 to Phthia. x?^taiYi6ev aveiT^to ;^aJl;ceoi/ eyx^^* ^^ 
 took the brazen spear from the tent. 
 
 IX. The measure of maynilude is put in the 
 genitive or nominative ; as, avh^iag SvuSexa nex^- 
 QVf a statue of twelve cubits. Ev^parrjg eon to 
 Evpog rerlapovaraSiov^ the Euphrates is fonr stadia 
 wide. TO MaiavSpti ro evpog Svo TtXf 0pa, the Mae- 
 ander is two plethera wide. 
 
 X. The distance from one place to another 
 is put in the accusative ; as, E(|)f(7og anex^h '^p'"^ 
 
Syntax. 187 
 
 riu^fx^ oSov^ Ephesus is distant three days' jour- 
 ney. SsxaTtevre Ttex^f^^ sTtarcd opov 'xr^udyj ro ^vScdp, 
 the water rose twenty-five cubits above the 
 mountains. Sometimes, though rarely, in the 
 dative ; as, Tlevra7to?.Eug TpcTtoTug ^tsj^et oSo etxoatv 
 ev^cyvo a^5pt, Tripoli is distant from Pentapolis 
 twenty days' journey, for an active man. 
 
 X. The time rvhen is commonly put in the gen- 
 itive, sometimes Jn the dative ; time how Icmgj 
 in the accusative ; as, Yifiepag ocai wxrtog^ by day 
 and night, ri/ufpa /u/a, on one day. opyyi ipL?Mvrcw 
 oT^iyov Laj(vei xpovov^ the anger of those who love 
 prevails but a short time. 
 
 The time when is sometimes put in the accusative ; as, 
 
 jjy ^i^eccxofi t<c5 rjf^pu,^^ ru/^ h vvxlec^ nvM^tla et^ To opog^ he taught 
 
 by day, and by night tarried in the mountain. Luke xxi. 37' 
 Here some preposition, as ^/«, is understood. The time 
 how long is sometimes put in the genitive or dative ; as, toXXh 
 etvjiii Hx, * iMpxKct xP^^^i ^ have not seen them for a long time. 
 a 7ro?^ect9 rfMpatii 6<rJepov, not many days after. 
 
 Case of the Synedoche. 
 
 XI. Substantives are very often put in the ac- 
 cusative by synecdoche^ xara, hia, &c. being un- 
 derstood ; as, Ttarj^p aot ryjv yiXixiav^ ^ia?i?jop Se 
 em'ouxv, a father to you in respect of years, more 
 so in respect of kindness. OTCsSaiog rov rpoTtai^, of 
 ingenuous disposition. 
 
 Nouns signifying the form, majinevy distinction, object, 
 measure^ number, or part affected, after substantives and ad- 
 jectives ; and those denoting the cause, instrument, or manner, 
 after adjectives and verbs, are commonly put in the accusa- 
 tive by synecdoche. 
 
188 Syntax, 
 
 Case Absolute. 
 
 XII. A substantive and participle are put in 
 the genitive, when their case depends on no other 
 Avord ; as, 0f« 8i8ovrog, bSev ia^vei (pdoivgj vvlifen 
 God gives, envy avails nothing. 
 
 1. The genitive is not, in such c;i&es, really absolute or 
 independent : it expresses the cause or origin of soaie circum- 
 stance mentioned in the preceding or subsequent clause ; as, 
 ^sctyni £<r]i icut cai^e^ui, Geav Ge^^oviav, Theagnes exists and is 
 preserved from the Gods willing it — Theagnes is preserved, 
 the Gods willing it being the cause of his preservation. 
 
 2. The participles of 5/jm-< and yivof^ccci, and some others, are 
 often omitted ; as, e|£^/< (pmslv, &»$ efcn f*.oni^ (sc. H'Ttj^) 1 may 
 speak when alone. 
 
 The genitive, especially of pronouns, is sometimes omit- 
 ted ; as, K?^ijp^^i>afv, (sc. av/^'v,) they choosing by lot. 
 
 3. The intinitive, or pai:t of a sentence, seems sometimes 
 to supply the place of the noun ; as, 
 
 TTvp TTveiv rag Tuvpii<i jit'j^oAoyjj^ev/es, thiit bulls breathe fire, be- 
 ing circulated as a story. 
 
 4. The accusative and sometimes the nominative, are 
 used absolutely by the Attics ; as, >tc«/ rctv]ec rec yevoi^eac cv-roe- 
 TTcog, eTJi-jcxv 01 'Upeti Kut Aevi]ut, and these things being proper- 
 ly performed, the Priests and Levites stood. ctvei^uvleg m 
 G-ufjut.rc<i TTopas, 'TTaT^i't ytvelcct ro Trvp, when they have opened the 
 pores of the body, there is again fire. 
 
 The dative is used, though rarely ; as, ««^ey cf^oiw-fv^;, both 
 sitting. These instances arise from the omission of some 
 words: thus, ufoi^uiji^ ra o-ofuiajog Trooai^^i. e. ai ocvoi^uvjii ao-tf 
 when they have opened, &c. uf4,0u> e^o/xsvco, (supp. n-elx.) 
 
 5. Certain participles are often used instead of the case 
 absolute ; as, J'wv, it being necessary ; hccpepov, there being 
 a difference, &.c. 
 
 Case of the Comparative. 
 
 XIII. The comparative degree governs the 
 genitive, when the conjunction >;, than, is omit- 
 ted ; as, ufXtTog j/Xi;xi6)?', sweeter than honey ; 
 
Tiarpo^ afULVQv, better than his father ; xpscraofp 
 OLxryjpfHiv ^dovog^ hatred is better than pity. 
 
 1. The noun in the genitive denotes the cause or origin 
 of the augmentation or diminution ; as, ><iVKOTipoi ^tovoi, whi- 
 ter than snow — i. e. from comparing them with snow, they 
 appear white — the snow being the cause of their appearing 
 whiter. x^^^^ h^"^ u'r?ui]epct, lips more soft from the rose — 
 or soft from comparing them witli the rose. 
 
 2. The excess of one thing ovor another is put in the da- 
 tive ; as, f^t^4tv m JWit/t/Ao;, greater by a finger. 
 
 3. The infinitive, or part of a sentence, is sometimes 
 governed by the comparative ; as, wsAArtJc/s ^oxet ro<pvXec^c6i r' 
 tcyecSec Ts KTviTXTOcct ;t^Af ?ra;/ffl«y eifeci, to preserve good seems 
 often more difficult than to gain it. 
 
 4. Multiplicative numbers, like comparatives, govern the 
 genitive ; as, i'7r>uto-io¥ ^u ockhu^ th Myuvy one should hear 
 twice as much as he speaks. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 I. Adverbs are often used as substantives or 
 adjectives ; as,arto rore^ from that time ; an apti 
 from this time ; aog aprt, till now ; to Ttepav ryjg 
 6a?.aaoyjg, the farther part of the sea ; 6 e^o av- 
 dpcjTtog, the outward man. 
 
 II. Derivative adverbs govern the case of their 
 primitives ; as, a^iGyg m 7.ayb^ agreeable to reason* 
 To aidf.ia ouoicdg rotg eaptvoig avOeOi ^lapatveraij tlie 
 body, like vernal flowers, decays. a^i-axorDg [mi^ 
 pleasing to me ; because (xpsaxcj governs the da- 
 tive. ara$pL(rcx ro rexvo 7t?.yj(yiov^ standing near the 
 child ; because TtXyjfrmg governs the dative, Ttepc^ 
 to 'teixogj around the wall ; because TUft governs 
 the accusHtive. 7ta()cx vyjaj without the sljip ; be- 
 cause Ttapa governs the accusative, eyyvg to 
 rsLx^i^ near the wall. 
 
Eyyv^f T^iiTicfi ^spi'^ and yretpeK^ govern the genitive like- 
 wise. 
 
 III. Adverbs of place, time, cause, order, quan- 
 tity, concealment, separation, number, exception, 
 exclamation, and some others, with adverbial 
 nouns, have a genitive after them, governed by a 
 preposition understood. 
 
 ttvev, etrep, ^t^^^ X^p'^3 without. 
 
 eivrticpv, uvriKpvg, uTTctvrixpv^ against, opposite. 
 
 ecxpt^^ H-^XPh^ to, even to. 
 
 IvsKcc, cvfxfy, on account of. 
 
 iyyvg, TTXiiO'iov, ccy^t, eto-rov^ near. 
 
 SKTog. e^a, eKTco-dev, without. 
 
 fvr<9§, ea-a, eico)- ivroa-0£v^ within. 
 
 ttAjuv, TTcipcKros, except, but. 
 
 /kera|t;. among. oTnca, cTnc-^ev, behind, 
 
 ;rpao-^£v, before, srspuv, £73-£iceivoc^ beyond, &Lt. 
 A^pt rrq (r]r,f4.£po^ ^f^pets, to this day, 
 Me^pt S^ya»y, as far as Susa. 
 
 'Evey^cc ra ^(Xrio-r^, for the best. 
 
 In these examples, £23-/ is understood. 
 Ex^it^svat ralav, after those things. 
 AotOpee. -srurpog^ without his father's knowledge. 
 Av£v ic»iicecrii, without labor. 
 Toturaiv cc^tjv, abundance of such. 
 
 «t7iro is understood. 
 A^et| TKi r^pL^pu^^ once a day. 
 X<y^/$ rav eiprptevm^ beside what has been said. 
 
 tzirt is understood. 
 n m uhfcrjpLure^, Oh, the injustice ! 
 
 Qptoi rm KTTjf^xrAfv, alas ! my possessions ! 
 
 T>;$ rv^y^i, for 6; rjj5 rvy^t)^, what an incident 1 
 
 ^lu is understood. 
 T<Vd5;|/o4^/y, for whose sake. 
 
 AtK*iv ■sroToti/^av, like rivers. 
 EyeoTTiov riiOf«, before God. 
 
 Kctrcc or TTupoe, is understood. 
 
 * *>:^'^» f^^XM^i before a vov/eL 
 
StijnUx, 191 
 
 The adverbs enumerated above, and many others, have 
 very much the nature of prepositions 
 
 Adverbs of the final cause are sometimes omitted 5 as, sypet- 
 -^XjTH f*.7j ruaq ^fiko-ut zs-ohy (supp. gyfXflt,) I have written for 
 this reason, lest any should happen to enquire. Thucyd. 
 
 IV. Adverbs of accompanying are followed 
 by the dative, a preposition being understood ; 
 as, ""a^a r'^ riiJ^^poL^ at day-break. 6^8 roig a^Xo^g, 
 together with the rest. In these instances aw is 
 understood. 
 
 V. Adverbs of swearing are followed by the 
 accusative, a preposition being understood ; as, 
 vyj A^a, by Jupiter ; vyj UXtrtuva^ by Pluto ; fia 
 roSe axyjTVtpov, by this sceptre. Here Ttpog is un- 
 derstood. 
 
 VI Adverbs of showing govern the nomina- 
 t ve ; as, lSh 6 'vcog era, behold thy son ! t& o avOpu- 
 Ttog, behold the man ! 
 
 Vll. Two or more negatives strengthen the 
 negation, if they belong to the same verb ; as, 
 sxen y firj tpayo e^ ai^ra, 1 will by no means eat of 
 it any more. Luke xxn. 16. 6v ax yjv bSsTtu) aSeig 
 xeifiEvogy in which no one had ever been placed. 
 
 Luke xxiii. 63. 
 
 1. The several adverbs deny of different things. Thus, 
 in the second instance, «>c denies of the fact ; »^f wa^, of time ; 
 ^^etf, of person. 
 
 2. When the negatives belong to different verbs, each 
 qualifies its own verb j and they generally affirm ; as, « ^wx- 
 fAMt fMi fjuf^irtcr^on ctvla, I cannot avoid remembering him. 
 Xenoph. 
 
 3. Ov and f^^ are often placed, not before the verb which 
 they quaUfy, but before some other one in the sentence ; as, 
 Hk e^Tj et.7rex6eWi he said he would not depart. 
 
i92 :^ntax. 
 
 Various Cases after Adverbs of Place. 
 
 Genitive or Dative, 
 ei^L^tyet, etftf4.iy^7}y ^ eyyv^y eyyvdev, ^u^eyyvg^ rvnyyv^, f|j:5., 
 
 Often er a Genitive, 
 
 Oftener a Dative. 
 
 Genitive or Accusative. 
 
 siTCif, nceT^ec, TTupsx. or w«tf5|, "^tptj^. 
 
 Dative or Accusative. 
 
 hvpo. 
 
 Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 
 
 *Ai,^^ «;fc/'^5» f*'ix9^'> M-fxP'^' 
 
 Various Cases after Adverbs of Exclamation. 
 
 N. G. D. A. V. 
 
 w^etyf 
 or 
 evyi 
 
 G. — A. — 
 
 or > — ^' — — — 
 
 TFC&tf S 
 
 N. G. ~ — V. 
 
 tOf^ 
 
 6ty 
 
 N. g: - - V. also \ g;-^ g; 
 
 N. — D. A. — also D. and 
 
 
 
 
 N. G. — A. — , 
 
 N. G, D. A. V. also < G. and A 
 
 N. and < jy' 
 
 A. 
 and G. 
 
 / N. J 
 
 5 G.. 
 ( D. 2 
 
Syntax. 
 
 193 
 
 Moods. 
 
 1. Adverbs of likeness, manner and interrogation, have 
 commonly an indicative ; of doubting, an indicative or op- 
 tative ; of exhorting or encouraging, an imperative, and 
 sometimes a subjunctive or indicative. Other adverbs hav^ 
 various moods. 
 
 2. Ai,tct$i,sif et§e, »$, joined to the imperfect bXpuXcv or 
 d^fiAdV, or the second aorist 4>^fA«v or o^t>^cv, are placed before 
 an infinitive, in the sense of the optative ; as, tt$^ o<PiXoi uyu' 
 fM^rt /iceistf, uyove^ re yivgr^cti, I wish I had remained unmarri- 
 ed or been childless. 
 
 3. n^fAev or d^fAor, without the preceding particle, is plac- 
 ed before other moods ; as, «^«Aiv -^vx^o^ £<>?$, I would thou 
 Tfert cold. ^ 
 
 4. E<^f precedes an optative in the present and future 
 tenses ; an indicative, in the perfect, and sometimes an in- 
 finitive ; as, u6{ ypu/pcif-u^ I wish I wrote, nh ytyptLtpu, I 
 wish I had written, n^en f^tj 6v9)roto-t yevecBut 'rr.fA.ok 7ro$et¥av, I 
 
 wish thou wert not a desirable evil to mankind. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 Conjunctions couple together the same cases^ 
 moods and tenses ; as, yif>^aro 6 Irjasg xyjpwoeLV xac 
 /i€'yetVj Jesus began to preach and to say. 
 
 Moods, 
 The following conjunctions govern an 
 Indicative and 
 
 Optative. 
 f/, if. 
 cTe, that. 
 
 . ' > when. 
 
 Indicative and 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 r^ I when. 
 ivei^uf, after. 
 
 Indicative aad 
 Infinitive.* 
 
 (■srei^ } after. 
 
 ffWf/Jjy, s since. 
 
 ', ) aft 
 ^Vj i sir 
 rtr«-7f, that. 
 
 Indicative,. Optative, and 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 fe^v^ ^ ' tPpoc, > that. 
 
 Kuyy although. osra>$, 
 oTflcy, when. 
 
 Indicat. Opt. 
 Sub. and Infin. 
 
 ««, that. 
 iotf, until. 
 
 ♦ Whenever a conjanction or adverb goes before an infinitive, there is 
 an ellipsis of some verb, such as «-wv«C», Sec. 
 
 18 
 
104 Syntax. 
 
 On the Particle Av^ (Poet, xs k xev.) 
 
 1. Ay indefinite. Av joined to verbs, adverbs and pronoun^, 
 makes them indefinite : connected with pronouns, its force is 
 that ofcunque in Latin. The subjunctive, and sometimes the 
 indicative, follows it ; and if a past action is narrated, the 
 optative ; as, f^slotf^^s^st av uv ev -srcniTac-t^ they repent of what- 
 soever they have well done. ^Otstco-oi ctv f<J<9)c«v «w7a; — ^tu/itccp' 
 Iccvsiv, whosoever seemed to him to sin. Aac'^e rov uv Muv^ocvn 
 slsKe^ take whatever Mandane may have produced. 
 
 2. A* conditional, in the sense of jjv or eocv ; as, «y ©fo5 ^Mj:, 
 if God will. 
 
 3. Av potential. This is commonly followed by the opta- 
 tive ; more rarely by the subjunctive, and sometimes by the 
 indicative, infinitive, or a participle ; as, ei^orcc ort hk uv ttoIs 
 ru rerjccpx zrevle yevoHo^ knowing that four never can become 
 five. Lucian? uu(pol£pii? uv ^f^pe^^Tue, he can aid both. Isoc. 
 ra/o ^£ oif^utt a^* uv Tov (puvXojulcy sruhtv C"jyypu(pgu, but this I 
 tbink even the worst writer cannot suffer. 
 
 When the indicative follows, it commonly denotes the sup- 
 position of something probable ; as, uv Tirr^ce, he asked it 
 perhaps, eih ksv f^a ^uco^iv — -o h y^ev KiXo^^^'o-elut, ov xev mufjiui, 
 and if they will not give — he may perhaps be angry, to whom 
 1 shall go. 
 
 4. Av willing. Av is used to denote will or desire. In this 
 sense it precedes the optative ; sometimes the imperative 
 and the indicative ; as, u ksv ^uvulov ye (pvyotf^sv, if we wish to 
 escape death. (piX^Tulov ue — uv, I wish you would kiss me. 
 Aristoph. e^Pv c Aojtcfv/05 TroXx^iuv ralo 7rpiu(r6ut, the Armenian 
 said that he wished to buy it even at a great price. Xen. 
 
 5. Av signifying ought. In this sense it precedes the opta- 
 tive, and sometimes the infinitive ; as, u$uvulcv '^vx'*i ot-v azf 
 the soul ought to be immortal. Plato, zrptv uv uf^oiv f^vBov 
 uKbfTiji, ii>i' ctv hy>u(r:ti , you ought not to judge before you hear 
 both sides. Aristoph. 
 
 6. Av future, which is generally uncertain, nnd dependent 
 on a condition. In this sense it is followed by all the moods 
 but the imperative ; as, ei Gio^ zrurj^o Cf^av y,v, uyuzrure uv /iu, 
 if God were your father, you woidd love me. 
 
 Sometimes, though rarely, a definite future is intended ; 
 a$, el /K.JJ ^aofrtff eya k;v IXafJ^cci, if they will not give, I will seize 
 it. Horn. 
 
Syntax, 
 
 19: 
 
 Av has sometimes two or more of the senses above men- 
 tioned at the same time ; as, otf^oti h, ^oc^lui av ifM^^oyr.c-xi^ i 
 think that all ca?i, ought, and will assent to this. Isoc. 
 
 Corresponding 
 
 E-is-etcuv, when ; 
 KcA'^asrsp, as ; 
 Mfv, indeed ; 
 Mev, both ; 
 'Of4.oiai, like ; 
 '035-fly, where ; 
 'O-sr&v, where ; 
 OyTftjg, so ; 
 n;4^5dX5'A>?<r/«y, SO ; 
 nptv, before ; 
 n^<y, before ; 
 T«7e, then ; 
 To75, then j 
 To?f, then ; 
 T«7f J then ; 
 
 12$, as ; 
 "C9, as ; 
 
 'Qo-f/, as ; 
 
 'Q.TzTep, as ; 
 'f2cw£^, as ; 
 
 'fltrzrtpi as ; 
 
 Particles, 
 
 flf7<jy, so. 
 ^f, but. 
 ^£,and. 
 a)(rss-sp^ as. 
 fxeT, there. 
 
 (vlctZ!^ci, there. 
 ft/5, as. 
 UTTtrep, as. 
 »;, that. 
 
 srp/v, that. 
 
 oTf, when. 
 
 bretv, when. 
 
 623-fi^fitv, when. 
 
 irv»)Cfi«, when. 
 
 ai;?^;, so. 
 ao-xvrui, thus. 
 
 CVTA', so. 
 ot;T6>, SO. 
 Xfit/, SO. 
 ^rccvrcD^, thus,"^ 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 I. ATtt), ai^t, ex (e^) and Ttpo, govern the geni- 
 tive only. 
 
 Ev and avv^ the dative. 
 
 Erg {eg) the accusative. 
 
 Ata, the genitive and accusative. 
 
 A^cpiy araj em^ xara, f^era, Ttfp^, Ttapa, f^fog, ( Att. 
 (og,) "i/Ttfp, '"i^Tto, govern the genitive, dative, or ac- 
 cusative. 
 
 ♦ One of the corresponding particles is frequently omitted ; 
 
 Tw /?/; T3t;^/!r7:t yn^x7ii.U ^g ';> X*?''' SOC fates. 
 
 as 5u/sy *-; 
 
196. Syntax. 
 
 11. Prepositions in composition often govern 
 the same case, as when they stand by them- 
 selves ; as, e^'i^Xde ryjg otxiagj he went out from 
 the house. 
 
 The principal relations of things to each other are ex- 
 pressed in Greek by three cases ; origin and possession, by 
 the genitive ; acquisition and communication^ by the dative ; 
 and action^ by the accusative. But these cases being alto- 
 gether insufficient to express all the varieties of these rela- 
 tions, prepositions are used to denote many relations of place, 
 time, cause, and eff'ect ; motion and rest ; connexion and oppo^ 
 sition. Every preposition has one primary meaning, to 
 which all the other significations, arising from figurative or 
 analogical relations, may be referred. The meaning of the 
 preposition is generally adapted to the use of the case. The 
 primary signification ofuzs-e, is under. The genitive, when 
 joined with it, expresses influence or origin ; as, uw« xetvuctroi, 
 under the influence of heat : the dative expresses the instru- 
 ment or manner ; as, x^^pTnt 6<p* ^f^cerepyjO-if uXHtu^ taken under, 
 hij our hands : the accusative, motion ; as, utto iXiov jfA^f, he 
 came under the walls of Troy. 
 
 The primary sense of the several prepositions will be first 
 given J and under each, the more distant and figurative sig- 
 nifications will be ranged in perpendicular columns. 
 
 I. Four Prepositions govern the genitive, efcvri, catxtq, cx, 
 
 If 09. 
 
 ANTl 
 Denotes originally, yaaVi^, fronting, set over against, an' 
 swering to. Hence its common signification is jugainst, in' 
 stead of 
 
 For. (i(p6 oi>.fj(,iit ecvTH c^6otXfJiov, an eye for an eye. 
 Before. <«vt/ x^vj^wt tXB(rdct,i rtjv i'o^otv ^019, we ought to 
 
 choose glory before (instead of) wealth. 
 Against, avrt ecvh^q ijui go against the man. 
 
 By a slight change of signification, u^n some- 
 times denotes in addition to, or upon. 
 Upon, ojv/fifc? av7< «cy<a^v, sorrows (corresponding to, in addi- 
 tion to.) upon sorrows. 
 
Syntax. 19^ 
 
 AUO 
 
 Denotes/rom, and expresses separation or distance from, 
 beginnings cause, or motive. Its signification is often expres- 
 sed by the word ofy which is derived from «^' or etTs-a. 
 From. upf>tuTo «2x<» lldp^eui, he marched from Sardis. 
 About, azs-o TpHiji apcci, about (i. e. from) the third hour. 
 After, x-aro ^'etza-you, from (the time of ) supper, i.e. after 
 
 supper. 
 Against, eczr^yvai^i, aside from (i. e. against) his opinion. 
 For. ctTs-iTlgv9iluM ecvla>¥ efxo rm x<*pi*ii ^ they disbelieved 
 
 from (for) joy. 
 Of. e&zs-o Ta>v o-af ccXi(nte>f, I Spend from (of) thine. 
 
 Of. ot ocvro Tfii /26t;A«, persons of the council, counsel- 
 
 lors. 
 Of. oi ctzTo r)>§ (piXta-opioi4 , persons of (belonging to) phi- 
 
 losophy, i. e. philosophers. 
 With. 4 mif6 r»v \«poZ^ f^ocx^y the battle (commencing) from 
 
 swords, i. e. a battle, with sword in hand. 
 Without. rj oLTc' uv^poq atrxy she without (separated from) a 
 husband. 
 
 EK, or EE, « 
 
 Denotes out of. It is used to express a change from one 
 state, place^ or time, to another, and the cause or m<iteriah of 
 any thing* 
 Out of. i% Aiyv-srrki iKuXiTct tov ui6v ^^, out of Egypt I havc 
 
 called my son. 
 From. f| £tpi)yH ^oAf^r<v, out of (from) peace to make 
 
 war. 
 Of. 7rcr7}pto¥ iic^^Tov, a cup (made out) of gold. 
 
 From . yvvn f| uy^poi, the woman out of (from) the man . 
 By. V hfccttei (K ^ts-eai ^ija-troit, the just shall live by faith, 
 
 (as the cause or source.) 
 After. cJsrvo? £K ^f/9rva, after (the time of) supper. 
 With. £K^xTi!ie7rif^^jixi^ (out of) with all care. 
 
 npo 
 Denotes priority either in place, time, or estimation. 
 Place, ^srpo ^vptin, before the door. 
 J. r ^ Time, -zs-pa rov TFoXipuv before the war. 
 
 * I Preference. 'SfX€f4^y zrp^ eiptj^u, war in preference 
 to (before) peace. 
 
 18* 
 
^f^ Syntax. 
 
 We generally defend what we stand before ; 
 
 hence, 
 
 ^ In defence of. fjtccx^'^^cci 'Z!rpo rav Ts-xt^m Koti Tsrpo yv 
 
 ^or. V 1 ^ctiytm to fight (before, in defence of) for 
 
 i wives and children. 
 
 \ Instead of ts-po zrut^og Octvstv, to die for his child. 
 
 II. Two prepositions govern the dative only, ev and cw, 
 
 EN 
 Denotes in, contained within, either in time or place. 
 
 In. ev Xi!4.evi Ts-p^ih^ to sail in harbour. 
 
 >Vithin. ev Izslee rji^spccti cc7xro$vr,<r)i,ii!rtv , they die within seven days. 
 
 After. £v -zsraXXcji xod^co, (within) after a long time. 
 
 Against, a ej^oi epeccvq, bold (in the case of) against me. 
 
 Among, ovoi £v fA^iXirlotti^ the ass among (within) the bees. 
 
 At. fv Mfltvr/vf/a rjr]t}it4.evoi, conquered (in) at Mantinea. 
 
 Belore. £v y^y,prvTi rav "EAAJiv^v ^Afov 3j rpicf^vpiot^, before (in 
 the midst of) more than three thousand witness- 
 es of the Greeks. 
 
 Sometimes it denotes within one^s power, or 
 sphere of operation ; as, vjyilo sf Trveuf^ocjt, was led 
 in the operation of the Spirit ; by the Spirit. 
 
 By. ev raroti roig vof^odsroii? it4jj 0rJT6e vofMV ftr.hvu^ make n6 
 
 law by (the operation of) these lawgivers. 
 
 For. fv rats ^V6 oQo?^i9 e0£6>p:iv uv, et jlu) ryr' eypst<ps, they 
 
 might have seen for the price of two oboli, had 
 not this been decreed. 
 
 Into. iUui ev ^EAAscJ";, to come into (within) Greece. 
 
 Upon. xctt fv iXioiG-iv e&r,Ke, and he put the roasted pieces 
 (within) upon the tables. 
 
 With. «v 5rfAro«/f x«/ «xflw<o/5, (in the way of ) with shields 
 and darts. 
 
 2YN 
 
 Denotes with, junction with. 
 With* t^)}7ids ho-i^g a-vv rctgf^x&Tfjatg, Jesus Went out with his 
 
 disciples. 
 At. ci/v TO) hiTrvm, at supper. 
 
 Beside. G-vv 5r'rt<ri Tiir«i$, (together with) besides all these 
 
 things. 
 
Syntax. 
 
 m 
 
 IW 
 
 /?> 
 
 With. o-w Be» TrapctG-a, with God (wrfitheaid of Gold) I 
 
 will attempt it. f ^ 
 
 During, o-w rcf) Tneif, at the same time with, dyring the drink- 
 
 To. TTopeuTo/^oct <ruv ccyofvt^ I will go into junction with 
 
 (to) the contest. 
 
 III. One preposition governs the accusative. 
 
 EIS 
 
 Denotes a^ ; and motion, tendency ov direction at or to- 
 wards^ and then it is rendered by into. 
 
 At. £c-7>jxf ii<i rn^t 6vpecv^ he stood at the door. 
 
 Into. £x 7rvpo5 eis y»Ayu.^ out of the frying-pan into the 
 
 fire. 
 
 About. e/5 ''^o-zrepotv, at, about evening. 
 
 Against. m lepov 9rAe^/t<.£Af7>, to offend against (the offence 
 being directed at) the temple. 
 
 Among. sn rm ripcjoc^ KccreMyf;, he was reckoned (at the 
 place of) among the heroes. 
 
 Because ) c^^roiivtircci et^ TO Kot^?^cq, he is praised because of his 
 of. y beauty — the praise being directed to his beauty. 
 
 For. tti iXotxf^lov fo-//y, it is reckoned (at) for a very 
 
 small thing. 
 
 In. f/$ iKKXrjricti Kud£^o/n.xty I sit (at the place of) in the 
 
 assembly. 
 
 Of. i/$ XptT^ov Myco^ I speak of Christ. 
 
 To. 05 ^.iiTUf^evi) £19 x.vX((rfA^ Qso^opn, the SOW that was 
 
 washed to her wallowing in the mire. 
 
 Toward. «/$ £/ue ivvotcc^ good will toward me. 
 
 Until. f/5 f^e^iov Kocrcc^vjec ^xivwloct, they feast (till they ar- 
 
 rive at) until sun-set. 
 
 IV. One preposition governs the genitive or accusative. 
 
 AIA, Through, 
 
 Denotes the medium^ instrument, or agent ; the materials 
 f>£ which any thing is made ; the distance measured by any 
 thing in motion, and governs the genitive. 
 
200 Syntax, 
 
 /'etrpi'sre icoti ha ts-ccvraff^ he excelled (throughout) 
 
 1 among them all. 
 Among. < evr* ccy Trparx (pvytjq oXoxi h<t snTpee^, as SOOn as thoU 
 
 I hast passed secure (through the place of) among 
 
 V the tremendous rocks. 
 Into. hn ft«%»j$ levcct, to go (through) into the battle. 
 
 Of. ^pafAMJoc hec yeOiUiclci fcett ftcA/7a$ y/v9jitfy«, food made of 
 
 milk and honey. 
 Through, ^tct ^vevf^^xks^ through the Spirit. 
 To. xuTt^vcrs ^tec rpizre^ay, he descended (among) to the 
 
 tripods. 
 Until, ^lec nA4?5« until the end. 
 
 With. a ^iXea ^let ^A«yo$ kxi tcuXetpt,^ (rol ypof*f/cn , I will not 
 
 write with pen and ink unto thee. 
 At. K4»,tt«/ ^e6 %-oX>^, (supp, x^P^i) villages at a great dis- 
 
 tance. 
 After, ^ix ^'Jttv rftepatv^ after two days — two days being the 
 distance. 
 
 Atx has that, on which it terminates, i. e. 
 the end ot final cause ^ in the accusative. 
 For. TO 9rx^€xlov hoL Tflv ctidpcjuTov eyevijo, the sabbath was 
 made for man. 
 
 Sometimes, though rarely, the means. 
 Through. tviict}erxv xvrav hu to ecifJLH, r^ ufvm, they conquered 
 him through the blood of the Lamb. 
 
 V. Ten prepositions govern three cases. 
 
 AM<I)I 
 Denotes round about^ in all directions^ near ahout^ or beside, 
 about, Concerning, 
 
 / ufA^t -sroXtoi 6tK€HTi, they dwell about the city. 
 1 xfjupt ^' et^ afMiTtv ^xXeU ^i<Poi, and he hung the sword 
 About. < about his shoulders. 
 
 / etyp»f*.ev9t Un^e^iH xf^i pit^pot, Collected about the 
 V streams of Jordan. 
 After. (tfjupt y x^ ecvjat tcXMi ewflv?*, others followed (near 
 
 about) after him. 
 Among. «/M.^< TipiTt zrevSci opc^ps, sorrow arose (round about) 
 
 among them. 
 Beside, ij^^a-g ^ ctfJLp'* «cvl(^, he fell beside him. 
 Near. u/*^t JV x,ocv}i§f <puo-yxnf ippxtG-^n, the sword was broken 
 near the hilt. 
 
:Syntax. 201 
 
 Upon. Ku€€u>^£V wii'pu xxjec x^ovoi, etju/pt ^ u^ uvju f^f?*? he 
 threw the man upon the ground, and sat down up- 
 on him. 
 
 Concerning, fuix^^^* -a-t^xjui ttf^jp^ txtytisy they fight about a 
 small fountain. 
 
 Of. ttfx/pt cto-JpMv ype^ij, a description of the stars ; liter- 
 
 ally, a writing about the stars. 
 
 ANA 
 
 Denotes to move up or hack, and refers to the line of direc- 
 tion traced backwards. Hence it denotes back along, against, 
 "up, upon, up and down, or among. 
 
 Against, ccfet ^oluf^^v ^utcof^io-cci, they bore them back along 
 
 the river, i. e. against the stream. 
 About. «y<» ^' 'Opv^etoiot hov, ttm Kpolcc^oto Tvxn^tci, he took 
 
 the noble Orythaon about the temple. 
 . Cctvx r6v uv'Jov Myov, according to the same word, 
 
 ccor- 1 ^ J tracing the same course of speech back 
 ^ * ( again. 
 Over. uvdt rec opt^, up or over the mountains. 
 Through. tKe^<ico-6i¥ tt^ot rjpulcv, were scattered up and down, 
 
 or through the army. 
 Among, ^m rtc opex n-?^ccvctr0cci, to wander up and down (a*- 
 
 mong) the mountain!. 
 A-piece. x^P^^^* «"« f^/^pnluq Iv tj rpei^, containing two or 
 three firkins a-piece, (i. e. up to two or three fir- 
 kins, no farther.) 
 
 By the Poets. 
 Upon. tvS'e sTetivp «<v« Tafiyxp^ uKp^, the father slept up upoa 
 
 the top of mount Gargarus. 
 In. ctfce, x'P^iv 'iXovtrot, taking it up in her hands. 
 
 With. xf^^"^^ <*"* fncfiTlpcft, with a golden sceptre. 
 
 Eni 
 Signifies upon, in different modes. With the genitive it 
 denotes action or situation upon. 
 
 Upon. ^7 ^(pxipct %v}^iihlut ezrt rr,^ rp^fre^tji, the ball rolls up- 
 on the table. 
 
 Through. sTn Q>pei.x,% ex^p^t, he marched through (upon) 
 Thrace. 
 
 Of. esri TTtcth^ My^y, speaking upon (of) the child. 
 
202 
 
 Syntax, 
 
 At. sTTt TaoTTH Td^evtiv, to shoot at the mark. 
 
 Within, far/ vvG-Ttii e?-otv etcx^oi, they each stood (close upon) 
 
 within the goal. 
 Beside, e^uvspao-ev eccvlov izri r?}$ ^uXeiO-trr,^ rrjs Ti^eptu^o^^ show- 
 ed himself just upon (i. e. at, beside) the sea of 
 Tiberias. 
 After. rifg v'ruo-7r;^(x,g otec^cctvstv etcsXivcre^ y.ui e^n ralm ru^ rcc^elg 
 TAJv Maȣ(^flv^y, he ordered the shield-men to de- 
 scent!, and after (close upon) them the Macedo- 
 nian ranks. 
 During. eTrt Kpovov, during the life of Saturn, 
 
 With the dative, tar/ generally denotes junc- 
 tion of one thing upon another. 
 C izs-i T0/5 <piXoi<;^ joined with, or among, his friends. 
 Among. < 7rpo<pr]ev£ii tisri Xctotq xcct sdvtscri, to prophecy among 
 ( people and nations. 
 
 Following upon, in the way of dependence, 
 addition to, or in pursuit of. 
 With. iTTi rovloii, in addition to (with) these things. 
 From. ezs-t Tjj -srirel, in consequence of (from) faith. 
 For. £33-/ r>^ y.sp^et, in pursuit of, fooc the sake of gain. 
 
 Above. nKpot rptcuKoa-tot i-srt ;ti/A/o/$, three hundred upon 
 (above) a thousand dead. 
 
 With the accusative, it denotes an action 
 directed upon. 
 Upon. >u&os mTrlii s-zs-i rtiif ym, a stone falls upon, or towards, 
 
 the ground. 
 At. Kot6i)i^voi eTFt TO riXmiov, sitting upon the business of 
 
 (at) the receipt of custom. 
 To. xv<vy szs-iTH'^cti i^i ro thov td^tpufjLoe,, the dog returned 
 
 to his vomit. 
 Toward, f^r' «tv7oA?jv, toward the east. 
 
 Against. ^cca-tXuot ep^ euvjr^v hct^JLtpiThura, a kingdom divided 
 against itself. • 
 
 KATA 
 
 Denotes along, against, according to, down, and refers to 
 the line of direction along which a thing tends, or is situated^ 
 Along. x«*7« rt;v o^ov, or x/clctr}}^ ohv, along the road. 
 Through. ku$* oX:,^ri)i iH^otta^, through allJewrv. 
 In. k««t' o»^/>, in adream. 
 
Syntas:. 203 
 
 To. t}iC6vlc Kulec Tpetlof, they came to the army. 
 
 Toward, aujcc fiopsuv l^f^Kot^ , standing toward the north* 
 Against, kujcc Xpitrla, against Christ. 
 Over. uo-i KuT^ >ipeo<i, goes against (over) the mountain. 
 Under. €^v koiJcc yutri, he went against (under) the earth. 
 Upon. Kulec yrji TTizrliiv, to fall against (upon) the ground. 
 At. y^sclu ricosra rc^eveiv, to shoot against (or at) a mark. 
 
 About. icxr' c(p&oL><u.m )ce;^t;T' <e;^^At/5, a mist was Spread a- 
 
 bout his eyes. 
 Of. oT< £uccprvpf]f!-ocf/,£v Kocju T« Gen, because we have 
 
 testified in regard (of) God. 
 Down. Ajp.u.y.cc Koclet ra Kp^uvH f/$ tjjv ^uXecTcxv^vwshed down 
 
 the precipice into the sea. 
 Among. icxjec <rv^i6t(riv stcyw, she confined them along the 
 
 line of (i. e. among) the sties. 
 From. Koclot h o-^iTi KsXccivov cLiuu u'STiXei^sr'* (pcc^e, the 
 
 black blood flowed along (from) tViem to the 
 
 ground. 
 According to. kuIu Mxr^xtov, according to Matthew. 
 By. Kujcc ^Xac Kut Kxjoc (ppvflpai, according to (i. e. by) 
 
 tribes and wards. 
 So far as. xetra i^vvxfA.iv, according to his strength, so far as he 
 
 could. 
 After. xar' eiKovoc m xliTxylo^ , according to, or after, the 
 
 image of him who created. 
 Before. x«t' o<pdx>^uii^ cot Xtyn, he speaks to thee before thy 
 
 face. 
 Kear. Kopiv$ioi ycocrx rag A&rvxdig »aw$ ^^;^«v, the Corinthians 
 had their ships near the Athenians. 
 
 META 
 
 Denotes connexion or concomitancy ^ and is rendered by 
 inntli^ among ^ between^ after. 
 With. ivpov TO TTxi^tov (jLtrx Tfji fufrpoi xvTev, they found the 
 
 young child with his mother. 
 Among. M-iJoc ray vfxf dwv, in the same place with (or among) 
 
 the dead. 
 With. oBbo<; e7roii}T£ fAsT^vlofv^God wrought with them. 
 By. ^xi]xtj eofaovlo fjuilx Trvotrs, their manes were blown 
 
 with (by I the wind. 
 With* ficslx rev ccpvtov '7ro>is/Ar,(r.iV(riy they shall fight with the 
 
 Lamb. 
 
204 
 
 Syntax. 
 
 On. votfiTa? TO eXeai uer* uvr^v, he that showed mercy 
 
 on him, i. e. with him as the object of it. 
 
 In. /M,f7« ;kifc/)o-/v tx^^i having between (in) his bands. 
 
 Among. fJLi'Ju. ^pAflci<^i vntlo< he was busy among the foremost. 
 
 To. f/^elu, ^{JLUYtTtv eetviVt he spoke among (to) the female 
 
 attendants. 
 
 Within. f4>ela T^to-i ^t)uoc rtSevlf^y placing their destruction 
 among (within) them. 
 
 After. .u/ju riivexf^tv rm if^sp^f rcvltav^ after the tribulation 
 of these days. 
 
 By. vvx^lcap re xui fcf^' rjf^epxv, by night and by day. 
 
 Into. /3i^A«y fierce x^^P^ «A>»^6?5, having taken the book be- 
 tween (into) his hands. 
 
 Among. t6i vvj> fA.srtt ^asov, go now among the people. 
 
 nAPA 
 
 Signifies at^ beside, or near. With the genitive, /rom at^ or 
 from beside, from,* 
 
 From. TTupuKvpiov^ (io9}6etx ft«t/, (from beside) from the 
 Lord is my help. 
 
 With. ijjTovi Ktti ol TTxp' uvrav, Jesus, and those who were 
 from beside (with) him. 
 
 Of. eTrvvOuviTo Trup^ ecvrav, he inquired from (of) them. 
 
 Above, tx^t fiv^ oytcov Apyci *EaAjjva>v Wflc^cc, Argos has some- 
 thing to boast from among (above) the Grecians. 
 
 After. 5r<e^' ij<J«v3j5 Aw^jj, from (after) pleasure, pain. 
 
 Near. ^ccp<t Kporajpui re TTecpeieti, the cheekt from beside 
 (near) the temples. 
 With the dative closebeside, i. e. at or with. 
 
 With. i^terSov ovx exe^e ^ecpec r^ vc$rpt, ye have not a re- 
 ward (laid up) beside, or with, your father. 
 
 Among. ^ifAoyi^ovTo Trup^ euvron, they reasoned (aside) among 
 themselves. 
 
 With. ^ccpei ry Kv/)/^ eMo^ (beside) with the Lord is mer- 
 cy. 
 
 To. Uicci voLpet rat TicarcA^epve't, to go to Tissaphemes. 
 
 With the Accusative beside, for the sake of com- 
 parison, or contrast or as a reason. 
 
 ♦The Genitive in Greek has frequently the force of tendency from. 
 
kjuiiiajb , 
 
 » C apctlc^ TTe&peA rag vliig t<wv ecvSe6)'r6)v^ thou art fair. 
 
 In com- 1 when set beside or compared w itb the sons of 
 
 parison. ^ ^^^ . -^ ^^ fcdrer than the sons of men. 
 
 Beneath. i:?^.e6rrfiJTsig stvrov (spotx^ '^t ^oi^' ccvyeAif^^ thou hast 
 lowered him a little, when set beside or com- 
 pared with the angels ; i. e. hast lowered him 
 beneath the angels. 
 
 For. TTxPot raro hk es-iv ey, m c-c^uxroi , (for this reason) it 
 
 is not out of thehody. 
 
 For. ©5CS ehxav Trccpxro y.^ysBoirm TreTrpx'yy.cva}^, 1 seemed 
 
 a god by reason of (for) the greatness of my ac- 
 tions. 
 
 From. rycviLCfici vfctfiet ruro CMTy.piccv sivxi, 1 think that safety 
 is from this. 
 
 Save. TiTTxpxKovTec TTxPx f^txv^ forty save one. 
 
 Beyond. Trxpx rov ttotx^uov t<pvyof, they fled to the farther 
 side of (i. e. over, beyond) the river. 
 
 Against, -sirxpx rov vd.«.ojr, beyond, against the law. 
 
 About 
 
 For. 
 
 ,|i 
 
 Against. 
 
 HEPI 
 Signifies ahoiit^ round about, concerning, 
 
 TTept (i6f,uoi^, round, or about the altar. 
 (^a)*i)v zrepi r>j» oc-^w, a girdle about his loins. 
 ^ept jicecTijiu.tptx)', about noon 
 Concerning, cyoyyv^ov oila^xtot ^rept uv]ovy the Jews murniui.- 
 ed concerning him. 
 Trept Trace?! TvtXu h^itvxi, to be in fear concerning 
 (for) the whole city. 
 h^<wq jMj rt Kxt Trept xvra vearsptG-ste, fearing lest he 
 
 should make a new attempt against him. 
 TTspi Ti'.(i ©£ii5 x<ri^YtfA.xlxy impieties against the gods. 
 Towards, yripi rm cc^iKHuevm, concerning (towards) those 
 who are injured. 
 TTepi rsg ydve/s roiaroi y/vy, be SUch in respect fo 
 (toward) thy parents. 
 
 It sometimes denotes superiority : what is 
 round another is of course greater. 
 tlHTixv £^£1 TTEpt Tn i^tn $£Xijf4,xTeg^ has powcT over 
 
 his own will. 
 TTipt TxifTa/v £i^f^vxt ccAA&T, to be aboVe all others. 
 TTept voov QpoTm, above the comprehension of mor- 
 tals. 
 
 In re 
 spect to 
 
 Over. 
 
 Above. 
 
 1 
 
 19 
 
206 
 
 Syntax* 
 
 With. 
 
 About. 
 Between. 
 
 By. 
 
 Near. 
 Of. 
 
 Through. 
 
 For, 
 Towards. 
 
 npos 
 Signifies before^ towards facing for the purpose of actings 
 0r being acted upon. 
 
 Before. o ^e iJsrpoi uThKu Trpo^ rri Qvpu^ but Peter stood be- 
 fore the door. 
 Xayoi >}v ^rpoi rov 0f«v, the Word was with (before 
 the presence of God. 
 TTpsqrcf} nXi'i Ts (iiHf about the end of life. 
 7!rp6g la-ss-epect ((r]t, it is about evening. 
 rex.f*.y,ptov rtj^ -sroGqrjfJLuq^fXiocq, a proof of the friend- 
 ship that is between us. 
 srpoi m At.'ii iKiTtva uf^cai^, 1 beseech you (in pres- 
 ence of) by Jupiter. 
 Tsrpoq fisv «Ai$ K3tflf5, the Carians near the sea. 
 Xpyi^l^ ^fo$ fltvc^as iit^J'ev utfovosi kcdcov, suspect no evil 
 
 of a good man. 
 (puTuv Tsroaq piyccg uifjuty blowing out the blood thro' 
 the nostrils. 
 
 It often denotes tendency towards or against. 
 
 rovT6 yx^ zrpo^ ufterepoci; (rarviptct^ u^ccp^et, for this 
 
 is tending to (for) your health. 
 
 u73-t)X66v sTfio^ eoiVjjig, they went away towards 
 
 their own homes. 
 
 wpoi ctv^po^ iXfpov s-ss-Kpepav tov '^>}<pcv, giving his vote 
 
 against an enemy. 
 vj?«5 TToog T-sriXuhc-Tiy eet^ccv^ dashed the ships against 
 
 the rocks. 
 yrpog xtvrpu A«xt/^£/i>, to kick against the pricks. 
 Txrpog roti upfifx^ioiq^ in addition to the things that 
 have been said. 
 With the Accusative only, according to ; i. e. 
 so fir in the presence, or under the inspec- 
 tion of; as, 
 fjLTjh 'TTOiviO-ccq -sTPoi TO 0£^f^u, ueithcr did according to 
 his will. 
 On account of, pointed towards, as a cause. 
 On ac- ( 7i:po(; TTjV a-KP^tjOoKOtp^av vf^av typct^ev^ On account of i 
 count of. ( your hardness of heart, he wrote. 
 
 For the ^ ^oU t>;» eXevf^ocwuv Koth^tm, sitting for the sake of 
 sake of. ( alms. 
 
 i}znrlt>X7} efcetyyj, et xat 'rrooq ^Oetv^ iXvsrvifrev uuoct , that? 
 
 epistle made you sad, though but for a season. 
 etzs-ocr.?)xu(rMei "srpog Kutpov apug, separated during ant 
 
 hour. 
 
 Against. 
 
 In addi- 
 tion. 
 
 
 During. 
 
Syntax. ^0^ 
 
 YHEP 
 Siccnifies over, in defence of. Over, in respect of place or 
 position. 
 
 Above. <r;> J" usrs^ K£0cc?i7!q, he stood over (above) his head. 
 Over. ozTf^ ccpyvpCi d;^^v/«/, they make their progress over 
 
 the silver ocean. 
 Upon. yepuio-^refi Ke0otXr,(i. old agc upon the head. 
 
 With the Genitive, it denotes beyond; what is 
 over another, is beyond it. 
 Beyond. f| Ai6to:sria.q ry$ vTz-e^ AiyvTflov, out of Ethiopia, which 
 is beyond Esiypt. 
 
 In defence of ; what w^ would defend, we stand 
 over ; on the part, or behalf, or for the sake of 
 ftt 0f(9$ vTTe^ rif^aiv^ riq ku6^ r^u.^, if God be foF US, 
 p 1 (on our part,) who cari be against us ? 
 
 J f^</flf^£T«6/ a-oi uzTte ^itvTH A£7£/v, it is permitted to 
 \ thee to speak in defence of thyself. 
 By. ^uTc-of^' uTe^ /M^x«ep<wv, I pray by (for the sake of) the 
 
 gods. 
 
 In the room of ; as, 
 Instead. Xpta-l^g Csre^ rif^ecv tf^i^tt^it^ Christ died in our stead. 
 Of, or concerning , as it were to go over 
 in tliou^ht. 
 Concerning.^ tAsr/g ij^a»v ^t^xiot o^e^ v(4,m, our hope is sted- 
 fast concerning you. 
 
 With the Accusative only, above , in any 
 way ; as. 
 Above. ret vsr^o ^f,^^ ^j^, ^p^ r/^g, what is above is noth- 
 ing to us. 
 More than, o (pix^v Trxnpcc t^ f^7}repcc ^zre^ efts, he who loves 
 father or mother above (more than) me. 
 
 Tno, by, under, 
 I. With the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, indiscrimi- 
 nately. 
 bolder ; whether in place, time, power, or any other mode 
 ©f being under 5 as, 
 
 vsro x^oveq^ under the earth. 
 After. i)ar' etvToj z-mm KccTeK^itvero, Zeno sat under Rafter) 
 him. ^ ^ 
 
 At. vTro vvKTi^ under (at) night. 
 
 Aboqt. uTxr^ revopBpoi^ under (or about) day -break. 
 
208 Prosody. 
 
 Under, p^eyof &f$ Cts-o Qsoj, I speak as under (the directiou 
 
 of) God. 
 Behind, y.on ^;v xxraKfivsrlei vsto rm ^vpetv, and he conceals 
 him behind the door. 
 C yVd T/jo/*? ryof^ev, we led (under) to Troy. 
 To. < xicr^iT'oi dvtj^ OTTO ixioi jjA^e, he was the most abject 
 
 \ wretch that came to Troy. 
 With. icuTccQocivavri v^o PiUf^-sree^av, coming down (under the 
 guidance of) with torches. 
 
 2. With the genitive, by, as a cause or an in- 
 strument. 
 By. To pi]$iv uT^ro Tcv Kveiov, what was spoken by the Lord. 
 
 Of. ivi7rotix6v) uT^c t4>v y.uym^ was mocked by (or of) 
 
 the wise men. 
 For. h(p' r^cviji ^oKpvstv, to weep for joy. 
 
 PROSODY. 
 
 SYLLABLES, in respect to their quantitj, 
 are either long* or short. 
 
 A long syllable requires, in pronouncing, dou- 
 
 ble the time of a short one ; as, rvnrere. 
 
 Some syllables are common^ i. e. long or short 
 at the will of the writer ; as, the first syllable in 
 the word Apyjg. 
 
 H and g) are long vow els ; g and o, short ; a, i, Vy 
 doubtful. 
 
 LoTiff Syllables. 
 
 L All circumflexed and contracted syllables ; 
 the letters >7 and co, and all diphthongs, are long 
 bv nature. 
 
 Exceptmi, A long vowel or diphthong, be- 
 
Prosody^ 209 
 
 fore another vowel or diphthong, is sometimes 
 shortened ; as, ^ .. 
 
 ZrjvogelTtt fieyalpoLaiv o\2.vfi7tni\a6pooi\yj(yav. 
 
 OvSe yapl^Se Apvlavrog 'vilog xpare\pog Avxolepyog. 
 
 1. This happens most frequently at the end of a word, 
 when the next word begins with a vowel ; in the beginning 
 of a word rarely ; and still more rarely in the middle. 
 
 2. The particles h, n, koci, xf, are not considered as sep- 
 arating the long vowel from the following vowel or diph- 
 thongs ; as, 
 
 Asvrepctj \ ^' ecv /3«y | 6r])cs f^s | yacv, x.ott \ zriact | Srf^, 
 
 3. A long vowel or diphthong is sometimes, though rare- 
 ly, shortened before a consonant^ especially a liquid ; as, 
 
 II. A short or doubtful vowel before two sin- 
 gle consonants, or a double consonant, is general- 
 ly long by ^ost/ion ; as, p^a^, larovy nokTjcL^ xa- 
 
 The vowel often continues long, though one of the conso- 
 nants has been dropped 3 as, y^vo^csti which is for yiyvofcoct ; 
 ylva^TKay which is for yiyturKoo \ ru^^cc^, for Tv^^y^ • fjucpru^^ for 
 IzetpTvpq ; A/«;5, for Atccvr^. 
 
 So where the Digamma^ has been omitted ; as, f^Xccio? oivn^ 
 for fA.iXa,to^ Ffl/ja. 
 
 Exception 1. A short vowel before a mute 
 and a liquid, or tit, xr^ fiVj is common ; as, 
 
 MetpaSelTevxe Oe\oL<ycy ro\yap (i6tpop\6atLV a\pLarov. 
 
 A short vowel before a smooth or rough mute followed by 
 a liquid, and before a middle mute followed by f , is short in 
 Comedy. But a short vowel before a middle mute followed 
 by A, ft, y, is long in the Dramatic writers. 
 
 2. The vowel is not always long before a and 
 a consonant, or/iJl; as,^eraXAag, 
 
 w 
 
 np/3|i-(J7tep6||: xp(j\^H7to'A,v\^vvog xolporj^* 
 ^ See Appendix No. I. 19* 
 
^10 Frosodjj, 
 
 III. A short or doubtful vowel is sometimes 
 made long before a single consonant, particu- 
 larly before a liquid ; as, rcapa ^■^/lyiavL. 
 
 87t£ihs. Ttpiv eTSeiv. 6 rav6\ ocptv. 
 A vowel is sometimes made long before the digamma ; as, 
 ^h 'Hg, for Fni . 
 
 IV. When three short vowels come together, 
 one must be made long in heroic verse, for the 
 sake of measure ; as, 
 
 ddavarog ; Hpiaui^y^g ; Sia fisv. - 
 
 V. A short vowel, standing between two long 
 ones, is sometimes made long by the Poets ; as, 
 Tto/Qn ?.iaaou8[iYj9 &c. 
 
 This most commonly happens in words ending in im, m -, 
 
 c/w; as, Af^km, ^iXriuv^ a^tv)}, i^pvce, 
 
 VL When the article takes the apostrophe, or 
 occasions it in the bes^inning of the succeeding 
 w^ord, the remaining vowel is considered as hav- 
 ing absorbed* the other, and is therefore made 
 long; as, 
 
 uq re hia ^hHqv r^ ayad^ avdpuTtsg ex^iv. Eurip. 
 
 dg av ro 7jrn7iov rd* \ji! avaxrop evasSetv. Ibid. 
 
 VH. A doubtful vowel, when it supplies the 
 place of the augment, is long ; as, 
 
 a^;OV for yj^ov ; ixa^ov ; 'v^psvov, 
 ' VHI. The last syllable of every verse is com- 
 mon. 
 
 Doubtful Vowels. 
 I. Words compounded and derived follow the 
 
 quaatity of their primitives ; as, atuwg from n- 
 
 ♦ By some grammarians it is even called a contraction. 
 
Prosody. 211 
 
 iiYi : from kolvu^ are formed expivovy xpivofxevogj &c, 
 
 «/ C Ll 
 
 from xpivo^ xexptxa^ expcdyiv. 
 
 a privative is short ; as, at^ioq. 
 apt, fp6, /3pt, hvg^ ^a, are short ; as, <fafeog. 
 II. A loubtful vowel before another vowel, 
 or a diphthong, is usually short : 
 
 Exceptions, — a and 6 Long, 
 a Long. 
 
 1. a Doric used for >? ; as, y.av for |[^>7l; ; 'aSi) 
 for /i^i;. 
 
 2. a .Eolic in the genitive singular and plural ; 
 as, Airpt&o ; fiaaacdv. 
 
 3. a in the second and third persons sins^ular 
 present indicative of verbs in oio, and third per- 
 son plural Ionic of verbs in ul ; as. rtfiag^ SiSoaaL. 
 
 4. In the present and imperfect of, verbs in ouo 
 whpnthe Digamma is supposed to be inserted. 
 
 5. Most nouns in ouovy whether they increase 
 long or short ;^ as, onduv. 
 
 6. Most feminine proper names in dig. 
 
 7. In dissyllables inog pure ; as, /laog, vaog. 
 
 8. In verbs in ao, preceded by p or a vowel ; 
 as, opdo, fcto). 
 
 L Long in 
 
 1. udv^ the termination of nouns increasing 
 short ; as, (i^y^a^v-ovog, 
 
 2. udv^ the termination of comparatives, but 
 in the Attic dialect only ; as, I3e?i/Ti.)v. 
 
 3. First future middle Attic of verbs in io) ; as, 
 xoiuS[xat. 
 
 * ?ajt>j >'*Cc«:a>?, and a few more fol'ow the general rule. 
 
2 IS Prosody. 
 
 a and t Common. 
 a and i. 
 In the first syllable of words exceeding thre^ 
 syllables, with the second and third short ; ag 
 
 1. In nouns in ux and lyj ; as, ^iTaa. 
 
 2. In verbs in to ; except eaduj. 
 
 3. In the improper redupUcation of verbs in ^t ; 
 as, ^LyifiL, 
 
 III. The doubtful vowels before a single con- 
 sonant are short. 
 
 Exceptions, — a, t, u, Long. 
 a in 
 
 1. a/[ia, the termination of verbals. 
 
 2. avog^ amg, atYjg^ arig^ terminations of proper 
 names, gentiles, and precious stones.* 
 
 3. avyjp in its oblique cases and compounds. t 
 
 4. Oblique cases of pa^, Oupa^^ tpa^, xvQSa^, 
 xopSa^^ oia^y 4^ta$, ^sva^, Xa^pa^, xepcug^ '^lap. 
 
 5. axiov^ the termination of diminutives whose 
 primitives increase long. 
 
 6. axooiog, the termination of numerals ; as, 
 rpiaxo(yiog ; also avpaKoacog. 
 
 7. Perfect middle of many verbs ; as, TteTtpdya, 
 
 8. Subjunctive active of the first conjugation 
 of verbs in fit ; as, larag, terra. 
 
 9. ag, in nouns of the first declension ; as, 
 ragtag, ^t^tdg :J and in those of the third, which 
 increase in avrog ; as, Atog, Atavtog, 
 
 ♦ AvrtTTctrni. AatfcTaty/?, and a few others, are short, 
 t In the nominative singular it is common. 
 
 :J: By the Ionic and Doric dialects, «? ie shortened in th« participle*, 
 and in the accusative plural of the first declension. 
 
Prosody. 213 
 
 10. ag, masculine of participles ; as, ru4<^$. 
 otcra, feminine of participles. 
 aOiy third person plural of verbs. 
 acTco, first future|^f ^^^^^ j^^ ^^^ 
 
 (Kyuj first aorist V , ^ 
 
 axa, perfect ) ^ 
 aaig, derivatives from the same verb. 
 
 t Long in 
 
 1. Oblique cases of monosyllables in tg,* and 
 trisyllables having the two former short ; and of 
 words of double endings in ig or iv ; also of words 
 in in tg-tdog. 
 
 2. Oblique cases of nouns in t^-tyog, or ixog^ 
 and L^'LTtog ; also, a few in t$-tSo$, viz. 'a\^6$, /^a^- 
 6tg^ xapigj xrikig^ /l>7t$, xvyj[iig^ x^nig^ veS^ig, vyjatgy 
 ctppa/ytg. 
 
 3. Perfect middle of any verb ; as, zexfiya, 
 (Sedpidaf 
 
 4 t^a, termination of verbals. 
 
 6. ivogj LVOV, fi'»75 terminations of nouns.f 
 
 6. (Co, laa, first future and aorist of verbs in uo. 
 
 7. tryjgy LTLg^X terminations of nouns. 
 
 8. iScjy cyu, idcdj t^xj, terminations of verbs. 
 
 9. L^LOVy termination of diminutives making 
 two iotas coalesce : as, from Ifmtt-ov^ limtL-Ldiov, 
 lliarlSiov. 
 
 V Long in 
 1. i^fza, vi.iogy vvog^ vpog, inrop, vtog^ i^'^'y^g, vtcg^ 
 terminations of nouns.§ 
 
 ♦ Tk, Az?, f^pt^.frt^^ are short in the oblique cases. 
 
 i Kat/ixlvo?, xoTi'va?, ^vpTtvog^ KCKptvog^ and possessive adjectives in /vc?— 
 iv», respecting time, matter, &c. also uKctTrm^ are short. 
 X Verbals in tn; are short. 
 
 * Verbals iq «t3?, wt«?, ut/?, are short ; as is ^o-t^m^., and some others 
 in WTJ^'. 
 
214 Prosody^ 
 
 2. Oblique cases of nouns of double endings 
 in vg or vv ; as, fpopxvg or cpopKvv. 
 
 S. Oblique cases of SouSv^^ Soibv^, ^yipv^y ^n- 
 v^y xoxxv^^ Sayvg^ xouvg^ ypv4^, yv4^. 
 
 4. VVU9 vpcj^ v^o^ terminations of verbs. 
 
 5. ixtg), vaa^ future and aorist from uj. 
 
 6. Perfect middle of many verbs ; B.s^^fwxa. 
 
 7. Before a in the penult of nouns ; as, ;^pvTo^, 
 ^vaog'j except those derived from the second |)er. 
 son of the perfect passive : as, (pvatg^ Xvatg. 
 
 8. Before a in the antepenult ; as, ^rcroco. 
 
 It would only embarrass the learner, to extend the rules 
 for the first and middle syllables any farther Those which 
 do not fall under any of the foregoing rules are said to be 
 long or short by authority ; that is, we have the authority of 
 the Poets (the best of all evidence) for the quantity of the 
 word. 
 
 IV. THE LAST SYLLABLES. 
 
 I. Terminations in a, t, i^, are short. 
 
 Exceptions, 
 a Long. 
 
 1. Nouns in a pure,* 5a, 0a, and also pa,t un- 
 less a diphthong precede ;f as, dsa. 
 
 2. In the vocative of nouns of the first and 
 third declension ; as, Acvaia^ from Aivaiag-a ; 
 UoXvSaua^ from Uo^vhafio/g-avrog. 
 
 3. In the accusative singular of nouns in evg ; 
 as, UyjXed, from Ilyj2£vg. 
 
 4. Feminines from adjectives in o$ ; as, Sax, so 
 {ltd, 
 
 ♦ Dissyllables in ettet^ Verbals in T/xat, Feminines in s^* frono mascu- 
 lines in «y? and &>?, Derivatives from adjectives in «f, Cities named from 
 illustrious men, and xWiiat, vclttua^ Ksthctvptetf follow the general rnie. 
 
 t The first aorist and perfect middle of verbs in pa, also etywjfa^ >2<?t/»«, 
 cxw^a, KopKv^aij (TK'jKoTre^/J'fiA^ ^ruvstypu^ follow the general rule. 
 
 j hctv^A^ a-Auptt^ ctvfety are long;. 
 
Prosody. 215 
 
 6. Duals of the first and second declension ; 
 as, rayTifia. 
 
 6. The Doric a used for >; or y ; as, re^^ova for 
 tsTujvs ; apfra for aperrj. 
 
 I Long. 
 
 1. Adverbs or pronouns augmented by para- 
 goge ; as ovrom for ovrog. 
 
 2. The Attic ij as in bevpt, tautu 
 
 3. Kfi^ and the names of letters. 
 
 i; Long. 
 
 1. Third person singular imperfect of the 
 fourth conjugation in ui ; as, f^v. 
 
 2. Certain adverbs in d, and the names of let- 
 ters. 
 
 11. Terminations in ar, op, lv^ t$, Wy rg, are 
 short. 
 
 Exceptions Long. 
 
 L Nominative and vocative of masculines in 
 av ; as, Ttrav ; and the neuter Txav^ whose com- 
 pounds are short. 
 
 2. Accusatives of the first and second declen- 
 sion, whose nominatives are long in the ultima ; 
 as, Aivafav, ao^iav. 
 
 3. Adverbs in av ; except orav, which is short. 
 
 4. Monosyllables in ap ; as, xap ; but yap is 
 common. 
 
 6. Nouns in LV-tvog. 
 
 6. Nouns of two endings in iv and ^, whick 
 make both long 
 
 7. Monosyllables in ig ; except rtg, which is 
 short. 
 
 8. Dissyllables in tg-ihg and lOog. 
 
 9. Trisyllables in t$, having the two former 
 short. 
 
I UOK/X*tJ» 
 
 10. Nouns in Di'-Pvog. 
 
 11. Accusatives in w, when the nominative is 
 long. 
 
 12. i>v^ the first person of verbs in ^t, and the 
 adverb vvv. 
 
 13. Words of a double termination in vv and 
 vgy which make both long. 
 
 14. Words declfned in vg pure ; as, tx^i/g. 
 16 Monosyllables in vg ; as, (ivg. 
 
 16. Participles of the fourth conjugation in fit ; 
 as, ^tvyvvg. 
 
 HI. Terminations in a$ and vp are long. 
 
 Exceptions Short. 
 
 1. Nouns which increase in the genitive, ex- 
 cept those in avrog. 
 
 2. Accusatives plural of the third declension. 
 
 3. Adverbs in ag, 
 
 4. The second person singular of the first 
 aorist active, and of the perfect active and mid- 
 dle. 
 
 SCANNING. 
 The feet and verse in Greek are the same as 
 in Latin. 
 
 Feet of Two Syllables. 
 Spondee consists of two long ; as, dii^o. 
 Pynhic two short ; as, rote. 
 
 Iambus a short and a long ; as, 0eXo. 
 
 Trochee a long and a short ; as, ;teipa. 
 
 Feet of Three Syllables. 
 Dactyle, a long and two short ; as, aoiiarog. 
 Anapest, a short and two long : as, Adyjvau 
 Amphimacer, a long, short, and a long ; as, eyx^^- 
 
Prosody. 217 
 
 Tribrachys, three short ; as, aOeog* 
 
 DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 
 Hexameter. 
 
 The hexameter, or heroic verse, consists of six 
 feet. Of these, the fifth is a dactyle, and the 
 sixth a spondee : all the rest may be either dac- 
 tyies or spondees ; as, 
 A.vao^e\voi; re 6v\yarpa ^e^ov r a7t£\p8i(ri^ a|7to£ra. 
 
 A spondee is frequently found in the fifth place ; 
 whence the verse is called spondaic ; as, 
 
 The spondaic is used when any thing grave, 
 slow, large, or sad, is expressed. It has com- 
 monly, though not always, a dactyle in the fourth 
 place, and a word of four syllables at the end. 
 
 What deserves particular attention in scanning, 
 is the Ccesura. 
 
 When, after a foot is completed, there remains 
 a syllable in the word to begin the next foot, that 
 syllable is called the Ccesura ; as, 
 Tov 8' a7ia\(i6t(3oi.i£\vog npog e\^ xpetliw Aya\fi£^vov. 
 
 Here there is a caesura in every foot. 
 
 When the Ca3sura falls on a syllable naturally 
 short, it is frequently made long ; as, 
 
 Avrap elTtetr avlrotat (SelTtog ex^lTtev^eg sl^mg. 
 
 Here og, in the word /3fAog, is made long by 
 ccBsura. 
 
 Pentameter. 
 This verse consists of five feet divided into two 
 halves ; the former consisting of two feet, either 
 spondees or dactyles, and a caesura ; the latter, 
 
 I* The more uncommon feet are not here enumerated, 
 90 
 
218 Dialects. 
 
 always of two dactjles and another ca-sura ; as, 
 
 Anacreont'C. 
 , The Anacreontic, or Iambic dimeter with a 
 CBBSura, consists of three Iambuses and a caesura ; 
 aSj Qe^j\?^yeiv\Arp8i\^ag. 
 
 The first foot may be a spondee instead of an 
 Iambus; as, Qcdpy^xloTtoglAxt^y^i^vg. 
 
 Of this measure are the 1st, 2d, 6th, 7th, 8th, 
 lOth, 12th, 15th odes of Anacreon, in the Collec- 
 tanea Grseca Minora. 
 
 There is another measure, which is often used 
 by Anacreon, consisting of a pyrrhic, two tro- 
 chees, and a spondee ; as, 
 
 M£Go\wxrL\oLg TtoO^opatg. 
 Of this measure are the 3d, 4th, 9th, 11th, 
 13th, 14th odes of Anacreon. 
 
 Two vowels are often contracted in scanning 
 into one ;* as, 
 
 MsvLV aletSs d8\a nrjlTiyjialSeid Axt\h^og.'t 
 
 DIALECTS. 
 
 Ancient Greece, with its dependencies, comprehended, 
 besides the different districts in Europe, part of Asia and sev- 
 eral islands in the Mediterranean. In these several coun- 
 tries, the inhabitants, besides the common language, had dif- 
 ferent Dialects, of which four were principal, y'iz. the Attic, 
 Ionic, Doric, and Molic ; the last comprehending the Bcectic. 
 The Poetic style admitted all the Dialects, and had certain 
 peculiarities of its own. 
 
 * This is called Synecphontsii, 
 
 1 For a fuller account of Metre, see Wjlsoo or Harmann. 
 
Dialects, Attic. 
 
 219 
 
 ATTIC. 
 The Attic Dialect was the most refined, and peculiar to 
 Athens and its neighborhood. It is admitted by the Poets and 
 writers in the Ionic and Doric Dialects. 
 
 I. Contraction 
 
 Properties. 
 
 1. Of syllables in the same word ; as, 
 
 CM, 
 
 ete 
 
 sut 
 
 ecu 
 
 uo 
 
 a 
 
 £0 
 
 V 
 
 into «. See Obs. 19. page 224 
 
 a. 
 a. 
 
 10. 
 
 9. 
 11. 
 19. 
 
 4, 6. 
 
 6, 20. 
 
 6, 20. 
 
 11. 
 
 — 5. 
 
 To this Dialect properly belong all contract nouns and 
 verbs. 
 
 2. Of Syllables in different words by Synaloepha, of 
 which there are six species ; viz. 
 
 '^Apocope, as 
 
 >> 
 
 Xi 
 
 
 Aphaeresis, as 
 
 
 To upyvpoiv 
 Ta rfjLsnpH 
 Toe, Bpycc 
 
 To If^OtTtoV 
 as Bf^l C'^O^VVSt 
 
 ^Attic<{ 
 
 Synaeresis, as 
 Crasis, as 
 Apocope k ) 
 Synaeresis, J 
 Apocope &, > i ct efJLOt 
 
 ^Crasis, ^ ^th uxyeos 
 
 T xpyvpioy. 
 t' ecvi^poq. 
 
 OKfceTepa. 
 Bjit^ijpec. 
 
 r' etpyct. 
 *r' avTpo), 
 
 OVVBKX. 
 ^Otf^^CCTiOV, 
 
 raXuxi^loy- 
 ef^HTro^vvii, 
 
 J: 
 
 ovi^t, 
 Tet^iyecg. 
 
Contractions of the Article, the Pronoun tyu^ the Conjunc- 
 tiouKut, and the Preposition TFpo. 
 
 u 
 
 ^,f»« 
 
 ilr, 
 
 ^^ 
 
 apve^, 
 
 OVfJLOl, 
 
 euytorpfip. 
 
 tyu otf*>xt 
 
 Eyof, 
 
 Attic 
 
 iya}ax . 
 
 Before 
 
 01 
 
 > into HOC 
 
 itU 
 
 
 Keti, 
 
 KCCt UV 
 KOCt etTU 
 
 KUi iy<» 
 Kctt ev 
 KUt evov 
 xui oivov 
 
 KOtt tJf^V 
 
 ► Attic \ 
 
 KOCV, 
 
 
 Kcci ri 
 
 KXt r uy^a^ot 
 
 Before an aspirate, leis chansjcd into;^^ jj as, 
 xcei ) ^ ;^6>. 
 
 Attic < )CV' 
 
 ♦ before i makes sometimes ^l']- ZT^%^21%. 
 i See Article in the Ionic Dialect. 
 I See Rule 111. page 6. 
 

 
 
 Dialects. Attic, 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 UPo, 
 
 
 
 
 Before 
 
 Uy H, 7rpoa)(Pet?^egy 
 
 'rpii<p£t>iei* 
 
 
 
 
 
 XV, cov, zrpoxv^uVy 
 
 TTpuV^XV, 
 
 
 
 II. Change of Letter or Syllable ; as, 
 
 
 V 
 
 into 
 
 ^. 
 
 as y^^vX^v, 
 
 ^Xnxa))t. 
 
 
 
 
 W, 
 
 — ftoA'j, 
 
 ^yii» 
 
 
 A . 
 
 
 ^. 
 
 -— K^^tQxvog^ 
 
 KptQxvei. 
 
 
 
 
 O" 
 
 — 7re<pxf>t^xi, 
 
 TTveVf^OfV, 
 
 7re(px'rfi^.xi 
 
 ^Aft/iM^V. 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 ^9 
 
 
 
 
 f' 
 
 — a-Viy 
 
 6vi, 
 
 
 
 
 \^ 
 
 — <rvv, 
 
 !«». 
 
 
 «• 
 
 
 \'' 
 
 — Gxpa-ilv* 
 
 0xppth, 
 
 
 
 
 /r 
 
 — i crtjiiiepovy 
 
 f TTpXOVMj 
 
 -rnfMpcf. 
 
 
 
 
 K' 
 
 -TFpxrreo, 
 
 
 
 
 
 C tXxx 
 
 
 2 0b8 
 
 CK, 
 
 
 f) 
 
 2. 
 
 « ( 
 
 
 
 —~ I Ti* ppm Art 
 
 ru.] 
 
 
 • \ 
 
 
 a;, 
 
 
 2.5. 
 
 £ 
 
 
 «> 
 
 7!ri'X£f*/pX^ 
 
 TFtZrcfAJ^X. 
 
 15. 
 
 
 
 u, 
 
 — tv^vriy 
 
 tv<pvx. 
 
 4. 
 
 i; 
 
 
 h'. 
 
 -^ ZS-lfiTOfJUtty 
 
 ^StTOfACtl.* 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 — n-eynjBXf 
 
 ^izrovS^, 
 
 16. 
 
 1 
 
 ' 
 
 •»» 
 
 — etKXy 
 
 Diphthong. 
 
 tCtJXX, 
 
 17. 
 
 OLi 
 
 
 ««> 
 
 — l6A«<f/^ 
 
 K}iMHf, 
 
 
 St 
 
 
 ?>» 
 
 — itAf^M, 
 
 KXrjS'ui, 
 
 6. 
 
 01 
 
 I 
 
 «^> 
 
 S xAo'«5, 
 
 ^patv*]. 
 
 2. 
 
 an 
 
 \ 
 
 
 it 
 
 
 Af, 
 
 — A«», 
 
 Syllable. 
 
 >^a* 
 
 2. 
 
 
 
 
 , — Tv^xra>'rx^y 
 
 TV^J/XVTtDV, 
 
 22 
 
 TC^Tcqv 
 
 24! 
 27. 
 
 fiLt 
 
 
 IjTct 
 
 
 f 1 
 
 yvot(y» 
 
 
 III. Insertion of, », o, *«, in Perfect Tenses. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Observation 16, 
 
 IG, 17. 
 
 * Rijsby, after Job. Gramraaticus, reverses this instance, making 
 9fit/)Tf/v for BoLPpuv i but greater authorities are against them. 
 
 + See Article. 
 
 4 In common with the Boeotic. 
 
 20* 
 
i^''^'^ IJtatects, Mtic. 
 
 IV. Syncope, 
 
 ^ c- in first future active and middle. 12 Obs. 
 
 Antepenultima of the Istaorist. 14. 
 
 « in the perfect, sometimes with the vowel or diphthong 
 
 following. 19 Obs. 
 
 I in the third plural pluperfect. 20. 
 
 9? in the aorists optative, and verbs in i^t, 27. 
 
 Toi III (r$a>Txv, imperative passive and middle. 23. 
 
 V. Paragoge, 
 
 y£ in pronouns primitive ; as, eyaye, o-vye. 
 
 «y in pronouns and adverbs ; as, orinv, hkHv. yasvyv. 
 
 t and vin pronouns demonstrative ;* as, 'uroTt, uvTi)t, nfleiy 
 ralm, Tstvhri^ r8]m, ralovt, roivloit, rotvjov^ for to uv]o^ n/Jov for 
 ra^. There is sometimes an elision of o and a ; as, mlt^ 
 
 TXVTt, 
 
 /in adverbs* conjunctions, and prepositions j as, alajTi, 
 vjy/, ovp^i, .M»fv/, evi. 
 
 Bot in the second person singular of verbs ; as, xpV^^^' 
 ii in the conjunction er/j;. 
 
 VI. Apocope, 
 
 6t in the imperative active of verbs in /it/ ; as, ItJcc and /V7»?, 
 lor itJu&i, ij-]))$i. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. It makes the vocative like the nominative in all declen- 
 sions. 
 
 Declensions. 
 
 2. In the 2d, the vowel or diphthong in every termination 
 is changed into a ; and the penuUima of nouns in ««$, iflongy 
 is changed into « ; as, Xc&oi , AeA>5, N, plur, \\^j,u,, Me^, not other- 
 wise ; as, t«<5$, 7ete>f<;, See Clarke's Horn. ct,. 265. 
 
 3. Some words of the 3d in >j5, -»;ro5, it declines after the 
 1st ; and ^yg, -oroq , m -0^05, after the 2d. 
 
 Contracts. 
 
 4. In the 1st form of contracts, the accusative smgular 
 of adjectives in 3}$ pure is contracted into ot ; as, ahto^iahci. 
 Pa<j:e 20. 
 
 * See Obervation 2d, page 47. 
 
Dialects. Attic. 223" 
 
 Proper names of this declension it forms after the 1st de- 
 clension ; and one appellative dKi^a^Km, Pige 20. 
 
 6. In the 2d and 3d, it makes the genitive singular in a'c, 
 contracting that from iv^ pure ; as, ;t»f6^5 p^fl*'?- P'^^ge 22. 
 
 6. In the 3d, it contracts the accusative singular into jy, 
 and the N. A. V. plural into j;? ; but ei^s pure has both accu- 
 satives in u, ; as, ;^of(«, x,^oi j x*oso(.(i, ;^oi««. rf)o(poi^ also occurs. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 7. It forms comparisons by -lo-lepc^^ -lo-'iccloi ; -«//e^05, -^/7«* 
 7«« ; and, in common with the Ionic ; 'srjepo^ , -srixio^. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 8. See Rule V. preceding page. 
 
 It uses exvlo) in the 2d person, and euvtui for <«AAeA2^$ . 
 Verbs. 
 
 9. It contracts ^««, S'l'^aay Trsimcj, 7rept'4^ouif, and xP<*o!^^h 
 by »i after the Doric manner. 
 
 10. It contracts ««!, foc/, »?««/, made by the Ionic syncope, 
 into v\ in the second person singular of the present indicative 
 passive and middle of verbs in f>Lt ; as, tTlus-cct, Tidto-xt^ x,uh^ot.iy 
 io-7>i, T/^^ Koi^vi, And sometimes in that of the perfect passive 
 of Barytons ; ^s, f^einvr.a-xi^ iLC£f4.yy\, Page 74. 
 
 11. It contracts the Ionic xa> into a ; fo, jj«, ©<,, into «, in 
 the second person singular of the imperfect indicative ; and 
 of the present and second aorist imperative passive and mid- 
 dle of verbs in ft/ ; as, ttrla)^ en&a^iKot&tfi ehhi, 
 
 12. In the first future of polysyllables in t^a, it drops t ; 
 as, e?^-aria ; middle, iXsn^fJLxi. It does the same by those in 
 cto-uy giT-o), e<ra)f which are afterward contracted ; as, ^i^a. But 
 tK^sof uncontracted occurs, Joel ii. 28. Page 69. 
 
 13. It affects the augment 6 ditlerent ways. Page 66-7. 
 
 14. It syncopates the 1st aorist ; as, eCpxl^ for evPr^o-xio ; 
 tyccf^x for iyuf^r.'Tx. By the Ionic, it is made syr.fM, which is 
 most in use. Page 71. 
 
 15. In dissyllable perfects in (pa, x^, it changes e intoo. 
 Page 71. 
 
 16. It changes j? into o, according to some grammarians, 
 in the perfect active of obsolete verbs ; as, P^ijza, ^eXoy^u^ 
 5r;j^A>, 7s-e^ov6x, inserting v. But they are better derived as 
 in the table of Anomals. 
 
 17. In the perfects active and passive uvsttcx, uvetf4,xt ' 
 ci<p£iKx, cc(peif*^^^ and the middle et^ct, it changes i into to ^ as, 
 
224 Dialects. Attie, 
 
 ttOiuYM^ ee^eaf^ott, eaSsi, in which the / is often retained ; as, . 
 €ta>$x. According to some, this is not a change, hut an in- 
 sertion ofcf ; an opinion which ef<i<>6<x, seems to sanction. 
 
 18. In the reduplicated perfect ccytix^ ffom ecya>, it inserts 
 • ; as, uymfcet. 
 
 19. It syncopates » in the perfect and pluperfect active, 
 and contracts the vowels ; as, ea-lctKctfri, lo-^mKevon, ea-;ecx,&>i ; 
 iirluTi, IWav<«<, eT]coi ; and in some persons the following 
 vowel is also syncopated ; as, 
 
 i li^lcCfcecJoTf, etrjctxetle, iTJctjcsiTotv. 
 ( 'itrlu — /ov, e(r]ec — 7f, Ifriu — cruv. 
 
 20. The Ionic iu, «$,* « for e/v, g/?, t/, 1st, 2d, and 3d Sing, 
 of the pluperfect active and middle, it contracts into a?, «;$,?? ; 
 
 as, tf/Ajj^-;?, -rfi. -fj. 
 
 It syncopates t in the 3d plural of the same tense ; as, 
 ijo'etroty for vhiJ-xv. 
 
 21. From the 2d person imperative active of verbs in |tt/, 
 it rejects the last syllable, i<r/<»^/, icr7«, iW*? ;t rtSslijl net}; 
 
 22. It changes tutccv into v7«v in the 3d person plural of 
 the imperative active, retaining the preceding vowel in the 
 1st aorist only of Barytons, and in both the tenses peculiar 
 to verbs in ft* : in the rest, e is changed into o, except in the 
 contracts, where a is changed into cj, ei into a, and a of the 
 third remains ;ias, ^ 
 
 Barytons. 
 IstAor. rv^J/ 'otjaTuVy — ccvlav. 
 
 Pres. rv-zsr] \ 
 
 Perf. r£%(p \ -elMtrotv, — ovjav, 
 2d Aor. rvsr J 
 
 Contracts. 
 1st Conj. |3« J -ely -uilm. 
 
 Xpv? ) -«, -»y/<yv. 
 
 ♦ The contraction is used in the 2d person, though usually limited bj 
 grammarians to the 1st and 3d only. 
 
 t In this case the long vowel is restored, but it is not always in verbs 
 from ««. 
 
 if Q m this place becomes t by reason of the preceding 9, Rule 11, 
 page 5. 
 
C Wloc ' 
 
 Pres. Iri6ii 
 {Mo 
 
 U A. < 6s 
 
 Dialects. Attic. 225 
 
 Verbs in f^i. 
 
 >'TUfrxVy v7<vv. 
 
 ! 
 
 23. In the 3d plural of the imperative passive and middle, 
 it syncopates «r«e ; as, 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 Pres. rv-srlto-Qco 
 Perf. ri1v(p6a ^-o-^v, 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 1st A. rt^ccT^if 
 
 24. In the optative active of Barytons and Contracts, fit 
 is changed into jjv ; as, 
 
 rvzrjoi 
 
 /3oa» ) 'f4.t, jjf. 
 
 • The persons are varied in all the tenses, as in the aorists 
 passive of this mood : 
 
 rvTurJot^ -9jy, • ?j$, V. 
 
 j3«ft' \ • Zlcv, ljl73V. 
 
 ^oio7* J -»;i6fv, tile, jj^atv 
 
 25 It uses the 2d and 3d singular, and the 3d plural of the 
 iEolic aorists. Page 60. 
 
 26. It changes oi, the penultima of the optative active of 
 verbs in ft/, from etv into v > ^s, h^otTjv, h^<u9]v, 
 
 27. It syncopates tj in eiJjjttfv, sivlci of the aorists passive 
 optative of Barytons, and peculiar tenses of verbs in ftt of 
 the same mood ; also in onj^uev, otn/^ev^ of the latter ; and, in 
 both, changes j?<r* in the 3d plural into s ; as, 
 
 1st Aor. Tu(pht "] 
 2d Aor. rv-zs-ei 
 
 Pres. ri6ei 
 2d Aor. 6ei 
 
 Pres. Irjett 
 2d Aor. (rjeil 
 
 Pres. Mot 
 2d Aor. Jo< 
 
 -VM^Vj -Tjle, 'tio-uv, AttiCj 'usv, -Tf, -fj 
 
 ♦ The Doric moreover changes oi of the penultima into « i as, <?>/>.• 
 
^ CVHIi\y%^bift 
 
 Writers. 
 Thucydides, Lysias, Plato, Xenophon, Isceus, Jsocrates, De- 
 mosthenes^ JEschmes^ Lucian. — JEschylus, Sophocles, Euripi- 
 des, Aristophanes, This Dialect was divided into ancient 
 and more recent. Thucydides, Plato, and Aristophanes \x%e^i 
 the former. 
 
 IONIC. 
 
 The Ionic Dialect was peculiar to the colonies of the 
 Athenians and Achaians in Asia Minor, and the adjacent 
 islands, the principal of which were Smyrna, Ephesus Mile- 
 tus, Teos, nndSamos . It is admitted hy writers of the Attic 
 Dialect, often by those of the Doric, but most frequently by 
 the Poets. 
 
 Pivperties. 
 
 It delights in a confluence of vowels ; hence it is distin- 
 guished from the common Dialect by 
 
 I. The i?c5oZwtton of Diphthongs and Contractions. 
 
 srervipee 
 
 Xpfil^^,63. 
 
 rvzrjfjott, 
 
 rob. Matt. P. 103. B. 
 
 uyecCospytct. 
 
 Xoyoio, Toio* o. 
 
 Ai^eeo-i Tea, 4, 5> 
 
 TTulpaiog. 
 
 II. Syncope of 
 ^ and T in oblique cases. 
 
Dialects, Ionic, 
 
 227 
 
 5 in many words ; particularly those in nu ; as, <9«f , upxt- 
 I in many words ; as, nAfay, zs-Xem, jus^av, tm for f/<i;v, imperf. 
 
 of feeo;. 
 
 ff- in second persons of verbs. 
 X in the perfect active. 
 
 III. Ejpenthesis of 
 
 u before terminations of verbs. 
 e before terminations of nouns and verbs, of some in all 
 cases ; as, ot^tXpeoi, xevsoq, Kcttvioq. 1. 4. 
 
 I in dual case* and many nouns ; as, cleivoi, ttoiij for ^o«, 5, 
 
 i; ; as, 7rov>iVi. 
 
 ai before a. and ?? ; as, e-eMvutu, A^j^vjc/^, xvotyxMtt}. 
 
 IV. Prosthesis of 
 
 e before many words ; as, «£/$, £<yy. 
 
 Reduplication in many tenses. » 12. 
 
 V. Aphceresis of 
 f ; as, o^?»j, xf/vo5. 
 
 r ; as, Ke^x^ofy f^Xct^. 
 
 r ; as, ryetyoy. 
 
 Augment. 12. 
 
 VI. Parago^e of 
 
 £6 in the perfect middle ; as, y<»<v, yr/;?**, P. M. ytycc, I. 
 yeyctcc, 
 
 ert in the third persons of verbs. 
 
 VII. Change of Letter or Syllable : 
 
 
 y 
 
 into 
 
 C ^C6ptt$pOV 
 
 i vof^y 
 
 r e' are so g 
 TT ettpiKouev 
 
 * Change of vowel and consonant. 
 j Tlie rough into the smooth. 
 
 ' ^epe^pov,"^ 
 7re(pv^cti, 
 ^opKCchi. 
 l2v<r(roi . 
 >coeiv» 
 
 ^ Ionic { H^Kolt, 
 
 r* arepoq. 
 
 See onward. 
 
228 
 
 Dialects, Ionic. 
 
 The smooth and aspirate mute reciprocally ; as, 
 
 t 
 
 CCKCCv6tOV 
 
 e 
 toe. 
 
 Ionic 
 
 1 
 
 ' uxotvhov, 
 
 i^CC$pCtX.O^m 
 
 xvfipij. 
 
 
 
 u 
 tcv 
 
 St 
 
 tcv 
 
 €19 
 
 > Ionic 
 
 VIII. 
 
 Oil 
 
 (ioepx&pey 
 tulpoi 
 
 e'srepo]eoy]o5 
 
 Oivpo 
 
 rpotvfJLU 
 itp'vsoi 
 
 L Apta-Jecyopuv 
 
 ( £lilv(Pity 
 
 Contraction in a few instances 
 
 into S . 'iltpoq 'ovlspo^,'^ 
 
 uvoyjCricc ctvcjTtx, 
 
 oy^uxov]x. 
 
 V 
 u 
 
 n 
 
 ' ^ipe&fiov, 
 
 lijipoi. 
 
 XPsia. 
 e'^TlpoJioyjoq, 
 
 oivpu, 
 
 ^09). 
 
 rpain^ot, 
 ijptveo^, 
 
 ApiTJctyoptec. 
 
 mio s . elepog 
 > — — a / uvoy,<rict 
 
 8. 
 
 4. 
 
 4. 
 
 16. 
 
 3. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. It inserts e in all genitives plural. 
 
 2. It annexes i to the dative plural of all parisyllabic 
 aouns. 
 
 3. In the article, o or to before e is contracted into « ; as, 
 erepog, ovripo?. 
 
 Declensions. 
 
 4. In the 1st it changes the ct of all terminations (the Du- 
 al and N. A. V, plural excepted) into Vy subscribing the 
 
 ♦ See Article in the ^ Itic Dialect. 
 
Dialecis. Ionic. i'29 
 
 subjimctive vowel ; « of the genitive into eu, uv and ?;v of the 
 accusative sing, into ea, and os.$ of the phiral into £«§ — 
 N. G. D. A. G. D. 
 
 1 . Sing, ^ops J)$, -f«;,* -Jj. -jjv or -e«. PI. -f a'v, -jj$ or ->^c-< or -tft<~/. 
 A. N. G. D. A. G. D; 
 
 sx^. 2. Sing. /3/ ?;, ->j5» -Ji, iiv. PI- -f*'s -?J« oi* ■?i'^' or ■«^^^- 
 
 5. In the 2d, it changes s of the genitive sing, into do, 
 (and in the article, which is of this declension, into sa, whose 
 dative also is in eco,) and ot of the dual into oi'i ; 
 
 G. G. D. G. D. G. D. 
 
 Sing, ^^ay-oio. Du. -o/iv. PI. -iov, -oiTi. Sing. roii(i and reM^reeo. 
 
 6. In the 3d, by syncopating ^ and r it makes -<$, -<Jo5, -ct5, 
 -^7«$j of the 2d and 5th of the contracts. Gsr-t^og, -;»5. 
 
 Contracts. 
 7- In the 1st and 2d form of contracts, the genitive and 
 dative sing, in the 3d, all cases have t of the penultima chau- 
 
 G. D. G. D. 
 
 ged into ??. 1. Sing. Ap-Kog, -th, 2. ^aA-y^^, -j}<. In the 
 
 G. D. A. N.A. 
 
 3d form of contracts : Sing. /S^^c/A-jjo?, -jj/, -jj;*. Dual, -rr, 
 G. D. N. V.G. D. A. 
 
 -r.oiv, Plur. -Tii -TjOfv, -art, -^•»$. 
 
 8. In the 4th, it makes the accusative in «v ; as, Aiirav. 
 
 G. 
 
 9. In the 5th, it changes tc of the penultima into r. xsp-sog. 
 D. 
 
 -f/, &c. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 10. In the feminine etx from fj, i is syncopated in every 
 
 N. G. 
 
 case ; as, o|-e* or -fij, -sus or -f3j$. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 11. It inserts e before every termination of horeg and ecvre^ 
 with its compounds ; G. raTea^ D. c^vnaf, Seldomer when 
 uv is changed into au ;t N. aurc^, A. ajwVov, particularly in the 
 compounds ; D. (rsaOraj, eauroj ; but eaiursn, and its contracted 
 form Aiureki for avm^ also occur. 
 
 12. It removes the augment syllabic and temporal. — 
 
 * /iof'SO) in Hesiod, by Syncope, for l^ocneoo. 
 + See Rule I, Example 1st. 
 
 21 
 
> -xdv,! 'Hei, 'Ke. xdv. 
 
 530 Dialects, Ionic, 
 
 €e^P6fKst, ukuo-s, iAf^cc* Herodot, Sometimes the reduplica- 
 tion only ; as, acrr.fjictt ; sometimes both ; as, Tsxvearut for 
 rerexmrut, and from the pluperf. both augments ; as, >,vra 
 for eXeXvTo. On the contrary, it reduplicates the pres. imperf. 
 and both the futures and aorists -, >ctK^<ry.6>, enviTrs, TrsTner.a-a, 
 xey^uiAa,, KeKpocr^picrcCju^))., fjLSfJiu.pzso^.'] Page 67. 
 
 13. It forms the 1st, 2d, and 3d Sing, and the 3d Plur. of 
 the imperfect, and both aorists active, by annexing %«v, xe$, xr, 
 to their 2d persons singular respectively, dropping the sub- 
 junctive vowel in contracts, and shortening the long vowel in 
 Terbs in fja. 
 
 Common. Ionic. 
 
 Imperf. ervirre^, srvTirr-str']^ 
 
 eXPvTsiy exp^i'O^ 
 
 1st. Aor. srvyf/ui, ew^'CCT 
 
 2d. Aor. ervTTSiy erv-^r-ec 
 
 s(rjt)i, eo-1'Ctcr 
 
 Hence in the passive and middle ro-srrgTMfjmv, -so, -ero, 
 
 'OVTo, 
 
 14. In the first future indicative active of liquid verbs, and 
 the 2d future of all verbs, it inserts e before the three 
 terminations Sing, and 3d Plur ; also in the infinitive and 
 participle, resolving et into ee and a into eo in the dual and 
 Plur. except in the 3d Plur. and the participle feminine ; 
 '^uX'ta, -ff/5, -££/ ; -f£7dV, -eilcv ; -fojttfv, -eele, -e^o-i. Inf. -^ctXtfiv, 
 Part. -(^^A-fffl^y, -faraft, -fov. In the middle voice, it onhj re- 
 solves a and u ; the latter in the 2d Sing indicative into eAty 
 subjunctive into v^on ;*as, rvTr-eof^^t, -son, -eerott ; -eof^edov, -eso-^ov, 
 -££0-6ov ; -feftf^*, '£eO'h, -eovrui ; rvTr-ay^^'^ -»j«e<, -Tjrect, 
 
 15. In the perfect active, it syncopates x, and shortens the 
 penultima ; la-lrjKCCre, etrjeoiTe ; Te&v»y.ag, re^yra>i , 
 
 16. In the pluperfect active and middle, it changes, e», g/5, 
 fi, into f«, £f$, § ££, 
 
 * On the supposition that « is an insertion, and not a change of/. The 
 aua:ment()f this verb is /. 
 
 t a.vc^<rcti retains the augment in the infinitive. Herodot. 
 
 ^ This form is more frequent))? found without the augment ; as, tvtt- 
 
 fi See .^ftic Dialect, p. 254, Note to Obf:ervation -^O. 
 
Dialects, Ionic, 
 
 ^31 
 
 17. It resolves >? and a in the 2d persons of passive and 
 middle tenses into e«e/, eo ; in the subjunctive, r,cci. Page 74. 
 
 18. To the 3d Sing, of all tenses active, of the perfect 
 middle, and the aorists passive, of the subjunctive mood, it 
 annexes c, ; as, 
 
 Active. 
 Pres. rvsrrviTt. 
 
 Perf. TeTvc>7i't. 
 
 1st A or. TV^r^ari, 
 2d Aor. rvTrnrjci, 
 
 Passive. 
 1st Aor. 7v<p9viTt. 
 
 2d Aor. rvTTrjS't,'^ 
 
 Middle. ' 
 
 Perf. TiTVTTVjTt, 
 
 19.1n the 2d Sing, of the 1st aorist middle, it resolves a» 
 into xo ; as, erv4"^, -«««• 
 
 20. In all tenses of the indicative and optative, whose 3d 
 Sing, ends in rcti or to, it forms the 3d Plur. by inserting ct 
 before those terminations respectively, and, of the next 
 preceding letters, shortening the long vowel, dropping the 
 subjunctive of the diphthong, (except in the optative,) chang- 
 ing the smooth mute into the rough, and c- into the charac- 
 teristic of the 2d aorists J^ or ^ ; as, 
 Pres. & Perf. Sing. Plur. 
 
 Kit 
 
 KeycoXH 
 
 TtrVTF 
 
 'XgTrXviO' 
 
 K£ 
 K£KOXo 
 
 T£Tv<P 
 
 tfsttXxQ 
 
 Imp. & 
 
 STVTrre 
 £7r£<piX£ 
 
 £K£XP^^O 
 
 £K£ 
 
 €iC£'sCoXo 
 
 £-^ce.?\, 
 tTgrv(p 
 
 s7re<ppx$' 
 e^e7rXcc6 
 
 Plup. Pluf. 
 
 C 'CCTO . 
 
 When cc precedes those terminations, instead of inserting 
 another ct after it, this dialect inserts an g before it ; as, 
 
 3 Sing. 3 Plur. 3 Sing. 3 Plur. 
 
 u,t}X<*^ > -«r«/, £xrxt Sf^vX'^^ / -»re, -exro, 
 
 uvxTTevl J xv£7r£7rr ) 
 
 21. In common with the Doric, it contracts verbs in <«« 
 into -»; ; as, o/s'^?, o/jJ, etfjv. 
 
 ♦ Also Ty?9j«(7-/, ^vTrnJo-i, See Observation 21. 
 
232 Dialects. Doric. 
 
 22. In the contract tenses of verbs in «<y, it inserts e after 
 contraction ; as xP^^f^'*^^ ef^tjxavsAJ/^yjV ; Imperat. xp^'^ ; * 
 but oftener changes a into e ; as, ;^/jfOft«*/, opeof^uti. Some- 
 times in the present subjunctive passive of Barjtons ; as, 
 KTetyimlcct : always in the aorists ; as, rvi^dsu/, rvTriot. Al- 
 so in the 3d plural of the present indicative of verbs in fju 
 from oc<», and the present and 2d aorists subjunctive of those 
 from oca and bu in the active voice ; as, It'isu'ti^ L-iiv^i^ neeS- 
 *-/, crjeao-t^ 6eco(rt. Sometimes in the 2d person middlevoice \ 
 
 as, hrjTxi . 
 
 23. It syncopates a- in the 2d persons passive and middle 
 of verbs in jtc/. Page 106. 
 
 24. In the 3d plural of the present active of verbs in /tt/ 
 from €6)^ oa>^ vuf, it inserts «, syncopating the subjunctive vow- 
 el of diphthongs ; as, Tt^etci^ riSeuTi ; J<<hi^/, h^cocTi ; ^evyvt^c-/, 
 
 25. It contracts ty. from ©<«*>, oeu. into a \ as, ^ovio-a, ^atroo j 
 
 Instead of the regular tenses o{ xstf^^cn and uvsif^xi, it uses 
 those of their primitives xia, and avf^; 3 as, xeovjeti, uvecvlui, 
 
 'ri'Savlcct, &C. 
 
 It makes A^/ito^vfi; borrow its tenses as if from Ace^g<y and 
 ?\xfJLQa, Kccrcc>ie?i6C9eKe, Xctf^-^^f^ai, >^»f^<p^£iv, &c. occur in Hero- 
 dotus. 
 
 Writers. 
 Herodotus, Hippocrates, Arrian^ Lncian, Aretwus, Homei\ 
 Hesiod, Theognis, Jlnacreon. 
 
 DORIC. 
 
 This Dialect was first used in Lacedemon and Argos ; af- 
 terwards in Epirus, Magna Gra^cia, Sicily, Crete, Rhodes, and 
 Lyhia. It was seldom used by Attic, but often by Ionic 
 writers and the Poets. 
 
 Properties* 
 
 1. Contraction ofo and xcn, when prefixed to vowels and 
 diphthongs. 
 
 * x^-^ occurs in Hippocrates, ih^ Ionic of pcf^, imperative of XS^-^y-^* 
 for ;tf«*^A**'' 
 
 \ 
 
Dialects, Doric, 
 
 TSZ 
 
 CoQimon. 
 
 ret ocyKicrJec, 
 Toe oo-lett, 
 
 y.cx.1 stTTe, 
 
 y-cct a BK, 
 
 Other Contractions ; 
 
 CCS into 7} 6l/f4.i}<;. 
 
 ^ Kpf}<;^ <Pp7Ui, 
 
 tv hvq^ Apsvi, 
 
 — — ^ (ioffcec^. 
 
 sot 
 so 
 cog. 
 
 Doric. 
 
 rotf^otjcc, 
 c^hoc<poq, 
 
 raXysci, 
 
 rav^^},oto, 
 
 f^yxttrlu, 
 
 y. 'y]^ac'rtvr,g. 
 
 ^etTiXiviy Gen, 
 
 
 C 
 
 II. C^aJio^e of Letter or Syllable ; as, 
 into J^ «J^, ^^y.* 
 
 •^vh(i^^ S7n,ui]$y>g, 6<icro^ , 
 
 6s^lcg, Aplsf^ffci, 
 
 yvfMct^o^ psi&f, by Metathesis, soS'a'. 
 
 f^x^^Xy zf^^^^y al^o JEolic. 
 
 opilav, 
 
 trvptrja, (ppccrjof, ^pif^arldj. 
 /"^ etv^tjpX, Avf^piq, 
 \ ? ^Vf^^pcctog, 
 
 i r et'JtiJov, xXocicrlpov.'^ 
 
 ^ySVog^ S0iyf4.iV for SOlXUf^£¥. 
 
 <Ptvlii, 7}vdovj Ksvlo for y,s^;lo.'i 
 
 <PuVpoq, 
 
 4. 
 
 V 9. 
 
 =1. 
 
 ♦ Words to which the asterism is affixed, undergo some chan 
 other letter. 
 
 i^e oi ail- 
 
 t When T or 6 follows, 
 t See yiV'To in the JEolic, 
 
 21* 
 
234 Dialects, Doric, 
 
 V 
 
 into j3 
 
 rvzs-'jou.si, Kec>,eigy^ ^et^y also JEolii\ 
 
 
 
 TC 
 
 — ^ 
 
 e/tcoo^V, ccin.^^etKtx, 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 rl 
 
 ftiKKoi for f^txpog. 
 
 TTB^pOt^f^CCt. 
 
 
 
 c- 
 
 It 
 
 
 
 23. 
 17. 
 
 
 (i 
 
 cnt^i^ay "TrXet^u^ tpn%. 
 
 
 11. 
 
 
 — 5 '^ 
 
 TToKUy TCKCC,^ 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^oppfg. 
 
 
 
 
 ie 
 
 Kpsjcg, also Io7nc^ 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 i^ 
 
 'Tirop^oLXii, 
 
 uysL^t^^ cDpKrJeg, eap^opitn. 
 
 rpsc^Afi rpatxco. 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 i: 
 
 
 
 16. 
 
 V) 
 
 1 £ 
 
 
 2, 13, 
 
 19. 
 
 
 
 1 CO 
 \ Cll 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 1 ^^ 
 
 rv-^evfjug** ) 
 
 TV^iif4.£g * ^ 
 
 16, 
 
 17. 
 
 
 
 Trpoirog, 0vpZi^ eTva^a, Vf A^v. 
 
 o 
 
 22, 
 
 ft> 
 
 ! viyec^evvy yeXsvfrx, 
 
 
 
 alt 
 
 
 ysct, netv» 
 
 
 
 
 /-« 
 
 K?^oc^otgj >tA<«|aj,*" yetf4.uv. 
 
 
 24. 
 
 
 U' 
 
 KXti^et^ 9CXUt0']p0Vy i]6cClOV. 
 
 
 
 it 
 
 "1- 
 
 xPo^f^cc, Gen. 
 
 
 14. 
 
 Aoye^' ACCUS. 
 
 Aoy&>5. Acc. upoMog, piyav. 3, 24. 
 
 TVis-loitri^rvzs-lotTci^ u-<i/oig'^ } 12 18 
 
 * See first Note, preceding page. 
 
 f Plato says .that i^ai was used for the ancient and Ailic opsu^Jix tc 
 
 J This seems to come from verbs in ct«e> made toe by the ^'J/Zte and 
 /<?»«; Dialect, 
 
Dialects, Doric, ^35 
 
 ,'j into £{ tXstGvtet. 
 U) ot T^pOlVi, 
 
 III. Syncope of 
 
 eT>iog^ fjLaet^ Tract, 
 
 1 TV7rIe<s, TVTrJeVi rihvlt,'^ 15, 17. 
 V hMi."" 17. 
 a TTpuv for 7rpa>r,v,'^ 
 
 \y , Epenthesis of 
 
 ^ yocvulett, 
 
 t Tv'^e'i'Tov, -Tf ; rv^et-rect ;J rv^otii. IG. 
 
 T rvz/jofcea-ex, 20. 
 
 V. Aphceresis of 
 
 tff in A», A%, A^. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 M. F. 
 
 1. It makes the nominative plural of the article t«/, mt. 
 
 Declensions. 
 
 2. In the Ist, it changes a of the Gen. singular a of the 
 Gen. plural, and j? of every termination, into ec. Sometimes 
 also the Gen. plural of the 2d and 3d ; as, 
 
 N. G. D. A. V. G. 
 
 AftW-flc$ -ec, } 
 
 > -^, -ctv, u,- 
 
 -Plur. 
 
 tcper 
 
 3. Proper names in ccog have o syncopated, and are de- 
 
 N. 
 clined after the 1st j as, fjr M««A-flCfl5, -a, &c. MfV5A-<e$, 
 G. D. A. V. 
 -jc, -«c, •«{», -ec- 
 
 In this declension, it changes a into a; ; that of the accusa- 
 tive plural sometimes into o, and rejects the t subscript of 
 the dative ; as, 
 
 C. D. G. A. 
 
 Sing. Aay-ft', -6/ Plur. -«y,]| -*;$ or -c$. 
 
 + By another Syncope for Biu,a-As-S6. 
 * See first Note, page 233 
 I Third singalar, 1st future middle. 
 U This iiilretiuent. 
 
236 Dialects, Doric, 
 
 It also changes a into a in the Norn, and Ace. Sing, and 
 Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. contracted of the 3d j as, N. /S^?, Ace. 
 jim, Plur. N. A .V. (iag, 
 
 4. It changes i" into r in nouns in tg, -t^oi i as, 
 
 Gen. $eiLLt]os> f^ipfloq^ AprsiLLile^, 
 
 Contracts. 
 
 5. It changes t} and iv of the Nom. and Voc. of the 1st 
 
 N. V. N. V. 
 
 and 3d form reciprocally ; as, Apsv^y -ev ; ^cta-ix-r.^ , -?;. to 
 or « of all genitives in cos into ew ; as, ;<$e<A£y$, TroAewg, ohjcrevqj^ 
 H into 6; in the Gen. Sing, of the 4th ; as, G. A;^^5. eig of the 
 Nom. Plur. into zg without the subscript, icj of all geni- 
 tives into a. : This last but seldom. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 6. To eya in the Nom. Sing, it annexes y, v?^, yet, vyu. In 
 the penultima of the dual and plural, it changes 97 into u, and 
 often uses the Sing. Ace. for the dual and plural. See Table 
 at the end of Dialects. 
 
 7. In the pronoun of the second person, it changes c- into 
 r, and annexes ya, vj?. See Table. 
 
 8. In the 3d personal pronoun for the accusative s, it uses 
 the accusative of*, G. io$ obsolete, with fc or y prefixed ; as, J 
 M./y,v/y, which often stand not only for I, but for uvr-ov, ->jy, -0,^ 
 and also for the plural avr-ii^, -^$, -ec. For the plural dative 
 G-(p{(rt, it uses the dual (r(piv, which by Aphasresis becomes 0iv. 
 For the plural accusative «^^«5, it uses the dual G-<pe. by Me-^ 
 tathesis (po-e ; hence -^f. As the relative avrog is often used 3 
 for the reciprocals 'a and uvra, (contracted from lavm,) so 1 
 ^iv and i^s ^re used respectively for uvt-oi?, -atg ; uvr-a^ -ccq, 
 -c6, in all genders : -^pe sometimes for the Ace. Sing, ccvt-ovj 
 
 -rjv, -0. 
 
 In the possessives, it changes 
 
 e-<j5 into recs . 
 
 e$ «)$. 
 
 rjfJLiltpoi ccf^q, 
 
 vf^ilspo? tJfttf?. 
 
 G-^slepo? 5*^$. 
 
 ♦ Odyss. «. 3&7. 
 
Dialects, Doric, 237 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 9. It changes^, the characteristic of the present, into c-J^, 
 
 J^, ^^, T, and TT ; as, trv^iT^u^ yvi^tvcc^a^ yFolt^^u^'cpilu^ ^pxrl^f, cv* 
 pirlA), 
 
 10. It makes new present tenses from perfects, by chang- 
 ing ot into cj ; as, W5?;\a», zn-zsroidtu, h^oiKa^ 9ce)t?^9}y^, 7re<PpiKv^* 
 
 n. It changes <r, the future characteristic of verbs in ^, 
 and of some in 6f pure, into | ; as, «5t»7/«|tt>, ys^^ot^ai, 
 
 12. It changes « in the penultimaof the 1st future and 1st 
 aorist of verbs in 6> pure, into ei ; as, ety^tc-cj, axoi<rov. 
 
 13. It changes rj in the penultima of the 1st future and 1st 
 aorist perfect and pluperfect into cc ; as, <pi?[xc6j, sltf^oicct^ 
 
 14. It changes n the augment, formed by annexing <, into 
 97 without a subscript ; as. j?;^ev, i;Ay.«». 
 
 15. It syncopates 1 in the 2d and 3d persons singular of the 
 present indicative active, and in every tense of the infinitive 
 ending in nv ; as, rv-nrl-e^, -g, rvTrJiv, Tv^£f^ rvTev, 
 
 16. It circumflexes the 1st future active and middle, and 
 forms it like the 2d ; as, 
 
 Act. rv-^a, -f??, -ei, -giroy^ -iiroi, ' > /u^v,| -£/7f, -ii \ v]i. 
 
 Mid. rv^J/'a/itetty -rj, -etjut. 'iif4.£$ov, -n5-^«v, -£i^^a\^, kc, 
 
 17. It changes v into o- in the 1st person plural of all tenses 
 indicative and subjunctive active, and of the 2d aorists sub- 
 junctive passive : also c-into vrin the 3d plural, dropping the 
 subjunctive vowel of the preceding diphthong, except in the 
 
 ^ 2d future ; as, Tt;sr7»/M.f$, ervTrJof^gi, iv^ofA^a^ irv^ufj^^ &:c. 
 \rv7r1oilt,^ rv^o)i]i^^ ri'jv^otvlt,^ Tvzs-iivli,^ ti6sv]i,^ ^iMh^ tvzsltay 
 7«, rv-^mlt^ Pass, rv^p^avli, rvTrmlt, 
 
 18. It changes 01 into a in the penultima of Barytons and 
 contracts of the optative active, whose termination /w,;, the 
 Attic had before changed into jjv ; as, Attic, rv7r]otr,v, yroiomy 
 Xpv^^tuv ; Doric, rvzrjuyrtv, 7rotai'0, ;kj^t/o-^>jv, 
 
 * From ri<pptKA for 'Ttiippi^A. 
 t See Obs. 18, and Note to the same. 
 X See Obs. 18. 
 
 i This person is like the dative plural of the participle of the same 
 ton.se ; but the Doric Dialect makes it like the dative sin:rular. 
 
238 
 
 Dialects, Doric, 
 
 It also often changes « of the penultima both of contracts 
 and Barytons into ev, sometimes into a/ ; as Active, (ptX-eZimeq, 
 'Evvlt, Imp. ((piXtuv, rv^^eviiteg, -£ov]t, rvTr-evf^-e^, av/<* or -iuvli 
 or -ovlt. Part. TV7r']edcrx,(pi?isvv. Pass, and Mid. (piXiZfJLon, 1st 
 
 Fut- oLXiZtA.Ai, Imperat. <piXv), Also ru7r]oia'i^ 1st Fut. 
 
 Tu^^otG-t, Particip. rv7rloi<rx. c is sometimes inserted in the 
 subjunctive ; as, tTopfosr-aTi, -sav]! ; G-vylt6 art, -eavli, Archi- 
 medes. 
 
 19. It changes t) into ct in most tenses of the indicative and 
 optative passive and middle : also of verbs in f^t ending in jjv ; 
 as, eTvzs-]ofAecv, erv-^etfjLocv, £TV(p0ocvy erv(p6t]] ecv , rvzs-lotfcotv, sG-iccVy 
 
 20. It inserts o* in the 1st person plural passive ; as, rvTr- 
 
 lo,U£G-dcd, 
 
 21. In the perfect passive of verbs in ^<jy, makings in the 
 future, it changes o-into ^; as, 7re(ppet^/^oct, KeKcc^f^sci. 
 
 22. It contracts verbs in ua into ^, in common with the 
 Ionic; as, r;jit-;;$, -'^, -Jv : and changes the a contracted into 
 a ; as, ^u?iu<rt^ particularly in participles ; as, Trawli, 
 
 23. In verbs in fjn^ it changes c- of the 3d person singular 
 present indicative active into r ; as, kt'iaI^ ri6?)](, &c. 
 
 24. In the infinitive, it sometimes changes n into u, and a 
 into 6» ; as, ev^eitf4.ov»v, piyctiv, 
 
 25. It also changes v and vxi into i^ev, dropping the subjunc- 
 five of the preceding diphthong ; as, 
 
 TVTrJet 
 
 TtfMJ 
 
 yJvTH 
 
 rslv<pe 
 
 t^evyvu 
 
 V 
 
 ^pvo-o 
 relvpe 
 rv<p6vi 
 
 ^Bvyyv 
 is 
 
 'f^V, 
 
 26. To this form it frequently annexes ut ; as, rvsrltf^i' 
 
 ♦ The 2d future commonly retains the «^, if the penultima be not 
 changed into iv or o/, but not always, 
 t aEolic for 4)/X£.v. 
 
Dialects. JEoUc. £39 
 
 « 
 vflc/, rif^^ififximi^ <ptX7i(^miy ;^p5-o/^fva/,* &c.. These often occur 
 in Ionic writers. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 27. It inserts / after u in the masculine and feminine of 
 participles ; as, rv^-wi^ -xKrce,, 
 
 28. It changes w«e, the feminine termination, into ijo-«, ac- 
 cording to some grammarians ; as, f^sit/,Bm}ciicru^ ocnr,uichTcty 
 eofpccKHo-x ; but they rather belong to present teuics formed 
 from perfects. See Obs. 10. 
 
 Writers. 
 Archimedes^ Timceus, Pythagoras, Pindar^ Theocritus, Bion, 
 Moschus, Callimachus, and the Tragedians in the Choruses. 
 
 iEOLIC. 
 This Dialect was used in Bceotia^ Lesbos, and JEolia in 
 Asia Minor, It is a branch of the Doric, and has some 
 changes in common with it. 
 
 Proj)e7'lies. 
 
 I. Change of the rough into the smooth breathing ; as. 
 
 To compensate the loss of the aspirate, it sometimes pre- 
 fixes /3 to ^ when the next syllable begins with ^, x, J", or t ; 
 as, /3p<(^(«, l^pcty^i, /S/jfl^ov, fioifiA-^* It sometimes prefixes y to a 
 vowel ; as, yevlo for evlo, Doric for £?C]o, by Syncope for sxejo, 
 which is by the Ionic Dialect for eiAe7o, 
 
 II. Change of Letter or Syllable : 
 
 /SA;y^,t ^eX^PUg, ^tX^mq. 
 
 ^XiQa. 
 
 TTspfo^oi for ^epto^og. 
 
 ♦ Sometimes ^pvirofAfxivcit. after the -^olic manner of compensating the 
 loss of the subjunctive vowel of the diphthong. See ,/Eolic Dialect, 
 t For ^iXioL^. 
 
 ii is S^T ) f crcT 
 
 :j: An ^ollc resolution of< ^ — itr \ by Metathesis < <rK 
 
 fi 
 
 into \ ^ 
 
 
 (f^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 /3 
 
 K 
 
 — c-n 
 
 e 
 
 — (p 
 
 t 
 
 — p 
 
n 
 
 240 Dialects, Molic, 
 
 fC into W TTsltty O-STTTctju, CtXtZTZTCX' foT UXilfAM. ScC 
 
 Rule IV. 
 
 djo^, izs-zTo^, Trico^^"^ TTo^y c-/6^, '-^ for 
 
 T ' TT cz7oXy,v^ cr^TocAe/^, cTf^^f. 
 
 ►^ . , o"5r| czTfAA/a;, (!'-sruX>^i^oc, 
 
 ^ e >ieyof^£$£9i (pe'pof^e^ev, v added. 
 
 f^€fcop&cci, e<p0op6ut, 
 (rvptcct^, 
 fA.iXcAi<;^ rccXcili ; hence y.e>Mtvcc^ Tcc?Mt))a. 
 
 c U, O'STlC&Ot. 
 
 ^ (^u Arpiit^, 
 
 i a ^biycilij^, Myapoiv, «^<w^, r^Hf^a^ ^aa-cc, 
 V ' I f} v;;«$. 
 
 I effi5, O, a, vfA«>5, Acc. ov, 
 
 u. . Oil (^oui^, ys^ioci, 
 
 St < 5:§ 'J^OV. 
 
 ( ot fMts-x, Kpsaxrui Me^oio-cc, opdotg,'^ 
 
 III. Prosthesis of 
 /3 before ^, instead of the aspirate ; as, ^pvl^^. 
 
 * Words that undergo a complicated change. 
 
 t See third Note, preceding: pae;e. 
 
 :j: >yv« and i»!^iV'Xiog are of ^olic extraction, from ^sv^ and o^Mcvssi 
 
 h In the augment, according to Priscian, 
 
Dialects. JEolic. ' 241 
 
 y tor the same purpose ; as, ysvlo. Also in other words ; 
 as, yvoe/Vj yyo<p6i, yvoiy y^ovzrov, whence epiy^ovyrov^ II. tj. 411. 
 
 IV. Epenthesis, It transposes the letters in the sylla- 
 ble pi, changing/ into e, and doubling ^ ; as, zc-zs-ptu, M'slpicc, 
 ctX^olp(o$ ; JEolic, KOTTep^oc, f^elepposi et.?\.Xo]eppo^, 
 
 Epenthesis of 
 (t in the genitive plural. {/.HTccm. 
 
 I in fjLiXAi^y ru>^oiti ; participles in «5 ; also of the i sub- 
 script. 
 
 V after « ; as, uvulecv, uvu^, ctv^s^, ctvlu^, d'ecvM^, iuvKSv^ 
 
 V after o ; as, Ovhro-iot, 
 
 A consonant to compensate the loss of the aspirate ; as, 
 
 A consonant when the vowel or diphthong preceding is 
 shortened j as, KJeWAf, ^Ssppa, tf^^uc^ 'l^l^i, Trsv^rry^gy rthi^fA,ty 
 etXtzs-zs-ct,. 
 
 a- in futures in Tuw, pa, 
 
 j8 in ec?itS^vetv, cAdeCov. 
 
 V. Syncope of 
 
 y in oAi«5, 7v|, <popfA.i^. 
 
 t — uxtcc^i '^otXccct; ; also < subscript ; as, rvufr^q, 
 
 :; — Opuvoi, ^vpetKctro-at , 
 
 VI. Par ag age of 
 
 V to the accusative singular of the 4th of the contracts ; 
 
 as, Aijlav, 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. It changes jj? in the nominative of the 1st declension 
 into ec ; as, Totr/ju, Koftnloi ; and a of the genitive singular into 
 «o ; as, Hpf^eieco. It inserts u in the genitive plural of the first 
 declension ; as, fA.ao'scm, uixf^ifl^uv j and i in the accusative of 
 those ending in oc and s?. 
 
 2. In the dative singular of the 2d, it omits the subscript ; 
 as, Aoy<w ; and changes m of the accusative plural into 0/5. 
 
 3. In the 1st form of contracts, it rejects 5 from the voca- 
 tive singular in ts ; as, l>a>icp<cT£^ AefioT$iV£, 
 
 22 
 
242 Dialects, JEolic. 
 
 4. In the 4tb, it makes the genitive singular in <&;$ ; and 
 the accusative in &'v ; as, G. oc:^-6>^, A, -av. 
 
 It makes of genitive cases a new nominative of another 
 declension, from which it forms its cases ; as, ofyepovlog^ the 
 genitive, it makes a nominative, from which yepovloiq is the 
 dative plural. So fAi\x\^ from fA^^Xxu^^ and T/e$, G. r/«, D. 
 Tio)^ &.C. from the genitive t/vo$, which has sometimes the y 
 [j^'ncopated. 
 
 It changes <r into f in the Gen. Sing, and Ace. of nouns in 
 avr> of the 1st declension, the Nom. Sing, of the 2d, the Nom. 
 and Gen. Sing, of the 3d, the Gen. and Ace Sing, of the 1st, 
 the Gen. of the 2d form of contracts, and the Ace. Plur. of all 
 
 five 3 as, 2d, G. ccperuP, A. ukox^, 3d, N. T'.f^eso^, fryt^Xvr 
 
 foTYio^ G. xpufA.ot.To^ ; Plur. A, wh^oc^. 1st of contracts, G. 
 
 ^S>.SO^y A. kMo^. 2d, G. TToMo^. 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 5. It changes the si of the 2d and 3d Sing of the present 
 indicative active, and of the infinitive, into 73 ; as, rt^W>i5, 
 
 -?5, ->5V. 
 
 6. It annexes ^^ to the 2d persons in y^? ; as, j^s-^ct, rv^]- 
 
 7. It inserts cin futures of the 4th conjugation in Aa;, p&) ; 
 as, reXcrca^ opcta 
 
 8. It changes <t of the penultima of the perfect passive into 
 in the infinitive ; as, f^ef>cop6oci, e<p6opeccu 
 
 9. It changes Zv andav in tlie infinitive of contracts into ctti; 
 anil 0/5 ; as, /ioua , xp^^o^^ • 
 
 10. It gives many contracts the form of verbs in ]«,», both 
 with and without a redupHcation ; as, <pi?^iii^(, vix.rjf^i, aAotAj?^^, 
 icKocx^i^i ; hence the 3d plurals otKevlt, (ptXevli, Imperf. e<^'t>im ; 
 and participles present, vo£/$, -roisi^^ &cc. 
 
 1 1 . It changes ??, in the present of verbs in f^.i from «iy, into 
 cci ; from sa into £, doubling ;«. ; as, ysXatf^t, yeXxtg^ ys^^xi, &c. 
 
 12. It often changes the short into the long vowel in these 
 rerbs ; as, rt^-ijlov^ 'r,usv, riSrPj^ crjy.Ot^ h^a^i, erLOr^:A.y^^. 
 
 13. In (py.fJLi it makes the 3d singular (potli^ and the 3d plu- 
 ral (f'attrt, 
 
 Writers. 
 JilccevSy Sappho. 
 
j; 
 
 Dialects. Bbeotic. 243 
 
 BCEOTIC. 
 Under the JEolic is comprehended the Ba:otic Dialect, 
 which has the following distinct peculiarities t 
 It changes 
 
 /3 into ^ ohxoii. 
 
 y j3 ^oci*^ for y^v'/?. 
 
 y^ I i;«v, ii|'>6^/ ,t Perf. Active. 
 
 € A£vo/t<.c<J£v, y added. 
 g ^ ia)v. 
 
 ^v cta-t eilotTi,] 1st Aor. Act. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. It inserts tru in the 3d plural of the imperfect and both 
 aorists indicative active. 
 
 Common. Boeotic. 
 
 And in the imperfect of contracts ; as, 
 Common. Boeotic. 
 
 e(pi>^H \ -V, ■ . (Txv, 
 
 2. It sometimes makes the 3d plural of the 1st aorist in 
 
 U,Tl ; as, STV^CCTt, 
 
 3. It sometimes makes the 3d plural of the perfect in «y ; 
 
 as* relv^ccv^ 7!r£(pptKocv. 
 
 4. It makes the 2d aorist imperative active in op like the 
 
 1st ; as, TVSS--OV, 'ulo. 
 
 ♦ The » which the Doric chans^es into st, the Bmolic does not charge 
 into ii'-i and, on the contrary, what the ^Bteoiic ctianges into «i, the Dor- 
 ic does not change into a \ as, '^tTy, Doric aS^u^ never ««^y, Boeotic ; 'y:fcoiCy 
 Bcp.ofic iif>a:i?, but not apang^ Doric. So Hort. Adonidis, Aldus. 1496. 
 P. 209. But a/iaiA occurs in Pindar, Ode 3, Strophe 1. 
 
 ■f i^cme ^ranamarians make this the perfect by changing » into f ; 
 others, the 1st aorist, by changing av inio 3t^/, 
 
»•« 
 
 roettc Dialect. 
 5. In the optative active, it changes e of the 3d plural int« 
 
 Common. Boeotic. 
 
 TV 
 
 
 e. In the 3d plural of both the aorists passive, and of the 
 imperfect and 2d aorist active df verbs in |t^/, it syncopates 
 cTflf, shortening the preceding long vowel ; as, 
 
 Boeotic. 
 
 -fV. 
 
 -ev. 
 -ov. 
 
 7. It changes t) in the penultima of verbs in ft/, from ta 
 into n ; and uses the Ionic reduplication ; as, n&eif^i, '2irs(pt^ei- 
 
 No writers extant ; nor would this Dialect have been 
 known, nor the Cretan, Spartan, Macedonian, Tarentine, 
 PamphyHan, and others, had not writers occasionally intro- 
 duced them ; as, in Aristophanes, we fmd a Boeotian woman 
 speaking in her own Dialect. 
 
 POETIC DIALECT. 
 
 1. The Poets often double a vowel or diphthong; as, 
 (iovtho<i for ^dTihq ; (poa<; for ^a(; ; Uer^aro for Ilereaf, from Usreag ; 
 ;|f^««tv^5v for £^s<pxv6£Vj from £)c<pcctv&t ; yvaact for yva)(rt ; ye^^oaV' 
 7f5 for yeAA;v7f5, from ysXota ; xpottuivof for xpccivu ; o8 for '« ; 
 o,««iio$ for o]tteio$ ; ff<^f for eizre, Ei is sometimes repeated for 
 ?} or >i ; and f for / ; as, e^sm for «|!j$ ; ^juJ'f/ for t^JV/ ; r/jj for 
 
 T/. 
 
 2. I is often inserted to form a diphthong ; as, utehg for 
 
 y.clog ; ««t for ass ; 9rot/jfit< for Trccpec ; f/itf/o for f^tteo, Ionic, for 
 
 3. A short vowel is often put for its corresponding long 
 vowel or diphthong ; as, ^epo^ for ^tjpoi \lLponoui for Kpavtuve^ ; 
 arpizros for Arpi'sra^, 
 
 4. A consonant is sometimes doubled ; as, yroXetcKvi for | 
 7s-o>iSKVi 5 i^it^o-oi; for fcfer«5 ; and on the contrary, when a con-j 
 sonant is doubled, one of them is often removed : as, oh^ev^ 
 for oi'vcTevg ; A^^P^w^ for AA^/Mft^s, 
 
Dialects of the Pronouns, 
 
 245 
 
 5. The last syllable of some words is removed by Apo- 
 cope, Nouns in the neuter ; as, (^a; for ^a^f^ot ; aXipi for ucA- 
 <pi%y ; icp( for xptfA^vov^ and ^jA for jjAos. «^«< from the second 
 person of verbs ; as, '^iretv for Trotvo-oci ; S'wcc for ^vvoltui. h 
 from datives in /J'^ ; as, Qeri for ^fr^J"/ ; rpoTrt for rpozrth. 
 
 6. They make nouns indeclinable by adding pi to the 
 nominative of parisyllabic nouns, and to the genitive of im- 
 parisyllabics, rejecting v and a- from the terminations j as, 
 
 Neuters of the 1st of the contracts reject o only from the 
 genitive; as, o/>fo?, spi(r0i. To the Attic genitive in a; they 
 add ; as. Gen. Evyeaa for Evyseo, 
 
 7. They form the dative plural from the singular, by 
 changing t into eo-t or eo-a-t ; as, t;pai, rpaeci, or r^pa/eo-o-t^ and 
 change oiv into oiiv in the dative dual. 
 
 8. The termination of the 2d declension is often given 
 to nouns in the 3d ; and that of the 3d to nouns of the 1st 
 and 2d, especially in the dative ; as, yepovron for ye pHO't ; '^xp. 
 Bfif^ocToi^ for '7rt»p$7}f/.ocTt j aAx/ for x^tcv] j Ocf^tyt for uT/ntivi 3 "ZTxpBevi 
 foT 7rup$£vaj ; KXetho-i for K^u^cig. 
 
 9. They change Barytons into verbs in ft/ ; as, s^zf^t, fipi- 
 &7)fA.i, from €x<»^ ^ptdof, 
 
 10. From regular verbs in at are formed, by the Poets, 
 verbs defective in u6ea, e6u, na^ virTu^ v^a>^ <><«*', aa*^ I*/, ryu^ 
 T&cOy «•»«, c-23-«y, c-A», v6a, vTCAf^ 6f(raf, uttm^ uQu^ cooo. These are 
 often formed from the future ; as, <p/o-frf, Imper. from atroi^ 
 Fut. of (Piou. 
 
 11. The termination /r^c•«MS changed into r^on ; as, /itf^ 
 cTAi for f^e^tccTu I J from fJLthocu. 
 
 DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS, 
 
 Sino;ular. 
 
 N. 
 
 Ionic. 
 
 Doric. 
 { eyavi] 
 1 cyeov 
 J eyavyoc 
 \ iyaya. 
 
 iEolic. 
 Bceotic, 
 eyav la 
 
 ic<}yct 
 
 iavya 
 
 Poetic, 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 
 5 ^i^^ 
 
 ifuv 
 
 ( €f4,£(C. 
 
 A. 
 
 
 . 5 ^'^^ 1 
 
 ' 
 
 
246 
 
 N. A. 
 G. D. 
 
 Dialects of the Pronouns. 
 
 Ionic. 
 
 -\ 
 
 CO 10 
 
 creo 
 
 vuse<; 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Doric. 
 
 ^olic. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 UfliV 
 
 
 -\ 
 
 ■! 
 
 Singular. 
 
 TV 
 
 rvyci 
 
 [ Teoto 
 
 roi,riv,Teiif 
 
 re 
 
 ru 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Uflf^i 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 UfJLfA.1 
 UfA,f4.0tg 
 
 ^ UfA.lA.eCSV 
 I Uf4.iV 
 < UfAfJUV 
 (uf4.f^l 
 i OtfA.fA.US 
 I Uf4.£ 
 (^UfAfAe 
 
 
 VfAfJLg 
 
 vfAfAeg 
 
 •i 
 ■\ 
 
 VfA.fA.m 
 
 vfA.fA.eav 
 
 VfA.fA.(V 
 VfA.fU 
 
 UfA.fA.Ui 
 VfA.fA.i 
 
 Poetic. 
 
 voi, 
 va'iv. 
 
 r.fA.el6)V, 
 
 ■I 
 ■I 
 
 ir£io6e^. 
 
 <r£o6£v. 
 
 crekv. 
 
 rtv 
 
 vfiem. 
 vfietm. 
 
Dialects of the Pronouns. 
 
 247 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 N.A. I 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 N.A. 
 G.D. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 Ionic. 
 
 is 
 
 
 OJ. 
 Singular. 
 Doric. -^olic. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 - I 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Article.! 
 
 Tea) 
 
 TO), 
 
 reci 
 
 Teat 
 
 ru, 
 
 ret 
 
 recv 
 
 ret^ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 reofv 
 
 TeOtG-t^TTlO'l 
 
 Plural. 
 
 rejt; 
 
 Tft;^, id^ 
 
 G-^iS, 
 
 \ GiptV, 
 
 T«/<V, 
 
 
 The Dialects, which by some are annexed to the relative 
 ;$, by others to the relative oo-7/5 belong properly to Ho?, used 
 
 for oC/;$. 
 
 ♦/M/y and v/v are both singular and plural, and of all genders. — See Do- 
 ric Dialect, Obs. 8. 
 
 t To every case of the article, the Attics add the particles cTg and yih 
 also >6 to the pronouns «^a>, c-y, ^c, &c. 
 
248 
 
 Dialects of the Verb Substantive eif^i. 
 
 From oTog comes regularly the genitive ©ry, I. orecj, D. 
 oTev, orleo, F,cr}ev • Dat. orat, I. orsojy P. or]ecf} -, Piur. Gen. 
 tf'r^yy, I. orgav ; Dat. orotic I. orsotiy oTsotTi. k^trcb and k^la, are 
 used by the Attics for kmu,, 
 
 DIALECTS OF THE VERB SUBSTANTIVE «.u/. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present Tense* 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 A. 
 I. 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 A. 
 I. 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 
 tfJLfJLt 
 
 n 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 -\ 
 
 
 3 
 
 su<r(ri. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 ^5 
 
 ^56 fJjC"^^ fJJV 
 
 ectis 
 
 
 
 m* 
 
 eo-u-av. 
 
 Futh 
 
 io-ei 
 
 
 iG'TOf/.Xl 
 
 c so-a-vj eFO-elut 
 
 ( iTCtOH 
 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Present Tense, 
 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 A. 
 P. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iotq 
 
 eot 
 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 Present Tense, 
 
 etptsv tilt tin.] 
 
 ♦ See «-* syncopated in the Attic Dialect. Obs, 27. 
 t See* syncopated in the Aiiic Dialect. 
 
Dialects of the Verb Substantive etf>n, 249 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present Tense, 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 2 3 
 
 2 3 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 '■?/ 
 
 
 s ^ 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 ^H'i<i 
 
 P. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 Present Tense, 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 efA^evett, ifA^^io^t, 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 Future, 
 
 TjfAe^^ ilfliV 
 
 
 D. 
 
 iVfitriui^ es^eto'&ut. 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 
 Present Tense. I. euy. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 P. €T9'0l4.tHCj, 
 
 
 eaxTi^ 
 
^PPEJVDI^— No. I. 
 
 (From Valpy's Grammar.) 
 
 DIGAMMA. 
 
 THE original Pelasgic, and the old Dialects of Greece, 
 
 admitted few, or no Aspirates. The Diguunma was early 
 
 adopted to prevent the hiatus, which the concurrence of 
 
 Towels would produce.* Aspirates were afterwards inlro- 
 
 * It cannot be ascertained with precision, what was the proBuncia- 
 tion of the Digamma, which in its orii^in had something of the ^u-tural. 
 The general opinion is, that it resembled our VV. — But the frequent 
 recurrence of this sound must have produced an effect so harsh and in- 
 elegant, that our V appears a more natural pronunciation of the ialter 
 DigLimma. This is more congenial to the sound of re fi2;ure F, which it 
 assumed. It was expressed in Latin by V ; and the Italian^, with the 
 other nations, whose language is derived from the Latin, pronouhce 
 that letter in rmo, vento, Sec. like our V. It must have been nearly 
 similar to the sound of B, which was frequently substituted to it, as ia 
 ftrveo, ferbuij as it is still in the Southern Provinces of France. 1 he 
 Latin V was frequently expressed in Greek by B, as, Batppw for 
 P^arro ; and the Greek B was changed in Latin into V, as f6x<fckK vado, 
 V was mdeed sometimes changed into ow as, OutxiA for Vdia. Vini^il- 
 ius was written in Greek ^ipyixioi and OuipyihioQ JSfervii NipCios and 
 Nspcwo/; but the B was not pronounced like W, but Ijke V; and 
 Vossius and other eminent Critics have given the preference to B 
 in those words. To this it should be added, that ov was often pronounc- 
 ed V, and some modern Greeks pronounce ofA'^^ev^v, Vhcjuivuv. '/'he 
 Lacedemonian Dialect, a branch of the^Eolic, always pronounced, ond 
 generally wrote, the Digamma like B. As this letter i? so nearly al- 
 lied to V in sound, and so remote from W, it may be considered as some 
 argument in favor of the former. 
 
 According to these principles, it is probable that the Digamma final 
 or betbre a consonant was pronounced like our F, and before a vowel 
 Kke our V. It has been observed that /iAo-ihivs h pronounced vasilefs. 
 The analogy subsists in French, neuf^ ncuce ; and in English, /^.a//*, halves^ 
 But our pronunciation of the Greek and Latin languaires is so dififerent 
 from what it was in Greece or Rome, that it is perhaps as unnecessary, 
 as it is diificult, to fix the genuine sound of the Digamma, which proba- 
 bly underwent some changes. 
 
 The form of it was at first that of a Gamma rererged, then of 
 
Appendix — No. I. — Digamma, 251 
 
 duced into all the Dialects, except the ^^olic, which adhered 
 to the Digamma. Hence it has preserved the name of the 
 iEolic. It has also with great propriety been called the 
 Homeric Digamma. That great Poet adopted the original 
 forms of the.^olic and Ionic Dialects,* which threw a ma- 
 jestic air of antiquity on his poetry. This ancient form Ho- 
 mer dignifies by the appclhition of the language of the Gods. 
 Virgil, and among the moderns Tasso and Milton, successful- 
 ly imitated that practice by the introduction of antiquated ex- 
 pressions, which removed their language from the common 
 idiom, and cast a venerable gloom of solemnity on their style. 
 To that principle may in a great measure, be attributed the 
 frequent use of the Digamma by Homer. 
 
 The use of the Digamma having been insensibly abolish- 
 ed by the introduction of Aspirates, the transcribers of the 
 works of Homer neglected to mark it, and at length the vesti- 
 ges of its existence were confined to a few ancient Inscrip- 
 tions. The harmonious ear of the Poet had led him sedu- 
 lously to avoid every hiatus of vowels ; but the absence of 
 
 a Gamma : afterwards it asfoimed the ?hape of a double Garomn, F, 
 whence it derives its name. Henre it has pomeTimfe«> b<jen wrilten r^ 
 asratC/oifor YoiCioi ; nS-sv for Ft-S^tv ; rtvTo for Fivtc, iEoI. for svts. Dor. 
 for CATS, from sac ; r^ttTja, gaudeo^ for I a^cTa), ^c. It Iihs frequently been 
 cxprefr.«ed by B ; and sometirrie." too by M, II, *. K, X. 
 
 Used for the original Digamma, T had not the sound of our G, but a 
 Eoft guttural sound, like tlie German g final ifi Jf emg. Indeed the an- 
 cient form of r ua*^ a curve thus, ( , wiiicb became afterwards a mark 
 of the rough aspirate. 
 
 Tiie German i^, commonly expressed by gh in the English language, 
 has shared, m South Britain, the fate M'hich the Digarjima experienced 
 in many parts of Greece, and has been disuf-ed. The lew instances, in 
 which it is sounded, follow the principle of the Digamma F, as cough^ 
 enoughs roughs tough. 
 
 It is not improbable that this guttural sound of r, softened by common 
 use, may have given rise to the opinion that the Digamma was pro- 
 nounced like our W. The difference <jf the two sounds may be exf ra- 
 plififid in the modf-rn word ctvyov^ an egg, which the Greeks pronounce 
 of one ^ gutturalizing one. 
 
 * It is not to be imasfined that Homer adopted arbitrarily the differ- 
 ent Dialects. His was the pure, apjTopriate diction of Verse, the clas- 
 sical language of ancient Greece, the soun-e of all that was sublime an<l 
 beautiful in Poetry, and the model of all succeeding Poets. 
 
252 Jlppendix — No. I. — Digamma. 
 
 the Digamma made him inharmonious and defective. To 
 remove in some degree this difficulty, his Commentators in- 
 terposed the tinal v,*" or the Particles y\ ^\ r* ; but these 
 could only be partially adopted, and were far from display- 
 ing the poet in all the charms of his original style. Num- 
 berless passages remained in their naked deformity, and ex- 
 ercised the conjectural sagacity of Grammarians and Com- 
 mentators. Thus in the verse, in the opening of the Iliad, 
 'Hpuav^ ccvTovg ^i iXapioc revxs x-evveo-o-iv, aware of the inharmo- 
 nious effect of the concurrence of the two f , they cut off the 
 former. The quantity of the latter created another difficulty. 
 Some doubled a, and others assert that e was lengthened be- 
 fore the liquid. But there were passages, to which even 
 these, and similar expedients were inapplicable. A suc- 
 cessful effort was made by the great Bentley to remove 
 these embarrassments — The restoration of the Digamma has 
 at length vindicated the Poet, and displayed the harmonious 
 beauties of his original versification. To give the learner 
 some clue to guide him through these intricacies, an alpha- 
 betical table is added of the words in Homer, which either 
 constantly, or generally, admit the Digamma in the initial 
 Vowel. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 «fi;, 
 
 £iKe)^i^ 
 
 fxjjAcs, 
 
 uy6f, 
 
 } to 
 
 «ct;5"itAf«$. 
 
 ei?Mpj 
 
 fX3?T/, 
 
 uywfA.ty 
 
 ^ break. 
 
 
 n^e^^ 
 
 sxvpog, 
 
 a^ejy 
 
 
 E. 
 
 etXvu, 
 
 e>cav, 
 
 OtM^iy 
 
 
 K 
 
 £iXv<Paa)y 
 
 eAfog, 
 
 «A'$, 
 
 
 ectp. 
 
 f<A», 
 
 €?H(r(!-CJ, 
 
 U>^af4.t, 
 
 
 *^v«v. 
 
 Uf^, 
 
 £>^7riiy 
 
 ecvu^i 
 
 
 i^Eifid^ 
 
 etpya, 
 
 fA^tfj, 
 
 ecv^o&va, 
 
 
 e^ef, 
 
 eiPa, 
 
 eA<y, 
 
 MpOClOiy 
 
 
 e^voq. 
 
 eiCTKOf, 
 
 eXap^ 
 
 etp^ay 
 
 
 iiha^ 
 
 txoiS-ev^ 
 
 eA<tf,tf/dy, 
 
 ctpvii 
 
 
 n^o», 
 
 etcug, 
 
 fVfTOi, 
 
 ccpi^ofi 
 etpveg, 
 
 
 £tKOO-t^ 
 
 exM^ex;, 
 
 fWV^/, 
 
 
 eiK6), to be like, Ikxto^j 
 
 
 ♦ They have even, by the addition of v, altered the Case, and conse- 
 quently the sense, of some words. An instance of tb's appears in the 
 last Book of the Odyssey, 312, where vJjv ia>\^ii has been put for ^'^t 
 
Appendix — No I. — Bigammeb, 
 
 253 
 
 spa'a}f 
 iipeo, 
 spr/jpr^.y 
 (ppcjy 
 ipva, to 
 
 t7'7rspc<3 , 
 
 The 
 which i 
 
 e^y, to put on. i^^/5, 
 
 H. fx,e?^rj^^ 
 
 ^«£e, adv. /ov^ci?, 
 
 draw, yjp, tq, 
 
 iJX,^, lO-KUy 
 
 I. i^^p'> 
 
 
 oivoq, 
 cvpov. 
 
 a 
 
 yA|. 
 
 Latin Dialect naturally adopted the iEolic Digamma, 
 it expressed generally by V, as will be seen in the fol- 
 lowing list : 
 
 ccyof^oct^ vagor ; 
 utMv, eevum ; 
 <tA«;r-/;|, vulpes ; 
 «o^vd5, a'i'ernus ; 
 cc;^xioi, achivus ; 
 «<y, vapor ; 
 fitoat, vivo ; 
 /3d£5, boves ; 
 ^0$, divinus ; 
 ei^eof^ video ; 
 ttKxlty viginti ; 
 
 f A(W, volvo ; 
 £f4.af, vomo ; 
 ev^iKoi, vindico ; 
 evelot, veneti ; 
 tvlepeg, venter ; 
 spx,^, vergo ; 
 ipoi, servus ; 
 spa), verto ; 
 £<^dr,q, veslis ; 
 io-Trepe^y vespera; 
 £5-/tfc, Vesta ; 
 
 f7«$, vetus ; 
 ^f, ver ; 
 ^|«$, viscus ; 
 idv, viola ; 
 is , vis ; 
 ta)i ivi ; 
 xxa, cavo J 
 KEpuo^y cervus ; 
 xAf/$, clavis ; 
 ycopoq, corvus ; 
 Afltiog, laevus ; 
 
 i 
 
 ♦ Aiijrments often retain the Digamma of the verbs, as soxrrat from 
 thTTuo, aiTToi from ^^a, &:('. Many words take a double Digamma, one 
 before ihe augment, the other before the verb, 2iS vujCJi [i^ciKcg^ iTntla,^ 
 
 In m-^ny comp'^unded words the Digamma is placed in the middle, as 
 ^pc(iiSa). ct(&:K)ig. KAKoif^ycs^ Sec. Ii is mserted in several simple words, as 
 otic vAlV), &;c. * 
 
 It has been before obf-ervrd, that / and u were substifued to the Di- 
 gamma. Henec to Ar^sfJw? succeeded A-rfnihc ; *oA^A[csy Ay^aicc. Thus 
 ^4,-, afo) made fitfao) in the future, changed into ciiwa); 4^a^ 4*l'« into 
 
254 
 
 Appendix — No. I. — Digamma, 
 
 .^xpT!, larva ; 
 ?ieif>i , levis ; 
 ^va, lavo ; 
 >it/A», solvo ; 
 f^uAj, moveo ; 
 ^«A3j, malva ; 
 fAuoooi Mavors ; 
 vctiog, naevias ; 
 yavi, na\is ;* 
 
 viog, novus ; 
 y/x«, vinco ; 
 olKog, vie US ; 
 ohog, vinum ; 
 e/$, OVl? ; 
 eA<y, VolvO ; 
 o;^A6$. VulgUS ; 
 
 ow, voveo ; 
 TTuvpoi, parvus j 
 
 crptof^ pnvo ; 
 ^'/<i>, rivus ; 
 cKcttog^ saevus ; 
 rci6fg, pavo ; 
 eJAjj, sjlva ; 
 v&f^ uvesco ; 
 
 a)oy, ovum, &C. 
 
 Sometimes by other letters, among which are B ; as, ^vu, 
 dubium ; f^oo^^ morbus ; paij, robur ; Ccj^ uber. 
 
 C ; as, erepcc^ cetera. 
 
 F; as, uyopx, forum; of^tP^o^, famulus; «t/Ao5, felis j /vfs, 
 funes 5 pi'y€g. frigus ; Ca, fluo. 
 
 R ; as, /3o>5, Boreas ; >tAe/<y, celebro ; Ja^jjo?, hilaris ; f^x^, 
 murex ; /ttovcatyv, musarum ; wo^ nurus, &c.t 
 
 In English the Digamma h,u become W ; as, vfos- new ; 
 iiinum, wine ; vicus, wick ; Jiistula, whistle ; vespa^ wasp ; 
 via, way. It is pronounced, without being written, in the 
 word one, 
 
 V ; as, Kotos, navey kc. 
 
 * Notuf was probably pronounced nafs ; hence navis. Thus riau^oc; 
 pafros^ was transposed into parvus. 
 
 + The Di£:amma waR a principal agent in the formation of tenses in 
 Latin : thus, from amo^ aniai, wa? formed amai'i ; from deleo,, delei, de- 
 levi; (rom cup 10, cupii, cu'piri; frotts audio, audiu audivi. Frofu amo, 
 amavo^ we have amabOy from mnneo^ moneho. Perhaps this analoo^y may 
 be carried to plural cases in bus. This termination was formerly more 
 extensire ; hence we find in Plautus, audibu^ hibusj kc. 
 
APPFXBTX—No. II. 
 
 THE SUBSCRIPT i 
 
 IS found among JVouns, in 
 
 I. The Dative Singular of the 1st and 2d Declension. 
 
 II. The Dative Sin.(ular, and Genitive and Dative Dual of 
 the oth of the Contracts. 
 
 III. Adjectives contracted from r.sn ; as, ri^si<i, '"'^Ji?. 
 
 Amoni]^ Verbs in 
 
 IV. The 2d and 3d Singular Subjunctive Active ; as, rt^^r?- 
 -»K»i :* retained after Contraction by Verb? in a« and eof ; as, 
 rifA.'''AYi<i'Ui . rifjL-uvi-^ ; (piX-tr^ rjq, iptX-iTi-v] : consequently fouiid 
 in tiiose tenses (4' the subjuu. tiv^ active of verbs in f^i^ which 
 have the samej formation with that of the contracted form of 
 verbs in oca., eat, ind oa. 
 
 V. Other contracted Terminations of V^erbs in ua> without 
 distinction of Voices where < occurred before contraction ; 
 
 as, ^a-6tf;g-^i, /3o-(JM'5-y<. 
 
 VI. The 2d Singular of Tenses of the Indicative Mood 
 in oA<^<, and of the Subjunctive in (^fJLUt^ Passive and Middle 
 Voices ; as, rvzsP-ofjLott-yi^ rvTsr'l'UfA.tt >j : retainer! after Contrac- 
 tion by Verbs in oia and iu ; as, T'l^-ccri-u,^ ^/A-i^ ^. 
 
 VII. The 2d Sing, of Tenses in the Subjunctive Passive 
 and Aliddle of Verbs in jm./ ; as, 
 
 Present. 2d Aorist. 
 
 Ua> -cc fS -« 
 
 ^(^a -9 ^6) -(^ 
 
 The Subjunctive in the three Voices corresponding with 
 that of the contracted form of Verbs in uu, ««, and eat, under 
 the exceptions already noticed. 
 
 ♦ All ihe tenses of the subjunctive mood active derive their terhiin- 
 ations from tho5e of the present indicative, chanj^ino: the phort into 
 their respective long vowels, dropping v and subscribing t v.hcn they 
 •ccur i e. g. 
 
 Indie. tuTrl-ct, nc u ; jtsv, «tov ; c//..n', sts, «o-/. 
 Subj. TVTrl-oot >?c ») ; «T6y, «tov ; cu^iv, «t2, ce7t, 
 
 t Except that verbs in oefxt make Ihe 2d and 3d persons sins^uiar in 
 »?, w ; which is indeed a more natural contrsLCtion of owe, cw, than ok, c7, 
 nsed by verbs in aco ; and that the 2d aorist varies from the present, ^nd 
 eons^equently from the contracted foroQ in verbs derived from «t*j by 
 assuming w instead of ct. 
 
JPPEJVDJX-No. III. 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 The article was originally a relative pronoun, and as swcli 
 was used by Humer and others in the sense ofuvloq or eKeivoq. 
 O yot'P ^ocTi^^yji ^oXcoQiiq vUG-ov ccvQC c-jpurov apfTe TfLot,yj-/t^ . ^ he being 
 enraged with the king, raised a destructive pestilence among 
 the people. Iliad, A. 9. 'o yup 7}X9e, for he came. 11. 
 THN d^£ iyca sk Xvxea^ but I will not release her. 29. 
 
 When the antecedent is so situated, that the relation of the 
 pronoun to it is obscure, the antecedent is repeated after the 
 pronoun, to remove the obscurity : in this case the pronoun 
 takes the name of the article. Thus, Iliad, A. 33, ai e<potr\ 
 s^hitrsv 'o— Here it would be doubtful whether the pronoun 
 *0 referred to the person who spake, or to some one men- 
 tioned before. To remove this ambiguity, the Poet goes on, 
 i^hi^^ey 'o yeoaiv, the old man feared, viz. Chryses, who had 
 been before introduced : line 11. 
 
 The article o differs from the relative oq in two respects 
 only. 
 
 1. It has so obscure a reference to its antecedent, as to re- 
 quire the repetition of it, to remove the obscurity. 
 
 2. Its antecedent is more extensive ; and from this cir- 
 cumstance, in part, arises the obscurity of its reference. 
 
 The antecedent to an article may be any thing which has 
 become familiar to the mind, either by being mentioned be- 
 fore, or implied in what has been said, or from its importance 
 or notoriety. In the case of the article, as of the relative oc^ 
 the antecedent does not always precede the pronoun, but 
 often follows it. 
 
 Between the article and its noun, there is always under- 
 stood the participle of existence, 6fv, ii(rx, ov. 'o ^cca-ixgy^, is 
 the same with 'o ^v (ioccrtXEvg, he that is kmg. 
 
 The participle is sometimes expressed ; as oi luLciXio-lcc ulioi 
 ONTES, y~icic-]sc7rXiiTii(ri, the most worthy are commonly the 
 least wealthy. 
 
 A participle differs from a verb by assuming what 
 verb asserfs. In the proposition 'o ocyoi$ei ^afKparv^ 
 
Appendix — No. III. — Article, 25^ 
 
 ^t>idcrc^eti the good Socrates philosophizes ; o uyotSo? is 
 equivalent to 'o &>v ccyoiO^g, he being good, viz. Socra- 
 tes, philosophizes. Here it is tirst assumed that Socrates 
 is good, and then an assertion is made concerning him. But 
 XaxpxTfii eo-it ccyoc^oq asserts that Socrates, is a good man ; the 
 thing assumed Avhen the article was used. 
 
 The article then, taken with the word which follows it, 
 always contains an assumptive proposition. To determine, 
 therefore, when the article may be used, it is necessary only 
 to determine when we are authorized to make this assumptive 
 proposition. May we always assume that the thing which we 
 are speaking of, is known to the hearer ? Certainly not ; 
 for then the article might be used without necessity or 
 meaning. But when may this assumption be made ? When- 
 ever that, which we are about to mention, has been before 
 presented to the mind ; for we are authorized to assume the 
 existence of that to be known, which has already been before 
 the mitid. If in discourse I have mentioned a horse, and 
 there is occasion to mention him again, 1 may assume that his 
 existence is known, and shall therefore say 'o Itttto^^ which 
 is equivalent to '^o d»v iTr-Toi , a horse before mentioned, and 
 therefore assumed to be known It is equally plain that I 
 could not say 'o l-zs-zro^ on the first mention of the horse, for 
 this would be to assume that which is not known, and there- 
 fore not conceded. 
 
 It remains only to point out in what cases the assumption 
 may be made. 
 
 I. Rcnezvcd Mention, 
 
 1. When a person or thing recently mentioned, is spoken 
 of again, the article is inserted, whether the saine word is 
 used, or a synonymous one, Xen. Cyrop. iTrott^iv^y} yef^^jv £v 
 U£pa-a;v vof^ti — ov7oi ^e ^okHti 'oI NOMOI ccP^i^ecdoct-, he was edu- 
 cated according to the Persian laws — and those laws seem to 
 begin, &c. Xen. Mem. III. 13. xoAao-<«vTo$ nm ta-xopojg 
 AKO AOJQO'H. r.psro ri x^?.£7rctivoi T<2t SipccTrovn^ and some one 
 beating his attendant severely, he enquired the reason of 
 abusing the servant. 
 
 2. The article is inserted before a word specifying the 
 known state or qualities of some thing just mentioned 3 as, 
 1>ci)Kpo6rr,s 'o Ahvotio^^ Socrates the Athenian ; fy<w 'o af^apr^- 
 ^05, I confessedly a sinner. 
 
 It is not always supposed, that the state or qualities {described ar© 
 
258 Appendtx^Jso, III. — Jlrticte, 
 
 known to the person addressed, but only that they may be generallr 
 known. 
 
 3. The article is inserted before a noun, when the exis- 
 tence of that, which the noun denotes, has been implied in 
 the i^receding part of the sentence, though not expressed in 
 form. 
 
 iEschin. cont. Ctes. § 5Q, ovrog nPOAOYS roi? TroXtfJuot^ 
 Kvu/^aiov (pvyxi eymro^ THN x,p{(!''v ^^' *v7rof^£(vui , he having 
 treacherously surrendered Nymphaium to the enemy, be- 
 caiie a fugitive, not waiting the trial. Here r>jv jcpta-i^ is the 
 trial, implied as the necessary consequence of the treache- 
 
 ry- . ^ 
 
 Ibid. § 34. oTecy rt ■^'EYAQNTAI, otoPi^lu. y-at olo-u(Pyi TrstpuvTcci 
 Pisystv 0o^ii,u.syoi TO fAey;^^^^, when thej lie, they seek indefinite 
 and obscure expressions to avoid the reproach. TO e>i£7;^ov 
 refers here to the reproach implied as the necessary conse- 
 quence of their falsehood. 
 
 The clearness of Die iriiplication will be very different in different cases. 
 In many instances it exists only in the mind of the speaker : and is au- 
 thorized, only because it will appear just, when the sentence is conclud- 
 ed. 
 
 II. KAT' EHOXHN. For Distinction, 
 There is a multitude of ideas dormant in the mind, which 
 are perfectly familiar to it, though not constantly the subjects 
 of its contemplation. A reference may be made to these, 
 with the same certainty that the relation will be perceived, 
 as if it were to something recently mentioned, or actually 
 present to the mind. 
 
 1. The article is used, kut* e^ox^iv^for distinction, when it 
 refers to some object, of which there are many, but none is 
 so well known as the one referred to. 
 
 Thucyd. II. 69. 'H vor«< i-zs-eiceiro otf^a. y,m *0 TroAf^es, i. e. 
 the celebi^ated plagve, and the Peloponnesianwar. 
 
 "O TVat^rrA, f f omer ; *b (icitriXevf, the king ; gj ^0^/5, the state. 
 
 2. The article is used tcur* ^l^^^jv, /or distinction, before 
 the names of the Deity j and of the great objects of nature, 
 as the Sun, Moon, Sea, Earth* Heaven, &c. 
 
 Demos, de f .Isis Leg. are TON ^A/ov y.o-^wovrd ot TocvTx TroiavTf^i 
 
 UTi THN y^jv. They who do these things, regard neither the 
 sun nor the earth. 
 
 3 To this head may be referred the case of Monadic 
 XovMs^ i. e. those which represent persons or things wbicll' 
 
Appendix — No. Ill — Article. 26d 
 
 exist singly ; or of which, if there be several, only one, from 
 the nature of the case, can be the subject of discourse. 
 
 Lys. Orat. Gr. vol. v. 139. Ekko-^u^ TAS evfiu^ EiTy^xOcy et? 
 THN yuvoctKmtrivy having knocked at the gate, he entered the 
 women's apartment. 
 
 Demos, de Cor § 53.- "o* f^zvUpvrstvstqTVlN ^ii?i>:v etcccP^av 
 f/$ TO liaXsvTr^piov. rifjciiq ^* eis THN £)cK}i/,<nacv sTrofisina-ds. The 
 rulers called tlie council to tiie council chamber ; we went 
 to the assembly. 
 
 Before we can know a noun to be monadic^ we must know to what it 
 belongs, or with what it is connected. A lock, or latch, considered by 
 itself, is not monadic ; but when a door is mentioned, these nouns are 
 recognized as monadic, because only one lock and one lat( h is found up- 
 on it. When a noun is thus determined to be monadic, there is no diffi- 
 culty in admiiting the assumpti' not its existence. 
 
 4,JLInder tiie same division may be classed those numerous 
 instances, in which the article has the sense of the possessive 
 pronoun. 
 
 Demos, de Cor. § 59. a^t raj zrurpi Kut rri uijrpt IU.OVOV 
 y£y£V7Ji7-6ut^ a.>^7\A ycxt r>j 'rccrpth, that he is born, not for his fath- 
 er or his mother only, but for his country. uP^ysa rxv Kc(px?^xv, 
 my head aches. 
 
 5. The article is frequently prefixed to adjectives of the 
 neuter gender, when they are used to indicate some attribute 
 or quaUty in its general abstract idea. 
 
 Plato, vol. 1, p. 11. Af7f (Jjj rt (pr^q £ivxt TO cV/dv kui TO 
 uvcTtov, Tell me, what do you say to be justice and injus- 
 tice. 
 
 No ideas are more familiar to the mi.nd than these. 
 
 In cases where the article is used ^*t' sj'>;t«v, its reference is some- 
 times more obscure than in instances of renewed mention ; yet its inser- 
 tion is explicable on the same principles. 
 
 III. Correlatives. 
 
 Correlatives are words between which there exists a mu* 
 tual relation. 
 
 1. When words are in regimen, if the governing noun has 
 the article, the one governed has it likewise 
 
 Plat. Thrast. p. 71. ^7 THN o-af^cc-rm llt^, the state of bo- 
 dies. 
 
 To this rule there are sgme exceptions, but these are chiefly cases 
 where the article is omitted, according to the rules for omission to be 
 givpn aftrrwards. 
 
 2. When partitives govera a gefiitivej the article is pre- 
 ixed to that genitive. 
 
26© .%?enJ/x— No. lU'-^Article, 
 
 Ts-oXXoi TQN c-o^<wv, many of the wise. 
 
 The genitive following the partitive, denotes the class to which the 
 partitive helongs. 
 
 The rule is sometinies violated, especially in the case of avbpocTrm 
 Some partitives, as t;?, oo-o?, cannot fr m their nature admit the article ; 
 and some only in particular cases, a^ ttokkoi^ hg, Thcj will be noticed 
 hereafter. 
 
 3. The article is used with /ttfv and Jf , when things are op-^ 
 posed to each other, so as to have a mutual relation. 
 
 |ttev, the one 3 <Je, the other. 
 
 ro |it£v ccvor,rov, re JV (^uvikov • the one foolish, the other 
 ma i. 
 
 f n the same manner, c/c and Inpos, 
 s Us, the one ; irepo^^ the other. 
 
 Hypothesis. ^ 
 
 In the preceding cases, the article with its predicate re- 
 calls some familiar idea. In this, it is used for no such pur- 
 pose, but merely for the sake of assumption. The article 
 used hijpothetkally, denotes that every individual is intended, 
 to whom the predicate can be applied. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. §71. Trovi^poi O (rt^5c««p«vr;$ aj<f/, the syco- 
 phant is always evil. This is equivalent to 'o ^v (rvKo(Pxv7i,g^ 
 whoever is a sycophant. 
 
 Xen. Mem. .3. 1. <i ^n tov ev cr] pccrT^yrjO-avrcc e^uv^ which it 
 become? a good general to have, i. e. every good general. 
 
 Had cru«.oe*vT«c, in the first instance, been recently mentioned, we 
 should inlier ihat 'O a-vncx^ctvrnq was the renewed mention ; but a?? the 
 context stands, we clearly perceive (hat'O vvkcipclvthq must mean every 
 person, of whom o-jKop^xv^tas can be predicated* 
 
 In the same manner, the article is used with the plural, 
 to denote whole classes of beings. 
 
 Plat, de Isid. p. 264. ;ifyd/t<,£vov TOYS ©fof^ (ppapslv, ao-yrep 
 '01 Ht;v:$ TOTS ccvdpcoTrni^ saying that the Gods guard men as 
 dogs do. 
 
 The article, then, is subservient to two purposes, re- 
 newed mention^ and hypothesis. 
 
 Renewed mention, when the predicate is familiar to the 
 mind from having been mentioned before, or from its im- 
 portance or relations, and the article is inserted on its repe- 
 tition. 
 
 Hypothesis, when the noun to which the article is prefix- 
 ed is intended to embrace all of the class to which it belongs. 
 
 To some one of the heads above mentioned, it is thought 
 every insertion of the article may be referred. 
 
Appendix — No. III. — Ai^cler or tl'e ^^^ 
 
 Omissions of the Article. ^ ^\^ - - 
 
 From the most remarkable msertwns\^^^ipfi& 
 be right to proceed to its most remarkablewitt$5^>; ^liM to 
 show that they too may be accounted for on the principles 
 laid down. It has been shown, that in all cases the parti* 
 eiple of existence, m^ ova-ot,^ ov, is understood between the arti- 
 cle and its predicate : whence it will follow, that the exis- 
 t€7ice of the person or thing, to which the article is prefixed^ 
 is alwa}?s supposed. 
 
 1. In propositions which merely affirm or deny existence^ 
 the name of the person or thing of which existence is affirm- 
 ed or denied is without the article. 
 
 iTioci fA,£v EIPHNH, there shall be peace. 
 Psalm liii. 1. ax, eel t e£02, there is no God.* 
 In such instances, to insert the article would be to assume the exis- 
 tence before ii is asserted^ and thus render the proposition useless. 
 
 2. The article is omitted before nouns preceded by parti- 
 ciples and verbs substantive, and those of naming. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. § 23. AITIOS EIMI tov ^oXsm^ov, I am 
 guilty of the war. 
 
 iEsch. cont. Ctes. § 62. nPOAOTAS ra;v 'E>^^y,ym n^i (iota- 
 rotpxoti ey-'CcXsire, he called the leaders of the Boeotians the be- 
 trayers of Greece. 
 
 Ibid. 43. rc^.ft»)v ev rcct^ tTritrJcXut^ ypot0iiy cri AESHOTHS 
 E2T1N TA»v c&v&oco^uv, who dared to write in his letters that he 
 is king of men. 
 
 In these inptnnces> the words in capitals would have the article kut* 
 «^o;:^«v, were it not forbidden by the verb, whicli is used to indicate, as 
 hitherto unknown, the very truth, which tlie presence of the! article 
 would imply as known or supposed already. Hence, in the passaa^e 
 from ^schines, had the Persian monarch written oTt 'O J^ia-Trcrnc f<r7/, 
 the sense would have been, that he was the person recognized, (for here 
 hypothesis has no place,) to be the lord of mankind. But he knew that 
 the Greeks had not thus recognized him. 
 
 3. After verbs of appointing, creating, choosing, &c. the 
 noun expressive of the appointment, choice, ^c. is without 
 the article. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. § 59. 'HFEMON kcai KYriOS 'Hpege 
 <I)/A/zr?D-fl$ u-zTcivraiv^ Philip was chosen ruler and governor of 
 all. 
 
 * This is a different case from EN 20I iyli o e^o?, for here the existence 
 &f God is assumed. 
 
2G£ Appendix — No. III. — Article, 
 
 Isai. V. 20, oi TieEiNTES ro <r/-or«4 <I)i2E, Koti to (^o'sSKOTOS, 
 who put darkness tor ii^^ht, and light for darkness. 
 
 The article could not be prefixed to any of these uouns, bec:«upe the 
 existence ot the appointment^ Sec. i? not of a nature to be reco^nized^ 
 being now first declared i and hypothesis, as before, being oui ol the 
 quesli:>n, 
 
 4. Nouns in apposition^ not explanatory of the essence of 
 the preceding noun, but of the end to which the person or 
 thing intended is affirmed to be subservient, are without 
 the article. 
 
 Demos, de Cor. § 15. rcf) is-po^orri STMBOTAa^ ;^f>j-a:{, he 
 uses the traitor as a counsellor. 
 
 In such ca^^.s. iivctt or av may be supplied. 
 
 5. in exclusive propositions^ where it is intended to ex-j 
 elude universally every individual, the artirle is omitted 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. § 28. a NATS, a TEIaH tjjs -srcXia^ xfj^-j 
 t>;jm.£V775, the city possessing no ships, no walls. 
 
 If Ihi' article had been inserted, it would hnve implied that the exiai 
 fence of ships and walls was either recogniz>^d or c''>n iiiio;rdlly admit- 
 ted ; both oi vvhich are inconsistent with the nature of ( he proposi'ion. 
 
 6. When nouns are in regimen, if the second cannot take 
 the article, the first loses it. 
 
 Herod, lib. iv. p. 153, AEPMA oiv&PaTrn Kott -z^-a^v koh Xu,uooVt 
 the skin of man is fat and shining. 
 
 Here cTf/i/u* would have the article, but it is omitted because ctvBpuiTrit 
 •annot taice it consistently v/ith (he serjse intended to be conveyftfl. 
 
 7. The same principle of correlation will explain wly, 
 when the noun governing is indefinite^ the noun governed 
 without the article. "* 
 
 Plato, vol. V. p. 164. ^i^ocG-KccXov MOYSIKHS, a teacher 
 music. 
 
 Plut. page 99. -^^TXHS yccp ooyoivov ro o*<5yju,a, for the body 
 is an instrument of the mind. 
 
 In these instances, /ucus-iKyt; and 'r^X,*^? would have the article, were it 
 not for the indefinite word preceding. 
 
 Insertions and Omissions combined. 
 
 Having considered the principal insertions and the princi- 
 
 I 
 
 * Many examples will occur, which seem repugnant to tliis canoq 
 The principle, however, requires that the iiovernin^ noun should he ua 
 merely without i\\e article, but also indefinite in sense : for it mai 
 though definite, have lost the article in conformity vvith some rule, v.hic1 
 yet may not require that the o^overned noun sliou'd lone it also. Sff 
 Thucyd. lib. i.$ 2. cT/;* y^tr upirnv TH2, where tt^fT>?v loses its article fi 
 accouat of the preceding preposition. 
 
Appendix—'No. III.— .^Wick. 263 
 
 pal omissions, it will be proper to notice one or two cases of 
 insertion and omission combined, 
 
 1. The subject of a proposition is generally found W^/i the 
 article, and the predicate without it. 
 
 Arist. Anal. Pas. II 3. ayxpeo-li TO t^i^e^ov SXHMA, 
 ah TO o-^iif^ec ElliriEAON. Surlace is not figure, nor tigure 
 surface. 
 
 Plut. de Aud. Poet, p 11. ZnrrAOIAN i^evsivui (p&eyyof^t- 
 v«v THN TFoiYio-iv, nolHSlN h (rr/ao-ccv THn t^caypctcpiu^, that Poet- 
 ry IS painting which speaks ; and painting, Poetry which is 
 silent. 
 
 John i. 1. Kui Sgo^ f}v 'o Aoyog, and the word was God. 
 
 The chief extepiion to this ruie i« in Ihf case oC reciprocating or con- 
 vertible propositions, i. e. those in nhich either word may be the subject. 
 In such propoeitioDS, both the nouns will have the article, or else neith- 
 er. 
 
 Plut. de Plac. Philo?, 1, 3. «<77/ S'i 'O eiog 'O vey?, God is the mind, or, 
 the mind is God. 
 
 Pldto, vol. xi. p. 38. TO ax^eA/ysv iciKiv 'a/utv uveu TO kxXov^ it inter- 
 ests us, that utility should be the great ^ood, or, that the great good 
 should be utility. 
 
 Arist. de hiter. c. 6 KATA*A212€(77/ AUC^Al^l tivg!: ka^a ttvo^. 
 
 2.* When two or more attributives,! joined by a copula- 
 tive, are assumed of the same person or thing, before the 
 first attributive the article is inserted ; before the others it is 
 omitted, 
 
 Plut. Vit Cic. p. 68 'Veoo-Kioi 'O vtos KAI xAjj/jflvo^i^g r» 
 n^yjjv^rcs xyocvocxTBt^ Koscius, the son and heir of the deceased, 
 was grieved. 
 
 Demosth. de Coro. § 27. n^ 'O t^ xoAf< ^eyam, KAI yoct' 
 (pm KAI zirou.rroo'i KAI toivrcH ^nq, he who says, and writes, and 
 acts, atid gives himself to the State. 
 
 Ibid. § 61. *0 crvfjL^ii\o<i KAI (lyirap eyoe^ I, the adviser and 
 orator. 
 
 Philo, 309. 'O Kupiog KAI Qso? ivepyerr,q eo-]<v,the Lord God 
 is a benefictor. 
 
 The article 'O, which precedes the first attributive, ia a representa- 
 tive of the person to whom all the attributives belong. 
 
 ♦ This is the celebrated Rule of Granville Sharp, Esq. 
 
 t By attributives are meant adjectives^ participles, and nouns 8ie:nifi- 
 cant o( character^ relation, or dignity ; such nouns are often intf^rrhang- 
 ed nith adjfc-ives or |)articipies ; as, 'O (6c(jK^(m for 'O iStXiVTn;^ and are 
 therefore similar to them in nature. 
 
264 ' Appendix — No. III. — Article, 
 
 Were it inserted before the remainder, the persons represented by 
 the article thus inserted, must be the same or difi'erent. Dilferenl (hey 
 cannot be by the supposition. If Uie persons denoted by the article be 
 the same, we have the absurdity of rouphng a being to himself. 
 
 When the article is repeated before the several words, they denote 
 difFerf'nt persons. 
 
 D' mopth. de Cor. ^ 56. *0 crv/uCaKcg kai 'O c-i^x-opa^vrnc — S'tetp^^icrt^ the 
 adviber and the sycophant differ. 
 
 Exceptions, 
 Three cla«^ses of nouns are exctpiionsto this rule. 
 
 1. Names of substances, considtrcd as substances ; as, 'O aiQo^ KAI 
 ^pi^o-of, stone and gold. 
 
 2. Proper names ; as, TON Ahi^ctvS'pciV^ KAI $;a/ttcv, Alexander and 
 Philip. 
 
 3 Abstract nouns ; as, 'H ctTruptuv KAI aTrettSva-ictVy want of experi- 
 ence and want of instruction. 
 
 The first sort of nouns are names of substances considered as sub- 
 stances ; for names of s»ibstances may be considered otherwise; and 
 the distinction is important. They are otherwise considered when the 
 name supposes the substance and expresses some attribute : so Ctoz^ 
 pTCD/i, 'nysfAuv, (Toi/Acs, are indeed so far names of substances, that they 
 presuppose a substance ; but their immediate use is to mark some at* 
 tribute of the substance ctvbfia>7rcg^ which is always understood. 1 hey 
 are thus adjectives of invariable aitplication^ being constantly? used of av- 
 Bpa/TTos J whereas common adjectives, as /usxat?, etyA^og, &c. are applica- 
 ble to substances of various kinds. It was, then, to be expected of 
 attributive substantives, that any number of them coupled together 
 might be predicated of an individual represented by a pronoun. But 
 suppose that, instead of these attributive nouns, we introduce others, 
 which express mere substances ; the consequence will follow, (if we 
 attempt to apply the rule.) that substances in tlieir nature distinct and 
 incompatible will be predicated of the same individual, e. g. a/6oc and 
 ^uo-os will both be assumed of 'O^ which is plainly absurd. 
 
 We must be cautious, however, in deternuning that any noun is ex- 
 pressive merely of substance. The word Av«/), man, commonly denotes 
 merely a being ; yet in the passage, 
 
 Avepei efrle, 0tXot, (A.V7](rcc(r&e JV 6iiP(^oq u^y-rj^y 
 
 Be men. my friends, and recal y ur martial spirit, II. Z, 112, avs/Jss is 
 evidently used not as significant merely of substance^ but of characteVy 
 and is therefore in this case an attributive. 
 
 The reason why proper names are excepted, is evident at once ; for it 
 is impossible that John and Thomas^ the names of two distinct persons, 
 should be predicated of an indivicbial. It is obvious, therefore, that in 
 the phrase tov AxfJ^vcfgov xa/ <btKi7r7rov, n-ov is the article of AAffav^T^cv only^ 
 and not of both names ; as would happen, were the principle of the rule 
 intended to apply. 
 
 Nouns, which are the names of abstract ideas, are also excluded, and 
 from a cause not wholly dissimilar ; for. as Locke has well observed, 
 " Every distinct abstract idea is a distinct essence ; and the names that 
 
Appendix — No. III. — Article. 266 
 
 stand for such distinct ideas, are the names of things essentially differ- 
 ent."* It would, therejore, be as contradictory to assume that any 
 quality represented by 'H were at once ctTrufict and ATra^SiUirtA^ as that 
 the same person were both Alexander and Fndip : whence it is imme- 
 diately evident, thai such an assumption could not be intended. Under 
 this head we may class verbs in the infinitive mood, which differ not ia 
 their nature from the names of thecorrespondingj abstract ideas. Thus 
 we read in Plato, vol. xi. p. 13, ^Tfi/ i^ih ti KAI <tiui(rcii : m the n^\t 
 pai'e we have TH/ o^s^t* KAI (tKoif. Tiie two ca^es evidently require 
 the same explanation. Infinitive moods so coupled together, are ex- 
 tremely common. 
 
 The rule likewise is true conversely. 
 
 If two or more attributives^ coupled by Kott^ have the arti- 
 cle prefixed to the first, and not to the otliers, they all belong 
 to the same subject. 
 
 This is plainly the case in all the instances cited above. The only 
 exception, in addition to those mentioned before,| is with regard to 
 plurals. 
 
 A single individual may stand in various relations, and act in divers 
 capacities ; and, consequently, if two such relations or characters be 
 connected by a copulative, and the first be preceded by a pronoun, the 
 reuder will reasonably understand them both of the j^erson repre- 
 sented by that pronoun ; because such is the general Ui^age, and the 
 compliance with it will not involve any contradiction. But this does 
 not happen in the same degree with respect to plurals. Though 9ne 
 individual may act, and frequently does act, m several capacities, it ia 
 not likely that a multitude of individuals should all of them act in the 
 same several rapacities : and, by the extreme improbability that ttiey 
 should be represented as so acting, we may be forbidden to undersiand 
 the second plural attributive of the persons designed in the article pre- 
 fixed to the first, however the usage in the singular might seem to coun- 
 tenance the construction. The meaning may be illustrated by a famil- 
 iar example. An individual is at once a member of parliament and the 
 colonel of a regiment. Speaking of such an one, and haviog occasion 
 to udvert to these two characters, we mi^ht say in Greek, 'O f^nKiUTtii^ 
 KAI Ko'^ttyQQ ; and if, by such a phrase, we meant to indicate two differ- 
 ent persons, we should speak in a manner not authorized by the Greek 
 idiom. But suppose we should say, speaking of several persons, 'OI 
 /^uKrjTAt KAI K^-)(jty^A ; the inference would be, either that the persons 
 situn^ in parliament, and those commanding regiments, are usualh (he 
 same ; or else, knowing them not to be the same, we should understand 
 the words as expressive of two distinct classes : and wha< is the alter- 
 native ? If they be the same, the rule is strictly observed ; if notori- 
 ously they are distinct, the rule, indeed, is viol ted, but in such a man- 
 ner that no ambiguity can ensue ; for thou2:h *Ol -K^yjiyot would nave 
 been more accurate, our previous knowledge on the subject prevents 
 the possibility of mistake. 
 
 ♦ Essay, book iii. chap. iii. k 14. 
 i Page 264. 
 
 24 
 
266 Jippendix—^0. WL-^Artich, 
 
 PROPER NAMES AND ABSTRACT NOUNS, 
 
 The rules which have been given for the Article, do not 
 always apply to proper names and abstract nouns. 
 
 Proper Names. 
 
 The practice of Greek writers, in the use of proper 
 names, accords generally with the rules already laid down. 
 
 When proper names first occur, they are commonly with- 
 out the article, unless its insertion is authorized by the noto- 
 riety of the person intended. Upon ren^^ wed mention, the 
 article is usually inserted. This is not, however, indispen- 
 sable ; for when the name is repeated, it will be naturally 
 referred to the person already mentioned, though the article 
 should not be inserted to mark that reference. 
 
 Some appellatives, fnim frequent use, partake of the nature of proper 
 names, and follow the same rules : of this kind is X^/^ro?, and some- 
 times ygjtr^Afus, &;c. 
 
 Abstract Nouns. 
 
 The article is inserted before abstract nouns, 
 
 1. When the noun is used in its most abstract sense. 
 Plato, vol. iv. p. 68 'H x^ikiu x-xt 'H oacoXxo-toc fisyicrov 
 
 T6>» evT6/ir KocKovBGrrt, Injustice and intemperance are the great- 
 est of evils. 
 
 Ibid. 70. locrpiKi} ytynrai Tsronptecs ^H hrcri^ Justice is the 
 remedy of wickedness. 
 
 There is a close analogy between this use of the article, and the hy- 
 pothetical use already mentioned ; as, 'O/ etS'itLoi will signify, all the un- 
 iust ; so 'H !L6iKi!L will mean, every act of which injustice can be assum- 
 ed. 
 
 2. When the attribute is personified. 
 
 Aristoph. Av. 1536. ko&i THN (ioto-iXuav <rot yv^MiC ep(^e» 
 h^ifi^ And I give you the kingdom as a wife. 
 
 Xen. Mem. II. 1. 'H Kax/cc jTroAflfc^feo-*^ e/wfv, And Malice, 
 interrupting, said. 
 
 The article is not always inserted, as in the case of proper names, to 
 ivbichthis is analogous. 
 
 3. Abstract nouns, according to the rule already given, 
 take the article when it has the sense of a possessive pro- 
 noun. 
 
Appendix — No III. — Article. 267 
 
 Aris. Ran. 45. ^Aa' ev)^ otoq^ t' etf^^ uTrotro^tjrxt TON yeXav, 
 But I cannot restrain my laughter. 
 
 4. These nouns take the article when they have reference 
 of any kind. 
 
 Plato, vol. iv. 31. eocf M-^ ^rpon^ri Trept rtirm THN uMhiotv^ 
 Unless he foresee the truth concerning these things. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 It was not to be expected, that the rules now given for the 
 article should be entirely without exceptions. The first are 
 in the case of 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Words which would take the article by the preceding 
 rules, often lose it after prepositions. 
 
 Plato, Kctrct nOAIN, the city (Athens.) ycur' AFOPAN, the 
 Forum. 
 
 Arist. His. II. 2. u e^tjputvero Ctto kyna, which were with- 
 ered by tiie dog-star -srXtja-iov 0AAA22H2, near the sea. 
 TTpoi HAIOT i'vvroq, at sunset. 
 
 Hence it is eviilent, that the absence of tlie article, in such instances, 
 affords no presumption, that the nouns are used indefinitely. Their 
 definiteness or indefiniteuess. when they are used after prepceitions, 
 must be determined on other grounds. 
 
 ENUMERATION. 
 
 When several nouns are coupled together by conjunctions, 
 or, what is equivalent, the conjunctions are omitted by the 
 figure Asyndeton, they frequently all drop the article, though 
 each taken singly would require it. 
 
 -^sch. cont. Ctes. § 38. Kect XEIPI xut noAI kui OTNH* 
 wtt TTccTt otq ^woti^ut^ with my hand and foot and voice and all 
 that I can. 
 
 This usage is not uncommon, even where there are only 
 two. 
 
 Plato, ii. 143. AN©pnnoiS kxi ©HPIOIS, men and beasts. 
 
 ORDINALS. 
 
 It might be supposed that ordinals would uniformly be 
 preceded by the article, inasmuch as the nouns with which 
 they are joined do, from this circumstance, become monadic. 
 In a series of things of the same class, only one can hejirst^ 
 one second, one thirds &c. 
 
^68 Appendix— ^0. \\\.— Article. 
 
 Ordinals, however, for the raost part, whether the nouns 
 with which they agree be expressed or understood, are 
 without the article. 
 
 iEsch. contra Ctes. § 29. ''ebAOMHN h iif^ipect rijg evyw 
 r^fl5, TfTfAfi/r^jjcyias, his daughter having died the seventh day. 
 
 Superlatives have so close an affinity to the ordinals sig- 
 nifying^ rst and last, that they also sometimes reject the ar- 
 ticle. 
 
 Dyon. Hal. vol. i. p. 6. rtg ctvrm etpxw re MEFISTHN zk- 
 T7}c-aToy Some one of them gained the highest command. 
 
 Construction of the Article with IIAS, 'OAOS, 'OTTOS &c. 
 DAS. 
 
 1. When HAS or "ahas in the singular is used to denote 
 the whole of any thing, the article is prefixed to DAS, or to 
 (he substantive with which it agrees. £/$ Trxtrctv THN 7r«A/v, to 
 the whole city, uttuv TO o-rpccrevi^eA) the whole army. 'H 
 -n-onrei i^nirici^ the whole power. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. § 59. -sruvru TON xiavcc hsreTeM}ce, Spent 
 his whole life. 
 
 2. When riAS or 'AIIAS in the singular is used to denote 
 every individual of the class, the article is omitted. 
 
 Xenop. Cyrop. page 208. m r^ot^tret, kiv^wov r,x&oy, they en- 
 countered every danger. 
 
 Plut. page 84. 5rcfc(rj;$ TBxn^ »«' ^v^eifJLtaq uy0pa7nv7;(;, every 
 art and power of man. 
 
 3. When HAS and 'AHAS are used in the plural, the ar- 
 ticle is inserted where there is reference ; where there is not, 
 the usage is various. 
 
 'OAOX. 
 
 The construction ofoXo^ resembles that of 7r«$. When the 
 substantive is without reference, it wants the article ; and 
 the contrary, gytctvrov oA#y, a whole year. cAjjv THN Ts-oxtv, the 
 whole city. 
 
 When oAa$ is used in the sense of wholly or altogether^ the 
 article is omitted. 
 
 Demosth. 7i:>^(r^ct. 'OAON iTTi VI ^tet$rj)Cii. 
 
 'OYTOS. 
 
 A noun, when joined with the pronoun ovTdgf always has 
 
Appendix^^o. WL—Artich, 26^ 
 
 the article prefixed, ton Tron^ mrof, this labor 5 uvrt) *H 
 f^etx,*], this battle ; Teivr» TA enpicc, these beasts. 
 
 Tkis rule is not observed by Horoer. 
 
 Proper names usually take the article, but not always. 
 
 'OAE. 
 
 What has been said of 'oTTOS, will, for the most part, ap- 
 ply to oh, 
 
 T9i<r^e THS ij/t«P«?, this day. TON vof^^v rov^e, this law. 
 
 There are, however, instances in which tht article is omitted, when 
 the noun precedes, especially if it be a proper name. 
 
 EKEINOS. 
 
 Nouns joined with this word, have the article in both 
 numbers, like owro?. eicf<v»?5 THS rjutepeiq, that day. eK£{vot(; 
 TOIS x^ovotq^ at those times. 
 
 When this word is associated with a proper name, the article is 
 sometimes omitted, at least when the proper name precedes. 
 
 On the Position of the Article^ in the Concord of Svbstantives 
 and Adjectives, 
 
 1. When an adjective is preceded by the article, a sub- 
 stantive is understood, which, together with the adjective, 
 is the predicate to the article. 
 
 '^O hicotio^ is equivalent to 'o hxMoietvtip ; and the article *0 
 belongs not merely to «»>:p, but to «vj?tf joined with ^Kocto^. 
 
 2. Whenever the article belongs to the adjective and sub- 
 stantive taken together^ so that the assumption is of both, the 
 article precedes the adjective. 
 
 Xenoph. e^ii>,£VTccvTo vept TQN ENESTHKOTflN ^pttyftccroffj 
 They consulted concerning present affairs. 
 
 Isoc. Ts-ept THS KoiNHS craiT»oiy,i oMvonvreq, thinking alike 
 concerning the public safety, 'o fft^j ^octtjp r6$)»iKe, my father 
 is dead. 
 
 3. When the article belongs to the noun only, and not to 
 the noun and adjective together, it precedes the noun. 
 
 Isoc. Koivfji THS 7a-xrpih<i ovTy.i, the country being com- 
 mon. 
 
 Xen. THN ^avtjv Trooc&repoiv -ss-oiowTccf y they make the voice 
 milder. 
 
 Ibid. £»fAft'C-5 0uveoxv ^ePeiv THN -v/^jji^oy, he commanded tO 
 make the vote known. 5^5 'O Trccmp, (supp, fo-ri,) mine is 
 the father. 
 
270 Appendix — No. III. — Article. 
 
 It win be remarked, from a comparison of the two last rules, that the 
 position of the article determines the sense, c^o? 'O^atTw/s is very differ- 
 ent from *0 if^Q^ ^ctTnf). In the latter, both the adjective and substan- 
 tive are the predicate of the artii le> and they require some verb to make 
 a proposition. But i/ao; 'O Tretntp contains a proposition, «3"t/ being un- 
 derstood. 
 
 4. When the substantive and adjective have both the arti- 
 cle, the substantive with its article is invariably placed first. 
 
 Lys. p. 139 eMatv €7ct rj;y oiKtuv rjjv ef^tjv^ going to my house. 
 
 Xen. ro/$ K),Atfl $ roig otp^xiois xp^^'^'^^i to use the ancient laws. 
 
 Sometimes the substantive drops its article. 
 
 The most simple and natural use of the adjective, is vrithout the re- 
 petition of the article ; and this is by; far the most common in all Greek 
 writers. When the article is repeated before the adjective, one 
 of these two things may generally be observed ; viz. either that 
 the substantive might of itself be reasonably presumed to signify 
 the particular thing intended, though, by the addition of the adjective, 
 the substantire is absolutely restricted to the object meant; in which 
 case the addition is a kind of after thought : or else, that the adjective 
 has been purposely reserved by the speaker to mark an emphasis or op- 
 pusifion. Of fhe first kind, an instance may be found in Eph. i. 13, 
 iv a KAi 7ns-<Tiva-AYri? i(r^!>:tyt(rhhrt TCU 7rviu/tA.ATt ms tTetyyihtctc Tfli ayiu>. 
 In whom believing, ye have been sealed with the Spirit of promise— Me 
 Holy One. Here t» TrviufA^Ti could not be easily misunderstood ; yet 
 the addition of t» ayttA absolutely limits the sense. Of the second kind, 
 an mstance may be taken from Demosth. (de Cor. * 27,) who, exulting 
 in having saved the Chersonef^us and Byzantium, exclaims emphatically, 
 *' These successes '« ^/»o«t^/>2<?"<? H EMH cT/sTr/ja^ATo , my counsel, mine^ 
 has produced." 
 
 An instance where the article is repeated before the adjective, for 
 the sake of marking opposition, may be found, John x. 11, «>» "A^^ • 
 'Troifxm 'O KAA02, 1 am the good Shepherd ; as opposed to •/M/<r6«- 
 "Ttf^f the hireling* v. 12. 
 
'■'-■^^^^^ 
 
.0 a 
 
U. C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 comiEfiast? 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
L^ "^V 
 
 <ort*'fMi%-;'